t950 User Guide

Spectra T950 Library
User Guide
SpectraLogic.com
Copyright Notices
Copyright 2007 2011 Spectra Logic Corporation. All rights reserved. This item and the information contained herein are the property of Spectra Logic Corporation. Except as expressly stated herein, Spectra Logic Corporation makes its products and associated documentation on an AS IS BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, BOTH OF WHICH ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. In no event shall Spectra Logic be liable for any loss of profits, loss of business, loss of use or data, interruption of business, or for indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages of any kind, even if Spectra Logic has been advised of the possibility of such damages arising from any defect or error. Information furnished in this manual is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed by Spectra Logic for its use. Due to continuing research and development, Spectra Logic may revise this publication from time to time without notice, and reserves the right to change any product specification at any time without notice. BlueScale, Python, Spectra, SpectraGuard, Spectra Logic, TeraPack, TranScale, and the Spectra Logic logo are registered trademarks. Endura, EnergyAudit, PreScan, PostScan, RXT, ScanTape, T-Finity, and Tape without Pain are trademarks of Spectra Logic Corporation. All rights reserved worldwide. All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 90940000 Revision G
Trademarks
Part Number Revision History
Revision E F
Date November 2007 December 2009
Description
Added information about MLM, HHM, DLM, Auto Configuration Save, Auto Drive Clean, BlueScale Vision, and other new features Updated information about encryption, AutoSupport, and other topics throughout. Updated/added information about LTO-5, new MLM and DLM features, other new BlueScale features, and the new RIM and Spectra LS.
January 2011
Note:
To make sure you have the most current version of this guide and the release notes for the most current version of the BlueScale firmware, check the Spectra Logic Web site at www.spectralogic.com/documents. The release notes contain updates to the User Guide since the last time it was revised.
February 2011
User GuideSpectra T950 Library
License
You have acquired a Spectra product that includes software owned or licensed by Spectra Logic from one or more software licensors (Software Suppliers). Such software products, as well as associated media, printed materials and online or electronic documentation (SOFTWARE) are protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties, as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties. If you do not agree to this end user license agreement (EULA), do not use the Spectra product; instead, promptly contact Spectra Logic for instructions on return of the Spectra product for a refund. Any use of the Software, including but not limited to use on the Spectra product, will constitute your agreement to this EULA (or ratification of any previous consent). Grant of License. The Software is licensed on a non-exclusive basis, not sold. This EULA grants you the following rights to the Software: You may use the Software only on the Spectra product. Not Fault Tolerant. The Software is not fault tolerant. Spectra Logic has independently determined how to use the Software in the Spectra product, and suppliers have relied upon Spectra Logic to conduct sufficient testing to determine that the Software is suitable for such use. No Warranties for the SOFTWARE. The Software is provided AS IS and with all faults. The entire risk as to satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, and effort (including lack of negligence) is with you. Also, there is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the Software or against infringement. If you have received any warranties regarding the SOFTWARE, those warranties do not originate from, and are not binding on Software suppliers. Note on Java Support. The Software may contain support for programs written in Java. Java technology is not fault tolerant and is not designed, manufactured, or intended for use of resale as online control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communications systems, air traffic control, direct life support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of Java technology could lead directly to death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage. No Liability for Certain Damages. Except as prohibited by law, Software suppliers shall have no liability for any indirect, special, consequential or incidental damages arising from or in connection with the use or performance of the Software. This limitation shall apply even if any remedy fails of its essential purpose. In no event shall Software suppliers, individually, be liable for any amount in excess of U.S. two hundred fifty dollars (U.S. $250.00). Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation, and Disassembly. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the Software, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation. Software Transfer Allowed with Restrictions. You may permanently transfer rights under this EULA only as part of a permanent sale or transfer of the Spectra product, and only if the recipient agrees to this EULA. If the Software is an upgrade, any transfer must also include all prior versions of the Software. Export Restrictions. Export of the Software from the United States is regulated by the Export Administration Regulations (EAR, 15 CFR 730-744) of the U.S. Commerce Department, Bureau of Export Administration. You agree to comply with the EAR in the export or re-export of the Software: (i) to any country to which the U.S. has embargoed or restricted the export of goods or services, which as May 1999 include, but are not necessarily limited to Cuba, Iran, Iraq, Libya, North Korea, Sudan, Syria, and the Federal Republic of Yugoslavia (including Serbia, but not Montenegro), or to any national or any such country, wherever located, who intends to transit or transport the Software back to such country; (ii) to any person or entity who you know or have reason to know will utilize the Software or portion thereof in the design, development or production of nuclear, chemical, or biological weapons; or (iii) to any person or entity who has been prohibited from participating in U.S. export transactions by any federal agency of the U.S. government. You warrant and represent that neither the BXA nor any other U.S. federal agency has suspended, revoked or denied your export privileges.
February 2011
Warnings and Cautions

Warning
Risk of electrical shock. Hazardous moving parts. Use caution when removing the librarys side panels. Spectra Logic recommends turning off the power to the library before removing the side panels. Warnung: Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlages. Gefhrliche bewegliche Teile. Gehen Sie uerst vorsichtig vor, wenn Sie die seitlichen Panels der Library entfernen. Spectra Logic empfiehlt die Stromversorgung zu unterbrechen, bevor die Panels entfernt werden. The library is very heavy. Always use at least four people, two on each side, when lifting or moving the library. Use extreme caution when moving it. Warnung: Die Library ist sehr schwer. Benutzen Sie immer mindestens vier Personen, zwei auf jeder Seite, beim Heben oder Fortbewegen der Library. Verwenden Sie extreme Vorsicht walten lassen, wenn sie abwandern.
Warning
Caution Caution Caution
Do not place the library on a carpeted floor or anywhere else that poses risk for static discharge that could damage your library and its drives. Use only the media approved by Spectra Logic for use in the drives installed in your library. Improper media will result in damage to the drives, library, and media. If the library is loaded with media packs (RXT media packs or media in TeraPack magazines), Spectra recommends that the library not be moved. If you must move the library, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support for recommendations before proceeding.
February 2011
Contacting Spectra Logic

To obtain general information Spectra Logic Web Site: www.spectralogic.com United States Headquarters Spectra Logic Corporation 6285 Lookout Road Boulder, CO 80301 USA Phone: 1.800.833.1132 or 1.303.449.6400 International: 1.303.449.6400 Fax: 1.303.939.8844 European Office Spectra Logic Europe Ltd. Magdalen Centre Robert Robinson Avenue Oxford Science Park OXFORD OX4 4GA United Kingdom Phone: 44 (0) 870.112.2150 Fax: 44 (0) 870.112.2175
Spectra Logic Technical Support Technical Support Portal: support.spectralogic.com United States and Canada Phone: Toll free US and Canada: 1.800.227.4637 International: 1.303.449.0160 Email: support@spectralogic.com Europe, Middle East, Africa Phone: 44 (0) 870.112.2185 Email: support@spectralogic.com Deutsch sprechende Kunden Phone: 49 (0) 6028.9796.507 Email: spectralogic@stortrec.de
Mexico, Central and South America, Asia, Australia, and New Zealand Phone: 1.303.449.0160 Email: support@spectralogic.com Spectra Logic Sales Web Site: www.spectralogic.com/shop United States and Canada Phone: 1.800.833.1132 or 1.303.449.6400 Fax: 1.303.939.8844 Email: sales@spectralogic.com To Obtain Documentation Spectra Logic Web Site: www.spectralogic.com/documents Europe Phone: 44 (0) 870.112.2150 Fax: 44 (0) 870.112.2175 Email: eurosales@spectralogic.com
February 2011
Contents
About This Guide
INTENDED AUDIENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RELATED INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REGISTER YOUR LIBRARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
16 16 19
Chapter 1 Library Overview

LIBRARY FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BlueScale Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
21
21 24
LIBRARY COMPONENT OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front Panel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main and Drive Expansion Frame Rear Components . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
26 27 30
OPERATOR PANEL AND TOUCH SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TERAPACK ACCESS PORT (TAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPUTER MODULES (LCM AND RCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spectra PC and Spectra LS Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LCM and RCM Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35 36 37
37 40
INTERFACE MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quad Interface Processors (QIPs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Robotics Interface Modules (RIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
42 44
DRIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MEDIA HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TeraPack Tape Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RXT Media Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45 47
47 48
Chapter 2 Architecture Overview

PARTITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
49
51 52
MEDIA POOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTO DRIVE CLEAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRIVE AND MEDIA FRAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPONENT IDENTIFIERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
52 53 55 57
Contents
CONNECTIVITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transporter Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Failover Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59
59 62 66
Chapter 3 Installation Overview

INSTALLATION STEPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unpack and Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update Firmware, Configure, and Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
69
69
69 70
UPDATING OR SERVICING THE LIBRARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SETTINGS CHECKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72 73
Chapter 4 Introducing the BlueScale User Interface

OVERVIEW OF THE BLUESCALE USER INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Interface Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77
78
78 79 80
USING THE BLUESCALE USER INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Logging Into the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logging Off or Switching Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
88
88 90 90
Chapter 5 Operating the Library

CONTROLLING THE LIBRARY POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Powering On the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Powering Off the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
92
93
93 93
MONITORING YOUR LIBRARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Performance Metrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using BlueScale Hardware Health Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Drive Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing a Fibre Channel Partitions World Wide Name . . . . . . . . Using the BlueScale Vision Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
96
97 99 102 108 110 112
USING A USB DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Continuing Library Operations While Using a USB Drive . . . . . . . Connecting a USB Drive to the LCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving Data From the Library to a USB Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying Data From a USB Drive to the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
116
116 117 118 119
February 2011
Contents
USING A GLOBAL SPARE TAPE DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Activating the Global Spare Tape Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reclaiming the Global Spare Tape Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
120
121 122
Chapter 6 Importing, Exporting, and Moving Media

UNDERSTANDING THE MEDIA INVENTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIEWING THE PARTITION INVENTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PREPARING MEDIA FOR USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing Tape Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing RXT Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
124
125 125 128
128 131
IMPORTING MEDIA AND CLEANING CARTRIDGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of Import and Export Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing Media into the Entry/Exit Pool or a Cleaning Partition Importing Media into a New Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
132
132 133 140
EXPORTING OR EXCHANGING MEDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Exporting or Exchanging Media in a Data Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting or Exchanging Cartridges in a Cleaning Partition . . . .
145
145 149
USING ADVANCED IMPORT/EXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOVING MEDIA WITHIN A PARTITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Locating the Desired Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move the Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
151 154
154 156
UPDATING THE MEDIA INVENTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
159
Chapter 7 Media Lifecycle Management

OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spectra-Certified LTO Media with MLM-Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . Media Auto Discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MLM PreScan and PostScan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MLM Tracking and Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional MLM Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
160
161
162 163 164 165 166
MLM BEST PRACTICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONFIGURING MLM SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Configuring Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Media Auto Discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Raw Capacity to Display as Broadcast Capacity . . . . Configuring PostScan Blackout Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
167 170
170 173 174 176
IMPLEMENTING MEDIA LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Addressing Media Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Media to the MLM Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
178
178 179
February 2011
Contents
STARTING OR STOPPING MEDIA AUTO DISCOVERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Starting Manual Discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping the Discovery Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
181
181 183
USING PRESCAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling PreScan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting a Manual PreScan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
183
183 184
USING POSTSCAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the PostScan Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling PostScan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requesting a Manual PostScan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pausing the PostScan Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
184
185 188 189 191
USING MLM REPORTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Generating Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overriding a Poor Cartridge Health Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
192
192 196 198
MANAGING THE MLM DATABASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Best Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backing Up the MLM and DLM Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verifying the Database Backup File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring the MLM and DLM Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting MLM Records From the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downloading the Database as a CSV File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
200
200 201 203 204 205 207
Chapter 8 Drive Lifecycle Management

BLUESCALE DRIVE LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENABLING DRIVE LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MONITORING DRIVE HEALTH USING DLM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Drive Health Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing a Detailed Heath Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving a Health Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
210
210 211 212
212 213 216
DOWNLOADING THE DLM DATABASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
216
Chapter 9 Using Partitions

BEFORE YOU BEGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
218
219
219 221
CONFIGURING A NEW DATA PARTITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Choose the Creation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering the Initial Partition Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring SmartMotion Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
223
223 225 226
February 2011
Contents
Choosing the Robotic Control Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Global Spare Tape Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Chambers and Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring a Direct-Attach Fibre Channel Drive Partition . . . . . Configuring an F-QIP-Attached SCSI Drive Partition . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring an E-QIP-Attached SCSI Drive Partition . . . . . . . . . .
227 228 230 232 238 243
CONFIGURING A CLEANING PARTITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Entering the Initial Partition Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the Chambers for the Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
253
254 255
CONFIRMING AND SAVING THE PARTITION SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MODIFYING AN EXISTING PARTITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DELETING A PARTITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
256 259 262
Chapter 10 AutoSupport
AUTOSUPPORT OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONFIGURING AUTOSUPPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Mail Recipients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring AutoSupport Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Log Set Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
264
264 267
267 267 268 272 274
USING AUTOSUPPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating New Support Tickets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating Existing Support Tickets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
275
275 279
Chapter 11 Configuring the Library

ACCESSING THE SYSTEM SETUP SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENABLING BLUESCALE SOFTWARE SUPPORT, OPTIONS, AND UPGRADES .
Locating the Library Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generating Activation Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Activation Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
281
282 283
284 285 289
CONFIGURING LIBRARY USERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adding a New User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying an Existing User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting an Existing User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
290
291 292 292
MODIFYING THE CONFIGURATION SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Configuring System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling and Disabling Performance Metrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling and Disabling Soft Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
293
294 297 298 298
February 2011
10
Contents
Configuring Mail Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling Email for the Automatic Configuration Save Feature . . Configuring Routine Maintenance (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring SNMP (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
300 302 304 305
BACKING UP THE LIBRARY CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using the Auto Save Configuration Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backing Up the Library Configuration Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verifying the Configuration Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
307
308 308 310
SETTING THE CAMERA IP ADDRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONFIGURING CONTROLLER FAILOVER (OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONFIGURING EMULATION (OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONFIGURING BAR-CODE REPORTING (OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Librarys Default Bar-code Reporting Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Determining Bar-Code Label Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
312 316 319 320

322 323
CONFIGURING AND USING OBSERVATORY (OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Enabling and Configuring Observatory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Observatory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
325
325 327
CONFIGURING A FIRMWARE PACKAGE SERVER (OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . CONFIGURING ROTATION MANAGER (OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONFIGURING THE LIBRARY FOR USE WITH STORNEXT SOFTWARE (OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure the Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure StorNext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
328 330 331

332 334
Chapter 12 Configuring and Using Encryption

BLUESCALE ENCRYPTION OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site-Specific Decisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Security Example: Low Security Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
335
336
337 341
CONFIGURING ENCRYPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Log Into the Encryption Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure the Encryption Initialization Mode and Password . . . . Create an Encryption Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
342
342 343 344 345
ASSIGNING THE ENCRYPTION KEY TO A PARTITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Enable Drive-Based Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enable Encryption Using an F-QIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
348
349 350
EXPORTING AND PROTECTING KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Export the Encryption Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify Backups of Encryption Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protect the Encryption Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
February 2011 User GuideSpectra T950 Library
351
351 354 355
11
Contents
RESTORING ENCRYPTED DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The Required Key is Stored in the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Required Key is Not Stored in the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Endura Decryption Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
357
357 358 360
DELETING AN ENCRYPTION KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RECYCLING ENCRYPTED MEDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
360 361
Chapter 13 Library Troubleshooting

RESOLVING OPERATIONAL ISSUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recovering a Media Pack after a Power Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recovering a Cartridge From a Global Spare Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . Refreshing the User Interface Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting Blockages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
364
365
365 365 365 366
TROUBLESHOOTING LIBRARY PROBLEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAPTURING TRACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESETTING THE LIBRARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESETTING COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resetting the LCM or RCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resetting a QIP or RIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resetting the BlueScale Vision Camera IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . .
367 368 370 371

371 372 374
RESTORING THE LIBRARY CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Restoring From an Auto Save Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring the Library Configuration Using a Saved Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
378
378 383
ACCESSING THE INTERIOR OF THE LIBRARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preparing the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing or Replacing the Side Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resume Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
385
385 386 386
Chapter 14 Drive Troubleshooting

RESETTING A DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USING DLM TO TEST AN LTO DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running the DLM Drive Health Verification Wizard . . . . . . . . . . .
387
388 389
389 390
RETRIEVING A DRIVE DUMP FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the BlueScale Retrieve Drive Dump Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
393
393 393
February 2011
12
Contents
TROUBLESHOOTING ALL DRIVE TYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Host Cannot Access Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QIP-Attached SCSI Drive Is Impaired or Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read/Write Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
396
396 397 397 398
TROUBLESHOOTING LTO TAPE DRIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Interpreting the Status LED Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interpreting the Display Character Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
398
400 401
TROUBLESHOOTING SDLT TAPE DRIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Viewing the Status of the Front Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interpreting the SDLT LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SDLT Tape Drive Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
415
415 415 416
TROUBLESHOOTING SAIT TAPE DRIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Viewing the Status of the Front Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interpreting SAIT LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SAIT Drive Cleaning Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
417
417 417 418
TROUBLESHOOTING RXT DRIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Viewing the Status of the Front Panel SCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interpreting RXT Drive SCD Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
419
419 419
Chapter 15 Maintaining the Library & Drives

ACCESSING THE TECHNICAL SUPPORT PORTAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating an Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logging Into the Portal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
421
421
422 424
MAINTAINING THE LIBRARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing the Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating Library Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing Cord Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating the Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
425
425 428 443 445
MAINTAINING DRIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning a Tape Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating Drive Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating Drive Device Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding or Replacing a Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
446
446 453 461 463
Appendix A Service and Support

OPENING A SUPPORT TICKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RETURNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
465
465 466
February 2011
13
Contents
Appendix B Best Practices

BACKING UP THE SPECTRA LIBRARY METADATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back Up the Library Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify and Protect the Metadata Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
467
467
468 470
WORKING WITH TAPE MEDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Use Only Spectra Certified Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Labeling Tape Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handling Tape Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storing Tape Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Tape Media in the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tape Media Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
471
472 472 472 473 475 476
WORKING WITH RXT MEDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RAID Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimizing Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using RXT Media in the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handling RXT Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storing RXT Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
479
479 481 482 483 483
OPERATING IN GIGABIT ETHERNET ENVIRONMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Best Practices for IP SANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Best Practices for iSCSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
485
485 485
Appendix C SNMP MIB Listing Appendix D Media & Upgrades

MEDIA AND MEDIA ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spectra Certified Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Media and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How To Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
486 494
494
494 495 495
LIBRARY SUPPORT AND UPGRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service Contract Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Firmware Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Library Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
496
496 497 497 500
REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
500
February 2011
14
Contents
Appendix E Specifications
LIBRARY SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Storage Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Size and Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Access Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shipping and Storage Size and Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shock and Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
501
501
502 504 505 505 506 509 510
INTEROPERABILITY AND SOFTWARE COMPATIBILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Component Interface Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Interface Cable Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet Cable Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Serial Bus (USB) Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
510 510
511 511 512 512
TAPE DRIVE AND MEDIA SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LTO Tape Drive Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SDLT Tape Drive Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SAIT Tape Drive Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tape Media Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bar-Code Label Specifications for Half-Inch Media . . . . . . . . . . . .
512
513 516 517 517 519
RXT DRIVE AND MEDIA PACK SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RXT Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RXT Media Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
523
523 524
Appendix F Regulatory & Safety Standards

EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KOREAN REGULATORY COMPLIANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FCC NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SAFETY STANDARDS AND COMPLIANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UL Accreditation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
527
527 528 528 529
529
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Waste of Electronic and Electrical Equipment (WEEE) Directive . Restriction of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment (RoHS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measures for the Administration of the Control of Pollution by Electronic Information Products (China) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
529
530 530 531
Index
532
15
February 2011
About This Guide
This guide describes how to configure, use, maintain, and troubleshoot the Spectra T950 library. It also provides specifications for the library.
INTENDED AUDIENCE
This guide is intended for data center administrators and operators who maintain and operate backup systems. The information in this guide assumes a familiarity with SCSI and Fibre Channel command protocols, as well as with network connectivity protocols such as Fibre Channel, Ethernet, and iSCSI (Gigabit Ethernet). It also assumes a knowledge of technical tasks such as configuring operating systems and installing drivers.
RELATED INFORMATION
This section contains information about this document and other documents related to the T950 library.
Product Discontinuance Notice

The Spectra Logic Technical Support portal provides information about which products are currently supported and which are considered discontinued. To view information about discontinued products, log on to the portal (see Accessing the Technical Support Portal on page 421), open the Knowledge Base, and use Search by Article Content to search for Product Discontinuance Notice.
BlueScale User Interface Screens

The BlueScale interface changes as new features are added or other modifications are made between firmware revisions. Therefore, the screens on your library may differ from those shown in this document.
16
About This Guide
Related Information
Additional Publications
For additional information about the Spectra T950 library and its drives, refer to the publications listed in this section.
Spectra T950 Library

This guide and the following documents related to the Spectra T950 library are available as PDF files on Spectra T950 Library Documentation and Software CD included with your library. They are also available the Spectra Logic web site at www.spectralogic.com/documents. The Spectra T950 Library Quick Reference Guide provides a quick reference for the user interface and instructions for performing day-today library operations such as powering on and off, and preparing, importing, and exporting media. The Spectra T950 Library BlueScale Toolbar Option Map provides a quick reference for locating the options and commands available through the BlueScale user interface. The Spectra T950 Library Site Preparation Guide provides information about preparing your site for the installation of the T950 library. The BlueScale Vision Camera Users Guide provides detailed information about installing and using the BlueScale Vision software. The Spectra T950 Library Release Notes and Documentation Updates provides the most up-to-date information about the T950 library, drives, and media. Note: The release notes are not included on the Spectra T950 Library Documentation and Software CD. The BlueScale Encryption User Guide provides detailed information about using BlueScale Encryption Professional Edition. It also provides useful information about encryption best practices and recycling encrypted media. The Spectra T-Series Library Part Replacement Procedures CD contains individual part replacement instructions for customers with an Assisted Self-Maintenance contract. Note: The CD replaces the Spectra T950 Library Assisted SelfMaintenance Guide. The Spectra T-Series Library SCSI Developer Guide provides detailed information about the SCSI and Fibre Channel commands used in the library.
February 2011
17
About This Guide
Related Information
Drives
LTO Ultrium Tape Drives The following documents provide information that is applicable to all IBM LTO tape drives. IBM Tape Device Drivers Installation and Users Guide at http://www-01.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?uid=ssg1S7002972&aid=1 Note: This guide also provides information about using the IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) to troubleshoot drive problems. IBM TotalStorage LTO Ultrium Tape Drive: SCSI Reference at http://publibfi.boulder.ibm.com/epubs/pdf/a3204509.pdf For drive-specific information, search for the product name (or machine type 3580) on the documentation page on the IBM web site. SDLT Tape Drives Check the Quantum web site at www.quantum.com/ ServiceandSupport/Index.aspx to locate documentation for SDLT tape drives. SAIT Tape Drives Check the Sony web sit at sony.storagesupport.com/ node/26?product=3&name=S-AIT&tab2=drivers to locate drivers and documentation for SAIT tape drives. RXT Drives The following documents related to the RXT drives are available as PDF files on the Spectra Logic web site at www.spectralogic.com/documents. The Spectra RXT150 User Guide provides information about operating the RXT150 drive. The Spectra RXT150 Release Notes provides the most up-to date information about the RXT150, including information about the latest firmware releases. The Spectra RXT Troubleshooting Guide provides troubleshooting information for RXT drives. The Spectra RXT SCSI Differences Guide outlines differences between RXT SCSI commands and LTO-2 (Ultrium-TD2) commands.
February 2011
18
About This Guide
Register Your Library
Typographical Conventions
This document uses the following conventions to highlight important information: Note: Read notes for additional information or suggestions about the current topic.
Important
Read text marked by the Important icon for information that will help you complete a procedure or avoid extra steps. Read text marked by the Caution icon for information you must know to avoid damaging the library, the tape drives, or losing data.
Caution
Warning
Read text marked by the Warning icon for information you must know to avoid personal injury. Warnung: Lesen Sie markierten Text durch die Warnung-Symbol fr die Informationen, die Sie kennen mssen, um Personenschden zu vermeiden.
This document uses an arrow (>) to describe a series of menu selections. For example: Select Configuration > Partitions > New. means Select Configuration, then select Partitions, then select New.
REGISTER YOUR LIBRARY

Register your library quickly and easily on the Spectra Logic Web site, by visiting www.spectralogic.com/register.
February 2011
19
CHAPTER 1
Library Overview
The Spectra T950 library is an enterprise-class, highly scalable library that provides fast, affordable storage that meets the stringent requirements for data integrity, data security, and high reliability in the enterprise environment.
This chapter provides an overview of the T950 library features, architecture, and components.
Topic Library Features Library Component Overview Operator Panel and Touch Screen TeraPack Access Port (TAP) Computer Modules (LCM and RCM) Interface Modules Drives Media Handling Described beginning on... page 21 page 25 page 35 page 36 page 37 page 41 page 45 page 47
20
Library Features
LIBRARY FEATURES
This section provides an overview of the librarys BlueScale user interface and the hardware features that make the T950 library a highly versatile enterprise storage solution.
BlueScale Software
The BlueScale software and firmware provide control over every aspect of the librarys operation. The BlueScale software includes the following features (listed in alphabetical order).
Auto Drive Clean

Auto Drive Clean lets you configure a dedicated cleaning partition to be used for cleaning cartridges. The cleaning partition can be shared by multiple data partitions and is used by the library to automatically clean drives whenever necessary. See Using Auto Drive Clean on page 53 for more information.
Auto-Save Configuration
Auto-Save Configuration automatically generates an auto-save file containing a backup of the library configuration and MLM database and stores it on the LCM compact flash once a week and whenever a partition is created or modified. If desired, the library can automatically email the auto-save file each time it is created. This external copy of the auto-save file ensures that you can recover your MLM database and library configuration in the event of a disaster. See Using the Auto Save Configuration Feature on page 308 for more information.
AutoSupport
AutoSupport configures the library to automatically contact library users with messages or when specific events occur. It can also be used to open or update a support ticket and send it to a specified email recipient or to SpectraGuard Support. See Chapter 10 AutoSupport for detailed information.
February 2011
21
Library Features
Controller Failover
Controller failover configures two identical G3 F-QIPs or RIMs (controllers) in the library as a failover pair. One member of the pair (the primary controller) provides the robotics control path in the partition. The other controller (the secondary) is designated as the spare. In the event that the secondary controller detects a problem with the primary controller, it automatically takes over all robotics control operations to provide uninterrupted operation. See Failover Redundancy on page 66 for more information.
Drive Lifecycle Management

BlueScale Drive Lifecycle Management (DLM) helps you identify drives that are experiencing high error rates or other problems. You can use this information to determine whether the drive requires maintenance or whether it needs to removed from the library. A health icon next to each drive indicates the overall health of the drive. DLM is automatically enabled when Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) is enabled.
Encryption and Key Management

BlueScale Encryption and key management are tightly integrated into the BlueScale environment. Encryption can be performed either through an encryption-enabled Fibre Channel QIP, if installed, or through encryptioncapable LTO-4 drives using LTO-3, LTO-4, or LTO-5 media. Encryption key management is provided through the librarys BlueScale user interface. See Chapter 12 Configuring and Using Encryption for detailed information. Note: BlueScale encryption is not supported with LTO-2 or earlier media or with LTO-3 or earlier tape drives.
EnergyAudit
BlueScale EnergyAudit lets you display and record actual power consumption, giving you greater control of your data center and budget. See Using Performance Metrics on page 99 for information.
February 2011
22
Library Features
Global Spare
Global Spare provides a way to remotely replace a failed drive in the library. You simply configure an installed drive as a designated spare for other drives in the library. This drive can then be substituted for a failed drive in any partition that is configured to use the Global Spare drive. When a drive fails, you simply log into the BlueScale web interface from any location, select the Global Spare option for the failed drive, and continue normal operations. You can then physically replace the failed drive at your convenience. See Configuring Global Spare Tape Drives on page 228 and Using a Global Spare Tape Drive on page 120 for more information.
Hardware Health Monitoring

BlueScale Hardware Health Monitoring (HHM) tracks maintenance thresholds for key library components and notifies you when a maintenance threshold is reached. When the maintenance icon appears in the status bar, you can click on it to send the AutoSupport Log (ASL) file to Spectra Logic Technical Support so they can review the log files and determine if any maintenance tasks are needed. See Using BlueScale Hardware Health Monitoring on page 102 for more information. Note: AutoSupport Log (ASL) information is only for troubleshooting purposes. This log information is separate from the data path and contains no customer data.
IPv6 Support
The library supports link-local addressing from a web browser. When the library connects to a routed IPv6 network it requests a link-local IPv6 address. You can then use this link-local address to connect to the library without changing the IP address configuration settings in your library. See Configuring Network Settings on page 298 for additional information.
Media Lifecycle Management

BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) helps you manage your tape media by giving you tools to pro-actively detect potential media errors well before they happenall consolidated within the same application you use to manage your library. When used in combination with Spectra Logic Certified Media with MLM support, MLM lets you manage, track, and report all facets of tape usage from creation to retirement. When used with media that is not MLM-enabled, MLM tracks and reports the general health of the media. See Chapter 7 Media Lifecycle Management for detailed information.
February 2011
23
Library Features
Shared Library Services (SLS) Partitioning

Shared Library Services (SLS) partitioning logically divides the library into multiple virtual libraries. With SLS, one library can support multiple media types and provide dedicated library services to multiple user groups. See Partitions on page 49 and Chapter 9 Using Partitions for detailed information
Soft Power Control

The Soft Power option lets superusers disable the front panel power button and instead enable a soft power button on the General Status screen of the BlueScale user interface. It also provides a confirmation message before power to the library is turned off. Enabling the Soft Power option gives superusers exclusive control over powering the library off, preventing other users from powering the library off from the front panel. See Use the Soft Power Feature on page 94 for more information.
User Interface
The librarys BlueScale user interface lets you set configuration options, view library and drive information and metrics, manage cartridges, and monitor library operations. You can access the user interface using the touch screen on the librarys operator panel, a direct connection to the library controller module (LCM), or through the BlueScale web interface (RLC) using standard web browser. Access to the user interface is controlled by assigning users to one of three groups, each with specific privileges. See Chapter 4 Introducing the BlueScale User Interface for detailed information about the features and controls provided by the BlueScale user interface.
Hardware Features
The librarys unique modular design lets you tailor the library to suit your current data requirements and easily expand it to keep up with data growth and technology changes by adding storage capacity and incorporating new drive technology as it becomes available. The library includes the following hardware features (listed in alphabetical order).
BlueScale Vision Camera

The BlueScale Vision camera lets you use the browser-based BlueScale Vision software to view the interior of the library while it is operating. A multi-frame library can accommodate multiple cameras. A single camera provides a view of up to three adjacent frames. See BlueScale Vision Camera on page 28 for more information.
February 2011
24
Library Component Overview
Fibre Channel Connectivity

Fibre Channel is the default method for connecting the librarys transporter (the robotics) and drives to the host systems. Depending on when you purchased your library, additional connection options may be available. See Connectivity on page 59 for additional information about transporter and drive connectivity.
High-Density TeraPack Media Storage

The library optimizes space usage by storing media on horizontal shelves. This horizontal storage provides very high density by using space within the library instead of the limited space provided by the vertical library walls. Each horizontal shelf is divided into multiple equal-size media storage chambers. Each chamber accommodates a single TeraPack magazine or an RAID eXchangeable TeraPack (RXT) media pack. See Media Storage Chambers on page 28 and Media Handling on page 47 for more information.
Modular Expansion
The modular design makes it possible to increase capacity or number of drives in the library to meet the storage and performance needs as they evolve within an organization. From the basic single-frame T950 library, up to seven expansion frames can be added. These expansion frames can be used to increase the tape slot capacity up to as many as 10,050 slots or to install as many as 120 drives. See Drive and Media Frames on page 55 for more information.
Support for Multiple Tape Formats

The library supports multiple generations of the high-performance, highcapacity LTO, SDLT, and SAIT tape drives. Shared Library Services (SLS) partitioning makes it possible to use multiple tape technologies a single library. See Drives on page 45 for additional information.
LIBRARY COMPONENT OVERVIEW

The following sections show the locations of and briefly describe the major front panel, internal, and rear panel components of the librarys main frame. Note: Media expansion frames are for media storage only and do not include any active front or rear panel components. A detailed component description is not included in this guide.
February 2011
25
Front Panel Components

Figure 1 shows the front components of a multi-frame library. It also shows the relative locations of the main drive frame and the expansion frames.
TeraPack Access Ports (TAPs) Operator panel Expansion frames
Access panel
Main drive frame
Air filter and fans (behind cover panel)
Figure 1 Front panel components. TeraPack Access Ports (TAPs) Two TAPs on the main drive frame function as dual entry/exit ports that let you import media into or remove media from the library. To learn more about the TAP, see TeraPack Access Port (TAP) on page 36. Operator Panel The operator panel on the main drive frame includes a color LCD touch screen and library power button. To learn more, see Operator Panel and Touch Screen on page 35. A stylus for making selections and typing entries on the touch screen can be conveniently stored near the screen. Expansion Frames Expansion frames make it possible to increase capacity or number of drives in the library. See Drive and Media Frames on page 55 for more information. Fans and Air Filters The air filters on the front of each frame prevent particulate contaminants from being pulled into the library by the air circulation system. Redundant fans in the drive frames circulate clean air throughout the library for climate control inside the library.
February 2011
26
Access Panels The clear access panels on each side of the library let you view the interior of the library and access to the interior components of the library. The access panels are equipped with safety interlocks that power down the library robotics when removed. Doors (not shown) Lockable doors on the back of each frame enclose the drives and cable connections to prevent unauthorized access.
Interior Components
Figure 2 shows the interior components of the library. Note: The interior components are shown for reference only. They are not accessible during normal operation.
LED light bar
Vertical axis (VAX column)
Drives and media storage chambers
Transporter with bar-code reader Horizontal axis (HAX) Front of library Rear of library
Figure 2 Library interior components (main or drive expansion frame). LED Light Bars The LED light bars mounted at the top of the main frame and each expansion frames illuminate the interior of the library. Note: Depending on when you purchased your library, the light bars will be different from those shown in Figure 2 and Figure 3.
27
Transporter The robotic transporter moves a TeraPack magazine or RXT media pack from one location to another in the library. A cartridge picking mechanism on the transporter removes an individual cartridge from a magazine and inserts it in a tape drive. When the tape drive is finished using the cartridge, the picker retrieves the cartridge and returns it into the original magazine. The transporter moves along the vertical and horizontal axes to perform all media movement within the library. The integrated bar-code reader mounted on the transporter reads the bar-code labels on individual TeraPack magazines, cartridges, and RXT media packs. The library uses the bar-code label information to maintain an inventory of the media currently stored inside the library. Media Storage Chambers The media storage chambers hold all of the media stored in the library. Each chamber provides storage for one TeraPack magazine or one RXT media pack. TeraPack magazines, individual cartridges, and the RXT media packs can all be labeled with unique bar codes for easy identification. The number of media storage chambers at the front of a frame depends on whether it is the main drive frame, a drive expansion frame, or a media expansion frame. The frames all have media storage chambers at both the front and the rear of the frame (see Figure 22 on page 56). The main drive frame has 59 chambers at the front of the library and 24 chambers next to the drives at the rear. Depending on the library configuration, additional chambers can also replace drives. Each drive expansion frame has 65 chambers at the front of the library and 24 chambers next to the drives at the rear. Depending on the library configuration, three TeraPack Bay Assemblies (TBAs) can three Drive Bay Assemblies (DBAs) to provide an additional 12 chambers. Each media expansion frame has 65 chambers at the front of the library and 65 chambers at the rear. The maximum media storage capacity of the library depends on the number of tape drives installed, the media type used, and the number of drive and media expansion frames installed (see Data Storage Capacity on page 502). BlueScale Vision Camera The BlueScale Vision camera is mounted at the top rear of a frame. The camera lets you can observe import and export operations, tape mounts, cartridge moves, and robotic operations in real time using the browser-based BlueScale Vision viewer software. The ability to view the interior of the library without removing the side panels provides an additional level of monitoring for your library. Note: The LED light bars mounted at the top of the main frame and each expansion frames provide illumination for the camera.
February 2011
28
The main drive frame always contains a camera. In multi-frame libraries, additional cameras can be installed in the expansion frames to provide monitoring of the entire library. Each camera can view the interior of the frame where it is mounted and one frame to either side.
Ethernet cable Power cable
Camera lens
Figure 3 The BlueScale Vision camera.
February 2011
29
Main and Drive Expansion Frame Rear Components

The components on the library rear panel depend on the type of frame. Figure 4 shows the rear panel components of the librarys main drive frame. Except where noted in the following descriptions, the same components are present in each drive expansion frame. Media expansion frames do not contain any active components and are not described. Note: Any bays that do not contain components have covers installed to maintain proper air circulation through the library.
Tool storage BlueScale Vision camera connector Interface module (RIM or QIP)
Media storage chambers (behind cover panel) Flex bays (for DBAs or TBAs)
TeraPack Bay Assembly (TBA) (behind cover panel)
Empty drive bay (cover removed) Empty controller bay (cover removed) Drive Bay Assemblies (DBAs) Drive
Power supply modules (5/12 VDC) Library Control Module (LCM) Robotics Control Module (RCM) Robotics power supply modules (24 VDC) Power Control Module (PCM) Dual AC power module
Figure 4 Library rear components (main drive frame, doors removed).
February 2011
30
BlueScale Vision Connector The dedicated Ethernet port for the BlueScale Vision camera lets you connect the camera to an Ethernet network and use the web-based BlueScale Vision software to monitor the interior of the library. Each frame that contains a camera will have an Ethernet connector. Notes: The BlueScale Vision connector is not present if a frame does not have a BlueScale Vision camera installed. In media expansion frames, the connector is located in a similar location. Media Storage Chambers The number of media storage chambers at the back of a frame depends on whether the frame is a drive frame or a media expansion frame. See Media Storage Chambers on page 28 for additional information. TeraPack Bay Assemblies (TBAs) Modular TeraPack bay assemblies accommodate four TeraPack magazines or RXT media packs. Each TBA contains four chambers and occupies the same physical space as a single DBA. Depending on the library configuration, three TBAs can replace three drive bay assemblies (DBAs) in a drive frame to provide increased storage capacity. Drive Bay Assemblies (DBAs) Modular drive bay assemblies house the drives and QIPs installed in the library. The main drive frame and each drive expansion frame contains either three or six DBAs. Each DBA accommodates up to four full-height tape drives or RXT drives and provides the electrical and internal interface connections for the drives. Each DBA also includes a bay for an interface module to the right of the drives. Note: Any drive or controller bays that do not contain components have covers installed to maintain proper air circulation through the library. LCM and RCM Two dedicated on-board library computer modules run the BlueScale firmware that controls all aspects of the library operation. Depending on where the module is installed, it is referred to as the Library Control Module (LCM) or the Robotics Control Module (RCM). The position where the module is installed determines the control role that it performs within the library. To learn more, see Computer Modules (LCM and RCM) on page 37. Note: Drive expansion frames do not include an LCM. A cover over the opening maintains proper air circulation through the frame.
February 2011
31
Robotics Power Supply Modules Two 24 VDC power supply modules in each drive frame provide redundant power for the library robotics and motors, the chassis fans, and the interior LED light bars. Notes: Media expansion frames do not include 24 VDC power supply modules. If the second 24 VDC power supply module is not installed, a cover over the opening maintains proper air circulation. Each 24 VDC power supply module has two indicator LEDs, one for DC power status and one for AC power status.
DC power status
AC power status
Figure 5 The 24 VDC robotics power supply module status LEDs. The color of the LED indicates the status: GreenThe power is on and functioning normally. OrangeThe power supply has a fault condition. OffThe power is not on or the power supply module is not functioning normally. Tool storage The compartment above the DBAs can be used to store the tool kit that is included with the library. Interface modules The optional interface modules are installed in the vertical controller bays to the right of the drives in each DBA (see Figure 4 on page 30). Note: A minimum of one interface module must be installed to connect the librarys transporter to the network. Additional interface modules are required if the library uses SCSI drives. Robotics Interface Modules (RIMs) provide the Fibre Channel interface to the librarys transporter. Unlike a QIP, the RIM does not provide connectivity for SCSI drives nor does it provide data encryption capability. To learn more, see Interface Modules on page 41. Quad Interface Processors (QIPs) provide the Fibre Channel (F-QIP) or Gigabit Ethernet (E-QIP) robotic control path from the host to the transporter. Additional QIPs can be used to provide Fibre Channel or Gigabit Ethernet connectivity to SCSI drives installed in the library. To learn more, see Quad Interface Processors (QIPs) on page 42.
February 2011
32
Drives The library accommodates multiple generations of the highperformance, high-capacity full-height LTO drives and SDLT tape drives, as well as RXT drives. The drives are installed in modular Drive Bay Assemblies (DBAs), with each DBA accommodating up to four drives. Drives are hot-swappable to provide uninterrupted operation. To learn more, see Drives on page 45. Note: Any drive bays that do not have drives installed have covers installed to maintain proper air circulation. Power Supply Bay The power supply bay accommodates up to seven power supply modules, the power control module, and the dual AC module. The main drive frame and each drive expansion frame include a power supply bay.
Power supply modules Power Control Module (PCM)
DC power status
AC power status
Dual AC module
Figure 6 The components in the main or drive frame power supply bay.
Figure 7 The 5/12 VDC power supply module status LEDs.
Power supply modules convert the AC input to provide the 5 VDC and 12 VDC power used by the drive frame for the drives and QIPs or RIM in the frame. In the main drive frame, these power supplies also provide power to the LCM and the LCD operator panel in the main drive frame.
February 2011
33
Each power supply module has two indicator LEDs (shown in Figure 7), one for AC power status and one for DC power status. The color of the LED indicates the status: GreenThe power is on and functioning normally. OrangeThe power supply has a fault condition. OffThe power is not on or the power supply module is not functioning normally. Each DBA requires one power supply module, up to a maximum of six power supply modules in the main drive frame when six DBAs are installed. Installing an optional N+1 power supply, where N is the number of DBAs, provides redundancy and failover protection in the event that a single power supply fails. If more than three power supply modules are installed, up to two can fail and the surviving power supplies will provide sufficient power to the affected DBA to allow backups to continue until the fail power supplies are replaced. Note: Any slots that do not have power supply modules installed have covers installed to maintain proper air circulation through the library. The power control module (PCM) applies power to the power supplies when you press the power button on the front panel of the main drive frame. It monitors the power supply modules in the frame for output voltage, output current, power supply fan operational status, and power supply operational temperature. The PCM uses the voltage and current data to calculate the library power usage that is displayed through the BlueScale user interface. The main drive frame and each drive expansion frame has a PCM. A recessed reset button resets the over-current circuit that protects the power system in the event of a voltage surge. The dual AC power module (see Figure 6 on page 33) monitors the primary AC input power to determine whether it is present and of adequate voltage. If the primary AC input fails or drops too low, the dual AC power module handles the fail-over to the redundant, secondary AC input until the primary input is restored. It also provides surge protection for the library power system. The main drive frame and each drive expansion frame include a dual AC power module. Each dual AC power module includes both primary and secondary AC power connectors and two breaker switches. LEDs indicate the status of the primary and secondary AC circuits.
February 2011
34
Operator Panel and Touch Screen
For redundant AC power configurations, the two AC inputs for each frame must be on the same phase, and the voltages must be the same within a few volts. If these requirements are not satisfied, there may be problems switching between the two AC power sources.
Caution
The main and drive expansion frames are designed to be used on single phase power only. If the power sources for the dual AC inputs for a frame are not on the same phase, damage to the library could result.
Doors (not shown) Doors on the back of each frame to protect the cabling connections. The doors are equipped with safety interlocks that cause the library robotics to operate at a reduced speed while the doors are open.
OPERATOR PANEL AND TOUCH SCREEN

The operator panel and touch screen on the main drive frame provides local access to the BlueScale user interface through the Library Controller (LC). You can select options and enter information by simply touching the appropriate location on the screen. For detailed information about using the BlueScale user interface through the touch screen, see Chapter 4 Introducing the BlueScale User Interface.
Figure 8 The library operator panel displaying the General Status screen of the BlueScale user interface. LCD touch screen The 8.4-inch color LCD touch screen operator panel lets you monitor library operations and select configuration options using the BlueScale user interface.
LCD touch screen
Power button
February 2011
35
TeraPack Access Port (TAP)
Power Button The power button provides front panel on/off control of the library. Stylus (not shown) A stylus for making selections and typing entries on the touch screen can be conveniently stored near the screen using the included holder.
TERAPACK ACCESS PORT (TAP)

The dual TeraPack Access Ports (TAPs) are used to move TeraPack magazines into and out of the library. A TeraPack magazine can contain one or more cartridges or it can be empty.
TeraPack magazine
TAP 1 (door open)
TAP 2 (door closed)
Figure 9 The library TAPs with a TeraPack magazine loaded. When you request an import operation from the BlueScale user interface, the library opens one of the TAP doors and waits for you to insert a magazine containing one or more cartridges. After you insert the magazine, the door automatically closes and the transporter moves the magazine to a chamber in the library. When the move is complete, the library updates its inventory to include the newly imported media. Similarly, when exporting media from the library, the transporter delivers the magazine containing the requested media pack to the TAP. You can then remove the entire magazine from the TAP. Single cartridges must be imported or exported by importing or exporting the magazine containing the cartridge.
36
Computer Modules (LCM and RCM)
Using the TAP to move media in and out of the library provides these key advantages: Data Security. Media is never stored in the TAP. A newly inserted TeraPack magazine is automatically moved into the library and placed in a storage chamber.A magazine already in the library is only moved to the TAP when you request an export operation through the user interface. Data security and backup integrity are enhanced because the media stored in the library can only be accessed using the passwordprotected BlueScale user interface. Convenience. Instead of individually importing or exporting multiple single cartridges as you would with a traditional entry/exit port, using a TAP lets you handle up to ten cartridges in a single operation, thus reducing the time spent on import and export tasks. During import or export operations involving more than one magazine, the TAPs alternate so that the operation completes more quickly.
COMPUTER MODULES (LCM AND RCM)

The library uses multiple computer modules called the Spectra PC and, more recently, the Spectra Library Server (Spectra LS). These dedicated computers run the librarys BlueScale software and firmware that control and manage all aspects of the library operation. Depending on where the module is installed in the library, these modules are known as either the Library Control Module (LCM) or the Robotics Control Module (RCM).
Spectra PC and Spectra LS Overview

Spectra Logic recently released a new computer module referred to as the Spectra LS. This new module replaces the previous generation computer module, which is referred to as the Spectra PC. The Spectra LS provides the same functionality as the Spectra PC and includes features that allow for new functionality in the future. Both the Spectra PC and the Spectra LS can be used in the same library.
Important Windows CE 6 Requirements
If the library contains one or more Spectra LS modules or one or more Spectra PC modules that have been updated to use the Windows CE 6 operating system, the library must have BlueScale11.2 or later installed. Updating a library to BlueScale11.2 or later automatically updates any installed Spectra PC modules functioning as LCMs to use the new Windows CE 6 operating system.
February 2011
37
Figure 10 shows the external components on the Spectra PC; Figure 11 shows the new Spectra LS. Note: When the control module is functioning as an RCM, the connectors are used by for troubleshooting and diagnostic purposes under the direction of Spectra Logic Technical Support.
Keyboard connector Reset Monitor connector Compact flash memory card (behind cover) Fan
Mouse connector
USB port
Ethernet port
Figure 10 The connectors and components on the Spectra PC.

Reset Monitor connector SD memory card (behind cover) Fan
USB ports (4)
Ethernet ports (2)
Figure 11 The connectors and components on the Spectra LS. USB Ports (1 on the Spectra PC, 4 on the Spectra LS) A USB port is used to connect a USB drive to the LCM for transferring encryption keys, saving configurations, and uploading firmware packages. The USB port on the RCM is only used when capturing motion traces used for troubleshooting. Note: For convenience, you can connect a USB keyboard and mouse to the USB ports on the LCM and use them when interacting with the BlueScale user interface. This connection provides access to all of the options available from the librarys front panel touch screen. Keyboard and Mouse Connectors (Spectra PC only) For convenience, you can connect a PS2 mouse and keyboard to the appropriate connectors on the LCM and use them when interacting with the BlueScale user interface. This connection provides access to all of the options available from the librarys front panel touch screen.
February 2011
38
Monitor Connector For your convenience, you can connect an SVGA monitor to the LCM and use it to view the BlueScale user interface instead of using the library front panel. Ethernet Port (1 on the Spectra PC, 2 on the Spectra LS) If desired, you can use one of the Ethernet ports on the LCM to connect the library to an Ethernet network and access the library through the BlueScale web interface using the Remote Library Controller (RLC). The BlueScale web interface provides access to all of the options available from the librarys operator panel except those that require physical interaction with the library (for example, importing or exporting media). Notes: Only one Ethernet port at a time can be used on the Spectra LS. If cables are connected to both ports, the module automatically checks for active connections and uses the first port that it detects. When the module is functioning as the RCM, the Ethernet port is only used for troubleshooting by service personnel. Memory Card (behind cover) The memory card in each module stores the librarys configuration information, which includes option keys, system settings, and partition settings, as well as other configuration information. In the event one of the modules is replaced, the configuration information is automatically transferred to the new module, reducing the likelihood of having to reconfigure the library following a replacement. Note: The Spectra PC uses a Compact Flash (CF) memory card. The Spectra LS uses a Secure Digital (SD) memory card. In addition to the library configuration information, the memory card in each module stores information related to its functional role in the library. When the library server module is installed in the library and powered on the first time, the library determines the location and then activates either the LCM or RCM code on the memory card. Once this is done, the module performs only the functions defined by the activated code on the memory card. RS-232 and CAN Connectors (Spectra LS only) These connectors are only used for troubleshooting by service personnel.
February 2011
39
LCM and RCM Functionality

The functionality provided by the control module is dictated by where the it is installed and the information on the compact flash card installed in the module. When installed in the top bay of the main frame, the module functions as the Library Control Module (LCM). See Library Control Module (LCM) on page 41 for information about the functions the LCM performs. When installed in the bottom bay of the main frame or in a drive expansion frame, the module functions as the Robotics Control Module (RCM). See Robotics Control Module (RCM) on page 41 for information about the functions the RCM performs.
Library Control Module (LCM)
Robotics Control Module (RCM)
Figure 12 Identifying the LCM and the RCM (Spectra PC modules shown). Notes: The main frame has both an LCM and an RCM; drive expansion frames only have an RCM. The LCM and the RCM in the main frame do not provide failover redundancy for each other in the event that one of the modules fails. Media expansion frames do not contain any library server modules.
February 2011
40
Interface Modules
Library Control Module (LCM)

Note: Drive expansion frames do not have an LCM. A cover over the opening where the LCM would be installed maintains proper air circulation through the frame. The LCM provides the BlueScale user interface used to perform all configuration, import/export, and management functions for the library. The BlueScale user interface is accessed locally through the librarys touch screen. In addition, an embedded web server provides remote access to the BlueScale web interface using a standard web browser. In addition to providing the user interface, the LCM maintains and stores the MLM database, system logs, and other information related to the current system status. It also stores the auto-configuration save file and handles emailing it and AutoSupport logs to preconfigured recipients.
Robotics Control Module (RCM)

The RCM controls the operation of the robotics, the drives, and the interface modules (QIPs and RIMs). It also stores all of the information relating to the logical library, including information about the location and status of each element in the library, as well as the raw media inventory in its non-volatile memory. The main drive frame and each drive expansion frame requires an RCM. The RCM handles the communications with the hosts, servers, and software that write/read data on the media stored in the library. This functionality allows the library to continue performing backup/restore operations, even when the user interface provided through the LCM is unavailable.
INTERFACE MODULES
The library uses interface modules to provide the bridge between the external interface from the host and the internal interface used by the library. The library can contain one or more of the interface modules described in the following sections. The interface modules are mounted in the vertical controller bay located along the right side of each DBA. To learn more about the role interface modules play in the library, see Connectivity on page 59.
February 2011
41
Interface Modules
Quad Interface Processors (QIPs)

Important
QIPs (both F-QIPs and E-QIPs) are no longer available for purchase with a new library. In new libraries, connectivity for the transporter is provided by the Robotics Interface Module (RIM). Existing libraries with QIPs installed continue to be supported. The option to use QIP-attached SCSI drives is no longer available for new libraries. The library continues to support partitions that use QIPs to provide the robotic control path and QIP-attached SCSI drives.
Important
Fibre Channel ports
Gigabit Ethernet ports Activity LEDs
Activity LEDs Reset Reset
Figure 13 The Fibre Channel QIP (F-QIP).
Figure 14 The Ethernet QIP (E-QIP).
QIPs can be used provide the Fibre Channel or Gigabit Ethernet connectivity to the transporter and any SCSI drives in the library. One QIP installed in the librarys main frame provides the robotic control path for motion commands sent from the host to the transporter. This QIP, which can be shared by multiple partitions, is referred to as the exporting controller. See Transporter Connectivity on page 59 for additional information. If the library uses SCSI drives, a QIP is required to provide Fibre Channel or Gigabit Ethernet connectivity to the drives. The two QIP port provide any-to-any connectivity for up to four drives and must be installed in same DBA as the drives. See Drive Connectivity on page 62 for additional information.
February 2011
42
Interface Modules
F-QIP
The Fibre Channel QIP (F-QIP) has two integrated dual-channel ports (Port A and Port B). These ports can be used to provide connections to two separate Fibre Channel arbitrated loops or fabrics or they can be used in conjunction with the BlueScale Controller failover feature to provide a redundant control path to the transporter over a single Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric (see Controller Failover on page 66). An additional feature of the F-QIP is the ability to encrypt data before it is written to tape. This capability is useful if the SCSI drives installed in the library cannot perform encryption themselves. Encryption key management is provided through the librarys BlueScale user interface (seeChapter 12 Configuring and Using Encryption). Note: The encryption performed by the QIP is not compatible with the drive-based encryption available with LTO-4 drives. Data encrypted by the QIP cannot be decrypted by an encryptionenabled LTO-4 drive and vice versa. Activity LEDs indicate SCSI bus activity (data transfer to or from the attached drives). Another LED indicates whether the data passing to the attached drives is being encrypted or decrypted.
E-QIP
The E-QIP has two integrated dual-channel ports (Port A and Port B), which can provide connections to two separate networks or redundant connections to a single network. Each port provides an any-to-any connection to the four tape drives controlled by the E-QIP. Activity LEDs indicate SCSI bus activity (data transfer to or from the attached drives). Note: The E-QIP does not support controller failover.
February 2011
43
Interface Modules
Robotics Interface Modules (RIM)

Important RIM Requirements
A library that contains one or more Robotic Interface Modules (RIMs) must have BlueScale 11.1.3 or later installed. When one or more RIMs and no QIPs are installed in the library, only direct-attach Fibre Channel drives can be used.
The Robotics Interface Module (RIM), which is always installed in the main frame, provides the control path for the motion commands sent from the host over a Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric to the transporter in the library. Functionally, the RIM replaces the F-QIP, which is no longer available. However, it does not provide connectivity for SCSI drives, nor does it provide any encryption capability.
Fibre Channel ports
Reset
Figure 15 The Robotics Interface Module (RIM). The RIM has two dual-channel Fibre Channel ports (Port A and Port B), which can be used to provide connections to two separate Fibre Channel arbitrated loops or fabrics. The two ports can also be used in conjunction with the BlueScale Controller failover feature to provide a redundant control path to the transporter over to a single Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric (see Controller Failover on page 66). The RIM can be shared by multiple partitions in the library. Note: The Ethernet port on the RIM is reserved for future use.
February 2011
44
Drives
DRIVES
The library supports the following drive technologies.
Drive Technology LTO Description IBM LTO Ultrium tape drives (LTO-3 through LTO-5) are the only drive technology available for purchase in new libraries. Existing LTO-2 drives are also supported. See LTO Tape Drive Specifications on page 513 for information about the transfer rates and storage capacities of LTO drives. The BlueScale user interface supports using SDLT tape drives in the library if a QIP is present to provide the network connectivity. See SDLT Tape Drive Specifications on page 516 for information about the transfer rates and storage capacities of SDLT drives. Note: SDLT tape drives are no longer available for purchase with new libraries. The BlueScale user interface supports using SAIT tape drives in the library if a QIP is present to provide the network connectivity. See SAIT Tape Drive Specifications on page 517 for information about the transfer rates and storage capacities of SAIT drives. Note: Sony SAIT drives are no longer available for purchase with new libraries. The BlueScale user interface supports using RXT technology in the library if a QIP is present to provide the network connectivity. See RXT Drive and Media Pack Specifications on page 523 for information about the transfer rates and storage capacities of RXT drives and media. Note: RXT drives and RXT media packs are no longer available for purchase with new libraries.
SDLT
SAIT
RXT
The librarys drives are installed in modular drive bay assemblies (DBAs). Each DBA has four drive bays and can accommodate up to four full-height drives. Drives are hot-swappable to provide uninterrupted operation.
February 2011
45
Drives
Each drive is mounted in a drive sled which provides the interface connections to the drive, a handle to simplify sliding the drive into or out of a drive bay, and a lock to prevent the drive from being accidentally pulled out of the library.
Fibre Channel connectors (2)
Handle
Lock release
Fibre Channel connectors (2)
Handle
Lock release
SCSI terminator
Handle Lock release
Figure 16 The LTO-5 Fibre Channel drive sled.
Figure 17 The Fibre Channel drive sled (LTO-2 to LTO-4).
Figure 18 The SCSI drive sled.
Depending on the drive interface, the drive sled includes one of the interface connector types shown in the following table. See Component Interface Connectors on page 511 additional information
Drive Interface Fibre Channel Drive Sled Connector Each drive sled has two multi-mode optical SC connectors (Port A and Port B) that can be used to connect the drive directly to a Fibre Channel network (see Figure 16 and Figure 17 on page 46). See Partitions Using Direct-Attached Fibre Channel Drives on page 63 for information about using direct-attach Fibre Channel tape drives. SCSI drives, including all RXT drives, require a QIP to provide the Fibre Channel or Gigabit Ethernet connectivity. Each drive sled has one Ultra-3 SCSI LVD 68-pin Micro D female connector. An LVD SCSI terminator is installed on the connector (see Figure 18 on page 46).
SCSI a
a. Requires an F-QIP to connect to the network.
February 2011
46
Media Handling
MEDIA HANDLING
Spectras TeraPack media architecture provides support for both traditional tape media and RXT media.
TeraPack Tape Media

The library uses TeraPack magazines to import and export cartridges through the TAP and to store cartridges inside the library. Each magazine holds up to 10 LTO or SAIT cartridges or 9 SDLT cartridges. The magazine has guides along each side and grooves on the bottom to ensure proper alignment when it is inserted in the TAP. TeraPack magazines can be purchase preloaded with Spectra Certified Media. You can also purchase empty magazines.
Figure 19 TeraPack with bar-code labeled cartridges and plastic dust cover. Storing and handling cartridges in TeraPack magazines helps eliminate errors resulting from mishandling individual tapes, which is the leading cause of tape damage. When inside the library, TeraPack magazines are stored in semi-enclosed chambers. When not in the library, a clear plastic dust cover snaps onto the magazine to protect the cartridges. The cartridges are continually protected by the TeraPack magazine, both inside and outside the library. Using TeraPack magazines offers the following advantages: Bar code labeling. All of the cartridges in a TeraPack magazine, as well as the magazine itself, are bar-code labeled for easy identification. The bar-code information is stored by the library as part of its inventory data in non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM). Even after a power-down and restart, the library retains its inventory.
February 2011
47
Media Handling
Grouped media. The cartridges in a TeraPack magazine are treated as a unit during import and export operations. This grouped media handling simplifies media management tasks by eliminating the need to import or export cartridges one by one. TeraPack magazines eliminate at least 90 percent of operator time spent on these types of tasks. Mixed media support. If multiple drive types are installed in the library, individual TeraPack magazines can be loaded with media and imported into separate partitions to support each drive type. Media types cannot be mixed within a single TeraPack magazine.
RXT Media Packs

Important
RXT drives and RXT media packs are no longer available for purchase with new libraries. The library continues to support existing RXT drives and media as long as a QIP is present to provide the network connectivity for the RXT drive.
An RXT media pack is the same size and shape as a TeraPack magazine. Each RXT media pack contains multiple Serial ATA (SATA) disks sealed in a sturdy protective enclosure, as shown in Figure 20. RXT media is set to the RAID level specified when the pack was ordered.
Status LEDs Write-protect switch Alignment guides
Figure 20 An RXT media pack and its internal disk drives. The media pack has guides along each side to ensure proper alignment when it is inserted in the TAP. LEDs along the front edge of the media pack indicate the operational status of the drives. A write-protect switch can be set to prevent data from being written to or erased from the media pack. The transporter moves an RXT media pack and loads it into an RXT drive in much the same manner as a tape cartridge is loaded into a tape drive. As with a TeraPack magazine filled with cartridges, RXT media can easily be moved off-line and off-site.
48
CHAPTER 2
Architecture Overview
The T950 library is designed to provide maximum configurability and ease of use. This chapter provides an overview of the software and hardware architecture behind this versatility.
Topic Partitions Media Pools Auto Drive Clean Drive and Media Frames Component Identifiers Connectivity Described beginning on... this page page 52 page 53 page 55 page 57 page 59
PARTITIONS
Partitions divide the library logically, so that the partitioned library looks to the enterprise environment like one or more physical librariesone library per configured partition. Partitioning simplifies storage consolidation through the creation of virtual libraries, each with its own drives and media. By default, the library supports a single data partition. The library uses Shared Library Services (SLS) virtualization technology to create additional partitions in the library. SLS support is a keyed option you can add to the library by purchasing an activation key from Spectra Logic. Notes: If your library previously included free SLS support, a new eight-partition option key will be installed on the library when you upgrade to BlueScale11.1.0. After the upgrade is complete, check the Option Enablement pane of the BlueScale System Setup screen and make a note of the SLS key for future reference. Refer to Chapter 11 Configuring the Library for information about accessing the System Setup screen. You will need to manually re-enter the key if you ever reset the library to its factory defaults.
49
Partitions
When partitions are configured, each partition: Has exclusive access to the tape drives and media storage assigned to it. Can control the transporter to move media within the partition. The library supports two types of partitions, data partitions and cleaning partitions. The library requires, at a minimum, one data partition. Each data partition must have at least one drive assigned to it. Up to eight data partitions, plus one or more cleaning partitions, can be configured in a single library. A single cleaning partition can be associated with multiple data partitions. The cleaning partitions do not count against the eight partition maximum. Figure 21 shows a conceptual illustration of a library configured with two data partitions and a shared cleaning partition.
Storage Pool chambers (each with a loaded TeraPack magazine) Entry/exit pool chambers (each with an empty TeraPack magazine) Entry/exit pool chambers (each with an empty TeraPack magazine) Cleaning partition shared by Partition 1 and Partition 2
Partition 2 drives
Partition 1 drives
Storage pool chambers (each with a loaded TeraPack magazine)
Partition 1 Virtual library 1 Partition 2 Virtual library 2
Figure 21 A library with two partitions and a shared cleaning partition.
February 2011
50
Partitions
Data Partitions
The library requires, at a minimum, one data partition. Each data partition must have at least one drive and one slot in the storage pool assigned to it. Drives and slots can only be assigned to one data partition at a time; they cannot be shared by multiple partitions. In some environments, using multiple data partitions is crucial to data center efficiency and growth. For example, multiple partitions are extremely useful in the following situations: Multiple Backup Software Packages If groups within your company use different backup software packages, each software package requires its own dedicated library. Instead of maintaining multiple physical libraries one per backup packagethe data center can use a single Spectra Logic library with multiple partitions, in which each partition appears to the software as a dedicated library. Multiple Databases f your company uses multiple databases, partitioning the library preserves the backup processes associated with each type of database. Shared Resources If each department in the company must keep their data segregated, partitioning the library supplies this segregation, as well as the subsequent integrity of the data set. Each partition can only access the drives and cartridge locations assigned to it. Data from other partitions cannot become intermixed with the data stored on the media in the partitions inventory. Multiple Network Protocols If your company uses multiple network protocols, such as Fibre Channel and Gigabit Ethernet, then each protocol is assigned to its own partition within the same physical library. Multiple Drive Generations or Technologies If your data center uses multiple generations of drive technology or multiple drive technologies (for example LTO and SDLT drives), then the media associated with each drive generation can have its own partition if the media for one generation is incompatible with the other generation; media for different technologies must have its own partition. Encryption If you do not want to encrypt all of your backups but only some of them, your can partition the library into an Encryption partition and non-encryption partition to segregate which data to encrypt.
February 2011
51
Media Pools
Cleaning Partitions
Cleaning partitions provide permanent storage for cleaning cartridges inside the library when using the Auto Drive Clean feature (see Auto Drive Clean on page 53). These special-purpose partitions do not have an entry/ exit pool or any drives associated with them. A single cleaning partition can be shared by multiple data partitions. The cleaning cartridges used in a cleaning partition must be identified with CLN at the beginning of the bar code sequence on their labels. They must be stored in specially labeled Maintenance TeraPack magazines. The cleaning cartridges are imported into and exported from a cleaning partition through the TAP in the same way that data cartridges are. The library automatically prevents importing cleaning cartridges and magazines that are not properly identified into a cleaning partition. Cleaning partitions are not accessible to the application software that uses the media in the data partitions. This means that software-initiated drive cleaning operations cannot use the cleaning cartridges in the cleaning partition.
MEDIA POOLS
Inside the library, media is logically grouped through the use of pools. The library has three different types of pool, each of which has a different purpose. Free pool Chambers that are not assigned to a partition are in the free pool. These chambers can be assigned to a data partition or a cleaning partition. Media in the free pool is not accessible through the BlueScale user interface or the backup software until it is added to a partition. Entry/Exit pool Chambers in the entry/exit pool provide an interim storage location for media during import and export operations. Media is not accessible to the backup software for writing or reading data while it is in the entry/exit pool.
Important
Although a entry/exit pool for importing and exporting the media in a partition is not required, configuring one is highly recommended. The code load tapes used for updating drive firmware can only be imported into a partitions entry/exit pool.
The media in the entry/exit pool either: Was ejected from the storage pool by the backup software and is waiting to be exported from the library through the TAP. OR Was imported into the library through the TAP and is waiting to be moved into the storage pool by the backup software.
February 2011
52
Auto Drive Clean
When media is exported by the backup software it is not moved to a physical entry/exit port for immediate removal. Instead, it is moved to the internal entry/exit pool, where it is temporarily stored until it is removed from the library. When it is time to remove media from a library, the operator simply uses the Import/Export screen on the librarys user interface to move the TeraPack magazine to the TAP, where it can be removed. Together, the entry/exit pool and the TAP function as a configurable entry/exit port. Using an entry/exit pool greatly speeds tape cartridge exports because the operator does not have to handle individual cartridges. Similarly, the entry/exit pool speeds up import operations. Instead of loading individual tapes into slots in an entry/exit port, the operator inserts full media packs through the TAP. The media packs are moved to the entry/exit pool, from which they are later imported into the storage pool using the backup software. Using TeraPack magazines makes it possible to load multiple cartridges into the library using a single operation. Storage pool Chambers in the storage pool contain the media for the data partition. This media is available to the backup software for writing or reading data. When you configure a partition, you assign a certain number of chambers to the partition. If the partition is a data partition, you specify how many chambers are assigned to the storage pool and how many chambers are assigned to the entry/exit pools.
AUTO DRIVE CLEAN

Auto Drive Clean is an option that provides library-based cleaning of LTO tape drives with minimal user intervention. Automated drive cleaning results in fewer failed tape read/write operations and is the preferred method for cleaning drives. Note: Auto Drive Clean is only supported for LTO tape drives.
Using Auto Drive Clean

Tape drives that are configured in a data partition that has an associated cleaning partition are cleaned automatically when cleaning is required. In addition, you can use the BlueScale user interface to initiate a manual cleaning. The option to perform a manual cleaning operation using a cleaning cartridge in a cleaning partition is only available with drives that are in data partitions associated with a cleaning partition. Note: If a cleaning partition is not configured, you must either use your backup software to perform the cleaning or import a cleaning cartridge into the data partition (see Manually Cleaning a Tape Drive on page 450).
February 2011
53
Auto Drive Clean
Requirements The Auto Drive Clean feature requires a cleaning partition to be associated with the data partition (see Configuring a Cleaning Partition on page 253). The cleaning partition is assigned to the data partition when the data partition is configured (see Configuring Chambers and Drives on page 230). How Auto Drive Clean Works When a drive is unloaded in response to a host request and the data cartridge is moved to its storage location, the library queries the drive to determine if it needs cleaning. If cleaning is required, the library delays notifying the host that the SCSI move command for the unloaded data cartridge is complete until an automatic drive cleaning is performed. The library then determines which cleaning cartridge to use, retrieves the cleaning cartridge from the cleaning partition, inserts it in the drive, and then returns it to the cleaning partition after the cleaning is complete. The library then notifies the host that the move is complete. Expired Cleaning Cartridges When an expired cleaning cartridge is loaded into a drive it is immediately ejected without completing the cleaning. The library then flags the cleaning cartridge as expired. The library generates system messages to notify you of expired cleaning cartridges, completed automatic drive cleanings, and failed automatic drive cleanings. If the cleaning partition contains other, good cleaning cartridges, a cleaning that failed because the cleaning cartridge was expired will be re-attempted the next time the host unloads a data cartridge from the drive. Drives in a partition with Auto Drive Clean enabled are cleaned no more than once in any 12 hour period. If you want to clean the drive immediately, you can initiate a manual cleaning.
MLM Tracking of Cleaning Cartridges

When you enable the BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) feature and use MLM-enabled cleaning cartridges, the library stores usage information, which includes the number of cleans remaining and the cartridge health (good, near expiration or expired), in the MLM database. This information is retained in the MLM database even when a cleaning cartridge is exported from the library. When a cartridge is nearing the end of its useful life, the library notifies you so that you can replace the cartridge. This early notification helps prevent failed cleanings resulting from using an expended cleaning cartridge. See Chapter 7 Media Lifecycle Management for detailed information about MLM. The library does not store any information about non-MLM cleaning cartridges in the MLM database. However the library does mark an expired cleaning cartridge and does not attempt to use it again as long as it remains in the library. If an expired cartridge is exported and then reimported into the library, it is identified as expired the next time it is loaded into a tape drive.
February 2011
54
Drive and Media Frames
DRIVE AND MEDIA FRAMES

The base T950 library is a single frame that contains the TAP, drives, and media (as well as the other components described in Chapter 1 Library Overview). As data transfer and storage requirements increase, additional drive or media expansion frames can be added to the main drive frame, up to a maximum of eight frames. Main frame. The main frame is the base T950 library. It is available in two configurations: Up to 12 drives and LTO 950 cartridges or 95 RXT media packs Up to 24 drives and LTO 830 cartridges or 71 RXT media packs Drive expansion frames. Up to four drive expansion frames can be added to the main drive frame. A drive frame includes either three or six DBAs, media storage, and an RCM. The drive expansion frame is available in two configurations: Up to 12 drives and 1010 LTO cartridges or 101 RXT media packs Up to 24 drives and 890 cartridges or 89 RXT media packs Media expansion frames. Each media expansion frame accommodates up to 1300 cartridges.
February 2011
55
Drive and Media Frames
Figure 22 shows the arrangement of the media storage chambers in each type of frame.
Chambers in the Main Frame or a Drive Expansion Frame
Front Bay 7 Bay 3 Bay 6 Back
Bay 2
TAPs (main drive frame) or Chambers (drive expansion frame)
Bay 5 TBAs
Bay 1 Bay 4
Chambers in a Media Expansion Frame

Front Back
Bay 3
Bay 6
Bay 2
Bay 5
Bay 1
Bay 4
Figure 22 Chamber numbering in the main drive frame and in a drive or media expansion frame (as viewed from the front of the library).
56
Component Identifiers
COMPONENT IDENTIFIERS
The librarys BlueScale interface identifies a drive, RIM, or QIP based on its location relative to the frame and the drive bay assembly (DBA) where it is installed. Figure 23 shows the relationship between the DBAs and the drives, RIMs, and QIPs installed in the main drive frame (FR1). The relationships are the same in each drive frame in a multi-frame library. In a multi-frame library, the frames are numbered sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front, beginning with the main frame (FR1).
Frame 1 (FR1)
Drive 3 Drive 1
Drive 4 RIM/ QIP Drive 2 6 Drive 4 RIM/ QIP Drive 2 5 Drive 4 RIM/ QIP Drive 2 4
DBA 6
Drive 3 Drive 1 Drive 3 Drive 1
DBA 5
DBA 4
Drive 3 Drive 1
Drive 4 RIM/ QIP Drive 2 3 Drive 4 RIM/ QIP Drive 2 2 Drive 4 RIM/ QIP Drive 2 1
DBA 3
Drive 3 Drive 1
DBA 2
Drive 3 Drive 1
DBA 1
QIP or RIM locations
Figure 23 The relationship between frames, DBAs, QIPs or RIMs, and drive locations and their identifiers.
February 2011
57
Component Identifiers
QIP Identifiers
Quad Interface Processors (QIPs) and Robotics Interface Modules (RIMs) are identified in the librarys BlueScale interface as FRx/DBAx/Y-QIPx, where: FRx is the number of the frame. DBAx is the number of the drive bay assembly (DBA) containing the QIP (see Figure 23 on page 57). The main drive frame and each drive expansion frame accommodates from one to six DBAs. Y is the QIP type (F for Fibre Channel or E for Gigabit Ethernet). QIPx is the number of the controller bay in the DBA. Each DBA contains one controller bay, so x is always 1. Note: Check the device descriptor (circled in the following figures) in Controllers screen to determine whether the module is an F-QIP or a RIM.
Figure 24 The Controller screen (F-QIP installed). Figure 25 The Controller screen (RIM installed).
Drive Identifiers
In addition to the interface connections for the drive, the drive sled circuitry includes intelligence which assigns an identifier to the drive based on its location in the library. This identifier is used both by the library and by any backup software that accesses the drive. Because this identifier is locationbased, it remains constant even if the physical drive is replaced by a new drive. The new drive assumes the location-based identifier, making drive replacement completely transparent to the backup software. The librarys BlueScale interface uses the following identifiers for drives (see Figure 23). Drive identifiers appear as FRx/DBAx/Y-DRVx, where: FRx is the number of the frame. DBAx is the number of the drive bay assembly (DBA) containing the drive. Y is the drive type (either LTO, SDLT, or RXT) DRVx is the number of the drive bay in the DBA, as viewed from the back of the library.
58
Connectivity
CONNECTIVITY
Important
QIPs (both F-QIPs and E-QIPs) are no longer available for purchase with a new library. Connectivity for the transporter is provided by the Robotics Interface Module (RIM). Because the RIM does not provide drive connectivity, only directattach Fibre Channel drives can be used. You can continue to use QIP-based partitions in an existing library that already has QIPs installed.
The transporter and drives in the library are typically connected to the hosts through a Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric or, less often, over a Gigabit Ethernet network. These connections carry two types of information: The commands from the backup software that control the transporter motion and the read/write operation of the drives. The data being transferred to and from a drive by the host.
Transporter Connectivity
Connectivity for the transporter requires either a RIM or a QIP to provide the robotic control path for the transporter. When configuring a data partition, the device you select to provide the robotic control path is designated as the controller for the partition. The controller exports the partition to the hosts using the library, receiving and processing the robotic motion commands sent from the host to the partition. The exporting controller can support multiple partitions, each with full control of the transporter. For example, if the library contains two partitions, each with two direct-attach Fibre Channel drives, a single exporting controller can provide the robotic control path to the transporter for both partitions.
February 2011
59
Connectivity
Figure 26 shows an example of a partition with direct-attach Fibre Channel drives and a RIM or an F-QIP to provide the robotics control path.
Figure 26 An example of a QIP or RIM in a partition with direct-attach Fibre Channel drives. In this example, port A of the F-QIP in DBA3, which is connected to the same switch or hub as the Fibre Channel drives, provides the path over which the commands to control the motion of the robotics within the partition are sent from the host. These commands are relayed to the LCM, which in turn controls the motion of the robotics.
Controller Addressing
As part of providing network connectivity, RIMs and QIPs (F-QIP or E-QIP) have unique addresses and identifiers within the library. Each RIM or F-QIP is identified by a World Wide Name (WWN). Each port on the RIM or F-QIP has a World Wide Port Name (WWPN), which is derived from WWN. The WWPN is used by the host software to address the transporter controlled by the RIM or QIP. In the case of a QIP, the WWPN is also used by the host software to address any drives connected to the F-QIP. The WWPN for the RIM or F-QIP is displayed on the Shared Library Services screen for every partition that is exported by the RIM or F-QIP (see Viewing a Fibre Channel Partitions World Wide Name on page 110 for more information).
February 2011
60
Connectivity
Each port on an E-QIP is identified by an iSCSI target name. The iSCSI target name is used by the host software to address the drives and robotics controlled by the QIP. Each RIM or F-QIP presents a unique, location-based identifier to the network. This identifier is based on the physical location of the module in the library and a unique identifier for the library. Because the identifier is location-based, it remains constant even if the physical module is replaced. When the new module is installed, it assumes the existing location-based identifier, making replacement completely transparent to the backup software.
Fibre Channel Port Configurations

One or both of the external ports on the RIM or F-QIP that is configured as the exporting controller can be used to provide the network connectivity for the transporter. Single Port Connectivity The simplest configuration uses only one of the interface ports on the exporting controller. This configuration works well when only a single host is connected to the library. When multiple hosts are connected to the library, they must share this single communications path to the transporter. This type of configuration requires the hosts to use device sharing application software to handle the arbitration for use of the transporter.
A B
Network
RIM or QIP
Figure 27 Single port network connectivity to the exporting controller. Two Port Connectivity A slightly more complex configuration uses both interface ports on the exporting controller. Each port is used as an independent communications path. From a host perspective, each port is viewed as a unique, independent path to the transporter. The two ports can be connected to the same or possibly different storage area networks (SANs). The transporter processes the motion commands in the order that they are received. As with the previous configuration, when multiple hosts share either of these connections device sharing application software is required to handle the arbitration for use of the transporter.
February 2011
61
Connectivity
Dual-Port Connectivity As an alternative to these single port configurations, multi-port configurations use both interface ports as a single communications path. The ports can be connected to the same or different SANs. The hosts on the network can use either port to communicate with the transporter. A multi-port configuration allows a host to have an alternate path to reach the library for multi-path failover or to use both channels for higher throughput with multi-port IO.
SAN
A B
RIM or QIP
SAN1 A B SAN2
RIM or QIP
Figure 28 Multi-port, multi-path network connectivity to the exporting controller for high availability and failover.
Drive Connectivity
Important Important
SCSI drives and QIPs are no longer available for purchase with a new library. The library continues to support partitions using existing QIP-attached SCSI drives. If the library contains one or more SCSI drives connected to a QIP, the drives appear as impaired or offline if the QIP is replaced by a RIM. To continue using the SCSI drives, you must install a QIP to provide the network connectivity for the drives.
The drives in the library can have either a native Fibre Channel interface or a SCSI bus interface. Fibre Channel drives connect directly to the host using a Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric, as described in Partitions Using DirectAttached Fibre Channel Drives. SCSI drives require a QIP to provide the Fibre Channel or Gigabit Ethernet connectivity. As described in Partitions Using QIP-Attached SCSI Drives on page 63, the F-QIP (or E-QIP) acts as a bridge to connect SCSI drives in the DBA to a Fibre Channel fabric or arbitrated loop (or Gigabit Ethernet network). The terminator for each SCSI bus in the DBA is installed on the drives external LVD SCSI connector
February 2011
62
Connectivity
Keep in mind that all of the Fibre Channel drives on an arbitrated loop must share the data transfer capacity (bandwidth) of the interface. Having multiple devices on the same loop can negatively impact the performance of all the devices.
Partitions Using Direct-Attached Fibre Channel Drives

When a partition includes Fibre Channel drives, the drives can be connected directly to the Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric. Figure 26 on page 60 is a simple representation of how the Fibre Channel drives in the library (four per DBA) are connected directly to a Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric through a switch or hub. Port A of the F-QIP in DBA3, which is also connected to the switch or hub, provides the path over which the commands to control the motion of the robotics within the partition are sent from the host. These commands are relayed to the RCM, which in turn controls the motion of the robotics.
Partitions Using QIP-Attached SCSI Drives

When a partition includes SCSI drives, a QIP is required to provide the connectivity to the host. Each QIP has two external ports and provides connectivity for up to four SCSI drives. If a partition contains more than four drives, additional QIPs are required to provide the connectivity for those drives. Notes: Depending on the configuration, one of the QIPs used for drive connectivity can also be used to provide the robotics control path. The Controller Failover feature is not supported for any F-QIP that has SCSI drives connected to it. The F-QIP pair configured for Controller Failover can only be used to provide the robotics control path. The F-QIP (or E-QIP) acts as a bridge to connect SCSI drives in the DBA to a Fibre Channel fabric or arbitrated loop (or Gigabit Ethernet network). Each QIP has two external ports and provides connectivity for up to four SCSI drives. If a partition contains more than four drives, additional QIPs are required to provide the connectivity for those drives.
February 2011
63
Connectivity
Figure 29 is a simple representation of how the drives and robotics in a library with a single QIP-based partition are connected to a Fibre Channel arbitrated look or fabric through a switch or hub.
Figure 29 An example of a QIP-based partition with QIP-attached drives connected to a SAN. In the example shown in Figure 29, the SCSI drives in the partition (four drives per DBA) are connected to the Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric through Port B of the F-QIP in the DBA. Port A of F-QIP 3 provides the path over which the SCSI commands to control the motion of the robotics within the partition are sent from the host. These commands are relayed to the RCM, which in turn controls the motion of the robotics.
February 2011
64
Connectivity
As illustrated in Figure 30, a QIP provides any-to-any connectivity to the SCSI drives it controls. Every drive (target) is potentially visible to servers through both ports on the QIP. This permits flexibility in configuring which servers can access which drives (target visibility).
Drive Bay Assembly (DBA)
Drive 3
Drive 4
QIP
Drive 1
Drive 2
Internal cabling Fiber port (Fibre Channel or Gigabit Ethernet)
Figure 30 QIP-attach SCSI drive connectivity. For example, a QIP-based partition can be configured so that Drive 1 and Drive 2 are only accessible through Port A and Drive 3 and Drive 4 are only accessible through Port B. In this configuration, Drive 1 and Drive 2 can only be accessed by the host connected to Port A; Drive 3 and Drive 4 can only be accessed by a host connected to Port B. In a more complex configuration, the QIP can be configured so that all drives are visible through both ports. Such a configuration is typically used in a shared storage environment or an environment with failover capabilities.
Important
If drives are visible to multiple servers, your backup software must support this visibility. Otherwise server contention for a single drive can create network and system problems.
February 2011
65
Connectivity
Failover Redundancy
In a high-availability Fibre Channel environment, the ability to maintain network communications between the host systems and the library and its drives the event of a connection failure is essential. A library with an F-QIP or RIM providing the robotic control path can be configured to use Controller Failover feature to provide redundant connectivity to the transporter. In addition, if the library uses direct-attach LTO-4 or LTO-5 Fibre Channel drives, the servers accessing the drives can be configured to use the two ports on each drive to provide redundant connectivity to the drives. Note: Redundant connections to SCSI drives through QIPs is not supported.
Controller Failover
The BlueScale Controller Failover feature uses two independent, identical F-QIPs or RIMs (controllers) that are configured as a logical pair. Within the logical pair, one controller is the primary; the other is the secondary. Port A on each controller in the logical pair is connected to the same Fibre Channel switch. See Configuring Controller Failover (Optional) on page 308 for information about configuring controller failover. During normal operation, the Fibre Channel port A on the primary controller operates in target mode to receive and process the motion commands sent from the host to the transporter. From the host perspective, the primary controller is the only controller present. The secondary controller is not visible to the host. Fibre Channel port A on secondary controller is configured to be a duplicate of its partners Fibre Channel port A, except that it operates in initiator mode. Instead of receiving and processing motion commands, the secondary controller regularly queries the primary controller over the Fibre Channel connection to detect lockups or disconnects on its active port. The secondary controller also uses the librarys internal communication bus to monitor its partner and to maintain identical records of the librarys inventory database on both controllers.
February 2011
66
Connectivity
As illustrated in Figure 31, when a failover event occurs, the active port on the secondary controller detects that the active port on the primary controller has experienced a lockup or disconnect. After confirming that the primary controller is no longer communicating, the active port on the primary controller is disabled and the secondary controller automatically switches its active port to target mode. The port assumes the identity of primary controllers port (WWN and WWPN) and begins receiving and processing the motion commands sent from the host to the transporter.
A B SAN A B
Primary Controller Secondary Controller
Before failover
A B SAN A B
Primary Controller Secondary Controller
After failover Robotics control path (target port) Partner monitoring (initiator port) Internal communication bus (mirror inventory & partner monitor)
Figure 31 Paired QIPs configured to provide failover redundancy. Because both F-QIPs are connected to the network and maintain a synchronized image of the librarys inventory, the failover is a nearly transparent process that ensures that network communications with the library are uninterrupted. You can then troubleshoot the failed controller at your convenience and replace it if necessary. Controller failover allows hosts to continue operations in the event that the connection to the primary controller is disrupted. To take advantage of the Controller Failover feature, the host must be configured to retry failed commands. This ensures that commands that fail when the connection to the primary controller is disrupted get re-issued after the connection to the secondary controller is established. The retry timing must be configured to allow for the time lag inherent in the process of disabling the hosts connection to the primary controller and enabling the connection to the secondary controller.
February 2011
67
Connectivity
Failover Using Direct-Attached LTO-4 and LTO-5 Fibre Channel Drives

The LTO-4 and LTO-5 Fibre Channel drives used with the library are equipped with two Fibre Channel ports. Although the two Fibre Channel ports the drive cannot be used simultaneously, they can be used to provide failover capability in the event that communication to the port currently in use is interrupted. This failover can be can be accomplished several ways, including: Manually disconnect the fiber optic cable from the failed port and connect it to the other port. You may need to reconfigure your host software to recognize the alternate port. Connect each port on the drive to a separate Fibre Channel HBA in the host. You can also use a dual-port Fibre Channel HBA. Configure one HBA (or HBA port) as the primary connection and the other HBA (or HBA port) as the failover connection. Install failover software on the host computer to control the transfer of I/O from one HBA to the other in case of a failure. You may also need to configure your backup software to correctly recognize both ports. Refer to your failover software, HBA, and backup software documentation for instructions. Connect each port on the drive to a separate Fibre Channel switch or hub. Configure one switch as the primary connection and the other switch as the failover connection. Install MPIO failover software on the host computer to control the transfer of I/O from one connection to the other in case of a failure. You may also need to configure your backup software to correctly recognize both connections. Refer to your failover software, switch, and backup software documentation for instructions.
February 2011
68
CHAPTER 3
Installation Overview
This chapter provides an overview of the hardware installation and initial configuration performed by the Spectra-Logic-certified field engineer who installed your library. A checklist at the end of the chapter provides space for recording your library configuration settings for future reference.
Topic Installation Steps Updating or Servicing the Library System Configuration Settings Checklist Described beginning on... this page page 72 page 73
Important
The information in this chapter is for reference only. It provides a high-level summary of the installation steps but is not intended for use as an installation guide.
INSTALLATION STEPS
During installation, the engineer performs the procedures described in the following sections.
Unpack and Set Up

1. Confirm that all of the pre-installation requirements, as specified in the Spectra T950 Library Site Preparation Guide, have been met. This includes ensuring the installation site is located near easily accessible AC power outlets and away from potential sources of static discharge (for example, carpeted flooring). 2. Move all of the components to the installation location. 3. Uncrate the main drive frame, any expansion frames, and all additional components. 4. Verify that there was no shipping damage to any of the components. 5. Remove all packing materials from the interior of the frames. 6. Install any BlueScale Vision cameras that were ordered with the library into the appropriate frames.
69
Installation Steps
7. Position the main drive frame and attach any expansion frames, making sure that all of the frames are correctly aligned and that the entire length of the library is level.
Caution
Do not place the library on a carpeted floor or anywhere else that poses risk for static discharge that could damage your library and its drives.
8. Install the QIPs, RIMs, drives, and power supply modules that were ordered with the library. Ensure that the LCM and all of the RCMs are installed. 9. Connect cables and attach the power cords to the library. Interface cablesSee Main and Drive Expansion Frame Rear Components on page 30 for the locations of the interface cable connections. In addition to the network connections to the QIPs and drives, each BlueScale vision camera requires a separate Ethernet connection. AC power inputsThe library comes with dual 220-240 VAC power inputs. Connect each input to a separate branch circuit to allow for failover in the event of a power failure in one of the circuits. Cord locksInstall the provided cord locks to keep the power cords from becoming disconnected from the AC input plugs. For instructions, see Installing Cord Locks on page 443. 10. Power on the library and allow it to complete its initialization process. See Controlling the Library Power on page 93 for power-on instructions.
Update Firmware, Configure, and Test

1. Configure user profiles (user name, password, and user group), the library IP address, the BlueScale Vision camera IP addresses, email notification profiles, and AutoSupport. See Chapter 11 Configuring the Library if you need to update or change any of these settings. 2. Verify that you can access the library user interface using the BlueScale web interface through a standard web browser. See BlueScale Web Interface on page 78 for information about accessing the library from a remote location.
February 2011
70
Installation Steps
3. Update the library and drive firmware to the most current versions, if necessary. If you need to update the library or drive firmware after your library is installed, see Updating Library Firmware on page 428. 4. Install the license keys for all of the options you purchased. At a minimum, the licensed options include the initial BlueScale Software Support key and the capacity key. If you purchase additional options, see Entering Activation Keys on page 289 to learn how to enter license keys and enable the options for use. 5. Configure one or more library partitions to meet your requirements. The library must have a minimum of one partition configured. See Chapter 9 Using Partitions if you want to add new partitions or modify existing partitions. 6. Import all prepared TeraPack magazines and RXT media packs (if used). Chapter 5 Operating the Library provides detailed information about importing and exporting all types of media. 7. Use the library diagnostics to test the transporter by moving media to and from all locations in the library, including the drives. 8. Connect the library to the hosts in your operating environment. If using partitions, ensure that the transporter and appropriate drives are accessible to each host. See Chapter 9 Using Partitions for information about setting visibility. 9. Use backup software or other application software to perform a read/ write test to each drive. See your software documentation for information about reading and writing data.
Important
Some operating environments require you to install device drivers before the application software can correctly communicate with the drives.
February 2011
71
Updating or Servicing the Library
UPDATING OR SERVICING THE LIBRARY

Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support before making any changes to your library hardware or performing any service operations. You must have a current support agreement and corresponding BlueScale Software Support key entered in the library before you can update the librarys firmware, which includes the BlueScale software. If you do not have a current support agreement and the relevant documentation, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
Important
Updating the library firmware and BlueScale software requires a current service contract with Spectra Logic Technical Support. The BlueScale Software Support key associated with your service contract must be stored in the library by entering it into the System Configuration screen. See Enabling BlueScale Software Support, Options, and Upgrades on page 283 for additional information. If you have questions about your service agreement, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
Installing Additional Drives

Installing an additional drive into a partially filled DBA causes the library to reassign element addresses. To avoid errors, reconfigure your backup software after adding a new drive (refer to your software documentation for instructions).
Moving the Library

The library hardware is configured to ensure proper thermal control, air flow, and dust filtering. After the library is installed, do not move the library. Do not remove the doors from the back of the library or any library components (except TeraPack magazines or RXT media packs). In the event a change is required, make sure that you have instructions for performing the procedure and you either: Have been instructed to do so by Spectra Logic Technical Support, or Have a support contract such as Assisted Self-Maintenance (ASM).
February 2011
72
System Configuration Settings Checklist
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SETTINGS CHECKLIST

If desired, use the following form to record the configuration settings for your library for future reference.
Component Network Settings Description The network on which the library operates uses either DHCP addressing or static IP addressing to determine the IP address of the library. If the network uses static IP addressing, record the library IP address, subnet mask, and network gateway (see Configuring Network Settings on page 298). Value Library IP address _______ . _______ . _______ . _______ Subnet mask _______ . _______ . _______ . _______ Network gateway _______ . _______ . _______ . _______ IPv6 link address ______::______:______.______:______ Web server port number ____________ Library Name The name used to identify the library, regardless of library size or subsequent expansion (see Modifying the Configuration Settings on page 293). The library can be configured to automatically send email messages to notify specified users about specific library conditions (see Configuring Mail Users on page 300). Identify the mail users to receive email notifications and AutoSupport information. Specify the types of notification(s) the library should send automatically. Specify the library name so that the recipient of the message knows which library originated the message. Specify the IP address of the SMTP server used to send the email. Library name
Mail Recipients
Email address 1 __________________________________ Notification Types Fatal Error Warning Informational SMPT Server IP Address _______ . _______ . _______ . _______ Email address 2 __________________________________ Notification Types Fatal Error Warning Informational SMPT Server IP Address _______ . _______ . _______ . _______
February 2011
73
Chapter 3 Installation Overview Component AutoSupport Profiles Description The library can be configured to automatically send AutoSupport information (see Configuring AutoSupport Profiles on page 268).
System Configuration Settings Checklist Value Customer/Contract Number __________________________________ Profile 1 Contact Name (First and Last) __________________________________ Primary Phone Number __________________________________ Email address 1 __________________________________ AutoSupport Profile Mail To autosupport@spectralogic.com __________________________________ __________________________________ __________________________________ Profile 2 Contact Name (First and Last) __________________________________ Primary Phone Number __________________________________ Email address 1 __________________________________ AutoSupport Profile Mail To autosupport@spectralogic.com __________________________________ __________________________________ __________________________________
Syslog Server IP Address
The library can be configured to automatically send all system messages to a previously configured Syslog server (see Syslog Server IP Address on page 295).
_______ . _______ . _______ . _______
February 2011
74
Chapter 3 Installation Overview Component Camera Location and IP Addresses Description If one or more BlueScale Vision cameras are installed, each camera uses a separate, static IP address for accessing the camera using the web-based Network Camera viewer (see Setting the Camera IP Address on page 312).
System Configuration Settings Checklist Value Frame___________________________ _______ . _______ . _______ . _______ Frame___________________________ _______ . _______ . _______ . _______ Frame___________________________ _______ . _______ . _______ . _______ Frame___________________________ _______ . _______ . _______ . _______ Frame___________________________ _______ . _______ . _______ . _______ Frame___________________________ _______ . _______ . _______ . _______ Frame___________________________ _______ . _______ . _______ . _______ Frame___________________________ _______ . _______ . _______ . _______
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a widely used protocol for monitoring the health and welfare of your library by using integrated alerts (see Configuring SNMP (Optional) on page 305).
System Contact __________________________________ System Location __________________________________ Communities __________________________________ __________________________________ Trap Destinations Community 1 __________________________________ Description __________________________________ IP Address _______ . _______ . _______ . _______ Community 2 __________________________________ Description __________________________________ IP Address: _______ . _______ . _______ . _______
February 2011
75
System Configuration Settings Checklist
Notes
February 2011
76
CHAPTER 4
Introducing the BlueScale User Interface
This chapter describes the librarys BlueScale user interface and how it is used.
Topic Overview of the BlueScale User Interface Access Options User Security User Interface Features Using the BlueScale User Interface Logging Into the User Interface Logging Off or Switching Users Entering Information Described beginning on... page 78 page 78 page 79 page 80 page 78 page 88 page 90 page 90
Figure 32 The BlueScale user interface General Status screen.
77
Overview of the BlueScale User Interface
OVERVIEW OF THE BLUESCALE USER INTERFACE

The BlueScale user interface lets you set configuration options, view library and drive information and metrics, manage media, monitor library operations, and perform maintenance operations.
Access Options
The BlueScale user interface is accessed using either the touch screen on the library operator panel or through the BlueScale web interface.
Touch Screen Interface

The touch screen on the operator panel of the main drive frame lets you select options and enter information by simply touching the appropriate location on the screen. The touch screen interface includes a soft keyboard that you can use to enter alphanumeric characters into text fields. This soft keyboard can be accessed from the keyboard icon that displays whenever text input is required. In addition to using the touch screen, you can access the local user interface using a monitor, keyboard, and mouse connected directly to the LCM (see Figure 10 and Figure 11 on page 38).
BlueScale Web Interface

The BlueScale web interface lets you access the user interface through the Remote Library Controller (RLC) using a standard web browser. Simply enter the librarys IP address into the browser running on a computer connected to the librarys LCM over an Ethernet network. The BlueScale web interface provides access to the same features and functions that are available through the touch screen, excluding functions that involve physical interaction with the library (for example, using the TAP to import or export a TeraPack magazine).
Important
When accessing the library remotely through a web browser, do not use the Enter key on your keyboard when making selections in the BlueScale user interface. Various web browsers handle the Enter key differently, causing inconsistent behavior in the BlueScale interface. Always use your mouse to make selections and click the buttons in BlueScale screens instead of using your keyboard.
February 2011
78
When using the web interface, keep the following requirements in mind: Number of Sessions The BlueScale web interface does not support using more than two simultaneous sessions. When you attempt to establish more than two simultaneous web interface sessions, the existing session with the longest idle time is terminated. Supported Browsers Remote access to the library through the web interface is only supported using the following web browsers: Microsoft Internet Explorer versions 6.0 and above Mozilla Firefox versions 1.0.7 and above Using an unsupported browser may result in the BlueScale web interface not displaying or operating as expected.
User Security
Library users are assigned to one of three groups, each with its own set of pre-defined library privileges (also known as permissions). These privileges determine the type of operations a user can perform on the library. These privileges are the primary means for configuring library security. See Configuring Library Users on page 290 for information about adding users. The following table describes the three user groups and the privileges of each.
User Group Type Superuser Description Controls all aspects of library use and configuration. Users assigned to the Superuser group can control all aspects of the librarys configuration and operation, including defining other library users and their groups. Note: The library requires a minimum of one superuser. You cannot delete the last member of the Superuser group. Configures and uses the library. With the exception of creating or modifying library users, users in the Administrator group have the same privileges as users in the Superuser group. Performs day-to-day operations. Users assigned to the Operator group can move, import, and export media, but cannot access the more sensitive library operations such as configuration, diagnostics, and security. Default User Name su
Administrator
administrator
Operator
operator
February 2011
79
User Interface Features

The following sections describe the common features that appear in all screens in the user interface.
Current toolbar
Additional tool bars
Status bar
Figure 33 The BlueScale user interface features.
Toolbars
The toolbar panel appears along the left edge of each screen (see Figure 33) and lets you navigate through the available toolbars to select options. Clicking on a toolbar expands it to display the available options. The screen for the previously selected option remains displayed until you select another option, either from the same toolbar or another one.
February 2011
80
Option Overview
The following table provides an overview of the options available under each toolbar. Figure 34 on page 84 shows the sequence of the screens under each option.
Toolbar General Available Options The General toolbar (shown in Figure 33 on page 80) accesses the most frequently used library screens and controls: General StatusDisplays the current status for all of the major library components for the selected library partition. Moving the cursor over the name of the component highlights the component in the system graphic. Click on Drives to display the Drives screen for more detailed information about the status of the drives (see Viewing Drive Status Information on page 108). Click on Media to display the Inventory screen to view the librarys physical inventory information (see Viewing the Partition Inventory on page 125). InventoryDisplays controls for viewing the librarys media inventory and moving media from one location in the library to another. See Understanding the Media Inventory on page 125 to learn about using the options available from this screen. Import/ExportDisplays controls for importing and exporting media. See Importing Media and Cleaning Cartridges on page 132 to learn about using the options available from this screen. This option is not available when using the BlueScale web interface. MetricsDisplays metrics for tape drive performance, power consumption, and storage density for the media types in the library. See Using Performance Metrics on page 99 for information about the metrics available for the library. Media Lifecycle ManagementDisplays controls for generating media lifecycle reports. See Using MLM Reporting on page 192 to learn about using the options available from this screen.
February 2011
81
Chapter 4 Introducing the BlueScale User Interface Toolbar Configuration Available Options
The Configuration toolbar accesses controls for configuring all aspects of the librarys operation: PartitionsDisplays information about the currently selected partition and lets you define new partitions or modify existing partitions. See Chapter 9 Using Partitions to learn about configuring and using both data and cleaning partitions in your library. Drives or DLMDisplays information about the drives installed in the library. If the Automatic Drive Cleaning feature is enabled and a cleaning partition is associated with a drives partition, you can also use the Drives screen to launch a manual cleaning operation. DLM is automatically enabled when you enable MLM. After DLM is enabled, the Drives icon in the Configuration toolbar changes to DLM. The DLM status icon next to each drive provides at-a-glance information about the general health of the drive. See Chapter 8 Drive Lifecycle Management to learn about using the options available from this screen. ControllersDisplays information about the QIPs (or RIMs) installed in the library and lets you configure a failover pair using two identical controllers. Controller failover provides uninterrupted control of the transporter in the event that the connection through the exporting controller becomes unavailable (see Configuring Controller Failover (Optional) on page 308). SystemProvides controls for enabling purchased library options and configuring the librarys system-wide operating parameters. See Chapter 11 Configuring the Library for information about using the controls available from this option. Media Lifecycle ManagementDisplays controls for enabling MLM and selecting the media lifecycle management events for which you want alerts. See Chapter 7 Media Lifecycle Management to learn about using the options available from this screen.
February 2011
82
Chapter 4 Introducing the BlueScale User Interface Toolbar Maintenance Available Options
The Maintenance toolbar accesses maintenance and troubleshooting options for the library and drives. Package UpdateDisplays the version of the currently running firmware and provides controls for updating and managing firmware packages, as well as for configuring and managing servers used for loading firmware package updates for multiple libraries. See Updating Library Firmware on page 428 for detailed information. ToolsAccesses utilities for viewing firmware versions, calibrating the touch screen, and generating operational traces of various library components for use during troubleshooting procedures. See Chapter 13 Library Troubleshooting for more information. DiagnosticsAccesses diagnostic tests to be used for testing the library and during troubleshooting procedures. These tests are performed under guidance from Spectra Logic Technical Support. See Chapter 13 Library Troubleshooting for more information. AutoSupportProvides controls for creating and maintaining AutoSupport profiles and for opening and updating support tickets. See Chapter 10 AutoSupport for detailed information about configuring and using AutoSupport. Media Lifecycle ManagementAccesses MLM tools used to: Start and stop the media discovery process (see Starting or Stopping Media Auto Discovery on page 181). Start and stop the manual PostScan process (see Using PostScan on page 184). Delete the MLM database records and export the MLM and DLM databases (see Managing the MLM Database on page 200). The Security toolbar accesses options for creating and managing users. If you purchased the BlueScale Encryption option for your library, the Security toolbar also provides access to the BlueScale Encryption options. Switch UserDisplays the Login screen to allow a different user to log into the library. Edit UsersProvides tools for adding, deleting, and managing users. See Configuring Library Users on page 290 for detailed information. EncryptionAccesses the BlueScale Encryption options, including the librarys built-in encryption key management. BlueScale Encryption Basic Edition capability is included with the library. BlueScale Encryption Professional Edition provides additional encryption capabilities. Refer to Chapter 12 Configuring and Using Encryption for information about configuring and using encryption with the library.
Security
February 2011
83
Toolbar Option Map

General
General Status
O, A, S
General (Cont.)
Metrics
O, A, S
Configuration
Partitions
A, S
Configuration (Cont.)
Drives (DLM)
A, S
Configuration (Cont.)
General Status Partition Status Drives > Drives screen Media > Inventory screen Robotics Status Power Status Fans Status TAP 1 Status TAP 2 Status Power Usage Density
Metrics Metric Power Consumption (EnergyAudit) Drive Write Performance Drive Read Performance Storage Density Display parameters
O, A, S
Inventory
O, A, S
Inventory Partition Source (for media move) Destination (for media move) Move Queue (defined moves) Delete (selected move) Delete All (moves) View Source Slot Find by Barcode Start Moves (defined moves)
Import/Export 1
O, A, S
Import/Export TeraPack Cases Data Partition Storage pool (superuser only) Import Export/Exchange Import Entry/Exit Pool Import Export/Exchange (Full Chambers) Export/Exchange (Pop. Chambers) Cleaning Partition Import Export/Exchange Export/Exchange Expired Rotation Manager Recycle Encrypted Media Advanced Advanced Import/Export
Media Lifecycle Management Report Partition Report Media Health Remaining Capacity Load Count Write Errors Cleans Remaining Born on Date Exported Media Last Write Time Last Read Time Save Report Find by Barcode
Shared Library Services New Summary Edit Delete Global Spare Global Spare Usage Name and Media Type Name <Media Type> (data partition) Clean (LTO only) Advanced Emulation Robotic Control Path Controller Failover (exporting F-QIP or RIM only) Spare Drives (Global Spares) 2 Ethernet Protocol (E-QIP only) Chambers and Drives Encryption (Encryption only) MLM Media Verification Enable PreScan PostScan Options 2 FullScan QuickScan QuickScan using Global Spare PostScan Triggers 2 Scan After Time (Days) Scan After Write Scan After Read Fibre Channel Loop IDs (Direct-Attach FC drives) Partition Users Smart Motion Options Robotic Path Visibility Drive Visibility (QIP-Attach drives only) QIP Configuration Settings (depend on QIP type and use) Save Library Configuration Save Partition
Drives Add 1 Remove 1 1 Replace Clean Detail Drive Lifecycle Management Report Test Reset
A, S
Controllers
A, S
Controllers Add 1 Remove 1 Replace 1 Release 1 Failover/Release (exporting F-QIP or RIM only)
Media Lifecycle Management Settings Enable MLM Enable Alerts for Non-Certified Media Enable Alerts for Load Count Discrepancies Minimum Cleaning Passes Before Warning Maximum Tape Loads Before Warning Enable Media Auto Discovery Convert to Broadcast Hours PostScan Blackout Periods
System
A, S
Option Enablement Hardware ID (Serial #) 3 Key Save Currently Installed Keys Other Settings Library Name Web Server Port Refresh Rate Auto Logout Timeout Online Access to Spectra Logic Drive Performance Monitoring Power Consumption Monitoring Soft Power Control Enable SNMP Agent SNMP Settings Syslog Server IP Address BlueScale Vision IP Address Network Settings Mail Users Auto Configuration Save Routine Maintenance Date and Time
Go to General (Cont.) Go to Configuration (Cont.)
Go to Configuration (Cont.)
Maintenance
Package Update
A, S
Maintenance (Cont.)
AutoSupport
A, S
Security
Switch User Edit Users
O, A, S
Status Bar
Refresh HHM Notification (when maintenance threshold is reached) Send AutoSupport Ticket > Send Log Set System Status System Messages Delete Selected Delete All Remote Support BlueScale Vision Camera (when enabled) Last Refresh (time and date)
S
Package Update Begin Package Update Manage Packages Manage Package Servers
Tools
A, S
Utilities Upload Backup Configuration Basic Utilities Show Advanced Basic Utilities List Advanced Utilities 4 Advanced Utilities List Save MLM Database Restore MLM Database HHM: View Data Show Basic Traces System Traces
Send Log Set Select Profile to Send Log Set Select Ticket Type Profile Summary Confirm and Submit Ticket Manage Profiles New Profile Remove Edit Profile Configure Alarms Log Forwarding
A, S
Library Users Users Delete Edit Add/Update User User Password User Type
Encryption
BlueScale Software Version Library IP Address (local access) OR Library Name (remote access)
Encryption User Login Encryption Configuration Configure Single User Mode Multi-User Mode (BlueScale Encryption Pro version only) Check Key Files Import Key Add Key Moniker Export Key Delete Key
Media Lifecycle Management A, S

Media Lifecycle Management Tools Discover Media Select Partition Stop Discovery (only visible when Discovery is running) 2 Pause PostScan (only visible when PostScan is running) 2 Manual PostScan Select Tapes Submit Delete MLM Records Select Records Delete Selected Download MLM Database (remote access only) Save as CSV file Download DLM Database (remote access only) Save as XML file
Diagnostics
A, S
Motion Diagnostics Motion Diagnostics List Previous Results
Notes: 1) Available only on the touch screen. 2) Available only with direct-attach Fibre Channel drives. 3) The Hardware ID (Serial #) is needed to purchase new options. 4) Do not use any Advanced Utilities except those listed here unless instructed to do so by Spectra Logic Technical Support. Library user types: Superuser, Administrator, and Operator Feature Availability: This feature is available to this user type: S) Superuser Controls all aspects of library use, configuration, and security. A) Administrator Performs all actions except creating or editing library users, and accessing encryption. O) Operator Moves, imports, and exports media.
Go to Maintenance (Cont.)
Note: The BlueScale user interface changes as features are added or modified between firmware revisions. The tool bar options shown here may differ from those available for your library.
Figure 34 Map of BlueScale Toolbar options.
February 2011
84
Status Bar
The status bar is located along the bottom edge of most screens. The information and icons displayed on the status bar depend on the status of the system and whether you are using the using the operator panel or the BlueScale web interface.
System Status
Refresh display
Last refresh time and date
BlueScale software version
IP address (or library name)
Figure 35 The BlueScale status bar. Refresh Button Refreshes (updates) the information currently displayed on the user interface. If you set a long interval for the refresh rate or disabled the automatic screen refresh by setting the refresh rate to zero (see Refresh Rate on page 294), you can refresh the screen manually by selecting the refresh button. Note: Using a keyboard command (for example, F5) to refresh the browser when connected to the BlueScale web interface cause unpredictable results. System Status Icon Indicates the status of library components. The BlueScale user interface uses the following icons to indicate the status of library components. Click the status icon to view system messages (see Checking Messages on page 97 for information about these messages). Note: These status icons also display next to the major system components shown on the General Status screen (see Figure 33 on page 80).
Icon Description A check mark ( ) in a green circle An i in a blue circle. Meaning All system components are functioning correctly.
An informational message about a system component is available. Check messages to determine the component. A system component requires attention. Check messages to determine the component. A system component has experienced an error condition. Check messages to determine the component.
An exclamation point ( ! ) in a yellow triangle. An X in a red circle.
February 2011
85
Last Refresh Time and Date shows when the displayed information was last updated. The library refreshes different screens at different rates, depending on the type of data displayed. The screen refresh rate can be set for a specific interval or disabled (see Refresh Rate on page 294). The displayed information can be refreshed manually by selecting the Refresh button. BlueScale Software Version Shows the version of the BlueScale software being run by the library. IP Address or Library Name Shows the IP address or name for the library. If you are managing the library from the touch screen operator panel, the librarys IP address is displayed on the status bar. If you are using the BlueScale web interface, the librarys name is shown instead of the IP address. Note: If you are using the BlueScale web interface and you have not set the library name, the right-hand side of the status bar is blank. If you need to view or set the librarys IP address, see Configuring Network Settings on page 298. See Library Name on page 294 for information about setting the library name.
Additional Status Bar Icons

The status bar can also include the following additional icons. Remote Support Icon Provides you with online access to the support section of the Spectra Logic web site where you can search the Knowledge Base, access the Product Documentation, and download firmware and drivers. If you need additional assistance, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
Remote support
Figure 36 The Remote Support icon in the BlueScale status bar. The remote support icon is also used to activate secure remote access capabilities using Cisco WebEx technology. This remote access helps Spectra Logic Technical Support provide faster resolution of support calls. This capability is only enabled on an as-needed basis during a support call. Notes: The remote support icon is only visible when you are accessing the library through the BlueScale web interface. When Spectra Logic Technical Support needs to launch a WebEx session to access your library, they will send you a link via email.
February 2011
86
HHM Icon When the library or one of its components reaches its maintenance threshold the Hardware Health Monitor (HHM) icon appears in the status bar. You can click on the icon to view information about the notification. If desired, you can send the Hardware Health Monitoring notification and an AutoSupport Log (ASL) file to a contact person or to Spectra Logic Technical Support so they can review the logs and determine if any maintenance tasks are needed to prevent future failures (see Respond to HHM Notifications on page 103). Notes: The HHM icon only displays if an HHM threshold has been reached. After any required tasks are complete, the threshold can be reset. The HHM icon disappears until the next threshold is reached. AutoSupport Log (ASL) information is only for troubleshooting purposes. This log information is separate from the data path and contains no customer data.
HHM icon
Figure 37 The HHM icon in the BlueScale status bar. Camera Icon If one or more BlueScale Vision cameras are installed in the library and their IP addresses entered into the BlueScale user interface (see BlueScale Vision IP Address on page 296), up to three camera icons appear in the status bar. Click on the icon to launch the web-based Network Camera viewer and use it to observe the interior of the library over an Ethernet network or the internet (see Using the BlueScale Vision Camera on page 112). Note: The Camera icon only appears on the BlueScale web interface; it does not appear on the front panel touch screen interface.
Camera icon
Figure 38 The Camera icon in the BlueScale status bar.
Progress Bar
When the library is busy processing a command, a horizontal progress bar displays above the status bar. Do not use the touch screen (or access the user interface from the BlueScale web interface) until the progress bar disappears.
February 2011
87
Using the BlueScale User Interface
USING THE BLUESCALE USER INTERFACE

The librarys BlueScale user interface lets you set configuration options, view library and drive information and metrics, manage media, and monitor library operations. Note: Unless otherwise specified, references to the user interface screens apply to both the touch screen on the library operator panel and the screens presented through the BlueScale web interface. The following sections describe the library controls and options available through the user interface.
Topic Logging Into the User Interface Logging Off or Switching Users Entering Information Described beginning on... page 88 page 78 page 90
Logging Into the User Interface

Before you can manage or configure the library, you must log into the BlueScale user interface. The Login screen displays on the library operator panel after the library completes its power-on initialization. The Login screen also displays when you switch users.
Touch the keyboard icon to open the soft keyboard.
Touch the icon with the stylus to switch between letters and numbers.
Figure 39 The user interface main login screen.
February 2011
88
Use the following steps to log into the library. 1. If you are connecting to the library remotely, enter the librarys IP address in the address bar of your web browser. The Login screen displays when the connection is established. 2. Select the User text box. A cursor appears in the box. Note: When using the touch screen on the library operator panel, touch the keyboard icon (Figure 39) on the Login screen to activate the soft keyboard on the librarys touch screen. Use the stylus or your finger to select fields and to type information using the soft keyboard. Selecting the keyboard icon again closes the soft keyboard. 3. Type your user name (su is the default user name for a superuser). The options and controls provided through the user interface depend on to which user group you belong. See Configuring Library Users on page 290 for information about user groups. 4. Type your password in the Password text box. If you log in as the default superuser su, the password is blank (unless you changed it). Note: By default, passwords are not required to log into the library. If you want to password-protect access to the library, set passwords for each user as described in Configuring Library Users on page 290. 5. Click the Login button. After you log in, the library completes its initialization and displays the librarys General Status screen.
Figure 40 The BlueScale user interface General Status screen. 6. If Encryption is enabled on your library and you have set the Encryption login password, you will be prompted to enter that password as well (see Log Into the Encryption Application on page 343 for detailed information).
February 2011
89
Logging Off or Switching Users

1. If a screen other than the Login screen is displayed, select the Security toolbar to display the Security options..
Security toolbar Switch User
Figure 41 The Security toolbar. 2. Select Switch User to display the Login screen. Select Switch User to log out the currently logged in user and redisplay the Login screen. 3. If desired, log in again using a different user name and password.
Entering Information
Entering information on a user interface screen requires using one of the following methods.
BlueScale Web Interface

The BlueScale web interface lets you use your computer keyboard to enter information into the user interface and a mouse to navigate through the user interface screens (see BlueScale Web Interface on page 78). Using the web interface is the most convenient way to enter large amounts of information when you are configuring the library.
Important
When accessing the library remotely through a web browser, do not use the Enter key on your keyboard when making selections in the BlueScale user interface. Various web browsers handle the Enter key differently, causing inconsistent behavior in the BlueScale interface. Always use your mouse to make selections and click the buttons in BlueScale screens instead of using your keyboard.
Note: Functions that require physical interaction with the library (for example, importing or exporting media packs) are not available when using BlueScale web interface.
February 2011
90
Soft Keyboard
When using the touch screen on the operator panel, select the keyboard icon in the lower right corner of any screen to activate the on-screen keyboard. When the keyboard is extended, an icon in the lower right corner lets you choose between alphabetic or numeric characters. Use a stylus or your finger to select fields and enter alphanumeric information using the keyboard. Touching the keyboard icon again closes the keyboard.
External Keyboard and Mouse

You can connect a standard USA-type PS2 keyboard to the keyboard connector on the LCM (see Figure 10 and Figure 11 on page 38). You can also connect a PS2 mouse to the LCM and use it for making selections on the user interface. Using an external keyboard and mouse is the most convenient way to enter large amounts of information if you cannot use the BlueScale web interface. The user interface options available when you use an external keyboard connected to the LCM are the same as when you use the librarys touch screen operator panel.
Important
Not all characters on a PS2 keyboard are supported in the BlueScale user interface. If a character does not appear on the soft keyboard, then its use is not supported.
Notes:
If using a non-USA type keyboard, you will need to find the equivalent for some characters like the back slash or forward slash. You can also use the USB ports on the LCM to connect a keyboard or mouse.
February 2011
91
CHAPTER 5
Operating the Library
This chapter describes the following procedures for day-to-day operation of your library:
Topic Controlling the Library Power Monitoring Your Library Checking Messages Using Performance Metrics Using BlueScale Hardware Health Monitoring Viewing Drive Status Information Viewing a Fibre Channel Partitions World Wide Name Using the BlueScale Vision Camera Using a USB Drive Continuing Library Operations While Using a USB Drive Connecting a USB Drive to the LCM Saving Data From the Library to a USB Drive Using a Global Spare Tape Drive Activating the Global Spare Tape Drive Reclaiming the Global Spare Tape Drive Described beginning on... page 93 page 96 page 97 page 99 page 102 page 108 page 110 page 112 page 116 page 116 page 117 page 118 page 120 page 121 page 122
Copying Data From a USB Drive to the Library page 119
92
Controlling the Library Power
CONTROLLING THE LIBRARY POWER

Before powering on the library, make sure that one or both of the librarys power cables are plugged into AC outlets and the main AC breakers switches on the back of each drive frame are set to the on position (see Figure 6 on page 33).
Important
For redundant AC power configurations, connect each input to a separate branch circuit, which allows for failover in the event of a power failure in one of the circuits (see Power Specifications on page 506 for additional requirements).
Powering On the Library

Press and hold the front panel power button until the buttons LED illuminates. Wait while the library completes its power-on sequence, which initializes all of installed components. When initialization is complete, the BlueScale login screen displays.
Power button
Figure 42 Press and hold the front panel power button.
Powering Off the Library

Before powering off the library, use the following steps to prepare for shutdown. 1. Use your backup software to stop any backups running to the library. 2. Use your backup software to move any cartridges that are currently in tape drives back their storage location. If you cannot use your backup software, then move the cartridges as described in Moving Media Within a Partition on page 154. 3. Pause PostScan if it is running (see Pausing the PostScan Process on page 191). Any tapes currently being scanned are returned to their storage locations. 4. Power off the library using one of the methods described in the following sections.
February 2011
93
Use the Front Panel Power Button

To power off the library, press and hold the front panel power button until the buttons LED starts flashing. The library begins its power-off sequence, which allows the BlueScale firmware and components to shut down gracefully. Note: If you intend to leave the library powered down for an extended length of time, set the AC breaker switches on the back of the library to the off position.
Use the Soft Power Feature

The Soft Power feature disables the physical power button on the library front panel and enables the soft power button on the General Status screen. Using the Soft Power feature gives superusers exclusive control over powering the library off, preventing other users from powering the library off from the front panel. The Soft Power feature requires a confirmation before power to the library is turned off. Notes: The Soft Power feature is only available from librarys front panel touch screen interface; it is not available through the BlueScale web interface. The Soft Power feature must first be enabled via the configuration menu (see Enabling and Disabling Soft Power on page 298). The feature can only be enabled or disabled by a superuser. Follow these steps to power off the library using the Soft Power feature. 1. Log into the library as a superuser. 2. From the toolbar, access the General Status screen.
February 2011
94
3. Using the stylus, touch the blue power button on the picture of the library.
Soft power button
Figure 43 The Soft Power button on the General Status screen. When the cursor comes near the button, it changes to a pointing finger, as shown in Figure 43. 4. When you touch the button, the Soft Power Shutdown confirmation screen displays after a brief delay. Select Continue to send a command to the power control module (PCM) to power off the library.
Figure 44 The Soft Power Shutdown confirmation screen.
February 2011
95
Monitoring Your Library
MONITORING YOUR LIBRARY

The BlueScale user interface provides a number of tools for monitoring the health and performance of the library, its components, and its media. Icons and bar graphs on the General Status screen (Figure 33 on page 80) provide at-a-glance information about the status of major system components and resource usage, respectively. The icons in the status bar (see Status Bar on page 85) provide additional system-level status information. System messages provide important information about the library and its operation. See Checking Messages on page 97 for details. Selecting the Status icon at the bottom of each screen in the BlueScale user interface displays the system messages. The Syslog feature configures the library to send all system messages it logs to a previously configured Syslog server. Performance metrics let you monitor the performance of your library and its drives. See Using Performance Metrics on page 99 for details. Hardware Health Monitoring (HHM) tracks maintenance thresholds for key library components and alerts you when a component reaches its maintenance threshold. See Using BlueScale Hardware Health Monitoring on page 102 for details. The Drive Status screens provide information about cleaning status, firmware level, and tools for using a Global Spare drive, manually cleaning an individual drive, and removing or replacing a drive. The Drive Details for each Fibre Channel drive shows the World Wide Name (WWPN) for the drive. See Viewing Drive Status Information on page 108 and Using a Global Spare Tape Drive on page 120 for details. The Shared Library Services screen shows the WWN for each partition. See Viewing a Fibre Channel Partitions World Wide Name on page 110 for details. The BlueScale Vision camera lets you view the interior of the library. See Using the BlueScale Vision Camera on page 112 for detailed information. Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) provides an array of tools for monitoring the usage and health of the MLM-enabled media in the library. See Chapter 7 Media Lifecycle Management for detailed information. Drive Lifecycle Management (DLM) provide tools for monitoring the usage and health of the LTO tape drives in the library. It also provides tools for generating reports and testing a drive. See Chapter 8 Drive Lifecycle Management for detailed information.
February 2011
96
Checking Messages
Check the librarys system messages regularly. These messages provide important information about the library and its operation. Reviewing the messages, which provide important information about library problems, is also the first step in troubleshooting. Note: When you configure mail users, you can specify which types of system messages the library automatically emails to each mail user. See Configuring Mail Users on page 300 for detailed information.
Use the BlueScale User Interface

Use the following steps to view messages from the BlueScale user interface. 1. Log into the library. 2. Select the System Status icon on the status bar. The System Messages screen displays. See Status Bar on page 85 for the location and description of the System Status icon.
Figure 45 The System Messages screen. 3. Read the message(s), and follow any recommended steps. If you need assistance, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5). 4. When you are finished reading the messages and have completed the appropriate actions, you can select and delete individual messages or you can delete all of the messages.
February 2011
97
Use Syslog
The BlueScale Syslog feature sends all system messages logged by the library to a previously configured Syslog server. Syslog is a standard for forwarding log messages over an Internet Protocol (IP) computer network. It allows separation of the software that generates log messages from the system that stores the messages. Each system message the library sends to the Syslog server contains the original system message posted by the library and the remedy information associated with the system message. See Configuring System Settings on page 294 for information about entering the IP address of the Syslog server. Entering a valid IP address enables the Syslog feature. When enabled, the BlueScale SysLog feature automatically sends all system messages posted by the library to a single, previously configured Syslog server. The library transmits the messages to the Syslog server using the format: <AA>BlueScale_NN[PP]:(DD) MM where:
Variable AA Definition Indicates the severity the library assigned to the message. This severity corresponds to the syslog priorities as follows: This library system message severity... Informational Warning Error Fatal Error NN Corresponds to this Syslog priority... 6 (Informational) 4 (Warning) 3 (Error) 2 (Critical)
Indicates the library name, if configured. If the library name is not configured, this value is set to UnknownLibrary. Refer to Library Name on page 294 for information about setting the library name. Indicates the ID number of the process that was being performed by the librarys firmware when the system message was posted. This ID number is for internal use only. Indicates the order in which the Syslog server received the messages. The counter increments each time a message is received, beginning at zero. The counter can be used to determine whether all messages are arriving at the Syslog server. Shows the actual message posted by the library. Each system message posted by the library generates two Syslog messages; one for the message text and one for the remedy text. The two messages have the same message number, which is included at the beginning of the message.
PP
DD
MM
February 2011
98
Using Performance Metrics

The library includes the following metrics for monitoring the performance of your library and its drives. These metrics must be enabled before they can be used (see Enabling and Disabling Performance Metrics on page 297). View Drive Performance Statistics on page 99 View Power Consumption Statistics on page 101 View Storage Density Statistics on page 101
View Drive Performance Statistics

Important
Do not enable drive performance monitoring with SAIT or SDLT drives installed in the library. Performance monitoring is only supported for LTO tape drives.
The Drive Performance metric lets you monitor the performance of your drives. This innovative feature helps you optimize drive performance through load-balancing, tuning your SAN, and identifying performance bottlenecks. The Drive Performance Monitoring screen provides a graphical display of drive performance. The Drive Performance Monitor displays the following for the selected drive set: Drive performance in MB/second Data transferred in total MBs Summary information for the displayed graphs Use the following steps to view the performance data for the drives installed in the library. 1. Select General > Metrics from the toolbar menu. The screen for the last metric you viewed displays. 2. Select the drive performance you want to view from the available options: Total Library Partition n A specific drive 3. Select either Drive Write Performance or Drive Read Performance from the Metric pull-down menu. Note: If you enabled or disabled the Drive Performance Monitor option when a drive contains a cartridge, the drive is reported as empty.
February 2011
99
4. Select Go. A screen showing the selected metric displays.
Figure 46 The Drive Performance Monitor screen (Write Performance shown). 5. Alternatively, you can view the Drive Performance metrics by selecting Configuration > Drives and then selecting the Drive Performance button in the upper right of the screen.
Figure 47 The Drives screen.
February 2011
100
View Power Consumption Statistics

In addition to the Power bar graph on the General Status screen, the BlueScale EnergyAudit feature provides a configurable graphical display of the librarys power consumption. Use the following steps to view the power consumption data for the library. 1. Select General > Metrics from the toolbar menu. The screen for the last metric you viewed displays. 2. Select which power consumption metric you want to view from the Metric pull-down menu: Power Consumption (kWh) Power Consumption (kWh/Ft2) Power Consumption (kWh/Ft3) Power Consumption (kWh/TB) 3. Select Go. A screen showing the selected metric displays.
Figure 48 The Power Consumption metrics screen.
View Storage Density Statistics

The Storage Density metric lets you to monitor the amount of data your library is capable of storing based on the amount of the selected media type is currently in the library. Use the following steps to view the power consumption data for the library. 1. Select General > Metrics from the toolbar menu. The screen for the last metric you viewed displays. 2. Select Storage Density from the Metric pull-down menu.
February 2011
101
3. Select the media type for which you want the density metrics and the unit of measure for the density values. 4. Select Go. The Storage Density screen showing the selected metrics displays.
Figure 49 The Storage Density metrics screen.
Using BlueScale Hardware Health Monitoring

BlueScale Hardware Health Monitoring (HHM) tracks maintenance thresholds for key library components. When a component reaches the maintenance threshold, an HHM icon displays on the status bar.
HHM icon
Figure 50 The Status bar showing the HHM icon. To send an AutoSupport log to a contact person, see Respond to HHM Notifications on page 103. To view a report showing the current HHM data, see View Hardware Health Monitoring (HHM) Data on page 106.
February 2011
102
Respond to HHM Notifications

Use the following steps to send the Hardware Health Monitoring notification and AutoSupport Log (ASL) file to the contact person in a predefined AutoSupport profile. You can also choose to send the ASL files to Spectra Logic Technical Support so they can review the logs and determine if any maintenance tasks are needed to prevent future failures. Note: AutoSupport Log (ASL) information is only for troubleshooting purposes. This log information is separate from the data path and contains no customer data. 1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. If not already completed, configure the mail recipients who should receive AutoSupport information. Also configure one or more AutoSupport profiles. Mail recipientsSee Configuring Mail Recipients on page 267. At a minimum, configure Spectra Logic Technical Support as a mail recipient if you want the library to email AutoSupport ticket requests to Spectra Logic. AutoSupport profilesSee Configuring AutoSupport Profiles on page 268. You can configure one of the mail recipients to receive critical alarm log sets automatically sent by the library. 3. Select the HHM icon (see Figure 50). The Hardware Health Monitoring screen displays.
Figure 51 The Hardware Health Monitoring screen. 4. If you want to save the AutoSupport ticket information to a USB drive, insert the USB drive into the USB port on the LCM (see Using a USB Drive on page 116). Note: The option to save the ticket to USB is only available if you plug a USB drive in to the USB port before you select Send AutoSupport Ticket.
February 2011
103
5. Select Send AutoSupport Ticket. The main AutoSupport screen displays.
Figure 52 The main AutoSupport screen. 6. Select Send Log Set. The Select Profile to Send Log Set screen displays.
Figure 53 AutoSupport Profiles screen. 7. Click the Select button next to the profile for the main contact person for HHM issues. The Select Ticket Type screen displays.
Figure 54 The Select Ticket Type screen. The Create a New Hardware Health Monitor ticket option is automatically selected. The options for entering an existing support ticket number and a problem description are not available.
February 2011
104
8. If you do not need to make any changes to the contact persons information for this support ticket, skip to Step 9. If you need to temporarily change the contact persons information for this ticket, select Profile Data. The Profile Summary screen displays (see Figure 171 on page 277). Make any necessary changes in the Profile Summary screen. Select Use Settings to save your changes and return to the Select Ticket Type screen. 9. Select Next. The Confirm and Submit Ticket screen displays.
Figure 55 The Confirm and Submit Ticket screen. 10. Verify that all information is correct. To save the ticket information to a USB drive instead of emailing it from the library, check the box at the top of the screen (shown in Figure 55). Note: The USB option is only available if you plugged a USB drive in to the LCMs USB port in Step 4 on page 103. If all of the information is correct, proceed to Step 11. If something needs to be changed, select Previous to return to the Select Ticket Type screen and make any necessary changes.
105
11. Select Submit to send the Hardware Health Monitor ticket to the selected recipient. Select Cancel to return to the AutoSupport Profiles screen. A progress screen indicates that the ticket request (with log information) is being sent. When completed, the AutoSupport Profiles screen displays.
View Hardware Health Monitoring (HHM) Data

The advanced utility called HHM: View Data generates a report showing the current status of the HHM counters. This information includes information about the following: Library serial number and name (if configured) Information about key library components monitored by HHM, including the type of reminder generated when the component reaches its maintenance threshold Transporter moves: Drive To Drive Moves, Drive To Slot Moves, Slot To Slot Moves, Slot To Drive Moves, Tap In Moves, and Tap Out Move.
Caution
In addition to the HHM: View Data utility, two additional HHM utilities configure the HHM counters and thresholds for the monitored components. Do not change the values for any counters or thresholds unless specifically instructed to do so by Spectra Logic Technical Support.
Use the following steps to view the current HHM data. 1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. Select Maintenance > Tools > Utilities. The Utilities screen displays. 3. If you want to save the HHM report to a USB drive, insert the USB drive into the LCMs USB port; otherwise, skip to the next step. Note: The option to save the HHM report to USB is only displayed if you plug a USB drive in to the LCMs USB port before you select Show Advanced (see Using a USB Drive on page 116). 4. Select Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen displays. 5. Select Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show a list of the advanced utilities.
February 2011
106
6. Scroll through the list of advanced utilities and select HHM: View Data. The screen refreshes to show the details for the utility.
Figure 56 The HHM: View Data utility. 7. If you want to save the results from the utility, use the check boxes at the top of the screen to select the location; otherwise skip to Step 8.
Selecting this option... Mail results to Saves the report... As an attachment to an email sent to the specified mail recipient. Use the dropdown list to select the recipient for the report file. To send the email with the attached library configuration file to someone who is not already listed as a library user, you must first configure that person as an email recipient (see Configuring Mail Recipients on page 267). Note: Do not use the default autosupport@spectralogic.com email recipient unless Spectra Logic Technical Support specifically instructs you to do so. Spectra Logic does not save emailed HHM report files unless they are specifically requested for troubleshooting. To the librarys compact flash card in the LCM. Note: Select this option only if specifically instructed to do so by Spectra Logic Technical Support. To a USB drive connected to the USB port on the LCM. Note: This option is only available if you inserted a USB drive in Step 3 on page 106.
Save results to Compact Flash file Save to USB
February 2011
107
8. Select Run Utility. After a brief delay, the Utility Results screen displays the current HHM data. Scroll as necessary to view all of the data.
Figure 57 The HHM: View Data Utility Results screen. 9. If you chose to save the file to a USB drive, a message displays showing file name for the trace file (tracen.txt, where n increments each time the file is saved to the same location). 10. Select Previous to return to the list of advanced utilities.
Viewing Drive Status Information

The drives status icon on the General Status screen indicates the overall status of the librarys drives. If the status icon indicates that a drive is experiencing a problem, view the Drive Details screen detailed information about as specific drive. The Drive Details screen includes the drive firmware version and manufactures serial number, as well as more detailed status information. From the Drive Details screen you can access the Drive Lifecycle Management (DLM) report for the drive. See Chapter 8 Drive Lifecycle Management for detailed information about DLM. 1. Select Configuration > Drives (or DLM). The Drives screen displays (see Figure 47 on page 100.
February 2011
108
2. Select Detail next to the drive you want to check. The Drive Details screen displays.
Figure 58 The Drive Details screen. For Fibre Channel drives, the Drive Details screen also shows the drives World Wide Name (WWN). Note: The WWN is actually the World Wide Node Name (WWNN) for the drive. Beginning with BlueScale 10.4, the format for the drive WWN is: 2n xy 00 90 a5 00 zz zz, where n, x, y, and zz zz are the variables defined in the following table.
Variable n Equals... The port number, which is determined as follows: Port A = the frame number Port B = the frame number + 1 The DBA number (1 6), as numbered from the bottom of the frame to top The drive number in the DBA (1 4) The frame ID, where each z is a hexadecimal number from 0 F.
x y zz zz
For example, the WWNN for the drive in Figure 58 indicates that the drive is located in DBA 1, and connected to the network using Port A. 3. From the Drive Details screen select DLM to access the Drive Lifecycle Management (DLM) report for the drive (see Viewing a Detailed Heath Report on page 213).
February 2011
109
4. Use the information on the Drive Details screen and the DLM report to troubleshoot drive problems. If the drive is in an error state, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5). Troubleshooting All Drive Types on page 396 Troubleshooting LTO Tape Drives on page 398 Troubleshooting SDLT Tape Drives on page 415 Troubleshooting SAIT Tape Drives on page 417 Troubleshooting RXT Drives on page 419
Viewing a Fibre Channel Partitions World Wide Name

When monitoring connections to multiple libraries through a Fibre Channel switch, knowing the World Wide Name (WWN) for a data partition is useful for identifying a particular library. Note: From the Fibre Channel switch, each data partition defined in the library appears as an independent library connected to the Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric. To view the WWN for each data partition configured in the library, select Configuration > Partitions. The Fibre Channel WWN for each data partition is shown on the Shared Library Services screen.
Figure 59 The WWN assigned to the partition.
February 2011
110
The format for the partition WWN is: 2xyf0090a500zzzz, where x, y, and zzzz are the variables defined in the following table.
Variable x Equals... 1 when the library is connected through Port A on the F-QIP 2 when the library is connected through Port B on the F-QIP Note: The Shared Library Services screen only shows the WWN for Port A of the F-QIP, regardless of whether Port B is in use or not. The DBA number (1 6), as numbered from the bottom of the frame to top The frame ID, where each z is a hexadecimal number from 0 F.
y zzzz
For example, in Figure 59 the WWN for Partition 1 indicates that the exporting F-QIP is located in DBA 1 of the frame with an ID of 0D60 and that it is connected to the Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric using Port A. Notes: The partition WWN is actually the World Wide Port Name (WWPN) for the active port on the F-QIP or RIM that provides the robotic control path for the transporter (the exporting controller). If multiple partitions use the same F-QIP or RIM port to provide the robotics control path, all of the partitions have the same World Wide Name (WWN). If Port A and Port B are used to provide the robotics control path for separate partitions, the WWNs for the two partitions are identical except for the second digit from the left (x). Only the WWN for Port A is shown on the Shared Library Services screen. Read Knowledge Base article 373 on the Technical Support portal for more information about the WWNs for F-QIPs. See Accessing the Technical Support Portal on page 421 for information about the Technical Support portal.
February 2011
111
Using the BlueScale Vision Camera

The BlueScale Vision camera and web-based BlueScale Vision viewer lets you see the interior of the library to observe import / export operations, tape mounts, cartridge moves, and robotic operations in real time. Use the following steps to launch BlueScale Vision viewer application. 1. Connect an Ethernet cable from cameras Ethernet port on the back of the frame to an Ethernet network.
Drive Frame
BlueScale Vision camera connector
Media Expansion Frame
Figure 60 Location of the camera Ethernet port.
February 2011
112
2. Connect to the BlueScale Vision viewer application. Using the Camera Icon Notes: Using the camera icon to connect to the BlueScale Vision viewer is not required. You can also connect to the viewer directly by entering the IP address for the desired camera in your web browsers Address bar. The camera icon used to launch the BlueScale Vision viewer is not present until you enter the IP address for the camera in the System Configuration screen (see BlueScale Vision IP Address on page 296). If the library has multiple cameras installed, you can enable a separate icon for up to three of the cameras. a. Using a remote connection, log into the librarys BlueScale web interface using a standard web browser (see Logging Into the User Interface on page 88). b. Select the Camera icon corresponding to the IP address of the camera you want to use. The left-most icon corresponds to the first camera IP address you entered in the System Setup screen.
Camera icon
Figure 61 The Status bar showing the Camera icon. Using a Web Browser a. Determine the IP address of the camera you want to use (see Setting the Camera IP Address on page 312). b. Enter the cameras IP address in your browsers Address field.
February 2011
113
3. The start page for the BlueScale Vision viewer opens in a new web page.
Figure 62 The BlueScale Vision viewer start page. 4. Select View Video to see the cameras view of the librarys interior.
Figure 63 The interior of the library as viewed by the BlueScale Vision camera.
February 2011
114
Buttons on the screen let you control the motion of the camera lens.
Click this button... To... Move the camera lens through the Preset positions in the sequence defined by the Camera Administrator. Pan the camera lens from left to right automatically. Move the camera lens to the Motion Detection Preset position. Point the camera lens to the position corresponding to the arrow on the button. There may a short delay after clicking the desired icon. Wait a couple of seconds instead of clicking again.
5. Read the BlueScale Vision Camera Users Guide, included on the Product Documentation and Software CD that came with your library, for detailed information about configuring and using the BlueScale Vision camera. This guide also describes installing and using the cameras Viewing/ Recording Utility. To view the camera documentation: a. Insert the librarys Product Documentation and Software CD in the CD/DVD drive of a Windows-based computer. Adobe Reader launches automatically and opens the welcome.pdf file. b. Select the BlueScale Vision Camera link on the opening page to display links to the camera documentation and descriptions of the camera software included on the CD.
February 2011
115
Using a USB Drive
USING A USB DRIVE

You can plug a USB drive into the USB port on the librarys operator panel or into the LCM to copy the following types of information to and from the library.
Use Configuration information AutoSupport tickets Traces Description Saving and restoring the library configuration and MLM database. Saving AutoSupport tickets and log files Saving results of traces run on the library and its components. Note: When capturing motion traces, Spectra Logic Technical Support may also have you connect a USB drive to the RCM. Transferring firmware to the library for updating the library and its components. Exporting a BlueScale encryption key for safekeeping. Importing a previously exported BlueScale encryption key
Firmware Encryption export Encryption import
Continuing Library Operations While Using a USB Drive

When using a USB drive, keep the following requirements in mind:
It is... Safe to continue library operations, such as data backup, while... exporting or importing a BlueScale encryption key using a USB drive. saving library configurations and other information to a USB drive. capturing traces (trace results are the data most often saved to a USB drive). Not Safe restoring a saved library configuration and other information from a USB drive. the library is performing a firmware update using a firmware package previously copied to the library. Do not run backups while the library is performing a firmware update. Updated components automatically reset (including a library reset) when updates are complete, which could interrupt a backup operation.
Caution
February 2011
116
Using a USB Drive
Connecting a USB Drive to the LCM

Important
Unless specifically instructed to do so, do not connect a USB drive to the USB port on the RCM.
Notes:
When connecting the USB drive to the LCM, make sure that you do not inadvertently connect it to RCM. See Figure 12 on page 40 to identify the LCM. Not all USB drives are compatible with the library. If you are unable to access a USB drive from the library, remove it and use a different one. If the LCM stops responding after you insert an incompatible USB drive, reboot the LCM as described in Resetting the LCM or RCM on page 371. Plug the USB drive into the LCM before beginning a procedure that reads or writes data to allow time for device recognition. For many utilities, the option to read or write data from a USB drive is not available if one has not been plugged into the LCM before you select the utility. Do not leave a USB drive plugged into the LCM indefinitely, unless directed to do so by Spectra Logic Technical Support.
Use the following steps to connect a USB drive to the LCM. 1. Locate the LCM (see Figure 4 on page 30). 2. Plug the USB drive into the USB port on the LCM.
USB port
Figure 64 Location of the USB port on the Spectra PC.
USB ports (4)
Figure 65 Location of the USB ports on the Spectra LS.
February 2011
117
Using a USB Drive
Saving Data From the Library to a USB Drive

You can save (upload) the following types of data from the library to a USB drive:
Saving this data to USB... Library configurations Creates a file containing... The library configuration information. You can use the backup to restore the library to a saved configuration, if necessary. The saved configuration file is one of the following: A library configuration backup file saved what a partition was created or modified (see Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings on page 256). An Auto Save Library Configuration, which contains the MLM database (see Using the Auto Save Configuration Feature on page 308). A manually generated backup (see Backing Up the Library Configuration on page 307). The reports generated by MLM. You can use these reports to maintain an external record of the health of the media in your library. See Generating Reports on page 192 for information about the types of reports you can generate. A backup of the MLM and DLM databases. You can use the backup to restore the databases instead of rebuilding them in the event of a disaster. See Best Practices on page 200 for detailed information. An exported encryption key. The exported key must be used to decrypt data that was previously encrypted using the same key. See Exporting and Protecting Keys on page 351 for detailed information about exporting BlueScale encryption keys for safekeeping. System logs and AutoSupport logs (ASLs) for use when troubleshooting library, drive, or media problems. See Using AutoSupport on page 275 for additional information. Trace results and diagnostic information to be used to troubleshoot library problems. See Capturing Traces on page 368 for additional information. Note: The USB port on the RCM is used when capturing motion traces.
MLM reports
MLM database
BlueScale encryption keys
System and AutoSupport logs Trace results
February 2011
118
Using a USB Drive
Copying Data From a USB Drive to the Library

You can copy (download) the following types of data from a USB drive to the library:
Copying this data from USB... Firmware package updates Saves this data to the library... A previously downloaded firmware package update. See Updating Library Firmware on page 428 for detailed information. CAUTION! Wait until all currently running backup processes are complete before executing a firmware update. If necessary, use your backup software to stop the backup processes. A saved library configuration file to be used for restoring the library to a previous configuration. The saved configuration file is one of the following: An Auto Save Library Configuration, which contains the MLM database (see Restoring From an Auto Save Configuration File on page 378). A library configuration backup generated as part of creating or modifying a partition or by using the Backup Library Configuration utility (see Restoring the Library Configuration Using a Saved Configuration on page 383). A previously saved backup of the MLM database to be used for restoring the MLM database instead of rebuilding it by loading each cartridge into a drive (see Restoring the MLM and DLM Databases on page 204). Note: The MLM database also includes the Drive Lifecycle Management data. An encryption key that was deleted from the library so that you can decrypt data stored on cartridges that were encrypted using that key (see Restoring Encrypted Data on page 357).
Saved library configuration
MLM database
Exported BlueScale encryption key
February 2011
119
Using a Global Spare Tape Drive
USING A GLOBAL SPARE TAPE DRIVE

The Global Spare option lets you replace a failed drive remotely using a spare drive in the library. You simply configure an installed drive to designate it as a replacement (spare) so it is available, if needed. Using a Global Spare allows you to continue your backup operations and replace the failed drive the next time you are physically present at the library. Requirements Before you can use the Global Spare option, the following requirements must be met. The Global Spare tape drive must already be configured in the partition where the failed drive is located (see Configuring Global Spare Tape Drives on page 228).
Important
The tape drives that are configured as Global Spares must be connected to the network. If they are not connected to the network, they will not be accessible to the application software. You may need to reconfigure your switch to access the spare tape drive.
The library partition with the failed drive must be idle with respect to the failed drive before the Global Spare drive is used. PostScan Requirements If a partition is configured to use either FullScan or QuickScan using Global Spares, keep the following in mind: If the only available Global Spare drive is in use by the MLM PostScan process, you must pause PostScan to make the spare drive available. See Using PostScan on page 184 for detailed information about the PostScan feature. When the PostScan process starts it owns the Global Spare drive it is using until it has processed all of the cartridges in its queue. This means that the shared Global Spare drive being used for PostScan is not available for use as a spare unless you pause the PostScan operation as described in Pausing the PostScan Process on page 189). Backup Application Guidelines Follow these backup application guidelines: Backup Exec v12.5 software running on a Windows serverAfter sparing or unsparing a tape drive, you must restart the Backup Exec Device and Media Service for the software to function properly with the spared tape drive. General guidelinesIn a few rare cases, your backup may fail if a cartridge is loaded into any tape drive in the partition at the same time that the library is in the process of assigning a Global Spare tape drive for use (as described in this section). Most applications will initiate the backup again, but some will fail the backup operation. If your backup operation fails, wait for the library to complete the Global Spare assignment and re-start the backup.
120
Activating the Global Spare Tape Drive

Follow these steps to use a Global Spare tape drive as a temporary replacement for a failed tape drive. 1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions to display the Shared Library Services screen.
Figure 66 The Shared Library Services screen with a Global Spare. 3. Select Global Spare > Use Spare to display the Global Spare Usage screen and substitute the partitions spared drive for the failed drive.
Figure 67 The Global Spare Usage screen (Use Spare). Notes: When you select the drive to replace, the BlueScale firmware disables the failed drive and configures a Global Spare drive to report the same WWN and Serial Number as the failed drive. The Global Spare drive logically replaces the failed drive, which can then be removed and replaced the next time you are physically at the library. If you have more than one available Global Spare tape drive, the library automatically selects a drive in no particular order.
121
4. Wait for the library to complete the sparing operation. 5. If desired, select Configuration > Drives to view the Drives screen. The drive icons on the screen change to indicate the failed drive and the Global spare that replaced it.
Failed drive
Available Global Spare drive Global Spare replacing failed drive
Figure 68 The Drives screen with a failed drive replaced by a Global Spare. 6. If necessary, use your backup application to bring the Global Spare tape drive that replaced the failed drive online. Refer to your backup application documentation for instructions.
Important
Replace the failed tape drive as soon as possible and reconfigure the spare tape drive to return it to a Global Spare configuration.
Reclaiming the Global Spare Tape Drive

Use the following steps to begin using the replacement drive and return the Global Spare to the pool of available spare drives. 1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. Replace the failed tape drive with the new tape drive that you received from Spectra Logic (see Adding or Replacing a Drive on page 463). 3. Stop all backup application activity to the Global Spare tape drive that replaced the failed drive. Refer to your backup application documentation for instructions. 4. Ensure that the Global Spare tape drive does not contain a cartridge. If necessary, use your backup software to eject the cartridge from the tape drive and return it to its slot. Refer to your backup application documentation for instructions.
February 2011
122
5. Take the Global Spare tape drive that replaced the failed drive offline. Refer to your backup application documentation for instructions. 6. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions to display the Shared Library Services screen. 7. Select Global Spare > Undo Spare to display the Global Spare Usage screen and make the spared drive available for use as a spare for another drive.
Figure 69 The Global Spare Usage screen (Undo Spare). The BlueScale firmware disables the spare and reconfigures the replacement tape drive back into the partition. The Global Spare is then available to be used again, as needed. 8. Use your backup application to bring the newly installed tape drive online. Refer to your backup application documentation for instructions.
February 2011
123
CHAPTER 6
Importing, Exporting, and Moving Media
This chapter describes the following procedures for importing, exporting, and moving the media used in your T950 library.
Topic Understanding the Media Inventory Viewing the Partition Inventory Preparing Media for Use Preparing Tape Media Preparing RXT Media Importing Media and Cleaning Cartridges Overview of Import and Export Operations Importing Media into the Entry/Exit Pool or a Cleaning Partition Importing Media into a New Partition Exporting or Exchanging Media Exporting or Exchanging Media in a Data Partition Exporting or Exchanging Cartridges in a Cleaning Partition Using Advanced Import/Export Moving Media Within a Partition Locating the Desired Media Move the Media Updating the Media Inventory Described beginning on... page 125 page 125 page 128 page 128 page 131 page 132 page 132 page 133 page 140 page 145 page 145 page 149 page 151 page 154 page 154 page 156 page 159
124
Understanding the Media Inventory
UNDERSTANDING THE MEDIA INVENTORY

The inventory is a record of all the media stored in the library and its current location (for example, in a specific slot in a TeraPack magazine, in a drive, or in the TAP). As media is imported into the library, the bar-code reader on the transporter reads the bar-code labels on the individual cartridges, the magazines, and RXT media packs (if used). The library uses this bar-code information to maintain its physical inventory, which is stored on the LCM memory card. The Inventory screen, available from the General toolbar, lets you view the librarys physical inventory information. You can determine whether a specific piece of media is located in a data partitions storage pool, its entry/ exit pool, a drive, or a TAP. You can also identify cleaning cartridges in any cleaning partitions and determine whether they are expended. See Chapter 2 Architecture Overview, beginning on page 49 for information about partitions and pools. In addition to viewing the library cartridge inventory, the Inventory screen also lets you find, select, and move media from one location to another within a partition. Note: Media can refer to either tape cartridges or RXT media packs.
VIEWING THE PARTITION INVENTORY

The Inventory screen, available from the General toolbar, lets you view the librarys physical inventory information. You can determine whether a specific piece of media is located in the storage pool, the entry/exit pool, a drive, or the TAP. Note: See Moving Media Within a Partition on page 154 for information about using the Inventory screen to find, select, and move media from one location to another within a partition.
February 2011
125
Viewing the Partition Inventory
Use the following steps to view a partitions inventory. 1. From the toolbar menu, select General > Inventory. The Inventory screen displays, showing the full inventory of the partition that was last viewed. Note: The Inventory screen only displays information for the currently selected partition.
Current Partition
Figure 70 The Inventory screen. 2. If you want to view the inventory information for a partition other than the one currently displayed, select the desired partition from the Partition drop-down list. 3. Select Go to display inventory information for the selected partition.
February 2011
126
Viewing the Partition Inventory
4. From the Source drop-down list, select the type of location for which you want to view the inventory, then select Go. The Source pane refreshes to display a list of the media for the requested location type. The list shows the slot number (if the location contains a magazine) and the bar-code label information for the media in that location. See Moving Media Within a Partition on page 154 for information about the Source and Destination options. Note: If an asterisk (*) appears next to the slot number in the source list for a cleaning partition, the cleaning cartridge is expired.
Available sources (data partition)
Figure 71 Select the Source of the media inventory to display. View Source SlotType the number of the slot you want to view, then select Go. The Source inventory list refreshes to show the requested slot selected at the top of the Source list. Find by BarcodeType the barcode information for the cartridge you want to locate, then select Find. The Source inventory list refreshes to show the requested media selected at the top of the Source list Notes: Make sure that you type the bar-code label information correctly to avoid selecting the wrong cartridge. Only the slots beginning with the first one displayed in the source list are searched. To ensure that all of the slots are searched, scroll to the top of the source list before selecting Find.
February 2011
127
Preparing Media for Use
PREPARING MEDIA FOR USE

Before loading media into the library, make sure that it is properly labeled and that the write-protect switch is properly set. For normal backup operations, the write protect switch is set to the write-enabled or unlocked position. The write-protect switch is typically set to the write-protect or locked position when the media is removed from the library for storage and during restore operations.
Important
Before loading media into the library, allow it to stabilize to the ambient environment for 24 hours.
Preparing Tape Media

Cartridges (tape media) are stored in TeraPack magazines while they are inside the library. For best performance, use Spectra Logic Certified Media, which guarantees media compatibility and the media itself over the medias lifetime. To learn more about the tape media supported by the library, see Tape Drive and Media Specifications on page 512. When preparing tape media for use (both data cartridge and cleaning cartridges), keep the following in mind: To ensure that the library can properly maintain its media inventory, make sure that all cartridges have unique bar-code labels. For your convenience, MLM-enabled media, like all Spectra Logic Certified Media, is available pre-labeled with sequential bar-code labels. Optional custom bar-code sequences can be ordered, if desired. Each magazine holds up to 10 LTO or 9 SDLT cartridges. Maintenance TeraPack magazines pre-loaded with Spectra Logic Certified cleaning cartridges are also available. For LTO data and cleaning cartridges, Spectra Logic recommends that you use only MLM-enabled Spectra Logic Certified Media to take advantage of the librarys Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) features. See Chapter 7 Media Lifecycle Management for detailed information about using MLM to monitor the health of data and cleaning cartridges. You can read data from unencrypted LTO-2, LTO-3, or LTO-4 cartridges using an encryption-enabled LTO-4 drive. You cannot write data to LTO-2 or LTO-3 cartridges using an encryption-enabled LTO-4 drive. Similarly, you can read data from unencrypted LTO-3, LTO-4, or LTO-5 cartridges using an encryption-enabled LTO-5 drive. You cannot write data to LTO-3 cartridges using an encryption-enabled LTO-5 drive.
February 2011
128
If you plan to use a cleaning partition and the Auto Drive Clean feature, the cleaning cartridges must be identified with CLN at the beginning of the bar-code sequence on their labels. This requirement applies to both standard and custom bar-code labels. The cleaning cartridges must be stored in Spectra Maintenance TeraPack magazines, which are identified by Spectra-unique labels. Note: The Auto Drive Clean feature is only supported for LTO drives. The library automatically prevents importing cleaning cartridges and magazines that are not properly identified into a cleaning partition by reopening the TAP door without moving the magazine into the cleaning partition.
Important
The cleaning cartridges in the cleaning partition are inaccessible to the application software running on the host. Make sure you disable any automated drive cleaning done by the software to prevent repeated requests to import a cleaning cartridge.
If your backup software supports automated drive cleaning and you plan to use this method to clean the drives instead of the librarys Auto Drive Clean feature, store a TeraPack magazine containing one or more cleaning cartridges in the data partitions storage pool. The backup software can then access the cleaning cartridges when needed. Before importing cartridges into the library, prepare and load the individual cartridges into a TeraPack magazine as follows: 1. If your cartridges are unlabeled, prepare and affix a bar-code label to each cartridge. Position each label in the indented area on the cartridge, as illustrated in Figure 72. See Bar-Code Label Specifications for HalfInch Media on page 519 for detailed information about bar-code labels. Note: Depending on the type of cartridge, the position of the label area may differ from that shown in Figure 72.
Bar-code label Write-protect switch
Figure 72 Attach bar-code labels to cartridges and check writeprotect switch setting (LTO cartridge shown).
February 2011
129
2. Depending on whether you plan to write data to a cartridge or restore data from a cartridge, make sure the write-protect switch on the cartridge is set for the desired operation. Note: Cleaning cartridges do not have a write-protect switch.
If the switch... does not cover the opening does cover the opening the cartridge is... write-enabled. Data can be written to or read from the tape. write-protected. Data can be read from the tape. Data cannot be written to or erased from the tape.
3. Insert the prepared cartridges into the magazine. Make sure that the cartridges are oriented with the hub side toward the front of the magazine.
Important
Do not put data cartridges in a Maintenance TeraPack magazine. The Maintenance TeraPack magazine, with properly labeled cleaning cartridges, can only be used in a cleaning partition.
Cartridge bar-code label
Cartridge hub Front of TeraPack magazine (note textured surface on each side)
Figure 73 Insert prepared cartridges into the TeraPack magazine (LTO cartridges shown).
February 2011
130
Preparing RXT Media

Important
RXT drives and RXT media packs are no longer available for purchase. The library continues to support partitions configured to use existing RXT technology.
Depending on whether you plan to write data to the RXT media or restore data from a the RXT media, set the write-protect switch for the desired operation before you import the RXT media pack into library.
Figure 74 Setting the RXT media pack write-protect switch. To set the switch, use a small flat-head screwdriver to move the switch to either the unlocked or locked position, as desired.
Icon Meaning Unlocked Locked Use Position the switch next to the Unlocked icon. Data can be written to the pack. Position the switch next to the Locked icon. Data cannot be written to the pack (that is, the pack is write-protected).
February 2011
131
Importing Media and Cleaning Cartridges
IMPORTING MEDIA AND CLEANING CARTRIDGES

This section provides instructions for the following import/export procedures:
Topic Overview of Import and Export Operations Importing Media into the Entry/Exit Pool or a Cleaning Partition Import Media into the Entry/Exit Pool Import Cleaning Cartridges into the Cleaning Partition Importing Media into a New Partition Import Media into the Data Partition Storage Pool Prepare the Entry/Exit Pool (for Tape Media Only) Described beginning on... this page page 133 page 134 page 137 page 140 page 141 page 143
Overview of Import and Export Operations

Moving media into the library (importing) and out of the library (exporting) are the primary interactions you will have with the physical library. Import and export operations must always be performed from the local user interface, either using the library touch screen or using a monitor, keyboard, and mouse connected directly to the LCM (see Figure 10 and Figure 11 on page 38). Media includes both the TeraPack magazines and the individual cartridges in them. It may also include RXT media packs and cleaning cartridges that are periodically used during tape drive maintenance. Cartridges are always imported and exported using a TeraPack magazine, whether you are moving an individual cartridge or a group of cartridges. When importing or exporting media, keep the following information in mind: You can only import TeraPack magazines or RXT media packs. When you want to import a single cartridge, you must first put the cartridge in a magazine, then import the magazine. When you want to import a single cartridge, you must first put the cartridge in a magazine, then import the magazine. When you want to export a single cartridge, you must export the magazine containing the cartridge, remove the desired cartridge, and then reimport the magazine.
February 2011
132
You cannot import media into a partition or export media from a partition if the library is actively running a PreScan in that partition. These operations are also restricted if a PostScan operation that uses Global Spare drives is running in the partition. You must pause or stop the operation before you can continue. Select Stop Discovery on the Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen to stop the PreScan operation (see Stopping the Discovery Process on page 183). Select Pause PostScan on the Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen to pause the PostScan operation for one hour (see Pausing the PostScan Process on page 191). Using Auto Discovery to add newly imported LTO media into the MLM database cannot begin while the library is actively loading media into drives. If you import media during this time, the library posts a failure message stating that no drives are available. Either wait until the library is idle before importing media or start the discovery process for imported media manually when the library is idle. See Starting or Stopping Media Auto Discovery on page 181 for instructions. The library automatically updates its physical inventory whenever media is imported into a partition. However, the inventory maintained by the backup software is not automatically updated when the librarys physical inventory changes. Refer to your software documentation for information about updating the inventory maintained by the software.
Importing Media into the Entry/Exit Pool or a Cleaning Partition

During normal operations, media is typically imported to the entry/exit pool and then moved to the storage pool using your backup software. This process ensures that the media inventory maintained by the backup software is accurate. When using the Auto Drive Clean option, Maintenance TeraPack magazines containing one or more cleaning cartridges are imported directly into the cleaning partition (see Import Cleaning Cartridges into the Cleaning Partition on page 137).
February 2011
133
Before You Begin...

When importing media into the library, keep the following in mind: A partition must already be created before you can import media into it. See Chapter 9 Using Partitions for detailed information about creating data and cleaning partitions. If you are importing media into a newly created partition, it is easier to import media directly into the partitions storage pool, as described in Importing Media into a New Partition on page 140. If your backup application requires all media import operations to be performed using the entry/exit pool, use the steps in this section instead. Make sure that you import only the type of media for which the partition is configured. Label each tape cartridge, TeraPack magazine, and RXT media pack with a unique bar code. The bar-code labels on Spectra Logic certified media contain information about the media type. If you try to import the wrong media type into a partition, the library rejects the media pack by reopening the TAP door without moving the media pack to the specified location.
Import Media into the Entry/Exit Pool

When you import media into a partitions entry/exit pool, the storage pool must contain empty locations to accommodate the imported media. The General Status screen (Figure 40 on page 89) shows the number of empty slots available in the storage pool for the selected partition. If you are importing tape media, the empty locations are empty slots in magazines already in the storage pool. An empty slot is required for each cartridge you plan to import. If you are importing RXT media packs, the empty locations are chambers in the storage pool. Each slot corresponds to one chamber. If there are no empty locations available in the storage pool, first do one of the following: If the partition has empty chambers in the storage pool, import empty TeraPack magazines into the storage pool (see Import Media into the Data Partition Storage Pool on page 141). Use your backup software to eject media from the storage pool to the entry/exit pool, then export the media from the library (see Export Media from the Entry/Exit or Storage Pool on page 145). Exchange a full magazine in the storage pool for one containing empty slots (see Exchange Media in the Entry/Exit or Storage Pool on page 148).
February 2011
134
When the storage pool contains sufficient locations for the media you plan to import, use the following steps to import the media packs into the entry/ exit pool for a selected partition. 1. Before beginning, have on hand the media that you want to import into the partition. If necessary, prepare the media as described in Preparing Media for Use on page 128. 2. Log into the library. Note: All users can import media into or export media from the entry/ exit pool. 3. From the toolbar menu, select General > Import/Export. The Import/ Export TeraPack Cases screen displays. Notes: The General > Import/Export option is only available when accessing the user interface from the librarys operator panel. It is not available when accessing the librarys user interface through a remote connection to the BlueScale web interface. The options to import, export or, exchange media in the storage pool are only available if you are logged in with administrator or superuser privileges.
Figure 75 Importing media using the Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen. 4. From the Partition drop-down list, select the partition into which you want to import the media, then select Go. The Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen refreshes to show the current status of the chambers assigned to the selected partition. 5. Select Import next to the Empty Chambers in the Entry/Exit section of the screen. The TAP opens and a Feedback Required screen displays instructing you to place a TeraPack in the TAP.
135
6. Insert a media pack into the open TAP, making sure that it is oriented correctly, as shown in Figure 76. The slots in bottom of the media pack slide easily onto the tabs on the front of the lowered TAP door. If the media pack does not slide into place easily, remove and reinsert it.
Handle Texture
The textured surface on each side of a TeraPack magazine faces outward, away from the library.
The handle on the front of the RXT media pack faces outward, away from the library.
Figure 76 Correct insertion of a TeraPack magazine (left) and RXT media pack (right). 7. Choose one of these options: ContinueChoose this option if you plan to import another magazine after the one currently in the TAP. The TAP door closes automatically and the TeraPorter retrieves the magazine from the TAP and moves it to a chamber in the entry/exit pool. If there are still empty chambers available, the second TAP door opens, ready for the next import. The TAP doors alternate as you continue to import media. The import process continues automatically as long as there are empty chambers available in the entry/exit pool. Simply continue to insert magazines into the TAP and select Continue for each one. When there are no empty chambers remaining, the process stops automatically and the Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen displays. Stop ImportingChoose this option if the magazine you placed in the TAP is the last one you will be importing. 8. Repeat Steps 6 and 7 to import the remaining magazines. The import process continues until you choose the Stop Importing option or there are no empty chambers left in the entry/exit pool (or storage pool).
February 2011
136
9. When you finish importing media packs into the entry/exit pool, use your backup software to move the media to empty locations in the partitions storage pool and update the inventory maintained by the software. Note: If you are using tape media, leave at least one empty Terapack magazine in the entry/exit port pool for future export operations. If you are using RXT media, leave at least one empty chamber in the entry/exit pool. 10. Use the following steps if you need to import more media than the entry/exit pool can accommodate. a. If necessary, exchange the empty magazines in the entry/exit pool for full ones to import the next set of media packs into the entry/exit pool (see Exchange Media in the Entry/Exit or Storage Pool on page 148). b. Repeat Step 5 through Step 9 until you have imported all of the media into the storage pool. If you are using tape cartridges, leave the last set of empty Terapack magazines in the entry/exit port pool.
Import Cleaning Cartridges into the Cleaning Partition

The cleaning partition is a special-purpose partition that is only used with LTO drives and the Auto Drive Clean option. Cleaning cartridges stored in the cleaning partition are not accessible to the application software running on the host. See Configuring a Cleaning Partition on page 253 for information about creating and using a cleaning partition. When importing cleaning cartridges into a cleaning partition, keep the following in mind: The cleaning cartridges in a cleaning partition can only be used for drives in a data partition that is configured to use that cleaning partition. Associating a cleaning partition with the drives in a data partition enables the Auto Drive Clean feature for that partition. Cleaning cartridges used in a cleaning partition must be stored in Spectra Maintenance TeraPack magazines, which are identified by Spectra-unique labels. The library automatically prevents importing cleaning cartridges and magazines that are not properly identified into a cleaning partition. Note: Maintenance TeraPack magazines filled with appropriately labeled cleaning cartridges are available from Spectra Logic. Make sure the Maintenance TeraPack magazine does not contain any data cartridges. The library rejects any Maintenance TeraPack magazine containing data cartridges by reopening the TAP door without moving the magazine into the cleaning partition.
February 2011
137
Make sure the cleaning cartridges are identified with CLN at the beginning of the bar-code sequence on their labels. This requirement applies to both standard and custom bar-code labels. The cleaning cartridges must be stored in Spectra Maintenance TeraPack magazines, which are identified by Spectra-unique labels. Make sure that you import only cleaning cartridges that are compatible with the tape drives in the data partition associated with the cleaning partition. If you try to import the wrong cleaning cartridge type into a cleaning partition, the library rejects the magazine by reopening the TAP door without moving the magazine to the cleaning partition. Use the following steps to import one or more Maintenance TeraPack magazines containing properly labeled cleaning cartridges into the cleaning partition. 1. Before beginning, have on hand the cleaning cartridges and properly labeled magazines that you want to import into the cleaning partition. If necessary, prepare the media as described in Preparing Media for Use on page 128. 2. Log in as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. 3. From the toolbar menu, select General > Import/Export. The Import/ Export TeraPack Cases screen displays. Note: The General > Import/Export option is only available when accessing the user interface from the library operator panel. It is not available when accessing the library using the BlueScale web interface.
February 2011
138
4. From the Partition drop-down list, select the cleaning partition into which you want to import the cleaning cartridges, then select Go. The Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen refreshes to show the current status of the chambers assigned to the selected cleaning partition. Note: The Import, Export/Exchange, and Export/Exchange Expired buttons on the Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen display only if those actions can be performed given the current inventory for the partition. For example, if the cleaning partition does not contain any known-expired cleaning cartridges, the Export/Exchange Expired button is not displayed.
Figure 77 Importing cleaning cartridges using the Import/ Export TeraPack Cases screen. 5. Select Import. The TAP opens and a Feedback Required screen displays instructing you to place a TeraPack in the TAP. 6. Insert a Maintenance TeraPack magazine into the open TAP, making sure that it is oriented correctly (Figure 76 on page 136). The slots on the bottom of the media pack slide easily onto the guides on the lowered TAP door. If the magazine does not slide into place easily, remove and reinsert it.
February 2011
139
7. Choose one of these options: ContinueChoose this option if you plan to import another magazine after the one currently in the TAP. The TAP door closes automatically and the transporter retrieves the magazine from the TAP and moves it to a chamber in the cleaning partition. If there are still empty chambers available, the second TAP door opens, ready for the next import. The TAP doors alternate as you continue to import media. The import process continues automatically as long as there are empty chambers available in the cleaning partition. Simply continue to insert magazines into the TAP and select Continue for each one. When there are no empty chambers remaining, the process stops automatically and the Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen displays. Stop ImportingChoose this option if the magazine you placed in the TAP is the last one you will be importing. 8. Repeat Steps 6 and 7 to import the remaining Maintenance TeraPack magazines. The import process continues until you choose the Stop Importing option or there are no empty chambers left in the cleaning partition.
Importing Media into a New Partition

Unless otherwise required by your backup software, the first time media is loaded into a partition, it is easiest to import the filled TeraPack magazines or RXT media packs directly to the storage pool for the data partition. This process is often referred to as bulk import. For subsequent imports, the media is typically imported to the entry/exit pool and then moved to the storage pool for the data partition using your backup software. After media is imported into a partitions storage pool, it is available for immediate use by the backup software. Any chambers in the storage pool that do not contain media are inaccessible to the backup software. Note: If your backup software requires you to use the software to perform all media imports, use the steps in Importing Media into the Entry/Exit Pool or a Cleaning Partition on page 133 to import the media into the entry/exit pool. Use your backup software to move the media from the entry/exit pool to the storage pool.
February 2011
140
Import Media into the Data Partition Storage Pool

When importing media into the storage pool for a data partition, keep the following in mind: Only a superuser or administrator can import media directly into the storage pool. Make sure that you import only the type of media for which the partition is configured. Label each tape cartridge, TeraPack magazine, and RXT media pack with a unique bar code. The bar-code labels on Spectra Logic certified media contains information about the media type. If you try to import the wrong type of media into a partition, the library rejects the media pack by reopening the TAP door without moving the media pack to the specified location. During normal operation, the backup software maintains its own media inventory when performing backup/restore operations and media management. To avoid errors when the backup software requests a specific piece of media, be sure to use your backup software to update its media inventory whenever you import media directly into the storage pool. Use the following steps to load media packs (TeraPack magazines or RXT media packs) directly into the storage pool for a selected data partition. 1. Before beginning, have on hand the media you plan to import. If necessary, prepare the media as described in Preparing Media for Use on page 128. If you are loading media into a partition for the first time, the maximum number of media packs required equals the number of chambers assigned to the storage pool for the partition (see Configuring a New Data Partition on page 223). You do not necessarily need to fill all chambers, but any empty chambers will be inaccessible to the backup software. Note: If desired, any magazines you import can have empty slots in them. These slots are then available to the backup software and can be used for moving media from the entry/exit pool into the storage pool. 2. Log in as a user with superuser or administrator privileges.
February 2011
141
3. From the toolbar menu, select General > Import/Export. The Import/ Export TeraPack Cases screen displays. Note: The General > Import/Export option is only available when accessing the user interface from the library front panel. It is not available when accessing the library using the BlueScale web interface.
Figure 78 The Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen (no media imported). Note: The Import and Export/Exchange buttons on the Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen display only if those actions can be performed given the current inventory for the partition. For example, if all chambers in a partition are empty, the Export/ Exchange button is not displayed. 4. From the Partition drop-down list, select the partition into which you want to import the media packs, then select Go. The Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen refreshes to show the current status of the chambers assigned to the selected partition. 5. Select Import next to the Empty Chambers in the Storage section of the screen. The TAP opens and a Feedback Required screen displays instructing you to place a TeraPack in the TAP. 6. Insert a media pack into the open TAP, making sure that it is correctly oriented, as shown in Figure 76 on page 136. The slots in bottom of the media pack slide easily onto the guides on the lowered TAP door. If the media pack does not slide into place easily, remove and reinsert it.
February 2011
142
7. Choose one of these options: ContinueChoose this option if you plan to import another magazine after the one currently in the TAP. The TAP door closes automatically and the transporter retrieves the magazine from the TAP and moves it to a chamber in the storage pool for the selected data partition. If there are still empty chambers available, the second TAP door opens, ready for the next import. The TAP doors alternate as you continue to import media. The import process continues automatically as long as there are empty chambers available in the storage pool. Simply continue to insert media packs into the TAP and select Continue for each one. When there are no empty chambers remaining in the partition, the process stops automatically and the Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen displays. Stop ImportingChoose this option if the magazine you placed in the TAP is the last one you will be importing. Note: Chambers in the partitions storage pool that do not contain a magazine are inaccessible to the backup software. 8. Repeat Steps 6 and 7 to import the remaining TeraPack magazines. The import process continues until you choose the Stop Importing option or there are no empty chambers left in the storage pool. 9. After you finish importing media packs, use your backup software to update the media inventory it maintains (see Updating the Media Inventory on page 159). 10. Proceed to Prepare the Entry/Exit Pool (for Tape Media Only) to load one or more empty magazines into the entry/exit pool for the partition. Note: Exporting one or more individual cartridges using your backup software requires a TeraPack magazine with sufficient empty slots to be present in the entry/exit pool.
Prepare the Entry/Exit Pool (for Tape Media Only)

When backup software ejects media from a partition, the media is not immediately exported from the library. Instead, the library moves the ejected media into empty slots in a TeraPack magazine stored in the partitions entry/exit pool. The TeraPack magazines can then be physically exported from the library whenever it is convenient. After loading tape media into a partition for the first time, make sure that the entry/exit pool contains at least one empty TeraPack magazine so that cartridges ejected by the backup software can be stored there. Over the course of time, normal operations will typically result in the entry/exit pool containing at least one magazine.
February 2011
143
If the entry/exit pool does not contain a magazine with an empty slot, the backup software will halt its eject operation. Exchange the full magazines in the entry/exit pool for empty ones, as described in Exchange Media in the Entry/Exit or Storage Pool on page 148, before retrying the eject operation. Use the following steps to import one or more empty TeraPack magazines into a partitions entry/exit pool. 1. Before beginning, have on hand one or more empty TeraPack magazines. The maximum number of empty magazines required corresponds to the number of chambers in the entry/exit pool. 2. Log into the library. 3. If it is not already displayed, access the Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen from the General toolbar (see Step 3 of Import Media into the Data Partition Storage Pool on page 141). 4. From the Partition drop-down list, select the partition into which you want to import the empty magazines, then select Go. 5. Select Import (Entry/Exit). The TAP opens and a Feedback Required screen displays instructing you to place a TeraPack in the TAP. 6. Insert an empty magazine into the open TAP, making sure that it is oriented correctly (see Figure 76 on page 136). The slots in bottom of the magazine slide easily onto the guides on the lowered TAP door. If the magazine does not slide into place easily, remove and reinsert it. 7. Choose one of these options: ContinueChoose this option if you plan to import another magazine after the one currently in the TAP. The TAP door closes automatically and the transporter retrieves the magazine from the TAP and moves it to the entry/exit pool for the partition. If there are still empty chambers available, the second TAP door opens, ready for the next import. The TAP doors alternate as you continue to import media. The import process continues automatically as long as there are empty entry/exit pool chambers to fill. Simply continue to insert magazines into the TAP and select Continue for each one. When there are no empty chambers remaining, the process stops automatically and the Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen displays. Stop ImportingChoose this option if the magazine you placed in the TAP is the last one you will be importing. 8. Repeat Steps 6 and 7 to import the remaining magazines. The import process continues until you choose the Stop Importing option or there are no empty chambers left in the entry/exit pool.
February 2011
144
Exporting or Exchanging Media
EXPORTING OR EXCHANGING MEDIA

This section provides instructions for exporting or exchanging media. The process for exporting or exchanging media depends on whether the media is in a data partition or in a cleaning partition.
Topic Exporting or Exchanging Media in a Data Partition Exporting or Exchanging Cartridges in a Cleaning Partition Described beginning on... page 145
Exchange Media in the Entry/Exit or Storage Pool page 148 page 149
You cannot export or exchange media in a partition if the library is actively running a PreScan in that partition. These operations are also restricted if a PostScan operation that uses Global Spare drives is running in the partition. You must pause or stop the operation before you can continue. Select Stop Discovery on the Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen to stop the PreScan operation (see Stopping the Discovery Process on page 183). Select Pause PostScan on the Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen to pause the PostScan operation for one hour (see Pausing the PostScan Process on page 191).
Exporting or Exchanging Media in a Data Partition

The export functionality is used to export (remove) one or more magazines or RXT media packs from the library (see Export Media from the Entry/Exit or Storage Pool). You can also use the export functionality to exchange one magazine or RXT media pack for another one (see Exchange Media in the Entry/Exit or Storage Pool on page 148).
Export Media from the Entry/Exit or Storage Pool

Exporting media from a data partition is a multi-stage process: 1. The backup software exports the cartridge(s) or RXT media from the partition and removes it from its inventory. From the software perspective, this step corresponds to opening the entry/exit port and removing the media. The media is no longer available for use. 2. The library automatically moves the exported media to the partitions entry/exit pool. Cartridges are placed in empty slots of a TeraPack magazine already stored in the entry/exit pool; RXT media packs occupy an entire chamber in the entry/exit pool. 3. The media in the entry/exit pool can then be exported to the TAP using controls on the Import/Export TeraPack screen of the user interface.
145
If you know where the media you want to export is located in the library, you can export it directly from the storage pool to the TAP. See Locating the Desired Media on page 154 for information about locating media in the library. Notes: Exporting media directly from the storage pool is not the recommended procedure, unless you are exporting all of the media from a partition. This process is often referred to as bulk export. Only a superuser or administrator can export or exchange media directly from the storage pool. If you do choose to export a portion of the media in a partition directly from the storage pool, be sure to use your backup software to update its media inventory after completing the export (see Updating the Media Inventory on page 159). Use the following steps to export media from the library. 1. Eject the desired media from the partitions storage pool using the backup software. The library moves the ejected media from the storage pool into the partitions entry/exit pool. When the software reports that the eject operation is complete, proceed to Step 2. 2. Log into the library as either a superuser or administrator.
February 2011
146
3. Select General > Import/Export from the toolbar menu on the librarys user interface. The Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen displays. Note: The General > Import/Export option is only available when accessing the user interface from the librarys front panel. It is not available when accessing the library using the BlueScale web interface.
Figure 79 Exporting/exchanging media using the Import/ Export TeraPack Cases screen. 4. From the Partition drop-down list, select the partition containing the media you want to export, then select Go. The Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen refreshes to show the current status of the chambers assigned to the selected partition. Note: The Import and Export/Exchange buttons on the Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen display only if those actions can be performed given the current inventory for the partition. For example, if all chambers in a partition are empty, the Export/ Exchange button is not displayed. 5. Depending on where the media you want to remove from the library is located, select the Export/Exchange for either the storage pool or the entry/exit pool. The transporter retrieves the media pack from the specified pool and places it in the TAP. The TAP door opens and a Feedback Required screen displays. 6. Remove the media pack from the TAP.
February 2011
147
7. Choose one of these options: ContinueChoose this option if you plan to export another magazine after the one you just removed from the TAP. The TAP doors alternate as you continue to export media. The export process continues automatically as long as there are magazines left in the selected pool. Simply continue to remove magazines from the TAP and select Continue for each one. When all of the magazines in the partition have been exported, the process stops automatically and the user interface redisplays the Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen. Stop ExportingChoose this option if the magazine you removed from the TAP is the last one you want to export. 8. Repeat Steps 6 and 7 to export the remaining magazines. The export process continues until you choose the Stop Exporting option or there are no magazines left in the entry/exit pool (or storage pool). 9. If you exported media directly from the storage pool, use your backup software to update the media inventory it maintains (see Updating the Media Inventory on page 159).
Exchange Media in the Entry/Exit or Storage Pool

The exchange option is used to replace a media pack currently stored in the partition with a new one of the same type. You can also use the exchange option to replace one or more individual cartridges while retaining the other cartridges in the magazine. The exchange option is especially useful when you need to import a cleaning cartridge into the storage pool as part of tape drive maintenance. To exchange a magazine or a cartridge, do the following: 1. Follow Step 2 through Step 5 in the previous section to select the magazine that contains the cartridge you want to exchange and move it to the TAP. 2. Remove the magazine from the TAP. 3. Exchange one or more cartridges in the magazine for others of the same type (or for an appropriate cleaning cartridge). 4. Return the magazine to the open TAP, making sure that it is correctly oriented, as shown in Figure 76 on page 136. The slots in bottom of the media pack slide easily onto the tabs on the front of the lowered TAP door. If the media pack does not slide into place easily, remove and reinsert it.
February 2011
148
5. Choose one of these options: ContinueChoose this option if you plan to exchange another magazine after the one you just returned to the TAP. The TAP doors alternate as you continue to exchange media. The exchange process can continue as long as there are magazines left in the selected pool. Simply select Continue to exchange magazines or cartridges as each magazine is delivered to the TAP. When all of the magazines in the pool have been processed, the exchange operation stops automatically and the user interface redisplays the Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen. Stop ExportingChoose this option if the magazine you just returned to the TAP is the last one you want to exchange. 6. Repeat Step 3 through Step 5 to exchange additional magazines. The export process continues until you choose the Stop Exporting option or until all of the magazines in the storage pool have been processed. 7. When you are finished with the exchange, be sure to update your backup softwares media inventory (see Updating the Media Inventory on page 159).
Exporting or Exchanging Cartridges in a Cleaning Partition

The steps for exporting or exchanging cleaning cartridges in a cleaning partition are the same as for a data partition, except that the Maintenance TeraPack magazine containing the cleaning cartridges is moved directly to the TAP. Use the following steps to export or exchange cleaning cartridges in a cleaning partition. 1. Log in as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. Select General > Import/Export from the toolbar menu on the librarys user interface. The Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen displays (Figure 79 on page 147). Note: The General > Import/Export option is only available when accessing the user interface from the library operator panel. It is not available when accessing the library using the BlueScale web interface.
February 2011
149
3. From the Partition drop-down list, select the cleaning partition containing the cleaning cartridges you want to export or exchange, then select Go. The Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen refreshes to show the current status of the chambers assigned to the selected cleaning partition. Note: The Import, Export/Exchange, and Export/Exchange Expired buttons on the Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen display only if those actions can be performed given the current inventory for the partition. For example, if the cleaning partition does not contain any known-expired cleaning cartridges, the Export/Exchange Expired button is not displayed.
Figure 80 Exporting/exchanging cleaning using the Import/ Export TeraPack Cases screen. 4. Select the Export/Exchange or Export/Exchange Expired. The transporter retrieves a magazine from the cleaning partition and places it in the TAP. The TAP door opens and a Feedback Required screen displays. If you selected Export/Exchange Expired, the feedback screen tells you which cartridge to remove from the magazine. 5. Remove the magazine from the TAP. If you are removing the entire Maintenance magazine of cleaning cartridges from the cleaning partition and will not be replacing it, skip to Step 7. If you are replacing an expired cleaning cartridge, remove the expired cleaning cartridge from the slot indicated in the feedback screen and replace it with a new one of the same type. 6. Return the magazine to the open TAP, making sure that it is correctly oriented, as shown in Figure 76 on page 136.
February 2011
150
Using Advanced Import/Export
7. Choose one of these options: ContinueChoose this option if you removed the expired cleaning cartridge and did not replace it with a new cartridge. Also choose this option if you removed or exchanged the entire magazine. Note: If you exchanged an expended cleaning cartridge for a new one and chose Continue, select Ok in response to a message stating that the slot containing the exchanged cartridge should be empty. The export process continues automatically as long as there are magazines left in the cleaning partition. Simply continue to remove or exchange cartridges or magazines and select Continue for each one. When of the all magazines in the cleaning partition have been exported or exchanged, the process stops automatically and the user interface redisplays the Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen. OverrideChoose this option if you exchanged an expired cleaning cartridge in the magazine for a new one. Stop ExportingChoose this option if the magazine you removed from the TAP is the last one you want to process. 8. Repeat Step 5 through Step 7 to process the remaining magazines in the cleaning partition. The export/exchange process continues until you choose the Stop Exporting option or there are no magazines left in the cleaning partition.
USING ADVANCED IMPORT/EXPORT

Use the following steps to import a media pack (TeraPack magazine or RXT media pack) into or export it from a specific chamber in the library using the TAP. You can only import or export media packs. You cannot import or export individual cartridges without using a magazine. 1. If you want to import one or more cartridges, place the prepared cartridges in an empty TeraPack magazine. 2. Log into the library as a superuser or administrator. 3. From the toolbar menu, select General > Import/Export. The Import/ Export TeraPack Cases screen displays (Figure 78 on page 142). Note: The General > Import/Export option is only available when accessing the user interface from the librarys operator panel. It is not available when accessing the librarys user interface through the BlueScale web interface. 4. From the Partition drop-down list, select the partition into which or from which you want to import or export the media pack, then select Go.
151
5. Select Advanced. The Advanced Import/Export screen displays. Note: To return to the basic Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen, select Basic.
Figure 81 The Advanced Import/Export screen. 6. From the Chamber drop-down list, select the chamber into which or from which you want to move the media pack, then select Go. The screen refreshes to display the status of the selected chamber. If the chamber contains a magazine, the status shows the contents of each slot in the magazine. 7. From the Direction drop-down list (shown in Figure 82), select the direction you want to move the media pack, then select Go.
Direction of Move
Figure 82 Select the Advanced Import/Export direction.
February 2011
152
The available destinations depend on the type of partition selected.

Partition Type Data Available Sources
TAP > StorageMove the media pack from the TAP to the storage pool.
Storage > TAPMove the media pack in the selected storage pool chamber to the TAP. TAP > EEMove the media pack from the TAP to the entry/exit pool. EE > TAPMove the media pack in the selected entry/exit pool chamber to the TAP.
Cleaning
TAP > StorageMove the TeraPack magazine from the TAP to the cleaning partition. Storage > TAPMove the TeraPack magazine in the selected cleaning partition chamber to the TAP. 8. Select Add Move. An entry listing the move you just defined appears in the Move Queue.
Select Add Move to add the defined move to the Move Queue.
Figure 83 Add the move to the Move Queue. 9. Repeat Step 6 through Step 8 if you want to perform additional moves. 10. Select Start Moves to begin processing the moves. Select Delete to delete a selected move from the Move Queue list. Select Delete All to delete all of the defined moves from the Move Queue list. 11. The TAP door opens. Insert a media pack into the TAP or remove a media pack from the TAP. A progress screen tracks the progress of each move operation. When the move is complete, the library updates its media inventory and the screen displays the status of the completed move.
February 2011
153
Moving Media Within a Partition
12. If you imported media packs directly into or exported them from the storage pool, be sure to use your backup software to update its media inventory after completing the export (see Updating the Media Inventory on page 159).
MOVING MEDIA WITHIN A PARTITION

During normal operations, you typically use your backup software to move media (tape cartridges or RXT media packs) from one location to another within the library. However, you may occasionally need to use the librarys user interface to locate and move an individual cartridge (for example, to move a cleaning cartridge to a tape drive if you are not using the Auto Drive Clean option). Note: If a cleaning partition is associated with the data partition, use the Clean button on the Drives screen to move a cleaning cartridge from the cleaning partition to a drive (see Manually Cleaning a Tape Drive on page 450).
Locating the Desired Media

1. Identify the media you want to move (for example, by determining its bar-code label) and the partition in which it resides. 2. Log into the library. 3. From the library user interface, select General > Inventory. The Inventory screen displays (Figure 70 on page 126). 4. If the media is in a partition other than the one currently displayed, select the desired partition from the Partition drop-down list, then select Go. The Source pane refreshes to display a list of the media in the requested location type. The list shows the name of the location (for example, the slot number) and the bar-code label information for the media in that location.
February 2011
154
5. Select the source of the media you want to move. You can select the media either by selecting it from the Source list, by entering its bar code, or by entering the slot number where it is located.
List media by source
Figure 84 Select the Source of the media you want to move. To select using the Source list: a. Choose the source type from the Source drop-down list (see Figure 84) and select Go to refresh the list of media in the selected source type. The available sources depend on the type of partition selected.
StorageThe media currently in the selected partitions storage pool. Entry/ExitThe media currently in the partitions entry/exit pool. DrivesThe drives assigned to the partition that currently contain media.
From TAPMoves the magazine containing the destination slot to the TAP, prompts you to place a cartridge in that slot, and returns the magazine to its original location. Note: The From Tap option is only available when accessing the user interface from the front panel. AllAll the media assigned to the partition, regardless of its location.
Cleaning
CleaningThe cleaning cartridges currently in the selected cleaning partition. From TAPMoves the magazine containing the destination slot to the TAP, prompts you to place a cartridge in that slot, and returns the magazine to its original location. Note: The From Tap option is only available when accessing the user interface from the front panel. AllAll the media assigned to the partition, regardless of its location. b. Scroll through the list and select the desired cartridge.
February 2011
155
To select using a slot number: a. Enter the slot number for the cartridge you want to move in the View Source Slot field. b. Select Go. The Source inventory list refreshes to show the requested slot selected at the top of the Source list. To select using the bar-code label information: a. Enter the bar-code label information for the cartridge you want to locate in the Find by Barcode field. Notes: Make sure that you type the bar-code label information correctly to avoid selecting the wrong cartridge. Only the slots below the one that is currently highlighted in the source list are searched. To ensure that all of the slots are searched, scroll to the top of the source list and highlight the first slot before selecting Find. b. Select Find. The Source inventory list refreshes to show the requested cartridge selected at the top of the Source list.
Move the Media

Use the following steps to move the media from one location to another within the partition. 1. Select the media you want to move as described in Locating the Desired Media.
February 2011
156
2. From the Destination drop-down list, select the type of location to which you want to move the media, then select Go.
Available destinations
Figure 85 Select the Destination for a media move. The available destinations depend on the type of partition selected.
StorageMove the media to the selected location in the selected partitions

storage pool. Entry/ExitMove the media to the selected location in the selected partitions entry/exit pool. To TAPMoves the magazine containing the source slot to the TAP, prompts you to remove the cartridge from that slot, and returns the magazine to its original location. Note: The To Tap option is only available when accessing the user interface from the front panel. DrivesMove the media to the selected drive in the partition. AllList all available destinations in the partition, regardless of the type. Selecting a specific destination type instead of using All displays fewer items through which you must scroll to locate the desired media.
February 2011
157
Chapter 6 Importing, Exporting, and Moving Media Partition Type Cleaning Available Sources
CleaningMove the selected cleaning cartridges currently in the selected cleaning partition. To TAPMoves the magazine containing the source slot to the TAP, prompts you to remove the cartridge from that slot, and returns the magazine to its original location. Note: The To Tap option is only available when accessing the user interface from the front panel. AllList all available destinations in the partition, regardless of the type. Selecting a specific destination type instead of using All displays fewer items through which you must scroll to locate the desired media. 3. The Destination list refreshes to show the locations of the selected type that are empty and available. 4. Select the desired destination from the Destination list. 5. Select Add Move. An entry listing the move you just defined appears in the Move Queue.
Select Add Move to add the defined move to the Move Queue.
Figure 86 Add the move to the Move Queue. 6. Repeat Step 1 through Step 5 if you want to move additional media. 7. Select Start Moves to begin the media moves in the order that they are listed in the Move Queue. Select Delete to delete a selected move from the Move Queue list. Select Delete All to delete all of the defined moves from the Move Queue list. A progress screen tracks the progress of the move operation. When the move is complete, the screen displays the status of the completed move. 8. When the move is complete, use your backup software to update the inventory it maintains, if necessary (see Updating the Media Inventory).
158
Updating the Media Inventory
UPDATING THE MEDIA INVENTORY

As the library imports or exports media, it reads the bar-code labels on the individual cartridges and the TeraPack magazines and automatically updates the physical inventory that it maintains in on the LCM compact flash card. This process does not automatically update the media inventory maintained and used by the backup software. After you finish importing media into or exporting media from a partitions storage pool, or if you use the librarys user interface to move media from one location to another, use your backup software to update the inventory it maintains. Refer to your software documentation for more information.
February 2011
159
CHAPTER 7
This chapter describes how to use BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) to proactively monitor and report on the health of media in your library.
Topic Overview Spectra-Certified LTO Media with MLM-Support Media Auto Discovery MLM PreScan and PostScan MLM Tracking and Reporting Additional MLM Features MLM Best Practices Configuring MLM Settings Configuring Global Settings Configuring Media Auto Discovery Configuring Raw Capacity to Display as Broadcast Capacity Configuring PostScan Blackout Periods Implementing Media Lifecycle Management Addressing Media Requirements Adding Media to the MLM Database Starting or Stopping Media Auto Discovery Using PreScan Enabling PreScan Starting a Manual PreScan Using PostScan Prerequisites for Starting PostScan Enabling PostScan Operating the Library During PostScan Requesting a Manual PostScan Pausing the PostScan Process Described beginning on... page 161 page 162 page 163 page 164 page 165 page 166 page 167 page 170 page 170 page 173 page 174 page 176 page 178 page 178 page 179 page 181 page 183 page 183 page 184 page 184 page 185 page 188 page 188 page 189 page 191
160
Chapter 7 Media Lifecycle Management Topic Using MLM Reporting Generating Reports Saving a Report Overriding a Poor Cartridge Health Report Managing the MLM Database Best Practices Backing Up the MLM and DLM Databases Restoring the MLM and DLM Databases Deleting MLM Records From the Database Downloading the Database as a CSV File
Overview Described beginning on... page 192 page 192 page 196 page 198 page 200 page 200 page 201 page 204 page 205 page 207
OVERVIEW
This section provides an overview of how BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) works in your library. The remainder of the chapter provides detailed information about configuring and using MLM. BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) helps you manage your tape media by giving you tools to pro-actively detect potential media errors well before they happenall consolidated within the same application you use to manage your library. When used in combination with Spectra Logic Certified Media with MLM support, MLM lets you manage, track, and report all facets of tape usage from creation to retirement. Note: Media Lifecycle Management is only supported for LTO-4 and LTO-5 tape drives and compatible media. MLM maintains a database of all the LTO cartridges in the library. The information in the database is used to monitor the health of the cartridges and generate a variety of reports. If desired, you can save the reports to a USB drive or email them to a previously configured mail user.
February 2011
161
Overview
In addition to tracking media health and generating reports, MLM displays a Filled Capacity bar graph on the General Status screen. This graph shows you the remaining uncompressed storage capacity for the MLM-enabled media in the entire library or in a specific partition. Click on the Filled Capacity bar graph to view the Media Lifecycle Management Report screen (Figure 101 on page 194). Note: Until an LTO data cartridge is discovered, either by Media Auto Discovery or when it is loaded into and then unloaded from a tape drive for the first time, its data capacity is not included on the Filled Capacity bar graph shown on the General Status screen.
Filled capacity
Figure 87 The General Status screen showing the media capacity for the selected partition.
Spectra-Certified LTO Media with MLM-Support

Media Lifecycle Management starts with packaged, bar-code labeled, Spectra Certified Media with MLM support (LTO-3 and higher data cartridges and LTO cleaning cartridges). Before shipment, Spectra Logic writes baseline data to the MAM (Medium Auxiliary Memory) embedded in each cartridge. Throughout its life, the cartridge continually collects data on its MAM, enabling it to support MLM tracking and reporting.
February 2011
162
Overview
Media Auto Discovery

The Media Auto Discovery feature is a background process that discovers newly imported LTO cartridges. The discovery process is independent of any backup application. During the discovery process, the library loads each cartridge that has not previously been processed into one of the partition drives and does the following: If the cartridge is MLM-enabled, the library collects the available MLM information from the cartridges MAM, born on date, and the name of the partition where it currently resides. If the cartridge has been used previously, the library also collects media health and encryption status from the MAM. The library updates the MLM database to include the collected information. Any updated MLM information is written to the Media Auxiliary Memory (MAM) in an cartridge. If the cartridge is not MLM-enabled, the library collects the cartridge bar-code label information and the name of the partition where the cartridge currently resides and adds this information to the MLM database. When the discovery process is complete, the drive unloads the cartridge and the library returns the cartridge to its original location. Each subsequent load/unload updates the MLM database again, providing the ability for ongoing tracking and reporting. The initial load/unload during discovery also establishes an initial tape health score for each cartridge and adds this information to the MLM database. This initial health score may not accurately reflect the actual health of the media. The health score stabilizes and becomes more accurate after the first four load/unloads as current usage statistics are updated and used in the tapes health scoring. Notes: For cartridges that are not MLM-enabled, the cartridge health is set to usable or impaired based on the tape alert information recorded on the tape. If the MLM PreScan feature is enabled in a partition, that process runs instead of the Media Auto Discovery process. See Using PreScan on page 183 for more information. Auto Discovery cannot begin while the library is actively loading media into drives. If you import media during this time, the library posts a failure message stating that no drives are available. Either wait until the library is idle before importing media or start the discovery process for imported media manually when the library is idle. See Starting or Stopping Media Auto Discovery on page 181 for instructions.
February 2011
163
Overview
The following sections provide detailed information about configuring and using Media Auto Discovery.
This section Configuring Media Auto Discovery on page 173 Provides... Detailed information about how Media Auto Discovery feature operates and instructions for enabling it. Notes: If Media Auto Discovery is not enabled, the discovery process can be launched manually (see Starting or Stopping Media Auto Discovery on page 181). If neither discovery process is used, the library discovers each cartridge the first time it is loaded into and unloaded from an MLM-capable tape drive during normal operation. The library then records all of the MLM information to the cartridge MAM and the MLM database. Detailed instructions for manually starting and pausing the Media Auto Discovery process.
Starting or Stopping Media Auto Discovery on page 181
MLM PreScan and PostScan

MLM PreScan and PostScan are configurable background processes that use an LTO-4 or LTO-5 tape drive to provide two levels of verification for LTO data cartridges. The two levels of verification are enabled and configured separately as part of the data partition creation process. See the following sections for detailed information about configuring and using the PreScan and PostScan features. Note: Both PreScan and PostScan generate system messages as possible error conditions are detected (for example, a broken leader or a media error). The messages indicate that the error condition was detected by the PreScan or PostScan process and not during normal operation.
This section... Configuring PostScan Blackout Periods on page 176 Using PreScan on page 183 Provides... Detailed instructions for configuring the PostScan blackout periods. These blackout periods apply to all partitions that are configured to use the PostScan feature. Detailed information about how the PreScan feature operates. This section also provides instructions for manually starting and stopping the PreScan process. Detailed information about how the QuickScan and FullScan options in the PostScan feature operate. This section also provides instructions for manually adding a tape to the PostScan queue and pausing the currently running PostScan process.
Using PostScan on page 184
February 2011
164
Chapter 7 Media Lifecycle Management This section... Configuring Global Spare Tape Drives on page 228 Configure MLM PreScan and PostScan on page 233 Configuring a Cleaning Partition on page 253 Provides...
Overview
Information about configuring a Global Spare drive. A Global Spare drive must be configured for the partition before FullScan option can be used. Detailed information about enabling and configuring the settings for PreScan and the PostScan options in each partition. Information about using a cleaning partition when a Global Spare drive is used to perform FullScan operations.
MLM Tracking and Reporting

MLM uses the information from the cartridges MAM to maintain a database of information about each cartridge in the library. The information in the MLM database gives you vital statistical and diagnostic information that helps you proactively manage your tape media throughout its life. MLM media tracking and reporting lets you monitor important health information about every MLM-enabled data cartridge and cleaning cartridge in your library. Notes: The MLM database also includes limited information about LTO cartridges that are not MLM-enabled. Until an LTO cartridge is discovered, either by Media Auto Discovery or when it is loaded into and then unloaded from a tape drive for the first time, it is not included in the MLM database; nor is the capacity of a data cartridge included on the Filled Capacity bar graph shown on the General Status screen. Using the information in the MLM database, the library can generate comprehensive health reports for the MLM-enabled media in the whole library or in an individual partition. It can also generate more detailed reports with information about compression ratios, load counts, write errors, remaining capacity, encryption status, and more. The MLM reports help you identify tapes with high error rates or other problems (for example, a dropped leader pin) that pose a risk to protecting your data. These tapes can then be removed before they cause data corruption or other problems. See Generating Reports on page 192 for detailed information about the types of reports you can generate.
February 2011
165
Overview
Data Cartridge Tracking

Each time a Spectra Certified MLM-enabled data cartridge is loaded into a tape drive, MLM records over 30 data points about the cartridge. These data points include health information, the cartridge age, how many times it has been loaded and into which drives, and how many errors it has accumulated. It also records when the cartridge is exported from the library and by whom. MLM uses a unique identifier that allows each cartridge to be tracked throughout its life, even if its bar-code label is damaged or removed. In addition to media health, the library uses information in the MLM database to determine an estimate of the Remaining Capacity for the selected partition. If the partition contains non-MLM-enabled media, the estimated capacity only represents what is available on the MLM-enabled media.
Cleaning Cartridge Tracking

With Spectra Certified MLM-enabled LTO cleaning cartridges, the library tracks and reports usage information, which includes the number of Cleans Remaining and the cartridge health (good, near expiration or expired). These reports alert you when a cleaning cartridge is nearing the end of its useful life so that you can have another on hand to replace it. See Configuring MLM Settings on page 170 for information about setting the threshold for generating the notification. When you use MLM-enabled cleaning cartridges in a cleaning partition, the usage information is retained in the MLM database even when the cleaning cartridge is exported from the library. The MLM database does not contain any information about cleaning cartridges that are not MLMenabled. However, the library marks an expired cleaning cartridge in its inventory and no further usage is attempted. If an expired cleaning cartridge that is not MLM-enable is exported from the partition and then reimported or if the LCM is reset, the library must rediscover that the cleaning cartridge is expired.
Additional MLM Features

In addition to the features described in the previous sections, MLM provides the following features (listed in alphabetical order): Broadcast Capacity The Broadcast Capacity option changes the capacity displayed on the General Status screen to show broadcast-centric hours of programming used and hours of programing remaining instead of raw capacity (see Configuring Raw Capacity to Display as Broadcast Capacity on page 174).
February 2011
166
MLM Best Practices
Media Alert The Media Alert feature generates a system message when a tapes health is identified as poor (red) during five consecutive loads. This message is only generated once per tape. A separate system message is generated whenever a cartridge experiences a hard error. MLM Database Management The MLM database is restricted to a maximum of 10,000 records. When this limit is reached, records are automatically deleted on a first-in, first-out (FIFO) basis. When a tape is retired or permanently exported from the library, its record can be deleted from the MLM database. Records can be deleted individually or as a group (see Deleting MLM Records From the Database on page 205). If desired, the information in the MLM database can be exported to a comma-separated value (CSV) file, which can then be imported into Microsoft Excel or other software applications that support this file type (see Downloading the Database as a CSV File on page 207). Tracking Non-MLM-Enabled Media MLM tracks the basic health information for LTO media that is not MLM-enabled. This basic health media health information (Usable or Impaired) is based on tape log data obtained by an MLM-capable LTO drive (LTO-2 through LTO-5) and is included in Media Lifecycle Management reports. Note: This feature was previously the keyed Media Check option.
MLM BEST PRACTICES

To effectively use MLM and ensure data protection, plan a strategy based on your data center needs and develop policies and procedures to support that strategy. Having sound management policies and procedures for media rotation and management is essential for consistent, effective implementation.
Follow the MLM Best Practice Guidelines

Consider the following best practice guidelines as you prepare to implement MLM in your environment.
Guideline Identify the people responsible for backing up data Identify the users who will have responsibilities that involve MLM Description The people who perform data backup at your site are typically the ones who will be responsible for implementing and following MLM procedures. It may be wise to have more than a single user familiar with policies, depending on the size of your organization, so that if one person is not available, another can take over.
February 2011
167
Chapter 7 Media Lifecycle Management Guideline Be consistent with partition names Description
MLM Best Practices
Using consistent naming simplifies identifying a specific partition. Spectras suggested naming practice is to list the location, followed by the library name, followed by the backup software. For example, Dallas/T950/Netbackup. The level of media management depends on the requirements for your environment. For example, you may choose to use Spectras guidelines for retirement for all media, or you may choose to retire tapes that hold financial or legal data sooner than recommended. See the Error and Warning health scores in Generating Reports on page 192 for information on when cartridges should be retired.
On an organizational level, determine the level of management your media requires
Establish Good MLM Policies

Consider the following guidelines when establishing your Media Lifecycle Management polices.
Guideline Choose a retirement guideline Description When implementing MLM, decide at the beginning on the criteria to be used when determining when to retire a cartridge. Spectra suggests using the Media Lifecycle Management health icon, visible on the MLM Reports screen and on the Details screen (Figure 102 on page 196) for each tape, to assess the overall health of individual tapes. See Generating Reports on page 192 for information about using the health icon to assess media health. For the most accurate tracking, do not import your MLM-enabled media into non-Spectra Logic libraries or drive generations lower than LTO-4. The cartridge MAM will not be updated with information about usage in those locations. As a result, the information about usage in those locations will not be recorded in the MLM database when the cartridge is returned to your library. The library uses information in the MLM database to monitor the health of the media in the library. For MLM-enabled media, the detailed health reports let you determine whether a particular data cartridge is past its useful threshold or determine whether a particular cartridge is experiencing high errors rates or retries. For MLM-enabled cleaning cartridges, you are notified when a cartridge is approaching the end of its useful life. Although MLM tracks the general health of media that is not MLMenabled, detailed health information is not available for this media.
Only use MLM-enabled media and cleaning cartridges in MLM-compatible libraries and tape drives
Use only Spectra Certified Media with MLM support (both data and cleaning cartridges) in the library
February 2011
168
Chapter 7 Media Lifecycle Management Guideline Do not routinely share LTO-4 media between LTO-4 and LTO-5 drives. Description
MLM Best Practices
The algorithm used to determine media health in LTO-5 drives differs from the one used for LTO-4 drives. As a result, when LTO-4 media that was previously used in an LTO-4 drive is used in an LTO-5 drive, the reported media health will initially appear to be different from what was reported by the LTO-4 drive. When the media is consistently loaded into LTO-5 drives, the health score becomes more accurate during subsequent load/unloads as current usage statistics are updated and used in the tapes health scoring. To maintain consistent media health statistics for your LTO-4 media, Spectra Logic recommends that you do not routinely share LTO-4 media between LTO-4 and LTO-5 drives. If you disable and then re-enable Media Lifecycle Management, any loads, reads, writes, errors, and any other tape related events that occur while MLM is disabled are not recorded in the MLM database. Load count alerts, used in combination with the media health icon, let you monitor the health of individual tapes. Tapes with low load counts, but with a yellow or red health icon are vulnerable to high errors rates or retries. For higher levels of notification, configure a threshold for the maximum number of times a data cartridge can be loaded before an alert is generated (see Configuring MLM Settings on page 170). When the number of loads exceeds this threshold, MLM will generates a system message listing the barcode of the tape. You can also enable an alert to notify you when the load count recorded on the cartridge MAM differs from the load count stored in the MLM database but none of the other data has changed. This type of discrepancy can indicate that the tape has been loaded into a non-Spectra Logic library. Use this alert as a security feature to let you know when a tape was removed and loaded into a drive in a different library. Determine how frequently to export the MLM database for storage. You can save the MLM database to a USB drive or email it to a previously configured mail recipient. The database can be loaded back into the library in the event of an error. See Best Practices on page 200 and Restoring the MLM and DLM Databases on page 204 for detailed information. See Configuring Mail Users on page 300 for information about configuring mail recipients. Backing up the MLM database produces a point-in-time snapshot of the MLM database. Based on the number of tapes you routinely import into and export from the library, determine how frequently backups are needed to ensure that you can easily restore the MLM database. Alerts for non-MLM-enabled media notify you when a cartridge that is not MLM-enabled is loaded into a tape drive.
Always operate the library with Media Lifecycle Management enabled Enable load count alerts
Regularly back up your MLM database
Enable non-MLM media alerts
February 2011
169
Chapter 7 Media Lifecycle Management Guideline Track exported cartridges Description
Configuring MLM Settings
When a cartridge is exported from the library, an asterisk (*) next to the bar code indicates that it is currently out of the library. However, all of the MLM data for the cartridge is still available. Define the frequency with which you will export the complete MLM report and make a note of all exported tapes. When you save an MLM report (see Generating Reports on page 192), you can choose between saving all MLM data or just the data from the most recently viewed report. You can save a copy of the MLM report as a comma-separated text file (*.rpt) to a USB drive, mail the saved report to previously configured email recipient, or both. If desired, you can zip the file before saving it (see Saving a Report on page 196).
Choose relevant information for saved reports
CONFIGURING MLM SETTINGS

This section describes configuring the optional MLM features. Note: MLM is enabled by default. If you do not want to use MLM, you must disable it.
Configuring Global Settings

Use the following steps to configure the global settings for MLM. These settings affect all partitions in the library. 1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges.
February 2011
170
2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > More Options > Media Lifecycle Management. The Media Lifecycle Management Settings screen displays.
Figure 88 The Media Lifecycle Management Settings screen. 3. Select the MLM features you want to enable.
Option Enable Media Lifecycle Management Description Enables the Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) features in the library. MLM is enabled by default. Enabling Media Lifecycle Management also enables Drive Lifecycle Management (DLM), which is described in Chapter 8 Drive Lifecycle Management. Important: MLM must be enabled before you can take advantage of the health monitoring and reporting features provided through MLM and DLM. Generates an alert message when a cartridge that is not MLMenabled is loaded into a tape drive. Note: Enabling this alert is only recommended if all of the media typically used in the library is MLM-enabled. Default Setting Enabled (Checked)
Enable Alerts for Non-Certified Media
Disabled (Unchecked)
February 2011
171
Configuring MLM Settings Default Setting Disabled (Unchecked) Zero (0)
Option Enable Alerts for Load Count Discrepancies Minimum Cleaning Passes Before Warning
Description Generates an alert message when the load count for the cartridge stored in the MLM database differs from the load count stored on the cartridges MAM. Sets the threshold for the minimum number cleaning passes remaining on a cleaning cartridge. When a cleaning cartridge reaches threshold, a warning message is generated showing that the cleaning cartridge is nearly expended. The warning message is generated every time the cleaning tape is used while the number of cleans remaining is at or below the threshold value. Sets the number of times a tape can be loaded into a tape drive before a load count warning message is generated. When the number of tape loads reaches the specified threshold, a warning message is generated. Subsequent loads do not generate additional messages. Notes: If you began using MLM-enabled data and cleaning cartridges before MLM became available in the librarys BlueScale user interface, some of your media may have already exceeded the thresholds you set. See Implementing Media Lifecycle Management on page 178 for more information. Generate a Load Count Media Lifecycle Report to determine the current usage status of the media in your library (see Using MLM Reporting on page 192 for detailed information). Enables the Media Auto Discovery feature. See Configuring Media Auto Discovery on page 173 and Using MLM Reporting on page 192 for detailed information. If PreScan is enabled for the partition, that process is used instead of the more basic Media Auto Discovery. See MLM PreScan and PostScan on page 164 for information about the PreScan feature. Note: If you do not enable Media Auto Discovery, you can start the discovery process for a specific partition manually. See Starting or Stopping Media Auto Discovery on page 181 for instructions. OR You can let the BlueScale firmware to discover MLM-enabled tapes the first time they are loaded and unloaded from an MLM-enabled drive during normal operations.
Maximum Tape Loads Before Warning
10,000 loads
Enable Media Auto Discovery
Disabled (Unchecked)
February 2011
172
Configuring MLM Settings Default Setting None (Disabled)
Option Convert to Broadcast Hours
Description Changes the way MLM capacity is displayed to use a broadcast-centric method based on hours of programming used and hours of programing remaining instead of raw capacity. See Configuring Raw Capacity to Display as Broadcast Capacity on page 174 for detailed information. Configures periods of time during which the automatic PostScan process does not operate. See Configuring PostScan Blackout Periods on page 176 for detailed instructions.
PostScan Blackout Periods
Zero (0) (Disabled)
4. Select Save to enable the selected MLM features.
Configuring Media Auto Discovery

Media Auto Discovery must be enabled before the library will automatically discover newly imported LTO media and add it to the MLM database. Notes: Media Auto Discovery requires bar-code labeled cartridges. The Media Auto Discovery process identifies both MLMenabled media and media that is not MLM-enabled media. Use the following steps to enable Media Auto Discovery. 1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > More Options > Media Lifecycle Management. The Media Lifecycle Management Settings screen displays. 3. Make sure that Enable Lifecycle Management is selected (see Figure 89 on page 174).
February 2011
173
4. Select Enable Media Auto Discovery and enter the number of minutes that you want the library to be idle following the last import of media before initiating the Media Auto Discovery process.
Figure 89 Enabling Media Auto Discovery screen. 5. Select Save. Note: If you enable PreScan for the partition, the Media Auto Discovery process is replaced by the more in depth PreScan process (see Configure MLM PreScan and PostScan on page 233) for that partition.
Configuring Raw Capacity to Display as Broadcast Capacity

If desired, you can configure the library to use a broadcast-centric method for displaying capacity in terms hours of content used and total hours of content available instead of raw capacity for all MLM-enabled media. 1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > More Options > Media Lifecycle Management. The Media Lifecycle Management Settings screen displays.
February 2011
174
3. Select the method for converting to broadcast capacity from the Convert to Broadcast Hours drop-down list.
Figure 90 The MLM Broadcast Hours screen. 4. The choice that you make in the Broadcast Hours field automatically selects a default Override Broadcast Bit Rate. If necessary, change the Override Broadcast Bit Rate as required for your environment. The default value for the broadcast bit rate depends on the Broadcast Hours conversion you selected.
Important
If you select none in the Convert to Broadcast Hours field, leave the Override Broadcast Bit Rate value set to 0.
February 2011
175
5. Select Save. The Filled Capacity bar graph on the General Status screen changes to reflect hours of content based on the settings for Convert to Broadcast Hours.
Figure 91 The General Status screen with capacity shown as Hours of Content.
Configuring PostScan Blackout Periods

If desired, you can configure blackout periods during which the automatic PostScan process does not operate. Configuring blackout periods ensures that during your backup window, all of the tapes in the partition are immediately available and ensures a Global Spare drive is available if needed.
Important
The blackout periods you configure apply to all of the partitions in the library. If PostScan is actively verifying a tape at the time the blackout period starts, it completes the current scan. No additional tapes are scanned until the blackout period expires.
Use the following steps to configure the PostScan blackout periods. 1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > More Options > Media Lifecycle Management. The Media Lifecycle Management Settings screen displays.
February 2011
176
3. In the PostScan Blackout Periods pane, use the Start and Stop dropdown lists to set the start and end times for the blackout period for each day of the week. Notes: Times are based on a 24-hour clock, where 0:00 is midnight. To disable the blackout period for a specific day, set both Start and Stop to 0:00. By default, the blackout periods are all set to 0 (disabled). The PostScan process will run whenever there are tapes in the PostScan queue and a Global Spare drive is available.
Figure 92 Enabling Media Auto Discovery screen. 4. Select Save. 5. Enable PostScan for individual partitions by configuring one or more PostScan triggers (see Configure MLM PreScan and PostScan on page 233).
February 2011
177
Implementing Media Lifecycle Management
IMPLEMENTING MEDIA LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT

After you configure the MLM features you want to use (see Configuring MLM Settings on page 170), you are ready to begin using MLM to track and monitor the LTO media in the library.
Addressing Media Requirements

Spectra Certified LTO Media with MLM support has been available from Spectra Logic since November 15, 2007. The following table summarizes the level of information reported through MLM for media purchased before and after MLM became available. Note: Spectra Certified LTO-5 media included MLM support with full reported when it was released.
Spectra Certified LTO-3, LTO-4, or LTO-5 Media Drive Type LTO-5 a LTO-4 LTO-2 or LTO-3 LTO-1 a. The LTO-5 drive does not support LTO-3 media. Born-on date is before November 15, 2007 Limited Reporting Limited Reporting Limited Reporting Born-on date is after November 15, 2007 Full Reporting Full Reporting Non-MLM-Enabled Media Limited Reporting Limited Reporting
Limited Reporting Not Supported
February 2011
178
Adding Media to the MLM Database

The LTO cartridges used in the library are not added to the MLM database until they have been discovered. The process you use to discover cartridges and add them to the MLM database depends on when you purchased your library, what version of the BlueScale firmware the library is using, and when you loaded the cartridges into the library.
Important
If a cartridge is write-protected when it is inserted into a drive, the library cannot update the MLM information on the cartridges MAM.
Notes:
Spectra Logic recommends always keeping your library updated to the most current version of BlueScale. Media Auto Discovery cannot begin while the library is actively loading media into drives. If you import media during this time, the library posts a failure message stating that no drives are available. Either wait until the library is idle before importing media or start the discovery process for imported media manually when the library is idle. If your previously-purchased MLM-enabled media does not appear in the MLM database after the discovery process is complete or if you receive an MLM alert that non-certified media was loaded, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support for assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
The following table provides information about different possible scenarios for adding cartridges to the MLM database.
If you... Purchased your library after BlueScale 10.4 was released in the fall of 2008 and you purchased Spectra Certified Media with MLM support at the same time, Do this to add the cartridges to the MLM database... 1. Enable MLM for the library (see Configuring MLM Settings on page 170). 2. Temporarily enable the alert about non-MLM-enabled media on the Media Lifecycle Management Settings screen. The alert is disabled by default. 3. Import media into the partitions to start the Media Auto Discovery process. 4. When the discovery process is complete, disable the alert about non-MLM-enabled media, if desired.
February 2011
179
Chapter 7 Media Lifecycle Management If you... Have an existing library that does not have BlueScale 10.4 or later installed and: you began using MLMenabled Spectra Certified LTO media when it became available but before BlueScale10.4 introduced the MLM functionality in the fall of 2008, OR you began using a mixture of MLM-enabled and nonMLM-enabled Spectra Certified LTO media before the MLM functionality was introduced in BlueScale10.4,
Do this to add the cartridges to the MLM database... 1. Update the library firmware update to the most current BlueScale firmware (BlueScale10.4 or later). See Updating Library Firmware on page 428 for instructions. 2. Enable MLM for the library (see Configuring MLM Settings on page 170). 3. Temporarily enable the alert about non-MLM-enabled media on the Media Lifecycle Management Settings screen. The alert is disabled by default. 4. Discover the media in the library using one of the following methods: Import new media into the partitions to start the Media Auto Discovery process. If you do not want to wait until new media is imported to have the existing media added to the MLM database, start the discovery process manually (see Starting or Stopping Media Auto Discovery). Manually load each cartridge into an LTO-4 or LTO-5 drive and then unload it (see Moving Media Within a Partition on page 154). Let the library update the MLM database as part of normal operation. The information for each cartridge will be added to the MLM database the first time the cartridge is loaded into and then unloaded from an LTO-4 or LTO-5 drive. 5. When the initial discovery process is complete, disable the alert about non-MLM-enabled media, if desired. 1. Configure one or more partitions to use the PostScan triggers (see Configure MLM PreScan and PostScan on page 233). 2. Discover the media in the library using one of the following methods: Import new media into the partitions to start the Media Auto Discovery process. If you do not want to wait until new media is imported to have the existing media added to the MLM database, start the discovery process manually (see Starting or Stopping Media Auto Discovery). Manually load each cartridge into an LTO-4 or LTO-5 drive and then unload it (see Moving Media Within a Partition on page 154). Let the library update the MLM database as part of normal operation. The information for each cartridge will be added to the MLM database the first time the cartridge is loaded into and then unloaded from an LTO-4 or LTO-5 drive.
Have been using MLMenabled media in a library that has BlueScale 10.4 or later installed but have just recently enabled MLM,
February 2011
180
Starting or Stopping Media Auto Discovery
STARTING OR STOPPING MEDIA AUTO DISCOVERY

If you enabled MLM when the library already contained MLM-enabled media and do not want to wait until new media is imported to have the existing media added to the MLM database, you can start the discovery process manually. You can also use this manual discovery process if you chose not to enable Media Auto Discovery (see Configuring Media Auto Discovery on page 173).
Important
If a cartridge is write-protected when it is inserted into a drive, the library cannot update the MLM information on the cartridges MAM.
Notes:
If the PreScan feature is enabled for the partition where you want to manually start the discovery, the discovery process uses PreScan to perform a more a more detailed examination of the media (see Using PreScan on page 183). Spectra Logic highly recommends that you perform the manual discovery process when your backup application is not accessing the library and the library is idle.
Starting Manual Discovery

Follow these steps to manually initiate the discovery process. 1. Enable Media Lifecycle Management (see Configuring MLM Settings on page 170). After MLM is enabled, you are ready to initiate the discovery process. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > MLM. The Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen displays. Notes: If all of the media in the library has previously been discovered, the Discover Media button is grayed out. The Download MLM DB button is only available when you access the library using the BlueScale web interface.
Figure 93 Discover Media on the MLM Tools screen.
February 2011
181
Starting or Stopping Media Auto Discovery
3. Select Discover Media to start the manual discovery process. 4. Choose the partition containing the MLM media you want to discover and select Next.
Figure 94 The Media Discovery Partition screen. 5. Select OK to begin the discovery process.
Figure 95 The Start Media Discovery screen. 6. Select OK to confirm that the process started and return to the Media Lifecycle Tools screen.
Figure 96 The Media Discovery Start Results screen.
February 2011
182
Using PreScan
Stopping the Discovery Process

Select Stop Discovery on the Media Lifecycle Tools if you need to interrupt the process.
Figure 97 Stop Discovery on the MLM Tools screen.
USING PRESCAN
PreScan is a background process that automatically inserts each newly imported LTO cartridge into an available LTO-4 or LTO-5 tape drive assigned to the data partition containing the cartridge. The drive loads the media into the tape path, and checks it to determine whether it has any of the following characteristics: Non-MLM-enabled Broken or dislodged leader Red media health Write protected Encrypted tape with a moniker not currently stored in the library When the PreScan operation is complete, the library stores the tape health information into the MLM database. When the drive ejects the cartridge, the library returns it to its original slot. Note: Auto drive clean operations will not start while PreScan is running on a multi-partition library. If a drive in one of the partitions requires cleaning, wait until the PreScan operation is complete and then manually clean the drive.
Enabling PreScan
PreScan is enabled when you configure a partition (see Configure MLM PreScan and PostScan on page 233). When it is enabled, it replaces the more basic Media Auto Discovery process for newly imported media.
February 2011
183
Using PostScan
Starting a Manual PreScan

As with Media Auto Discovery, you can manually start the PreScan process if you enabled MLM when the library already contained MLM-enabled media and do not want to wait until new media is imported to discover it. You can also pause the PreScan process. See Starting or Stopping Media Auto Discovery on page 181 for instructions.
USING POSTSCAN
PostScan is a background process that uses a Global Spare or an LTO-5 drive in the partition to check each LTO cartridge in the partition for media errors that can impact the restorability of the data. The PostScan process is performed by the library independent of the backup application normally used to read and write data to the tape. Notes: Although a Global Spare drive can be shared by multiple partitions, assigning a separate Global Spare drive to each partition is recommended. Each partition can then perform PostScan whenever the prerequisites are met, without waiting for PostScan in another partition to complete. Because the backup software can potentially request a tape that is currently undergoing verification, you can configure blackout periods during which the PostScan operation is suspended. Configuring blackout periods ensure that PostScan does not operate during your normal backup window. The blackout periods apply to all of the data partitions in the library. See Configuring PostScan Blackout Periods on page 176 for instructions.
February 2011
184
Using PostScan
Overview of the PostScan Process

The following sections describe how the PostScan process operates.
Prerequisites for Starting PostScan

When an MLM-enabled cartridge meets the PostScan trigger criteria configured for the partition, the cartridge is added to the PostScan queue. The queue is processed in a first-in-first-out (FIFO) basis.
Important
When using automatic PostScan to check your cartridges, configure your backup software to allow at least 15 minutes for a requested move to complete. If a cartridge is in the process of being scanned when it is requested for a backup or restore operation, it must be unloaded from the Global spare and moved to another drive before the move request is reported as complete.Timeout
Note: The automatic PostScan triggers only apply to MLM-enabled LTO cartridges. LTO cartridges that are not MLM-enabled must be manually added to the PostScan queue (see Requesting a Manual PostScan on page 189). Before beginning the PostScan process, the library verifies that the following prerequisites have been met: The system has been idle for the period of time specified for the partition (see Configure MLM PreScan and PostScan on page 233). The library is not currently in a PostScan blackout period (see Configuring PostScan Blackout Periods on page 176). A Global Spare drive assigned to the partition is available. OR An LTO-5 drive in the partition has just unloaded a cartridge following a backup operation.
February 2011
185
Using PostScan
Cartridge Processing
If the prerequisites are met, the library inserts the first cartridge in the PostScan queue into the chosen drive. Depending on the PostScan option selected for the partition, the drive loads the tape into the tape path and begins one of the following operations to check for media errors. The cartridges in the PostScan queue are processed in a first-in-first-out (FIFO) basis. Note: PostScan reads the data on the tape but does not process this data into a usable form. It simply verifies that it can read the data from the tape.
This PostScan option... FullScan Uses... A Global Spare drive assigned to the partition. FullScan verifies all the data on the tape, from beginning of tape up to the end of the recorded data (EOD) or the physical end of the tape, whichever comes first. Notes: If the partition uses LTO-4 drives, FullScan is the only available option. A Global Spare drive must be assigned to the partition. The cartridge does not appear on the BlueScale inventory screens while it is being scanned. If the cartridge is requested by the backup software it is immediately ejected from the drive that is performing the verification and moved to the location requested by the backup software. A system message is posted to indicate that the FullScan operation was interrupted. The cartridge is returned to the top of the PostScan queue and will be the first one processed after it is returned to its slot. The Global Spare drive cannot be activated while FullScan is running. You must first pause PostScan process (see Pausing the PostScan Process on page 191). The library immediately aborts the FullScan currently in progress and returns the cartridge to its original location. You can then activate the Global Spare drive (see Activating the Global Spare Tape Drive on page 121). The aborted FullScan process will resume when the Global Spare drive again available. The time to complete a FullScan depends on the type of data on the tape and whether it was written using fixed- or variable-length blocks.
February 2011
186
Chapter 7 Media Lifecycle Management This PostScan option... QuickScan Uses...
Using PostScan
One of the LTO-5 drives in the partition. QuickScan verifies all the data on a single wrap, from beginning of tape up to the end of the wrap or the end of recorded data (EOD), whichever comes first. Notes: If possible, the library avoids using the drive in which the cartridge was most recently unloaded to perform the QuickScan. If a Global Spare tape drive is not assigned to the partition, a QuickScan using one of the partitions drive is the only option available. While QuickScan is running, all moves in the partition delayed until the scan is complete. Only one move can be performed on a partition at a time. QuickScans will not resume until all of the prerequisites are again met. A QuickScan using a partition drive is limited to three minutes. If the QuickScan exceeds this time limit, the operation is aborted and the cartridge is returned to its slot. The library posts a message stating that the QuickScan failed. Use FullScan to verify the cartridge. An LTO-5 Global Spare drive. QuickScan verifies all the data on a single wrap, from beginning of tape up to the end of the wrap or the end of recorded data (EOD), whichever comes first. Notes: A Global Spare tape drive must be assigned to the partition. The cartridge does not appear on the BlueScale inventory screens while it is being scanned. If the cartridge is requested by the backup software it is immediately ejected from the drive that is performing the verification and moved to the location requested by the backup software. A system message is posted to indicate that the QuickScan operation was interrupted. The cartridge is returned to the top of the PostScan queue and will be the first one processed after it is returned to its slot. The Global Spare drive cannot be activated while a QuickScan using Global Spares is running. You must first pause PostScan process (see Pausing the PostScan Process on page 191). The library immediately aborts the QuickScan currently in progress and returns the cartridge to its original location. You can then activate the Global Spare drive (see Activating the Global Spare Tape Drive on page 121). The aborted QuickScan process will resume when the Global Spare drive is again available. A QuickScan using a Global Spare drive is limited to ten minutes. If the QuickScan exceeds this time limit, the operation is aborted and the cartridge is returned to its slot. The library posts a message stating that the QuickScan failed. Use FullScan to verify the cartridge.
QuickScan using a Global Spare
February 2011
187
Using PostScan
Completing the Process

When the PostScan process on a cartridge is complete, the library writes the scan date and pass/fail test result to the cartridge MAM and updates the MLM database with the scan date, the pass/fail test result, and when (or if) the next scan should occur. The drive then unloads the cartridge and the library returns it to its original slot. The library then posts a system message showing that the cartridge has been scanned. If the QuickScan used a partition drive, the library reports that the unload move for the backup operation that preceded a QuickScan is complete. After a cartridge is unloaded from a Global Spare drive following a PostScan verification, the library checks to see if the drive requires cleaning. If cleaning is required and a cleaning partition is associated with the data partition, the drive is cleaned before the next cartridge is processed. Note: If a cleaning partition is not present, periodically check the Drives screen to determine whether cleaning is required. Clean the drive as described in How to Proceed on page 449.
Operating the Library During PostScan

You cannot perform the following operations in the partition while either a FullScan or a QuickScan using Global Spare drives is running: Use the Global Spare drive being used by PostScan to replace a malfunctioning drive in the partition. Use the TAP to import cartridges into or export cartridges from the library. Use the BlueScale user interface to move a cartridge from one location to another. Change the library configuration. Create or modify partitions. If you need to perform any of these operations or if you need to reset the library, you can pause the PostScan process for one hour (see Pausing the PostScan Process on page 191). The library returns any cartridges currently being scanned to their original locations. After an hour has passed, the library restarts the PostScan operation on the tape that was being verified at the time of the interruption when all of the prerequisites have been met (see Prerequisites for Starting PostScan on page 185).
Enabling PostScan
PostScan is enabled by selecting one or more trigger criteria when you configure a partition (see Configure MLM PreScan and PostScan on page 233). The available PostScan options depending on whether the partition uses LTO-4 or LTO-5 tape drives and whether or not a Global Spare tape drive is assigned to the partition.
188
Using PostScan
Requesting a Manual PostScan

The automatic PostScan triggers only add MLM-enabled LTO data cartridges to the PostScan queue. However, cartridges can also be added to the PostScan queue manually. This is especially useful if your library contains LTO cartridges that are not MLM-enabled. You can also use the manual PostScan process to verify a suspect MLM-enabled cartridge even if it has previously been scanned. Cartridges that are manually added to the PostScan queue are processed before cartridges that were added as a result of the trigger criteria for the partition. They are processed using the PostScan option that was specified for the partition. Follow these steps to manually add a cartridge to the PostScan queue. 1. Enable Media Lifecycle Management if it is not already enabled (see Configuring MLM Settings on page 170). 2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > MLM. The Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen displays. Notes: If all of the media in the library has previously been discovered, the Discover Media button is grayed out. The Download MLM DB button is only available when you access the library using the BlueScale web interface.
Figure 98 Manual PostScan on the MLM Tools screen.
February 2011
189
Using PostScan
3. Select Manual PostScan. The MLM Manual PostScan screen displays.
Figure 99 Choose media on the MLM PostScan screen. 4. If the media is in a partition other than the one currently displayed, select the desired partition from the Partition drop-down list, then select Go. Note: The PostScan feature cannot be used on a cleaning partition. The Source pane refreshes to display a list of the media in the requested location type. The list shows the name of the location (for example, the slot number) and the bar-code label information for the cartridge in that location. 5. Select the cartridge that you want to check for media errors. You can select the cartridge either from the Source list, by entering its bar code, or by entering the slot number where it is located.
To select a cartridge using the... Source list Slot number
Follow these steps... Scroll through the list of available media and select the desired cartridge. 1. Enter the slot number for the cartridge you want to verify in the View Source Slot field. 2. Select Go. The Source inventory list refreshes to show the requested slot selected at the top of the Source list.
February 2011
190
Chapter 7 Media Lifecycle Management To select a cartridge using the... Bar-code label information
Using PostScan
Follow these steps... 1. Enter the bar-code label information for the cartridge you want to locate in the Find by Barcode field. 2. Select Find. The Source inventory list refreshes to show the requested cartridge selected at the top of the Source list. Notes: Make sure that you type the bar-code label information correctly to avoid selecting the wrong cartridge. Only the slots below the one that is currently highlighted in the source list are searched. To ensure that all of the slots are searched, scroll to the top of the source list and highlight the first slot before selecting Find.
6. Select Add to add the cartridge in the highlighted slot to the Tape List. 7. Repeat Step 4 though Step 6 to add additional tapes to the Tape List. Note: To remove a cartridge from the Tape List, highlight the cartridge and select Delete. To remove all of the cartridges from the Tape List, select Delete All. 8. Select Submit to add the tapes in the Tape List to the PostScan queue.
Pausing the PostScan Process

If you need to perform any of these operations listed in Operating the Library During PostScan on page 188 or if you need to reset the library, you can pause the PostScan process. The library returns any cartridges currently being scanned to their original locations. Notes: The pause affects all partitions that are configured to use PostScan. The PostScan process automatically resumes one hour after the pause.
February 2011
191
Using MLM Reporting
Use the following steps to pause PostScan. 1. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > MLM. The Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen displays. Note: The Pause PostScan button is only present if the PostScan process is running.
Figure 100 Pause PostScan on the MLM Tools screen. 2. Select Pause PostScan to pause the PostScan operation for one hour so that you can use the Global Spare or perform other library operations. After an hour has passed, the library restarts the PostScan operation on the tape that was being verified at the time of the interruption. Note: The prerequisites listed on page 185 must be met.
USING MLM REPORTING

After the LTO media in your library is included in the MLM database, you are ready to make use of this powerful tool to manage, track, and report all facets of tape usage from creation to retirement.
Generating Reports
To generate reports about the media in your library, follow these steps: 1. Log into the library. 2. From the toolbar menu, select General > More Options > Media Lifecycle Management. The Media Lifecycle Management Report screen displays (Figure 101 on page 194). Note: You can also click on Filled Capacity bar graph on the General Status screen (Figure 87 on page 162). 3. Select either Total Library or a specific partition from the Partition dropdown list, and then select Go.
February 2011
192
Using MLM Reporting
By default, the Media Lifecycle Management Report screen shows a Media Health report for all Spectra Certified Media with MLM support in the library. 4. Select the type of report you want from the Report drop-down list. Note: Information about MLM-enabled cleaning cartridges only appears in the Exported Media, Cleans Remaining, and Born on Date reports.
Option Media Health Description For MLM-enabled cartridges, shows the bar code label information, the overall health (media health), and the load count (the number of times the MLM-enabled cartridge has been loaded into a tape drive) for each data cartridge in the selected location. For non-MLM-enabled cartridges, shows the bar code label information and whether the cartridge appears to be usable or unusable. Important: The algorithm used to determine media health in LTO-5 drives differs from the one used for LTO-4 drives. As a result, when LTO-4 media that was previously used in an LTO-4 drive is used in an LTO 5 drive, the reported media health will initially appear to be different from what was reported by the LTO-4 drive. When the media is consistently loaded into LTO 5 drives, the health score becomes more accurate during subsequent load/unloads as current usage statistics are updated and used in the tape's health scoring. To maintain consistent media health statistics for your LTO-4 media, Spectra Logic recommends that you do not routinely share LTO-4 media between LTO-4 and LTO 5 drives. Remaining Capacity Shows the remaining capacity and maximum capacity for each MLM-enabled data cartridge. The remaining capacity reflects the native capacity of the cartridge, not the compressed capacity. Notes: The remaining capacity and maximum capacity on a cartridge is displayed as GB or TB. This report is not available for non-MLM-enabled cartridges. Shows the load count for each MLM-enabled data cartridge in the selected location and the born on date (the date on which Spectra Logic enabled the cartridge to support MLM tracking and reporting). Note: This report is not available for non-MLM-enabled cartridges. Shows the number of soft errors and the load count for each MLM-enabled data cartridge. Note: This report is not available for non-MLM-enabled cartridges. Shows the number of cleanings remaining and the born on date for any MLMenabled cleaning cartridges. Note: This report is not available for non-MLM-enabled cartridges. Shows the date that the MLM-enabled cartridge (both data and cleaning) was created and certified by Spectra Logic and the load count for each cartridge. Note: This report is not available for non-MLM-enabled cartridges.
Load Count
Write Errors
Cleans Remaining
Born on Date
February 2011
193
Chapter 7 Media Lifecycle Management Option Exported Media Description
Using MLM Reporting
Lists the MLM-enabled media (both data and cleaning) that has been exported from the library, sorted by the export time (oldest first). The report also shows the user name of the person who exported the media. Note: This report is not available for non-MLM-enabled cartridges. Shows the time and date for the most recent write and read operations for each MLM-enabled data cartridge. Note: This report is not available for non-MLM-enabled cartridges.
Last Write Time Last Read TIme
5. Select Go. The Media Lifecycle Management Report screen refreshes to display the selected report with a list of the bar-code labels for all media in the selected location. A media health icon indicates the overall health of each piece of MLM-enabled LTO media, as of the last time it was loaded into a tape drive. Note: Heath icons are not used with LTO media that is not MLMenabled.
MLM health icons
Figure 101 The Media Lifecycle Management Report screen.
February 2011
194
Using MLM Reporting
The following table describes the meaning of each media health icon. Select the bar code next to the icon to view detailed information about that specific piece of media.
Icon Health score 100 80 Meaning The media health is Good. Data cartridge: The media is in good condition and operating properly. The cartridge can be used for writing new data and reading previously written data. Cleaning cartridge: More than ten cleaning cycles remain on the cartridge. The media health is Average. Data cartridge: When the Health graph on the Details screen for the cartridge falls below a health score of 80, the media health icon changes from green to yellow (generally due to normal aging). For maximum reliability, only use the cartridge for restores. Cleaning cartridge: The cleaning cartridge is near expiration. From one to ten cleaning cycles remain. The media health is Poor. Data cartridge: When the Health graph on the Details screen for the cartridge falls below a health score of 50, the media health icon changes to red. The combination of media errors, tape age, and usage indicate that the media has reached the end of its useful life for reliable data backups and restores and should be retired. If you are experiencing an unexpected number of cartridges with poor media health, you may want to investigate further: Review the media health data for each cartridge to see if it has a high error rate. A high error rate can indicate either that the media health is poor and the cartridge should be retired or that the cartridge has been written to by a tape drive that is having trouble. If multiple cartridges with high error rates have been written to by the same tape drive, the tape drive may be the source of the errors. Clean the tape drive or, if necessary, replace it. If the cartridge has a high error rate that cannot be attributed to a tape drive or environmental factors, retire it. Note: If the source of the high error rate is a tape drive, the media health icon for the affected cartridges should return to either green or yellow after approximately three load/read or write/unload cycles in a known good drive. Cleaning cartridge: The cleaning cartridge is expired. No more cleaning cycles remain. Replace the cleaning cartridge. The media health is Unknown. The status of the media cannot be determined.
79 50
49 0
February 2011
195
Using MLM Reporting
6. To view detailed information about a specific cartridge, click on the bar code in the Media Lifecycle Management Report screen. Alternatively, enter the bar-code label information for the cartridge in the Find By Barcode field (see Figure 101 on page 194) and select Enter. The Details screen for the selected cartridge displays. Note: Media health is based on the MLM-tracked history of the cartridge. The heath indicated by the Health graph may fluctuate until the cartridge has been loaded six times.
Health graph
Figure 102 The detailed report for the selected media. 7. Select Previous to return to the main Media Lifecycle Management Report screen (Figure 101 on page 194).
Saving a Report
You can choose to save a copy of the MLM report, which is a commaseparated text file (*.rpt), to a USB drive, mail the saved report to previously configured email recipient, or both. If desired, you can zip the file before saving it. 1. Generate the desired report as described in Generating Reports on page 192. 2. If you want to save the MLM report to a USB drive, connect the drive to the LCMs USB port before continuing. Note: The option to save the report to USB is only available if you plug a USB drive in to the LCMs USB port before you select Save Report on the Media Lifecycle Management Report screen.
February 2011
196
Using MLM Reporting
3. Select Save Report to display the Save Media Lifecycle Management Report screen.
Figure 103 The Save Media Lifecycle Management Report screen. 4. Select the data to include in the saved report and how you want the report saved. Note: If you want to email the report, the intended recipient must be a previously configured mail user (see Configuring Mail Users on page 300).
Option Report All Media Lifecycle Data Description Saves a report containing all of the available detailed MLM data for MLMenabled media in the selected location (a specific partition or total library). Note: Depending on the number of cartridges in the selected location, this report can be quite large. Saves only the fields displayed in the report that you selected on the Media Lifecycle Management Report screen (Figure 101 on page 194). Note: The headings in the saved report reflect the fields displayed in the report you select in the Media Lifecycle Management Report screen. Saves the report as a zip file which is compatible with standard file compression software (for example, WinZip). Zipping the report is especially useful when emailing the Report All Media Lifecycle Data report. Sends the report to a previously configured mail user. Use the drop-down list to select the recipient for the report file. Note: Do not use the default autosupport@spectralogic.com email user. Spectra Logic does not save emailed MLM report files unless they are specifically requested for troubleshooting.
Report Selected Data
Zip Report
Mail Report to
February 2011
197
Chapter 7 Media Lifecycle Management Option Save to USB Description
Using MLM Reporting
Save the report to the USB drive. Notes: The USB option is only available if you plugged a USB drive in to the LCMs USB port before you selected Save Report on the Media Lifecycle Management Report screen. If you unzip the report using the standard format used by most file-zipping applications, the application creates the following directory structure: *\hard disk\lc\reports.
5. Select Save to send the report to the selected destination. Select Previous to return to the Media Lifecycle Management Report screen without sending the report.
Overriding a Poor Cartridge Health Report

Under certain circumstances you may need to override the health of an MLM-enabled cartridge that is reported as poor (a red health icon appears next to the cartridge barcode). Along with the red health icon, a green arrow button used to override the reported health also appears. During the reset process, the library progressively eliminates any recent hard errors from the tape health calculation. If the health is still red, all hard errors are eliminated from the tape health calculation. The library continues to use this adjusted tape health until the cartridge health returns to either Good or Average as part of the normal health monitoring.
Important
Do not reset the cartridge health unless you are specifically directed to do so by Spectra Logic Technical Support. Do not reset the cartridge health unless you believe that the reported poor health is due to tape drive problems and not the cartridge.
Use the following steps to reset the health of a single cartridge. 1. Display the Media Lifecycle Reports screen as described in Generating Reports on page 192. 2. Locate the bar code of the cartridge for which you need to reset the health.
February 2011
198
Using MLM Reporting
3. Click the green arrow button for the cartridge. The library adjusts parameters used to calculate the tape health until the reported health is Average.
Override MLM health
Figure 104 Overriding the reported health for an MLM-enabled LTO cartridge. 4. Attempt to resolve the issues that were causing the media health to be reported as poor.
February 2011
199
Managing the MLM Database
MANAGING THE MLM DATABASE

The MLM database contains the usage history, health, the verification data for all of MLM-enabled media in your library. It also contains the Drive Lifecycle Management data for all of the drives in your library (see Monitoring Drive Health Using DLM on page 212).
Best Practices
As a part of best disaster recovery planning and practices, Spectra Logic strongly recommends backing up the MLM database to a USB drive or emailing it to a preconfigured mail recipient after using MLM for some period of time. In the event of a disaster, you can use the backup to restore the MLM database information for the media in your library instead of rebuilding it by loading each cartridge into a drive (see Restoring the MLM and DLM Databases on page 204).
Important
The automatic weekly auto-save file reflects the state of the MLM database at the time the backup was created. If MLM-enabled media is imported into or exported from the library during the period between the automatic weekly auto-save operations, the backup of the MLM database may not accurately reflect the librarys inventory. If you plan to import or export a large number of MLM-enabled cartridges, backup the MLM database using the procedure described in this section when you are finished to ensure that you have a backup that accurately reflects the information in the database.
Notes:
Backing up the MLM database also backs up the DLM database. For extra security, the librarys Auto Configuration Save feature automatically backs up its configuration and the MLM and DLM databases to the LCM compact flash card once a week and whenever a partition is created or modified. If email for the auto-save backup is configured, the backups are emailed to the designated recipient (see Enabling Email for the Automatic Configuration Save Feature on page 302). See Using the Auto Save Configuration Feature on page 308 for detailed information about the Auto Configuration Save feature.
February 2011
200
Deciding when and how often you back up the MLM database depends on many factors, including how often tapes are loaded into a tape drive. If all of the tapes are loaded into drives frequently, the MLM database can be rebuilt relatively quickly. The database can be backed up less frequently. If many of the tapes remain in the library without being loaded into a drive for a long period of time, or if tapes are exported and stay outside of the library for a long period of time, rebuilding the MLM database can take a long time. Back up the MLM database more frequently.
Backing Up the MLM and DLM Databases

Based on your environment, determine how frequently backups are needed, then use the following steps to create a backup. You can choose to save the backup to a USB drive or send it as an email attachment to a previously configured mail recipient. 1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. Select Maintenance > Tools > Utilities. The Utilities screen displays. 3. Select Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen displays. 4. Select Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show the advanced Utilities screen. 5. Scroll down and select Save MLM Database. The screen refreshes to show the details for the utility.
Figure 105 The Save MLM Database utility.
February 2011
201
6. Use the Select the Destination drop-down list to choose the destination for the saved file. Note: To send the file to someone who is not already listed as a library mail user, you must first configure that person as an email recipient as described in Configuring Mail Users on page 300.
Select this option... Save MLM Database to USB Mail MLM Database to... To... Backup the MLM database to a USB drive. Send the MLM database file as an email attachment to the specified mail recipient. Note: Do not use the default autosupport@spectralogic.com email recipient. Spectra Logic does not save emailed files unless they are specifically requested for troubleshooting.
7. If you want to compress the file to make it smaller, select Compress files. 8. If you want to save the MLM database to a USB drive, connect the drive to the LCMs USB port before continuing. 9. Select Run Utility. After a brief delay, the Utility Results screen displays, showing that the database file was either saved or sent. 10. Proceed to Verifying the Database Backup File.
February 2011
202
Verifying the Database Backup File

After backing up the MLM database, use one of the procedures in the following table to confirm that the backup file was generated. Make sure the file is more than 0 bytes in size.
If the backup was... Saved to a USB Drive Follow these steps... 1. Plug the USB drive into a PC that is not connected to the library. 2. Examine the list of files on the USB drive and locate the SavedMLMDB folder. 3. Open the folder to verify that: It contains a file called cminfo_<date-time>.zdt OR
cminfo_<date-time>.dat
where date-time is the time stamp for when the backup was created. AND The file is more than 0 bytes in size. 4. If a file with the format is present and is more than 0 bytes in size, the database backup was successful and the file is usable. Store the USB drive in a safe location. 5. If the MLM database file is not present or if it is 0 bytes in size, repeat the backup process (Best Practices on page 200) using a different USB drive. Sent as an Email Attachment 1. Open the email attachment and verify that: The attachment contains a zip file called cminfo_<date-time>.zdt AND The file is more than 0 bytes in size. 2. If the zip file is present, the backup was successful and is usable. Save the email attachment to a safe location from which you can copy it to a USB drive, if needed. 3. If the zip file is not present, repeat the backup process (Best Practices on page 200) to generate the email again.
February 2011
203
Restoring the MLM and DLM Databases

Use the following steps to restore the MLM database from a previously saved backup that was created using the Save MLM Database utility (see Backing Up the MLM and DLM Databases on page 201). Notes: Restoring the MLM database also restores the DLM database. You can also restore the MLM and DLM databases using an automatically generated library configuration backup file (see Restoring From an Auto Save Configuration File on page 378). 1. If you plan to restore using the MLM database backup file that was sent as an email attachment, use the following instructions to copy the file to a USB drive; otherwise, skip to Step 2. a. Create a folder called SavedMLMDB on a USB drive. b. Copy the cminfo_<date-time>.dat file to the SavedMLMDB folder on the USB drive. 2. Plug the USB drive containing the MLM database backup file into the USB port on the LCM before continuing. 3. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 4. Select Maintenance > Tools > Utilities. The Utilities screen displays. 5. Select Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen displays. 6. Select Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show the advanced Utilities screen. 7. Scroll down and select Restore MLM Database from USB. The screen refreshes to show the details for the utility.
Figure 106 The Restore MLM Database from USB utility.
February 2011
204
8. Use the drop-down list to select the cminfo_<date-time>.dat file containing the MLM database backup you want to use for the restore. 9. Select Run Utility. After a brief delay, the Utility Results screen displays, showing that the database was restored.
Deleting MLM Records From the Database

The MLM database is restricted to a maximum of 10,000 records. When this limit is reached, records are automatically deleted on a first-in, firstout (FIFO) basis. When a tape is retired or permanently exported from the library, you can manually delete its record from the MLM database. Records can be deleted individually or as a group.
Delete an Individual Record

If you only need to delete one or two cartridges from the MLM database, you can use the Media Lifecycle Report screen to delete individual records. 1. Display the Media Lifecycle Reports screen as described in Generating Reports on page 192. 2. Locate the bar code of the cartridge of the cartridge you want to remove from the MLM database. Note: An asterisk next to the bar code indicates that the cartridge has been exported from the library. 3. Click the trash can icon next to the bar code to delete the record.
Delete cartridge from the MLM database
Figure 107 Overriding the reported health for an MLM-enabled LTO cartridge. 4. Respond to the confirmation message to delete the record.
February 2011
205
Delete Multiple Records

Use the following steps if you need to delete multiple cartridges from the database. 1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > MLM. The Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen displays.
Figure 108 The Delete Records option on the MLM Tools screen. 3. Select Delete Records. The Delete MLM Records screen displays.
Figure 109 The Delete MLM Records screen. 4. Select the cartridge records you want to delete from the MLM database. Note: An asterisk (*) indicates that the cartridge has been exported from the library. 5. Select Delete Selected to remove the selected records from the MLM database.
February 2011
206
Downloading the Database as a CSV File

If desired, you can download the MLM database as a comma-separatedvalue (CSV) file. You can then open the file in any software application that supports this type of file (for example, spreadsheet software).
Important
The MLM database information contained in the CSV file cannot be used to restore the MLM database. Always maintain a current backup of the MLM database as described in Backing Up the MLM and DLM Databases on page 201.
Note: The Download MLM DB button is only available when you access the library using the BlueScale web interface (RLC). It is not available from the operator panel. 1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > MLM. The Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen displays.
Figure 110 The Download MLM DB option on the MLM Tools screen. 3. Select Download MLM DB. The Open file dialog box displays. Note: The appearance of this dialog box depends on the web browser you are using.
Figure 111 The Open file dialog box.
February 2011
207
4. Choose how you want to handle the file. Select Open with, choose the application you want to use to open the file, and then select OK to download and open the file. Select Save File > OK to save the database to a location that is accessible to the computer you are using to access the BlueScale web interface. 5. If you chose to save the file, a dialog box for specifying where you want to save the file displays.
Figure 112 The Windows Save file dialog box. a. Navigate to the location where you want to store the file. The available locations depend on the network to which the computer you use to access the BlueScale web interface is connected. b. If desired, change the default file name to something more meaningful in your environment. c. Select Save.
February 2011
208
6. To view the information stored in the MLM database, open the CSV file using a software program that supports this file type.
Figure 113 An example of the downloaded MLM database file (opened in Microsoft Excel).
February 2011
209
CHAPTER 8
Drive Lifecycle Management
This chapter describes how to use BlueScale Drive Lifecycle Management to proactively monitor the health of the LTO drives in your library.
Topic Enabling Drive Lifecycle Management Monitoring Drive Health Using DLM Using the Drive Health Icons Viewing a Detailed Heath Report Saving a Health Report Downloading the DLM Database Described beginning on... page 211 page 212 page 212 page 213 page 216 page 216
BlueScale Drive Lifecycle Management Overview this page
BLUESCALE DRIVE LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT OVERVIEW

This section provides an overview of how BlueScale Drive Lifecycle Management works in your library.
Important
The BlueScale Drive Lifecycle Management feature is only supported for LTO drives (LTO-2 and later).
BlueScale Drive Lifecycle Management (DLM) helps you identify drives that experience a high number of errors or other problems during operation. DLM is automatically enabled when Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) is enabled and cannot be used without MLM. See Chapter 7 Media Lifecycle Management for detailed information about enabling and using MLM.
210
Enabling Drive Lifecycle Management
Each time media is unloaded from a drive, the library collects the tape health data from the drive. This data includes soft or hard read/write errors, tape alerts, and flags generated during the time the most current cartridge was loaded in the drive. It also includes the current value for the drives single character display (SCD) and any errors detected at the time the tape is unloaded. In addition, the DLM data for the 50 most recently loaded tapes is stored in the MLM database. This data is used to generate an overall drive health status for the library, as well as health reports for each individual drive. You can view the DLM health information for each individual drive and, if necessary, use the built-in BlueScale drive test to clean the drive and then run a read/write performance test using a scratch tape. This test, when used in conjunction with other DLM data and MLM data, can help you determine whether a tape drive or the media is the source of the errors you are investigating. In addition to the reporting and testing functions, DLM also lets you reset the drive, which power cycles the drive, runs the internal drive diagnostics, and reinitializes it in the library.
ENABLING DRIVE LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT

Drive Lifecycle Management is automatically enabled when you enable Media Lifecycle Management (MLM). When DLM is enabled, the Drives icon under the Configuration toolbar changes to show that DLM is enabled. See Configuring MLM Settings on page 170 for information about enabling MLM. Note: See Resetting a Drive on page 388 and Adding or Replacing a Drive on page 463 for information about the other buttons on this screen.
DLM Drive icon
Figure 114 The DLM Drive icon in the Configuration toolbar.
February 2011
211
Monitoring Drive Health Using DLM
MONITORING DRIVE HEALTH USING DLM

The DLM health icons and detailed drive health reports help you monitor each drive in a partition.
Using the Drive Health Icons

Health status icons provide at-a-glance health information for the drives in the library. On the General Status screen, the drive health icon indicates the overall health for all of the drives in the selected partition (see Figure 33 on page 80). The drive health icons, visible on the Drives screen (Figure 114 on page 211) and the Drive Detail screen (Figure 115) indicate the overall health of individual drives. The following table describes the drive health status icons. Note: The drive health icon reflects data collected for the drive while the most current tape was loaded in the drive. This data consists of the code presented on the drives SCD, as well as tape alerts, and errors detected at the time the tape is unloaded. See Interpreting the Display Character Information on page 401 for detailed information about the SCD codes for LTO tape drives.
Icon Meaning The drive health is Good. The drive is operating normally. The drive requires Attention. Use the SCD code information on the Drive Details screen to determine the type of action required. See Interpreting the Display Character Information on page 401 to determine what action is needed to address the condition. The drive health is Poor. The drive has experienced an unrecoverable error or problem. Use the SCD code information on the Drive Details screen to determine the type of action required. See Interpreting the Display Character Information on page 401 to determine what action is needed to address the condition. If necessary, replace the drive. The drive health is Unknown. The status of the drive cannot be determined. Note: To refresh the drive health data, use the Update button on the Drive Lifecycle Management report screen (see Figure 116 on page 214).
February 2011
212
Viewing a Detailed Heath Report

Use the following steps to view a detailed health report for an individual drive. 1. Log into the library. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Drives to display the Drives screen (Figure 114 on page 211). 3. Click the Details button next to the drive for which you want to view more information. The Drive Details screen displays.
Figure 115 The Drive Details screen.
February 2011
213
4. Select DLM to view a detailed Drive Lifecycle Management report. Note: The DLM button is not present if DLM is not enabled (see Enabling Drive Lifecycle Management on page 211).
Current drive health
Tape summary
Tape history
Drive errors
Figure 116 The Drive Lifecycle Management report screen.

214
The Drive Lifecycle Management Report screen (see Figure 116 on page 214) is divided into four panes, which are described in the following table.
Important
This pane Drive Health Status Tape Summary
To ensure that you are viewing the most current data, select Update at the top of the Drive Lifecycle Management Report screen to refresh displayed data. Shows... The drive identifier and any status information. The drive health icon indicates the drives overall health at the time the screen was displayed. The bar-code label information and media health information for the last 50 cartridges loaded into the drive. The media health icon indicates the cartridge health at the time the cartridge was unloaded from the drive and the current health from the MLM database. Refer to the table on page 195 of Chapter 7 Media Lifecycle Management for descriptions of the icons related to media health. Note: Depending on the usage history for the drive, this pane may not be present. Detailed information about each of the individual tapes listed in the Tape Summary pane as well as any Tape Alert flags or SCD codes posted by the drive while the tape was loaded in the drive. Note: Depending on the usage history for the drive, this pane may not be present. Detailed information about any errors detected by the drive, beginning with the most recent. This information includes the bar code of the tape loaded in the drive at the time of the error and the sense key, ASC, and ASCQ data reported by the drive for the error. Note: Depending on the usage history for the drive, this pane may not be present.
Tape History
Drive Errors
5. Use the buttons at the tope of the screen as need.

Select... Update Reset Health To... Refresh the report with the most current status Reset the drive health to Good (Green). Use this button after you have corrected the condition that changed the drives health to yellow or red. Select Continue to complete the reset health process. Note: If the condition was not truly corrected, the next tape load sets the drive health back the previous indication. Return to the Drive Details screen (Figure 115 on page 213).
Previous
February 2011
215
Downloading the DLM Database
Saving a Health Report

To save the Drive Lifecycle Management report, use the Save MLM Database utility as described in Backing Up the MLM and DLM Databases on page 201.
DOWNLOADING THE DLM DATABASE

If desired, you can open and save the DLM database as a XML file. This file contains the same information that is in the Drive Lifecycle Management report.
Important
The DLM database information in the XML file cannot be used to restore the DLM database. The information required to restore the DLM database is backed up with the MLM database. See Backing Up the MLM and DLM Databases on page 201 for information about backing up the MLM database.
Note: The Download DLM DB button is only available when you access the library using the BlueScale web interface (RLC). It is not available from the operator panel. 1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > MLM. The Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen displays.
Figure 117 The Download DLM DB option on the MLM Tools screen.
February 2011
216
Downloading the DLM Database
3. Select Download DLM DB. The XLM file opens in the application associated with that file type on the computer accessing the librarys BlueScale web interface. Note: Typically, the application associated with XML files is a web browser. If this is the case, the XML file opens in a new browser window.
Figure 118 The DLM database XML file opened in a web browser. 4. Use the File > Save option in the application that opened the XLM file to save it to a known location on your computer. a. Navigate to the location where you want to store the file. The available locations depend on the network to which the computer you use to access the BlueScale web interface is connected. b. If desired, change the default file name to something more meaningful in your environment. c. Select Save. 5. Open the saved XML file using Microsoft Excel 2007 or later, or use another program that supports the XML file format.
February 2011
217
CHAPTER 9
Using Partitions
This chapter describes procedure for working with partitions in the library, including the following topics:
Topic Before You Begin Configuring a New Data Partition Entering the Initial Partition Settings Choosing the Robotic Control Path Configuring Global Spare Tape Drives Configuring Chambers and Drives Configuring a Direct-Attach Fibre Channel Drive Partition Configuring an F-QIP-Attached SCSI Drive Partition Configuring an E-QIP-Attached SCSI Drive Partition Configuring a Cleaning Partition Entering the Initial Partition Settings Configuring the Chambers for the Partition Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings Modifying an Existing Partition Deleting a Partition Described beginning on... page 219 page 223 page 225 page 227 page 228 page 230 page 232 page 238 page 243 page 253 page 254 page 255 page 256 page 259 page 262
218
Before You Begin
BEFORE YOU BEGIN

Before you start configuring the partitions in your library, read: Partitions, beginning on page 49, to learn how the library uses data partitions to create multiple virtual libraries. MLM PreScan and PostScan on page 164 to learn how the MLM PreScan and PostScan features interact with the data partitions.
Configuration Requirements
When configuring partitions, keep the requirements in the following sections in mind.
Data Partitions
The library requires, at a minimum, one data partition. A maximum of eight data partitions are allowed in the library, regardless of the number of frames in the library. Each partition must have a minimum of one chamber assigned to the storage pool. Each data partition must have at least one drive assigned to it. Beginning with BlueScale11.1, the default library configuration includes support for a single data partition. If you need additional data partitions, you must purchase a Shared Library Services (SLS) virtualization option key. Refer to Enabling BlueScale Software Support, Options, and Upgrades on page 283 for information about purchasing and entering the option key to activate SLS on your library. Notes: If your library previously included free SLS support, a new eight-partition option key will be installed on the library when you upgrade to BlueScale11.1.0. After the upgrade is complete, check the Option Enablement pane of the BlueScale System Setup screen and make a note of the SLS key for future reference. Refer to Accessing the System Setup Screen on page 282 for information about accessing the System Setup screen. You will need to manually re-enter the key if you reset the library to its factory defaults. QIPs (both F-QIPs and E-QIPs) are no longer available for purchase with a new library. They have been replaced by a Fibre Channel Robotics Interface Module (RIM). If your library does not already use QIPs, you must use a RIM to provide the robotics control path. The RIM does not provide connectivity for SCSI drives.
February 2011
219
Before You Begin
If you want to use the controller failover feature (see Controller Failover on page 66), you must use a G3 F-QIP or a RIM to provide the robotics control path and configure a second controller of the same type as the failover partner. SCSI drives are no longer available for purchase in new libraries. If your library contains SCSI drives you can continue to use them in QIP-attached SCSI drive partitions. Although an entry/exit pool for a data partition is not required, using one is highly recommended. Only users with superuser or administrator privileges can import media directly into or export media directly from the storage pool.
D
Important Important
Drive firmware update tapes can only be imported into the entry/exit pool. If you plan to update drive firmware using a code load tape, you must configure an entry/ exit pool for the partition. The DLM Drive Health Verification wizard requires a scratch tape to be available in the entry/exit pool. In addition, if the partition does not use a cleaning partition, a cleaning cartridge with Good or Usable health must also be in the partitions entry/ exit pool. To test a tape drive using the wizard, you must configure an entry/exit pool for the partition.
If you want to create an additional partition and all of the enabled chambers and drives in your library are already assigned to an existing partition, you must modify or delete one or more partitions to provide chambers and drives the new partition.
Cleaning Partitions
Cleaning partitions do not count against the eight-partition maximum. If you want to create a cleaning partition and the library contains chambers that have not been enabled with a Capacity On Demand (CoD) key, the library will use the unlicensed chambers for the cleaning partition. If all of the chambers are enabled and assigned to partitions, you must modify or delete one or more partitions to provide chambers for the cleaning partition. You can configure cleaning partitions either before or after you configure data partitions (see Configuring a Cleaning Partition on page 253). However, if you know that you want to use the Auto Drive Clean feature for one or more data partitions, it is best to configure the cleaning partition before you configure the data partitions. If you choose create the cleaning partition after you create the data partitions, you will need to modify the data partitions to assign a cleaning partition to them.
February 2011
220
Before You Begin
Preparation
Important
You cannot create, modify, or delete a partition if the library is actively running a PreScan or PostScan operation. You must stop or pause the operation before you can continue. To stop PreScan, select Stop Discovery on the Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen (see Starting or Stopping Media Auto Discovery on page 181). To pause the PostScan for one hour, select Pause PostScan on the Media Lifecycle Management Tools screen (see Pausing the PostScan Process on page 191).
Before you begin configuring partitions, gather the information listed in the following table.
Component Media Type Description Determine the type of media to be used in the partition. You can only choose from media types that are compatible with the drives already installed in the library. The media type you select determines the type of drive that can be used in the partition. Note: Only one media type can be used in each partition. If you plan to use the Auto Drive Clean feature, determine the number of chambers to be used for the cleaning partition (see Auto Drive Clean on page 53 for information about using cleaning partitions). A cleaning partition can be shared by multiple data partitions as long as the cleaning cartridges are compatible with the tape drives in the data partitions. Determine the number of chambers to be used for the partitions entry/exit pool (see Entry/Exit pool on page 52 for information about how the entry/exit pool is used). Each chamber holds a single TeraPack magazine or RXT media pack. Note: The chambers in the entry/exit pool are not accessible to the backup software for writing or reading data. Determine the number of chambers to be used for the partitions storage pool (see Storage pool on page 53 for information about how the entry/exit pool is used). Each chamber holds a single TeraPack magazine or RXT media pack. Determine which drives to assign to the partition. Only drives that are already installed in the library and are compatible with the media type you select are available. Each data partition must have at least one drive associated with it. Determine which tape drives to designate as Global Spares if you plan to use this feature (see Configuring Global Spare Tape Drives on page 228 for detailed information about the requirements for using Global Spares). Important: If you plan to use one of the PostScan options that uses a Global Spare, one or more Global Spare drives must be configured for the partition Decide whether or not you want the library to scan the tapes in the partition for media errors. See Using PreScan on page 183 and Using PostScan on page 184 for detailed information about the PreScan and PostScan features.
Cleaning Partition
Entry/Exit pool: Number of Chambers
Storage Pool: Number of Chambers Drives Assigned to this Partition Global Spares
PreScan and PostScan
February 2011
221
Chapter 9 Using Partitions Component Robotic Control Path Description
Before You Begin
Decide whether to assign one or both of the ports on a QIP or a RIM as the control path to the librarys robotic transporter. Note: If you plan to select both ports, make sure that the software used with the partition supports using multiple control paths and that the ports are cabled correctly. Selecting both ports provides failover, but requires software that supports two control paths to the transporter. Decide what addressing mode and loop ID each port on the F-QIP or RIM will use. Each Fibre Channel port is identified using a worldwide name (WWN) on a Fibre Channel arbitrated loop, fabric, or SAN. This WWN is based on the soft address assigned to the F-QIP or RIM when it connects to the network. If soft addressing is not used, the WWN is based on the fixed Loop ID you set. Note: If F-QIPs are used to provide both the robotic control path and the connectivity for SCSI drives, you must configure the addressing for both the exporting controller and the drives. If a partition uses E-QIPs, decide whether the network address for each Ethernet port will be static or assigned through a DHCP server on the network. For static addressing, you must specify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway used by the E-QIP. Note: Depending on your environment, you may need to configure digests, CHAP authentication, and iSNS. If a partition includes direct-attach Fibre Channel drives, decide what addressing mode and loop ID each drive will use. Each Fibre Channel port is identified using a worldwide name (WWN) on a Fibre Channel arbitrated loop, fabric, or SAN. This WWN is based on the soft address assigned to the drive when it connects to the network. If soft addressing is not used, the WWN is based on the fixed Loop ID you set. Note: The library does not support direct-attach SCSI drives. If a partition includes SCSI drives, decide whether the drives connected to each QIP are visible (accessible) to external hosts through one or both of the QIPs interface ports. Note: If you select both, make sure that the backup software can handle server contention over drive use resulting from multiple paths to a drive.
Addressing F-QIP Ports
Addressing E-QIP Ports
Direct-Attach Fibre Channel Drives
Drive Visibility
February 2011
222
Configuring a New Data Partition
CONFIGURING A NEW DATA PARTITION

The first time that the library starts up after installation or following a reset to factory defaults, you have the option of letting the library configure a single data partition using all of the librarys available resources or manually creating one or more partitions to your own specifications.
Choose the Creation Method

1. Use the following steps to choose the method used to create the new data Log in as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. If you need to modify encryption settings for the partition, select Security > Encryption after you log into the library as a superuser. The Encryption User Login screen displays. a. Type the encryption user password, if one has been set. Otherwise, leave the password blank. b. Select OK to display the Encryption configuration screen. See Configuring Encryption on page 342 for detailed information about enabling and configuring encryption for a partition.
Start Encryption application
Figure 119 The Encryption User Login screen.
February 2011
223
3. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions to display the Shared Library Services screen. If one or more partitions have already been created, the existing partitions are listed in alphabetical order. Select New and proceed to Entering the Initial Partition Settings.
Figure 120 The Shared Library Services screen. If the library does not currently have any partitions configured, the Shared Library Services screen presents you with two options for creating a partition.
Figure 121 The Shared Library Services screen when no partitions have been created.
Choose... Automatically create a partition If you... Want the library to automatically configure the partition, choose this option and then follow the prompts to create a single partition that uses all the licensed capacity and all installed tape drives. Notes: This option is only available if there are currently no partitions created in the library. This option is not available if the library contains multiple QIP or drive types. Do not use this option if you want to use the Global Spares option in the partition. This option does not enable encryption. After the partition is created, follow the instructions in Chapter 12 Configuring and Using Encryption to enable encryption. User GuideSpectra T950 Library
February 2011
224
Chapter 9 Using Partitions Choose... Manually create a partition If you...
Want to create one or more partitions to your own specifications. Use the steps in the following sections, beginning with Entering the Initial Partition Settings, to create the desired partition.
Entering the Initial Partition Settings

1. When you select New from the Shared Library Services screen, the Name and Media Type screen displays.
Figure 122 The Name and Media Type screen, create a data partition. 2. Enter a unique, descriptive name to identify the partition in the Name field. Names can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters and can include the @ - _ /. and the space character. The default name for a data partition is Partition n, where n is a number. 3. Select the media type for this partition. You can only use one type of media per partition. Choose <media type> to create a data partition. Choose <media type> Clean to create a cleaning partition (see Configuring a Cleaning Partition on page 253). Note: The <media type> variable indicates the type of media that will be used in the partition. Only the media types corresponding to drives installed in the library are listed on this screen. If you have multiple drive types installed in the library, the media type you choose dictates the type of drives that can be used in the partition. 4. Proceed to Configuring SmartMotion Options.
February 2011
225
Configuring SmartMotion Options

The SmartMotion option lets you configure how the transporter handles the TeraPack magazine when it receives a command to move media. 1. From the Name and Media Type, select Next to display the SmartMotion Options screen.
Figure 123 The SmartMotion Options screen. DefaultThe transporter carries the TeraPack magazine with it as it moves the cartridge to the destination location. Optimize for CommVaultThe transporter retrieves the desired cartridge from the TeraPack magazine, returns the magazine to its storage chamber, and then moves the cartridge to the destination location. 2. Proceed to Choosing the Robotic Control Path.
February 2011
226
Choosing the Robotic Control Path

One QIP or the RIM in the partition is designated as the controller for the partition. The controller exports the partition to the hosts using the library, receiving and processing the robotic motion commands sent from the host to the transporter.
Important Important
QIPs (F-QIPs and E-QIPs) are no longer available for purchase with a new library. If your library does not already have QIPs installed, you must use the Fibre Channel RIM to provide the robotic control path. When you choose an F-QIP or RIM as the controller, you must select direct-attach Fibre Channel drives (indicated by an f in the drive identifier) in the Global Spare and the Chambers and Drives screens.
Note: The RIM is listed as an F-QIP in the Robotic Control Path screen and other screens that reference an F-QIP. To determine whether the F-QIP is actually a RIM, check the Controllers screen (see QIP Identifiers on page 58). 1. From the SmartMotion Options screen, select Next. The Robotic Control Path screen displays with a list of the controllers (QIPs) currently installed in the library.
Figure 124 The Robotic Control Path screen.
February 2011
227
2. Select the QIP or RIM that will provide the control path for the robotics.
Important
If you want to use the controller failover feature for the partition, keep the following requirements in mind: You must use a G3 F-QIP or a RIM to provide the robotic control path. You must also have an identical G3 F-QIP or another RIM that can be configured as the failover partner (see Configuring Controller Failover (Optional) on page 308). If the partition will use SCSI drives, the drives cannot be in the same DBA as either of the F-QIPs or RIMs used for controller failover. Because the SCSI drives must be connected to an F-QIP that is not part of the controller failover pair, a minimum of three F-QIPs or one F-QIP and two RIMs are required for this type of configuration. If you previously configured controller failover, choose the F-QIP or RIM that you configured as a primary controller (see Configuring Controller Failover (Optional) on page 308).
3. Proceed to Configuring Global Spare Tape Drives.
Configuring Global Spare Tape Drives

The Global Spare option lets you replace a failed drive remotely using a spare drive in the library. Having a spare drive in the library lets you continue your backup operations and replace the failed drive the next time you are physically present at the library. Notes: If the correct tape drives are already installed, you can configure a drive as a Global Spare as part of the partition configuration process. If you do not currently have a drive installed that can be used as a Global Spare but install one later, you can edit the partition to configure Global Spares. See Using a Global Spare Tape Drive on page 120 for instructions on how to use the Global Spare to replace a failed tape drive. Requirements Before you can configure the Global Spare option, the following requirements must be met. The library have direct-attach LTO Fibre Channel tape drives available for use in the partition. The Global Spare option is not available with other drive technologies. The drive configured as the Global Spare must be the same technology generation as the drives it would replace. For example, you cannot use a direct-attach Fibre Channel LTO-3 drive as a spare for direct-attach Fibre Channel LTO-4 drive or an LTO-4 drive as a spare for an LTO-5 drive. The tape drives that are configured as Global Spares must be connected to the network. If they are not connected to the network, they will not be accessible to the application software. You may need to reconfigure your switch to access the spare tape drive.
228
Partitions When configuring the partition, keep the following in mind: The library prevents you from selecting drives that cannot be used as Global Spares, either because they are not direct-attach LTO Fibre Channel drives or because Although a Global Spare drive can be shared by multiple partitions, the drive can only be used by one partition at a time. To ensure that each partition has access to a Global Spare when needed, configure one or more dedicated Global Spare drives for each partition. The type of drive you select as the Global Spare determines the type of drive that you can assign to the partition. PostScan Requirements You must configure at least one Global Spare drive for the partition if you plan to use one of the MLM PostScan options that requires a Global Spare drive. Configuring one or more dedicated Global Spare drives for each partition is highly recommended. Note: See Using PostScan on page 184 for information about the PostScan feature. Use the following steps to configure one or more Global Spare drives for the partition. 1. From the Robotic Control Path screen, select Next. The Spare Drives screen lists the drives that are available for use as Global Spares. If you do not want to configure spare drives, select Next again and skip to Configuring Chambers and Drives on page 230. 2. Select one or more of the available tape drives to be designated as spares. Drives that cannot be used as spares are grayed out.
Figure 125 The Global Spare selection screen. 3. Proceed to Configuring Chambers and Drives.
February 2011
229
Configuring Chambers and Drives

1. From the Spare Drives screen, select Next. The Chambers and Drives screen displays.
Figure 126 The Chambers and Drives screen (direct-attach Fibre Channel drives shown). 2. Complete the following information in the Chambers and Drives screen.
For this field... Storage Chambers Enter... The number of storage chambers assigned to the storage pool for this partition. Notes: Each chamber accommodates one TeraPack magazine (or RXT media pack). Each magazine has slots for either 10 LTO cartridges or 9 SDLT cartridges. The size of the partitions storage pool is the total number of chambers you want to assign to the partition MINUS the number of chambers you reserved for the partitions entry/exit pool. If you are configuring only one partition in your library, use all remaining licensed chambers. If you are creating multiple partitions, be sure to reserve enough chambers to configure the other partitions. If you licensed all of the chambers in the library and want to use a cleaning partition, you must also subtract the number of chambers you want to use for the cleaning partition from the total number of chambers available to be assigned to the storage pool.
February 2011
230
Chapter 9 Using Partitions For this field... EE Chambers Enter...
The number of chambers assigned to the entry/exit pool for this partition. Although an entry/exit pool is not required, using one is highly recommended. Important: If you will need to update drive firmware using a firmware update tape, you must configure an entry/exit pool for the partition. Drive firmware update tapes can only be imported into the entry/exit pool. Important: The DLM Drive Health Verification wizard requires a scratch tape to be available in the entry/exit pool. In addition, if the partition does not use a cleaning partition, a cleaning cartridge with Good or Usable health must also be in the partitions entry/exit pool. To use this wizard to test a tape drive, you must configure an entry/exit pool for the partition. Note: The chambers in the entry/exit pool are not accessible to the backup software for writing or reading data. Select the drives to be dedicated to this partition. The check boxes for any installed drives that cannot be used in the partition are grayed out. Important: The algorithm used to determine MLM media health in LTO-5 drives differs from the one used for LTO-4 drives. When LTO-4 media that was previously used in an LTO-4 drive is used in an LTO-5 drive, the media health reported by MLM will initially appear to be different from what was reported by the LTO-4 drive. To maintain consistent media health statistics for your LTO-4 media, Spectra Logic recommends that you configure LTO-4 and LTO-5 drives in separate partitions and that you do not routinely share LTO-4 media between LTO-4 and LTO-5 drives. Notes: Mixing Fibre Channel and SCSI drives in a partition is not allowed. If you enabled Global Spares (see Configuring Global Spare Tape Drives on page 228), you can only choose direct-attach Fibre Channel drives of the same generation as the Global Spare drive for the partition. If you plan to use SCSI drives in the partition, they must be connected to the network through either an F-QIP or an E-QIP. If you plan to mix multiple generations of the same media technology (for example, LTO-3 and LTO-4) in the same partition, make sure that the drives in the partition support all of the generations. The media used by different generations may not be compatible (see LTO Read/Write Compatibility on page 518 for compatibility information).
Drives
3. If you want to enable Auto Drive Clean in this data partition and have previously created a cleaning partition (see Configuring a Cleaning Partition on page 253), use the Cleaning Partition drop-down list to select the cleaning partition. If you do not want to enable Auto Drive Clean, select None. Note: The option to select a cleaning partition is only available if you previously configured a cleaning partition that uses the same type of media as the data partition. If you create a cleaning partition later, edit the data partition to associate the cleaning partition with it.
February 2011
231
4. If you are not logged into the encryption application or have not configured encryption, skip to Step 5. You can configure the partition to use encryption later, as described in Configuring Encryption on page 342. If you logged into the encryption application (see page 223) and have already configured encryption, the Encryption screen displays. See Assigning the Encryption Key to a Partition on page 348 for information about this screen. After you complete the Encryption screen, proceed to Step 5. 5. The remaining configuration steps for the partition depend on the type of QIP you selected and how the drives in the library are connected to the network. Proceed to one of the following sections: Configuring a Direct-Attach Fibre Channel Drive Partition Configuring an F-QIP-Attached SCSI Drive Partition on page 238 Configuring an E-QIP-Attached SCSI Drive Partition on page 243
Configuring a Direct-Attach Fibre Channel Drive Partition

In this type of partition, the Fibre Channel drives connect directly to the Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric. See Figure 26 on page 60 for an example of this type of configuration. You create this type of partition if you selected: An F-QIP (or RIM) to provide the control path for SCSI motion commands issued by the host to control the robotic transporter (see Choosing the Robotic Control Path on page 227). Direct-attach Fibre Channel drives as the Global Spare and for the partition drives (see Configuring Global Spare Tape Drives on page 228 and Configuring Chambers and Drives on page 230).
February 2011
232
Configure MLM PreScan and PostScan

If MLM is enabled, you can configure the partition to use the MLM PreScan and PostScan features. See Using PreScan on page 183 for information about these features. Notes: The PostScan features are not available if the library does not have direct-attach LTO-4 or LTO-5 Fibre Channel drives installed. When you import tapes with MLM disabled, those tapes are not automatically discovered and added to the MLM database. Use the following steps to configure PreScan and PostScan for the partition. 1. From the Chambers and Drives screen (or the Encryption screen), select Next. The MLM Media Verification screen displays. Notes: If you do not want to use these features, select Next again and skip to Configure the Drive Fibre Channel Addresses. The PostScan options available on the MLM Media Verification screen depend on whether or not the partition uses LTO-5 Fibre Channel drives.
Figure 127 The Media Verification screen (LTO-4 Figure 128 The Media Verification screen (LTO-5 drives installed). drives installed).
February 2011
233
2. Configure the PreScan and PostScan for the partition. Notes: Selecting any of the PostScan triggers automatically enables the selected PostScan option for the partition. The automatic PostScan operation configured on this screen only verifies MLM-enabled LTO cartridges. If your partition uses LTO cartridges that are not MLM-enabled, you must added the to the PostScan manually (see Requesting a Manual PostScan on page 189).
Select this option... Enable PreScan To... Enable the PreScan feature. When enabled, PreScan replaces the more basic Media Auto Discovery process. See Using PreScan on page 183 for information about this option. Enable the FullScan feature. When enabled, FullScan uses a Global Spare drive assigned to the partition to verify all of the data on each cartridge. See Using PostScan on page 184 for information about this option. Note: FullScan is not available if a Global Spare drive is not configured for the partition. Enable the QuickScan feature. When enabled, QuickScan uses one of the drives in the partition to verify the data on a single track of each cartridge. See Using PostScan on page 184 for information about this option. Note: QuickScan is not available if the partition uses LTO-4 Fibre Channel drives. Enable the QuickScan using Global Spares feature. When enabled, QuickScan uses a Global Spare drive assigned to the partition to verify the data on a single track of each cartridge. See Using PostScan on page 184 for information about this option. Notes: QuickScan using Global Spares is not available if a Global Spare drive is not configured for the partition. QuickScan using Global Spares is not available if the partition uses LTO-4 Fibre Channel drives. Verify After TimeAdd the tapes in the partition to the automatic PostScan queue after the specified number of days have passed since the last scan. Enter the number of days in the Days field. Verify After WriteAdd a tape to the automatic PostScan queue after data is written to it. Verify After ReadAdd a tape to the automatic PostScan queue after data read from it. Default Disabled (unchecked) Disabled (no triggers selected)
FullScan
QuickScan
Disabled (no triggers selected)
QuickScan using Global Spares
Disabled (no triggers selected)
PostScan Triggers
Disabled (unchecked)
3. Proceed to Configure the Drive Fibre Channel Addresses.
February 2011
234
Configure the Drive Fibre Channel Addresses

The Fibre Channel Loop ID determines how each drive in the partition is addressed when attached to a Fibre Channel arbitrated loop or fabric. 1. From the MLM Media Verification screen, select Next. The Fibre Channel Loop IDs screen displays.
Figure 129 The Fibre Channel Loop IDs screen (F-QIP with direct-attach Fibre Channel drives). 2. Select Soft Addressing or Hard Addressing for each of the drives listed. If you select Hard Addressing, enter a value between 0 and 125 for the Loop ID. 3. Proceed to Configure User Access.
Configure User Access

1. From the Fibre Channel Loop IDs screen, select Next. The Partition Users screen displays.
Figure 130 The Partition Users screen. 2. Select the users who are allowed access to this partition. Only users that have previously been configured can be selected (see Configuring Library Users on page 290). 3. Proceed to Configure Robotic Path Visibility.
February 2011
235
Configure Robotic Path Visibility

Robotic path visibility determines whether the one or both of the Fibre Channel ports on the F-QIP or RIM provide the robotic control path. 1. From the Partition Users screen, select Next. The Robotic Path Visibility screen displays.
Figure 131 The Robotic Path Visibility screen (F-QIP with direct-attach Fibre Channel drives). 2. Select either one or both ports to provide the robotic control path to the transporter. Note: Selecting both ports can be used to provide a redundant connection to the transporter, but requires software that supports two control paths to the transporter. 3. Proceed to Configure the Port Addressing for the Exporting Controller.
February 2011
236
Configure the Port Addressing for the Exporting Controller

The WWPN of the Fibre Channel port on the exporting F-QIP or RIM is used as the WWN for the partition (see Viewing a Fibre Channel Partitions World Wide Name on page 110). 1. From the Robotic Path Visibility screen, select Next to display the Exporting F-QIP Configuration screen. This screen configures addressing for the F-QIP or RIM selected as the controller for the transporter (see Choosing the Robotic Control Path on page 227). As the controller, this F-QIP or RIM exports the partition to the host. Note: An F-QIP or RIM can export multiple partitions. If this is the case, a confirmation screen displays to warn you that any changes you make will affect all partitions associated with the F-QIP.
Figure 132 The Exporting F-QIP Configuration screen (directattach Fibre Channel drives). 2. Choose one of the following combinations for the Address and Fabric Mode: Use Soft Address and Fabric. Use Loop ID and Loop. The Loop ID must between 0 and 125. Use Soft Address and Auto-negotiate. Use Loop ID and Auto-negotiate. The Loop ID must between 0 and 125. Note: If you choose Loop as the Fibre Mode, the Fibre Channel switch to which the F-QIP is connected may override your settings.
February 2011
237
3. If you selected both F-QIP ports in the Robotics Visibility screen (Figure 131 on page 236), repeat the configuration steps in this section for the other F-QIP port. If you only selected one F-QIP port in the Robotic Path Visibility screen or if you have already configured both F-QIP ports, proceed to Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings.
Configuring an F-QIP-Attached SCSI Drive Partition

In this type of partition, an F-QIP provides the Fibre Channel interface to the SCSI drives in the partition. See Figure 29 on page 64 for an example of this type of configuration.
Important Important
F-QIPs are no longer available for purchase with a new library. An F-QIP-attached SCSI drive partition does not support Global Spares or the MLM PostScan feature. If you want to use either of these features, you must use directattach Fibre Channel drives (see Configuring a Direct-Attach Fibre Channel Drive Partition on page 232). If you want to use the controller failover feature, the SCSI drives cannot be in the same DBA as the F-QIP used to provide the robotics control path or the F-QIP configured as the failover partner (see Choosing the Robotic Control Path on page 227 and Configuring Controller Failover (Optional) on page 308). Because the SCSI drives must be in a DBA with an F-QIP that is not part of the controller failover pair, a minimum of three F-QIPs is required for this type of configuration.
Important
You create this type of partition if you selected: An F-QIP or RIM to provide the control path for the motion control commands to the transporter (see Choosing the Robotic Control Path on page 227) SCSI drives in the Chambers and Drives screen (see Configuring Chambers and Drives on page 230). Notes: If you are not using the controller failover feature, the SCSI drives can be connected either to the F-QIP that provides the robotics control path or to another F-QIP in the library. You cannot use QIP-attached SCSI drives and direct-attach Fibre Channel drives in the same partition.
February 2011
238
Configure MLM PreScan

If MLM is enabled, you can configure the partition to use the MLM PreScan feature instead of the more basic Media Auto Discovery process. See Using PreScan on page 183 for information about these features. Note: When you import tapes with MLM disabled, those tapes are not automatically discovered and added to the MLM database. Use the following steps to configure PreScan for the partition. 1. From the Chambers and Drives screen (or the Encryption screen), select Next. The MLM Media Verification screen displays. Note: If you do not want to use this feature, select Next again and skip to Configure User Access.
Figure 133 The Media Verification screen. 2. Select Enable PreScan to enable this feature. 3. Proceed to Configure User Access.

1. From the MLM Media Verification screen, select Next. The Partition Users screen displays.
Figure 134 The Partition Users screen. 2. Select the users who are allowed access to this partition. Only users that have previously been configured can be selected (see Configuring Library Users on page 290). 3. Proceed to Configure the Robotic Path Visibility.
239
Configure the Robotic Path Visibility

The robotic path visibility determines whether one or both of the interface ports on the F-QIP provide the robotic control path for the transporter. 1. From the SmartMotion Options screen, select Next. The Robotic Path Visibility screen displays.
Figure 135 The Robotic Path Visibility screen (F-QIP with SCSI drives). 2. Select either one or both ports on the F-QIP to provide the robotic control path to the transporter. Notes: If you have previously configured an F-QIP in the partition and do not need to make any configuration changes, select Skip Ports to advance to the Configure Drive Visibility screen. Selecting both ports can be used to provide a redundant connection to the transporter, but requires software that supports two control paths to the transporter. 3. If the drives in the partition are connected to the F-QIP that provides the robotics control path (the exporting F-QIP), proceed to Configure Drive Visibility. If some or all of the drives in the partition are not connected to the exporting F-QIP, skip to Configure the F-QIP Port Addressing on page 242. After you configure the port addressing for the exporting F-QIP, you will configure the drive visibility as described in the following section, Configure Drive Visibility.
February 2011
240
Configure Drive Visibility

The QIP has an any-to-any relationship between the QIPs drives and the QIPs two ports. See Connectivity on page 59 to learn more about this relationship. For each drive on the F-QIP, identify the port(s) through which the hosts will communicate with the drive. 1. From the Robotic Path Visibility screen, select Next to display the Drive Visibility screen.
Figure 136 The Drive Visibility screen (F-QIP with SCSI drives). 2. For each drive, select either one or both ports to provide access (visibility) to the drive. Notes: Drives can be visible through both ports for failover or drive sharing. If they are visible through both ports, make sure that the software accessing this partition can handle any server contention over drive use that can result from multiple paths to a single drive. If you previously configured the selected ports, select Skip Ports and proceed to Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings on page 256 3. Proceed to Configure the F-QIP Port Addressing.
February 2011
241
Configure the F-QIP Port Addressing

If the partition uses multiple F-QIPs you will encounter multiple screens for configuring the port addressing: The Exporting F-QIP Settings screen configures the port addresses for the F-QIP that provides the robotics control path (the exporting F-QIP). These settings also apply to any drives connected to the exporting F-QIP. Note: An F-QIP can export multiple partitions. If the F-QIP is being used to export more than one partition, a confirmation screen displays to warn you that any changes you make will affect all partitions associated with the F-QIP. When one or more of the drives in the partition are connected to other F-QIPs in the library, a separate F-QIP Settings screen configures the port addresses for any drives in the partition that are connected to each F-QIP. If multiple additional F-QIPs are used, the settings for each one must be configured separately. If you previously configured the F-QIP settings for both the exporting F-QIP and any additional F-QIPs in the partition and do not want to make any configuration changes, select Next on the F-QIP Configuration screen to proceed to Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings on page 256. Use the following steps to configure the F-QIP port addressing for the exporting F-QIP and any additional F-QIPs in the partition. 1. From the Drive Visibility screen, select Next. The Exporting F-QIP Configuration screen (or F-QIP Configuration screen) displays.
Figure 137 The Exporting F-QIP Configuration screen for robotics.
Figure 138 The F-QIP Configuration screen for SCSI drives connected to another F-QIP.
February 2011
242
2. For the Address and Fibre Mode settings, choose one of these combinations: Use Soft Address and Fabric. Use Loop ID and Loop. The Loop ID must be between 0 and 125. Use Soft Address and Auto-negotiate. Use Loop ID and Auto-negotiate. The Loop ID must be between 0 and 125. Note: If you choose Loop as the Fibre Mode, the Fibre Channel switch to which the F-QIP is connected may override your settings. 3. Repeat the configuration steps in this section to configure any additional F-QIP ports if: All of the drives in the partition are connected to the exporting F-QIP and you selected both F-QIP ports in the Robotic Path Visibility screen or the Drive Visibility screen. OR All of the drives in the partition are connected to the exporting F-QIP and you selected different F-QIP ports in the Robotic Path Visibility and the Drive Visibility screens. OR All of the drives in the partition are not connected to the exporting F-QIP. You must configure the ports on the F-QIP(s) where the drives are connected. 4. If necessary, configure the drive visibility for the F-QIP ports (see Configure Drive Visibility on page 241). 5. After you have configured all of the F-QIP ports being used, proceed to Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings on page 256.
Configuring an E-QIP-Attached SCSI Drive Partition

In this type of partition, the E-QIP provides the iSCSI network interface to the SCSI drives in the partition. See Figure 29 on page 64 for an example of this type of configuration.
Important Important
Ethernet QIPs (E-QIPs) are no longer available for purchase. Partitions that use E-QIPs are only supported as a legacy configuration. An E-QIP-attached SCSI drive partition does not support Global Spares or the MLM PostScan feature. If you want to use either of these features, you must use directattach Fibre Channel drives (see Configuring a Direct-Attach Fibre Channel Drive Partition on page 232).
February 2011
243
You create an E-QIP-Attached SCSI Drive partition if you selected: An E-QIP to provide the control path for the motion control commands to the transporter (see Choosing the Robotic Control Path on page 227). SCSI drives in the Chambers and Drives screen (see Configuring Chambers and Drives on page 230). One or more E-QIPs provide the iSCSI network interface to the SCSI drives in the partition. Note: You cannot use QIP-attached SCSI drives and direct-attach Fibre Channel drives in the same partition.
Configure the Ethernet Protocol

1. From the Spare Drives screen, select Next. The Ethernet Protocol screen displays. The only choice is iSCSI.
Figure 139 The Ethernet Protocol screen (E-QIP with SCSI drives). 2. Proceed to Configuring Chambers and Drives on page 230. 3. After you configure the drives and chambers for the partition, proceed to Step 4, below. 4. If you are not logged into the encryption application or have not configured encryption, proceed to Configure User Access. You can configure the partition to use encryption later, as described in Configuring Encryption on page 342. If you are logged into the encryption application (see page 260) and have already configured encryption, the Encryption screen displays. See Enable Drive-Based Encryption on page 349 for information about this screen. After you complete the Encryption screen, proceed to Configure MLM PreScan.
February 2011
244
Configure MLM PreScan

If MLM is enabled, you can configure the partition to use the MLM PreScan feature instead of the more basic Media Auto Discovery process. See Using PreScan on page 183 for information about these features. Note: When you import tapes with MLM disabled, those tapes are not checked. Use the following steps to configure PreScan for the partition. 1. From the Chambers and Drives screen (or the Encryption screen), select Next. The MLM Media Verification screen displays. Note: If you do not want to use this feature, skip to Configure User Access.
Figure 140 The Media Verification screen. 2. Select Enable PreScan to enable this feature. 3. Proceed to Configure User Access.

1. From the MLM Media Verification screen, select Next. The Partition Users screen displays.
Figure 141 The Partition Users screen. 2. Select the users who are allowed access to this partition. Only users that have previously been configured can be selected (see Configuring Library Users on page 290). 3. Proceed to Configure the Robotic Path Visibility.
245
Configure the Robotic Path Visibility

The robotic path visibility determines whether the one or both of the interface ports on the E-QIP provide the robotic control path. 1. From the SmartMotion Options screen, select Next. The Robotic Path Visibility screen displays.
Figure 142 The Robotic Path Visibility screen (E-QIP). 2. Select either one or both ports on the E-QIP to provide the robotic control path to the transporter. Notes: If you have previously configured an E-QIP in the partition and do not need to make any configuration changes, select Skip Ports to skip the Exporting E-QIP Configuration screen and advance to the Configure Drive Visibility screen. Selecting both ports provides failover, but requires software that supports two control paths to the transporter. 3. If the drives in the partition are connected to the E-QIP that provides the robotics control path (the exporting E-QIP), proceed to Configure Drive Visibility. If the drives in the partition are not connected to the exporting E-QIP, skip to Configure the E-QIP Port Addressing on page 248. After you configure the port addressing for the exporting E-QIP, you will configure the drive visibility.
February 2011
246
Configure Drive Visibility

The QIP has an any-to-any relationship between the QIPs drives and the QIPs two ports. See Connectivity on page 59 to learn more about this relationship. For each drive on the E-QIP, identify the port(s) through which the outside world will communicate with the drive. 1. From the Robotic Path Visibility screen, select Next. The Drive Visibility screen displays.
Figure 143 The Drive Visibility screen (E-QIP). 2. For each drive, select either one or both ports to provide access (visibility) to the drive. Notes: Drives can be visible through both ports for failover or drive sharing. If they are visible through both ports, make sure that the software accessing this partition can handle any server contention over drive use that can result from multiple paths to a single drive. If you previously configured the selected ports, select Skip Ports and proceed to Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings on page 256. 3. If the drives in the partition are connected to the E-QIP that provides the robotics control path (the exporting E-QIP), proceed to Configure the E-QIP Port Addressing. If some or all of the drives in the partition are not connected to the exporting E-QIP, a separate E-QIP configuration screen sets the port addressing for the E-QIP connected to the drives. Proceed to Configure the E-QIP Port Addressing.
February 2011
247
Configure the E-QIP Port Addressing

Notes: The Exporting E-QIP Settings screen configures the port addresses for the E-QIP that provides the robotics control path. These settings also apply to any drives connected to the exporting E-QIP. The E-QIP Settings screen configures the port addresses for any drives in the partition that are connected to another E-QIP. If multiple additional E-QIPs are used, the settings for each one have to be configured separately. An E-QIP can export multiple partitions. If the E-QIP is being used to export more than one partition, a confirmation screen displays to warn you that any changes you make will affect all partitions associated with the QIP. If you previously configured the E-QIP and do not want to make any configuration changes, select Next to proceed to Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings on page 256. Use the following steps to configure the port addressing for each E-QIP. 1. From the Drive Visibility screen, select Next. The Exporting E-QIP Settings screen (or the E-QIP Settings screen) displays.
Figure 144 The Exporting E-QIP Configuration screen for robotics.
Figure 145 The E-QIP Configuration screen for SCSI drives connected to another E-QIP.
2. Enter a Hostname of up to 64 alphanumeric characters. The name can include hyphens.
February 2011
248
3. Select either DHCP or Static Address. Using a static address is recommended. Select DHCP if the network to which you are connecting the E-QIP uses a DHCP server to automatically assign IP addresses.
Important
If you select DHCP, and your environment uses iSNS, be sure to read Configuration Note: Using DHCP in iSNS Environments on page 249 for important information.
Select Static Address if your network does not use DHCP or if you simply want to have a fixed IP address for the partition. Enter the addressing information for the E-QIP. Hosts connected to the E-QIP use this information when communicating with devices controlled by the E-QIP. The IP address and gateway must be valid Class A, B, or C addresses in the form nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Enter 0.0.0.0 for the Gateway if your network does not use a gateway. The subnet mask must be a valid octet in the form nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. 4. Proceed to Configure the E-QIP iSCSI Settings on page 250.
Configuration Note: Using DHCP in iSNS Environments

Using DHCP requires the QIP to be connected to an external network in order for it to obtain an IP address. Using DHCP only Using DHCP addressing requires the QIP to communicate with an external DHCP server to obtain the Ethernet setup information needed for communication over a network. If the DHCP server is not present or cannot be reached when the library powers up, the QIP will not be able to communicate with any host on the network. When DHCP is enabled, the QIP begins searching for a DHCP server as soon as the library is powered on. If a DHCP server does not respond within three minutes, a warning message is sent to the user interface. The QIP continues searching until it finds a DHCP server. You may need to reset the QIP to restart the DHCP server scan. When you first create a Gigabit Ethernet partition, you must enter a host name for the ports on the E-QIP. Because this hostname is not yet registered with the DHCP server, the only way to address the iSCSI port on the QIP is by using its IP address. Thus, if you use DHCP, you must get the DHCP-assigned IP address directly from the DHCP server and enter this address in the Static Address field to establish the initial communication with the QIP.
February 2011
249
Using iSNS An alternative to knowing the DHCP-assigned IP address of the QIP is to enable and configure iSCSI Storage Name Service (iSNS) for the DHCP port. When iSNS is enabled, the QIP registers its iSCSI name and IP address with the iSNS server. The iSNS server maintains a list of the DHCP IP addresses and iSCSI names of all iSCSI devices on the network, including the QIP. Any iSNS-aware iSCSI initiator on the network can use this information to establish a connection to an iSCSI device on the network without knowing the host name or IP address of the iSCSI device.
Configure the E-QIP iSCSI Settings

1. From the Exporting E-QIP Settings screen, select Next. The Exporting iSCSI Settings screen displays. Note: If you are configuring the ports for an E-QIP other than the exporting E-QIP, this screen is called iSCSI Settings. The information on the screen is identical.
Figure 146 The Exporting iSCSI Settings screen. 2. If necessary for your network environment, change the Listen Port for the E-QIP. The value must be an integer between 1 and 65535 (the default setting is 3260).
February 2011
250
3. If desired, select Enable Header Digests and/or Enable Data Digests. Note: With digests disabled, any attempted connection that requires digests fails. When digests are enabled, the connection is considered a preferred connection. With a preferred digest connection, any initiator connection (with or without digests) succeeds. Currently, the only way to determine if any single iSCSI connection has digests enabled or disabled is if the initiator can report the connection type to the user. 4. If desired, select CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol) as the authentication method. 5. If desired, select Use iSNS. If you select Use iSNS, enter the iSNS IP Address and the iSNS Port. The iSNS IP address must be a valid Class A, B or C address and the iSNS Port setting must be an integer between 1 and 65535. See Using iSNS on page 250 for information about using iSNS. 6. If you did not select CHAP authentication, continue with Step 7. If you selected CHAP authentication, proceed to Configure E-QIP CHAP Authentication. 7. Repeat the configuration steps beginning at Configure the E-QIP Port Addressing on page 248 to configure any additional E-QIP ports if: All of the drives in the partition are connected to the exporting E-QIP and you selected both E-QIP ports in the Robotic Path Visibility screen or the Drive Visibility screen. OR All of the drives in the partition are connected to the exporting F-QIP and you selected different F-QIP ports in the Robotic Path Visibility and the Drive Visibility screens. OR All of the drives in the partition are not connected to the exporting F-QIP. You must configure the ports on the E-QIP(s) where the drives are connected. 8. After you have configured all of the E-QIP ports being used, proceed to Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings.
February 2011
251
Configure E-QIP CHAP Authentication

1. From the Exporting iSCSI Settings screen, select Next. The Exporting CHAP Settings screen displays. Note: If you are configuring the ports for an E-QIP other than the exporting E-QIP, this screen is called CHAP Settings. The information on the screen is identical.
Figure 147 The Exporting CHAP Settings screen. 2. Enter the Remote Device Name and Remote Secret. The remote name and secret (password) are used by the iSCSI initiator when it authenticates the QIP port. The name must be less than 256 alphanumeric (plus hyphen, period, and colon) characters, and the secret must be less than 101 characters. Note: Some iSCSI initiators have their own imposed limits on the number of characters used for the Name and Secret. 3. If you want to use bi-directional (dual) CHAP, enter the Local Device Name and Local Secret. The local name and secret (password) are used by the QIP when it authenticates the iSCSI initiator. The name must be less than 256 alphanumeric (plus hyphen, period, and colon) characters, and the secret must be less than 101 characters. Notes: Dual CHAP is only needed if the iSCSI initiator requires bidirectional CHAP authentication. If the iSCSI initiator is configured to use uni-directional CHAP, then uni-directional CHAP is used, regardless of how the QIP is configured. You must either enter values for both the Local Device Name and Local Secret or leave both blank. Some iSCSI initiators impose their own limits on the number of characters used for the Local Device Name and Local Secret.
252
Configuring a Cleaning Partition
4. Select Save. The CHAP entry displays at the top of the screen.
Important
Do not select Next before selecting Save, or you will lose all of the CHAP configuration settings you just completed.
5. If required, repeat Step 2 through Step 4 to add as many CHAP entries as necessary, selecting Save after each. If necessary, you may also edit entries from the Exporting CHAP Settings screen. 6. After you finish configuring all of the required CHAP entries, proceed to Step 7. 7. Repeat the configuration steps beginning at Configure the E-QIP Port Addressing on page 248 to configure any additional E-QIP ports if: All of the drives in the partition are connected to the exporting E-QIP and you selected both E-QIP ports in the Robotic Path Visibility screen or the Drive Visibility screen. OR All of the drives in the partition are connected to the exporting E-QIP and you selected different E-QIP ports in the Robotic Path Visibility and the Drive Visibility screens. OR All of the drives in the partition are not connected to the exporting E-QIP. You must configure the ports on the E-QIP(s) where the drives are connected. 8. After you have configured all of the E-QIP ports being used, proceed to Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings.
CONFIGURING A CLEANING PARTITION

Cleaning partitions provide permanent storage for cleaning cartridges inside the library when using the Auto Drive Clean option (see Auto Drive Clean on page 53). A cleaning partition can be shared by multiple data partitions as long as the cleaning cartridges are compatible with the tape drives in the data partitions. Note: The Auto Drive Clean feature is currently only used with LTO tape drives. If you do not have LTO drives in the library, there is no need for a cleaning partition. If you configured MLM PostScan for the data partition associated with the cleaning partition, the Global Spare drive being used to verify the cartridges is cleaned using a cleaning cartridge in the cleaning partition. After each cartridge is moved from the Global Spare drive following its verification, the library checks to see if the drive requires cleaning. If it does and a cleaning partition is associated with the data partition, the drive is cleaned before the next tape is processed.
253
You can configure cleaning partitions either before or after you configure data partitions. However, if you know that you want to use automated drive cleaning with a data partition, it is easier to configure the cleaning partition before you configure the data partitions. A cleaning partition can be shared by multiple data partitions as long as the cleaning cartridges are compatible with the tape drives in the data partitions. When a cleaning partition is associated with a data partition (thereby enabling Auto Drive Clean), the library automatically makes any chambers that are not already configured for use in another partition available for use in cleaning partitions. The library gives you the option of reserving one unused chamber for a cleaning partition each time you create a data partition. If all of the physically available chambers in your library are already licensed and assigned to existing partitions, you must modify or delete one or more partitions to provide chambers for the new cleaning partition (see Modifying an Existing Partition on page 259 and Deleting a Partition on page 262).
Entering the Initial Partition Settings

1. Log in as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions. The Shared Library Services screen displays. 3. From the Shared Library Services screen, select New to begin configuring the cleaning partition. The Name and Media Type screen displays.
Figure 148 The Name and Media Type screen, create a cleaning partition. 4. Enter a unique, descriptive name to identify the partition in the Name field. Names can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters and can include @ - _ /. and the space character.
February 2011
254
5. Select <media type> Clean to create a cleaning partition using the selected cleaning cartridge type. Note: The variable <media type> corresponds to the type of cleaning cartridge that will be stored in the cleaning partition. Only the cleaning media types compatible with the drives installed in the library are listed.
Configuring the Chambers for the Partition

1. From the Name and Media Type screen, select Next. The Chambers and Drives screen displays.
Figure 149 The Chambers and Drives screen (cleaning partition). 2. Enter the number of chambers you want to assign to the this cleaning partition. 3. Proceed to Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings.
February 2011
255
Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings
CONFIRMING AND SAVING THE PARTITION SETTINGS

After you finish configuring a partition, confirm and save the partition settings to complete the creation process. Note: If you want to save the configuration to a USB drive, connect the drive to the USB port on the LCM (see Figure 10 and Figure 11 on page 38) before continuing. 1. After you complete the configuration screens for the partition as described in the previous sections, select Next. The Save Library Configuration screen displays.
Figure 150 The Save Library Configuration screen. 2. Select whether to save the current library configuration. Dont Save Library ConfigurationA backup of the changed library configuration will not be saved. Save Library Configuration To (recommended)Saves a backup of the changed library configuration to the selected destination. Using this option is highly recommended to ensure that you can easily restore the library if necessary. Choose whether to save the library configuration file to USB or to email it to an already-configured mail recipient (see Configuring Mail Users on page 300). Note: Do not use the default autosupport@spectralogic.com email recipient. Spectra Logic does not save emailed configuration files unless they are specifically requested for troubleshooting.
February 2011
256
3. Select Next. The Save Partition screen displays. Note: The Save Partition screen on your library may be different from the ones shown in Figure 151 and Figure 152. The information on this screen varies depending on the type of partition you have configured.
Figure 151 The Save Partition screen for an F-QIP Figure 152 The Save Partition screen (cleaning partition with a Global Spare and cleaning partition). partition. 4. Review the information on the screen and confirm that all settings are correct for this partitions configuration. If the configuration information is correct, proceed to Step 5. If the configuration information is not correct, either: Select Cancel to configure the partition again from the beginning. Select Previous to move backward through the configuration screens until you reach the settings that need correction. Make any necessary corrections, then select Next to move forward through the screens and return to the Save Partition screen. Note: If the screen requiring the correction is toward the beginning of the configuration process, it may be easiest to select Cancel and repeat the entire configuration process. As you move backward through the configuration screens, the values are reset to their default values. After you reach the desired screen and make the necessary changes, advance through the screens and re-enter any necessary information.
February 2011
257
5. Select Save. The library requires several minutes to store the configuration information, after which the Shared Library Services screen redisplays with the partition you just created added to the list of partitions.
Figure 153 The Shared Library Services screen. Notes: If you assigned a cleaning partition to the data partition, the partition icon changes as shown in Figure 153. When you save the partition, the library generates an autosave configuration file and saves it to the LCM compact flash. If you configured the auto-save email option, an email containing the updated library configuration and the MLM database is sent to the specified recipient (see Enabling Email for the Automatic Configuration Save Feature on page 302). 6. To configure another data partition, repeat the entire configuration process, beginning with Configuring a New Data Partition on page 223. To configure another cleaning partition, repeat the entire configuration process, beginning with Configuring a Cleaning Partition on page 253.
February 2011
258
Modifying an Existing Partition
MODIFYING AN EXISTING PARTITION

Important
When reducing the number of chambers assigned to a partition, physically export any media in those chambers, as described in Exporting or Exchanging Media on page 145, before you remove chambers from the partition. By default, the library deletes empty chambers from a partition first. However, if all of the chambers are full, the library is forced to delete populated chambers. When this happens, the media packs in the deleted chambers are no longer accessible through BlueScale or the backup application. You must add the chambers to either a new or an existing partition before the media packs can be accessed again.
Notes:
Spectra Logic strongly recommends saving the library configuration either to a USB drive or as an attachment to an email sent to a previously configured mail recipient before you modify a partition. When you make a change to a partition, the library generates an auto-configuration file and saves it to the LCM compact flash. If you configured the auto-save email option, an email containing the updated library configuration and the MLM database will be sent to the specified recipient (see Enabling Email for the Automatic Configuration Save Feature on page 302). Do not use the default autosupport@spectralogic.com email recipient. Spectra Logic does not save emailed configuration files unless they are specifically requested for troubleshooting.
February 2011
259
Use the following steps to edit an existing partition. 1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. To change user types, select Security > Switch User from the toolbar menu, then log in as a user with the required privileges. 2. If you need to modify encryption settings for the partition, log into the library as a superuser, then select Security > Encryption. The Encryption User Login screen displays. Type the encryption user password, then select OK to display the Encryption configuration screen. See Configuring Encryption on page 342 for detailed information about enabling and configuring encryption for a partition.
Start Encryption application
Figure 154 The Encryption User Login screen. 3. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions to begin the partition configuration process. The Shared Library Services screen displays.
Figure 155 The Shared Library Services screen.
February 2011
260
4. Select either Summary or Edit. Either option can be used when modifying a partition. When you select Summary next to the partition that you want to edit, the Partition Settings screen displays, showing information related to the selected partition. If you do not want to make any changes to the partition, select Cancel to return to the Shared Library Services screen. Note: To view all of the configuration settings for the partition, select the Edit option.
Figure 156 The Partition Settings screen (data partition). When you select Edit from either the Partition Settings screen or the Shared Library Services screen the Name and Media Type screen displays.
Figure 157 The Name and Media screen (data partition).
Figure 158 The Name and Media Type screen (cleaning partition).
February 2011
261
Deleting a Partition
5. The Name and Media Type screen is the beginning of a series of configuration screens. Depending of the type of partition you are modifying, the sequence of steps and screens matches those for creating either: A new data partition, beginning with Entering the Initial Partition Settings on page 225, OR A new cleaning partition, beginning with Configuring a Cleaning Partition on page 253, except that you cannot change the media (drive) type specified for the partition.
DELETING A PARTITION
When you delete a partition, the drives and chambers previously assigned to that partition can be reassigned to an existing partition or used to create a new partition.
Important
Before deleting a partition, either physically export the media stored in the chambers for that partition or have a plan to add the chambers to another partition. After the partition is deleted, the media in the chambers assigned to the partition will not be accessible until the chambers are assigned to another partition. To ensure that you do not inadvertently mix media from one partition with that from another, use your backup software to eject all of the media in the partition. The library moves the media to the partitions entry/exit pool. Export the media from the library as described in Exporting or Exchanging Media on page 145. Before you can delete a data partition that is configured to use Global Spares, you must edit the partition and deselect all of the tape drives that are designated as Global Spares for the partition.
Important
Note: Spectra Logic strongly recommends saving the library configuration, either to a USB drive or as an attachment to an email sent to a previously configured mail recipient, before you delete a partition. Use the following steps to delete an existing partition. 1. Log in as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. To change user types, select Security > Switch User from the toolbar menu, then log in as a user with the required privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions. The Shared Library Services screen displays. 3. Select Delete for the partition you want to delete. A Feedback Required screen displays.
262
Deleting a Partition
4. Select whether to save the current library configuration. If you select to save the configuration, choose whether to save it to USB or to email it to an already-configured mail recipient (see Configuring Mail Users on page 300). Note: If you want to save the configuration to a USB memory device, connect the device to the USB port on the LCM (see Figure 10 and Figure 11 on page 38) before continuing. 5. Select Ok to confirm that you want to delete the partition or select Cancel to return to the Shared Library Services screen. The screen refreshes. The deleted partition is no longer listed on the Shared Library Services screen.
February 2011
263
CHAPTER 10
AutoSupport
This chapter describes how to configure and use AutoSupport with your library. All AutoSupport functionality is included with your library purchase.
Topic AutoSupport Overview Configuring AutoSupport Before You Begin Configuring Mail Recipients Configuring AutoSupport Profiles Configuring Alarms Configuring Log Set Forwarding Using AutoSupport Creating New Support Tickets Updating Existing Support Tickets Described beginning on... this page page 267 page 267 page 267 page 268 page 272 page 274 page 275 page 275 page 279
AUTOSUPPORT OVERVIEW
AutoSupport configures the library to automatically contact library users with messages or when specific events occur. It can also be used to open or update a support ticket and send it to a specified recipient or to Spectra Logic Technical Support. AutoSupport can be used without email access by saving the ASL sets generated by AutoSupport to a USB key and then manually sending the stored information to Spectra Logic Technical Support. Note: AutoSupport Log (ASL) information is only for troubleshooting purposes. This log information is separate from the data path and contains no customer data.
264
AutoSupport Overview
Send Log Sets

This feature lets you manually generate a standard AutoSupport Log (ASL) set (file) and email it to a pre-configured recipient or save it to a USB drive. You can use the Send Log Sets option to open or update a support ticket and send it to a specified recipient or to Spectra Logic Technical Support. The ASL included in the support ticket includes the following types of information: Library message logs Library Control Module (LCM) logs LCM configuration (including the current physical configuration) EC data from all components Firmware information Contact information for data center staff Other library information specified in the AutoSupport user profile
Log Forwarding
This feature configures the library to send monthly ASL files to preconfigured recipients (see Configuring Log Set Forwarding on page 274).
Critical Alarms
When you enable critical alarms, the library automatically generates an ASL file whenever any of the events in the following table occurs. If you configured one of your AutoSupport profiles as the AutoSend Profile (see Step 3 on page 270), the library automatically sends the ASL file to the mail recipients in the AutoSend profile. Note: If you select autosupport@spectralogic.com as a mail recipient in the AutoSend profile, the library also sends the ASL file and a ticket request to Spectra Logic Technical Support.
For this event... Motion Restart Front or Side Panel Opened or Removed Power Supply Failure An AutoSupport ticket request is generated... Whenever motion restarts. Each motion restart is treated as a separate event and results in generation and submission of an AutoSupport ticket request. If the library side panel is opened or removed three times within thirty minutes. Only one AutoSupport ticket request is generated for each 30-minute time period. When a power supply fails. Each power supply is evaluated separately. Only one AutoSupport ticket request per power supply is generated for each 24-hour time period, even if the power supply fails and then resumes operation repeatedly. If two power supplies fail during the same 24-hour time period, two separate AutoSupport ticket requests are generated, one per failed power supply.
February 2011
265
Chapter 10 AutoSupport For this event... QIP Failure An AutoSupport ticket request is generated...
AutoSupport Overview
Whenever the library detects that a QIP is no longer present. Only QIPs that are configured as part of a partition will generate an AutoSupport ticket request. The following QIP problems can generate a QIP failure event: Failure of the QIP software or hardware, Loss of communication between the library and the QIP Removal of a QIP from the library without using the BlueScale Controller Remove or Controller Replace operation. AutoSupport ticket requests are not generated if the QIP is removed following a Controller Remove or a Controller Replace operation. Each QIP is evaluated separately. Only one AutoSupport ticket request per QIP is generated for each 24-hour time period, even if the QIP fails and then resumes operation repeatedly. If two QIPs fail during the same 24-hour time period, two separate AutoSupport ticket requests are generated, one per failed QIP. When the library detects that a drive which is part of a configured partition is no longer present and this drive failure results in the percentage of failed drives in the partition meeting or exceeding a specified threshold (see Configuring Alarms on page 272). The following drive problems can generate a drive failure event: Failure of the drive software or hardware Loss communication between the library and the drive Removal of a drive from the library without using the BlueScale Drive Remove or Drive Replace operation. AutoSupport ticket requests are not generated if the drive is removed following a Drive Remove or a Drive Replace operation. If the library controller (LC) fails to properly initialize.
Drive Failure
Library Controller Fails to Initialize
February 2011
266
Configuring AutoSupport
CONFIGURING AUTOSUPPORT
If you have any questions about configuring AutoSupport, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5). Note: To simplify entering the information required to configure and use AutoSupport, use the BlueScale web interface or a keyboard attached to the LCM.
Before You Begin

Before you configure AutoSupport, Spectra Logic recommends connecting the library to an email gateway. You will need to do the following: Connect a 10BaseT/100BaseT Ethernet cable to the Ethernet connector on the LCM (see Figure 10 and Figure 11 on page 38). Obtain the librarys IP address, subnet, and gateway address (see Configuring Network Settings on page 298). Obtain the AutoSupport Customer/Contract Number for the library from Spectra Logic.
Configuring Mail Recipients

If not already completed, configure the mail recipient who should receive AutoSupport information (see Configuring Mail Users on page 300). At a minimum, configure Spectra Logic Technical Support (autosupport@spectralogic.com) as a mail recipient if you want to send AutoSupport ticket requests to Spectra Logic Technical Support. If desired, you can configure additional recipients, as well. Notes: The default autosupport@spectralogic.commail recipient can be used for any ASL or HHM files that are generated by the library. This includes those generated manually, or automatically in response to critical events or log forwarding. You cannot configure the autosupport@spectralogic.com mail recipient to receive messages that result from configuration changes or system messages generated by the library. AutoSupport can be used without email access by saving the information generated by AutoSupport to a USB drive and then manually sending the stored information to Spectra Logic Technical Support.
February 2011
267
Configuring AutoSupport Profiles

Use the following steps to create or modify a profile for each person assigned to work with Spectra Logic Technical Support to troubleshoot problems with the library or drives. 1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. If not already completed, configure the mail recipients who should receive AutoSupport information (see Configuring Mail Recipients). 3. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > AutoSupport. The AutoSupport screen displays. Note: If you have not yet configured an AutoSupport profile, the Send Log Set button will be grayed out. If you have not configured one profile for AutoSend, the Configure Alarms button will be grayed out.
Figure 159 The AutoSupport screen. 4. Select Manage Profiles. The AutoSupport Profiles screen displays.
Figure 160 AutoSupport Profiles screen.
February 2011
268
Create or Modify a Profile

1. Select New Profile to create a new profile or select Edit Profile to modify an existing profile. The Company Information screen displays.
Figure 161 AutoSupport Company Information screen. Complete the information in this screen. The information marked with an asterisk (*) is required. Note: Make sure to fill in all of the required fields in each of the following screens. You cannot advance to the next screen if required information is missing. The Customer/Contract Number for the library is an alpha-numeric string of exactly six (6) characters.
Important
Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support at www.spectralogic.com/support if you need help locating your contract number. Entering a number other than your exact contract number will prevent us from finding your information in our system.
2. Select Next. The Contact Information screen displays.
Figure 162 AutoSupport Contact Information screen. Enter the information for your contact person in the fields provided. This information determines how Spectra Logic contacts this person.
269
3. Select Next. The System and Mail Information screen displays.
Figure 163 AutoSupport System and Mail Information screen. Enter information about your librarys operating environment and backup software in the fields provided. Select AutoSend Profile to use the current profile as the recipient for critical alarm log sets automatically sent by the library. Note: Only one profile can be configured as the AutoSend profile. Select the mail recipient(s) from the Mail To choices presented. Only mail recipients that have previously been configured are listed (see Configuring Mail Users on page 300). Note: You must select autosupport@spectralogic.com as one of the recipients if you want the library to send an AutoSupport ticket request to Spectra Logic Technical Support.
February 2011
270
4. Select Next. The Save Profile screen displays. Verify that all of the information shown is correct. If any information needs to be changed, select Previous to display the screen in which the changes need to be made.
Figure 164 The Save Profile screen. 5. When all of the information is correct, select Save. 6. The AutoSupport Profiles screen redisplays, listing the newly completed profile.
Figure 165 The updated AutoSupport Profiles screen. 7. Repeat Step 1 through Step 5 if you want to create additional profiles. Note: When you create multiple profiles, they are listed in the order in which they are created, not in alphanumeric order. 8. Select Previous to return to the main AutoSupport screen. If one of the profiles is configured as an AutoSend recipient, the Configure Alarms button is active (see Figure 159 on page 268).
271
Delete an AutoSupport Profile

Use the following steps to delete an existing profile. 1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > AutoSupport. The AutoSupport screen displays (see Figure 159 on page 268). 3. Select Manage Profiles. The AutoSupport Profiles screen displays (see Figure 165 on page 271). 4. Select the Remove button next to the contact you want to delete. The Remove Profiles screen displays, asking you to confirm the deletion. 5. Select Remove. The AutoSupport profiles screen redisplays with the updated list of profiles. 6. Select Previous to return to the main AutoSupport screen.
Configuring Alarms
Use the steps in this section if you want the library to automatically generate an ASL file in the event that any of the critical event listed under Critical Alarms on page 265 occurs. 1. If you have not already done so, configure one AutoSupport profile as the AutoSend recipient (see Step 3 on page 270). 2. Select Configure Alarms from the AutoSupport screen. The AutoSupport Critical Event Configuration screen displays.
Figure 166 The AutoSupport Critical Event Configuration screen.
February 2011
272
3. Select Enable Critical AutoSupport Events. When enabled, the library generates an ASL file whenever one of the critical events listed under Critical Alarms on page 265 occurs. Any ASL file that is generated as a result of a critical event is automatically sent all of the recipients selected in the AutoSend profile. Note: The autosupport@spectralogic.com must selected as a mail recipient in the AutoSend profile if you want the library to send critical event ASL files to Spectra Logic Technical Support. 4. If desired, select a value for the Partition Drive Failure Threshold from the drop-down list. This is the only configurable critical event. You can specify the threshold for the number of failed drives in a partition that will cause an AutoSupport ticket request to be generated. The threshold is a percentage of drives assigned to the partition. You can choose 25% and 50%; the default is 50%. The threshold applies to all partitions in the library. 5. Select Save or select Previous to return to the main AutoSupport screen without saving your changes. After your changes are saved, the Scheduled AutoSupport Configuration screen redisplays with a confirmation message. 6. Select Previous to return to the main AutoSupport screen.
February 2011
273
Configuring Log Set Forwarding

Log forwarding is enabled by default from the factory. This is a monthly log set that is forwarded to Spectra Logic for data collection. No action is taken by Spectra Logic Technical Support for a particular library when the log set is received, but the data is parsed and stored in our database to better understand our field population and how the library is used and how it can be improved. Use the following steps to configure log set forwarding. 1. Select Log Forwarding from the main AutoSupport screen. The Configure Log Forwarding screen displays.
Figure 167 The Configure Log Forwarding screen. 2. Select the forwarding options you want to use. Allow BlueScale to automatically send log sets is selected by default. Clear the check box if you do not want the library to automatically generate and submit monthly Auto Support Log sets to one or more preconfigured recipients. The autosupport@spectralogic.com mail recipient is automatically selected. All ASL files generated by the library are automatically sent to Spectra Logic Technical Support. Select any additional mail recipient(s) from the Mail To choices presented. Only mail recipients that have previously been configured are listed (see Configuring Mail Users on page 300). 3. Select Save. After your changes are saved, the Configure Log Forwarding screen redisplays with a confirmation message. 4. Select Previous to return to the main AutoSupport screen.
February 2011
274
Using AutoSupport
USING AUTOSUPPORT
This section covers the following aspects of using AutoSupport: Creating New Support Tickets Updating Existing Support Tickets on page 279
Creating New Support Tickets

Follow these steps to open a new ticket with Spectra Logic Technical Support. Notes: Spectra Logic Technical Support opens tickets during regular business hoursfrom 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. local time, Monday through Friday. If your problem needs attention outside of those hours, and you have an advanced service contract granting you 24-hour, 7 days a week telephone support, you can call Spectra Logic Technical Support after submitting the AutoSupport ticket (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5). Go to Spectra Logics web site at: www.spectralogic.com/ warranty-service for information about the warranty and service options for your Spectra T950 library. 1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > AutoSupport. The main AutoSupport screen displays.
Figure 168 The main AutoSupport screen. 3. If you want to save the AutoSupport ticket information to a USB drive, insert the drive into the LCMs USB port (see Figure 10 and Figure 11 on page 38). Note: The option to save the ticket to USB is only available if you plug a USB key in to the LCMs USB port before you select Send Log Set.
February 2011
275
Using AutoSupport
4. Select Send Log Set. The AutoSupport Profiles screen displays.
Figure 169 AutoSupport Profiles screen. 5. Click the Select button next to the profile for the main contact person for the issue. The Select Ticket Type screen displays.
Figure 170 The Select Ticket Type screen. If you are sending additional information about an existing support ticket, select Use existing support ticket and enter the ticket number in the Number field. See Updating Existing Support Tickets on page 279 for additional information. If this is a new ticket, select Create new support ticket. This option is selected by default. Notes: The option to create a new Hardware Health Monitor ticket option is not available when you sent a AutoSupport ticket using the Send Log Set option. It is only used to send HHM data in response to a maintenance notification (see Respond to HHM Notifications on page 103). Supplying a detailed problem description will help support personnel to address the issue more quickly and efficiently.
February 2011
276
Using AutoSupport
6. If you do not need to make any changes to the contact persons information for this support ticket, proceed to Step 7. If you need to temporarily change the contact persons information for this ticket, select Profile Data. The Profile Summary screen displays. Make any necessary changes in the Profile Summary screen, then select Use Settings. The Select Ticket Type screen redisplays.
Figure 171 The Profile Summary screen. Select Cancel to return to the Select Ticket Type screen without making any changes to the contact persons information. 7. In the Select Ticket Type screen (Figure 170 on page 276), type a detailed description of the issue in the Problem Description field, including what happened just before the failure occurred.
February 2011
277
Using AutoSupport
8. Select Next. The Confirm and Submit Ticket screen displays.
Figure 172 The Confirm and Submit Ticket screen. 9. Verify that all information is correct.
If... The library is not connected to a network with an SMTP server, Then... Select the check the box at the top of the screen (shown in Figure 172) to save the ticket information to a USB drive instead of emailing it from the library. Notes: The USB option is only available if you plugged a USB drive in to the LCMs USB port before you started the ticket-opening process. After saving the ticket information to the USB drive, you can upload it to the Technical Support portal (see Accessing the Technical Support Portal on page 421). Select Submit. A progress screen indicates that the ticket request (with log information) is being sent. When completed, the AutoSupport Profiles screen displays. When Spectra Logic receives the request, a ticket is opened and an email response is sent to the user with a ticket number.
All of the information is correct,
February 2011
278
Chapter 10 AutoSupport If... You need to change the problem description, Then...
Using AutoSupport
1. Select Previous to return to the Select Ticket Type screen. 2. Modify the problem description as required. 3. Select Next to return to the Confirm and Submit Ticket screen. 1. Select Previous to return to the Select Ticket Type screen. 2. Select Profile Data from the Select Ticket Type screen to display the Profile Summary screen. 3. Make any necessary changes in the Profile Summary screen. 4. Select Use Settings. The Select Ticket Type screen reappears 5. Retype the problem description. 6. Select Next to return to the Confirm and Submit Ticket screen.
You need to change the contact persons information,
Updating Existing Support Tickets

Follow these steps to update a ticket that you have already opened with Spectra Logic Technical Support. Updating a ticket is particularly useful for mailing new logs to Technical Support. Note: You must have the reference number for the existing ticket which you receive when you open the ticketand the information you are sending must be related to that ticket. If you have a new issue with your library, a new ticket is opened to address that issue separately. 1. If you plan to save the ticket information to a USB key, insert the device into the LCMs USB port (see Figure 10 and Figure 11 on page 38). 2. Follow the instructions in steps 1 through 5 in Creating New Support Tickets on page 275 to reach the Select Ticket Type screen (see Figure 170 on page 276). 3. If you do not need to make any changes to the contact persons information for this ticket, proceed to Step 5. If you need to temporarily change any of the contact persons information, select Profile Data. The Profile Summary screen displays (Figure 171 on page 277). 4. Make any necessary changes in the Profile Summary screen, then select Use Settings. The Select Ticket Type screen redisplays. 5. Select Use existing support ticket. 6. Type the six-digit ticket number in the Number field. You received this number when you originally opened the ticket. 7. Add any updated information in the Problem Description field. 8. Select Next. The Confirm and Submit Ticket screen displays (see Figure 172 on page 278).
February 2011
279
Using AutoSupport
9. Verify that all information is correct. If all of the information correct, proceed to Step 6. If something needs to be changed, select Previous and make the necessary changes. 10. To save the ticket information to a USB key instead of emailing from the library, check the box at the top of the screen (shown in Figure 172 on page 278). Note: The USB option is only available if you plugged a USB key in to the LCMs USB port before you started the ticket-opening process. 11. Select Submit. A progress screen indicates that the ticket request (with log information) is being sent. When completed, the AutoSupport Profiles screen displays. When Spectra Logic receives the request, a ticket is opened and an email response is sent to the user with a ticket number.
February 2011
280
CHAPTER 11
Configuring the Library
When it was installed, your library was configured according to your initial requirements. This chapter describes the procedures for modifying the library configuration, including the following topics:
Topic Accessing the System Setup Screen Enabling BlueScale Software Support, Options, and Upgrades Locating the Library Serial Number Generating Activation Keys Entering Activation Keys Configuring Library Users Adding a New User Modifying an Existing User Deleting an Existing User Modifying the Configuration Settings Configuring System Settings Enabling and Disabling Performance Metrics Enabling and Disabling Soft Power Configuring Network Settings Configuring Mail Users Enabling Email for the Automatic Configuration Save Feature Configuring Routine Maintenance (Optional) Configuring SNMP (Optional) Backing Up the Library Configuration Using the Auto Save Configuration Feature Backing Up the Library Configuration Manually Verifying the Configuration Backup Setting the Camera IP Address Configuring Controller Failover (Optional) Configuring Emulation (Optional) Described beginning on... page 282 page 283 page 284 page 285 page 289 page 290 page 291 page 292 page 292 page 293 page 294 page 297 page 298 page 298 page 300 page 302 page 304 page 305 page 307 page 308 page 308 page 310 page 312 page 316 page 319
281
Chapter 11 Configuring the Library Topic Configuring Bar-Code Reporting (Optional) Configuring a Firmware Package Server (Optional) Configuring and Using Observatory (Optional) Enabling and Configuring Observatory Using Observatory Configuring Rotation Manager (Optional) Configuring the Library for Use with StorNext Software (Optional)
Accessing the System Setup Screen Described beginning on... page 320 page 328 page 325 page 325 page 327 page 330 page 331
ACCESSING THE SYSTEM SETUP SCREEN

All of the settings for the librarys general configuration options are accessed through the System Setup screen. The screen is divided into two panes. You may need to use the scroll bar to see the entire screen. Option Enablement paneLets you enter the option keys for any purchased options, including BlueScale Software Support, licensed capacity (chambers), and Shared Library Services (SLS). Other Settings panefor configuring the operational parameters for the library. Note: The Other Settings pane can have up to three BlueScale Vision IP Address fields if the library includes multiple cameras.
Figure 173 The System Setup screen (Enable Options pane).

February 2011
Figure 174 The System Setup screen (Other Settings pane).

282
Enabling BlueScale Software Support, Options, and Upgrades
Use the following steps to access the System Setup screen when you want to enable a new option or change a configuration setting. 1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. Note: To simplify entering the BlueScale Software Support license key or option keys, use the BlueScale web interface (RLC) to access the System Setup screen. You can then cut and paste keys from the email containing the keys into the System Setup screen instead of typing them. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > System. The System Setup screen displays.
ENABLING BLUESCALE SOFTWARE SUPPORT, OPTIONS, AND UPGRADES

Activation keys are required to enable the BlueScale Software Support license and purchased library options and upgrades. These activation keys are tied to the library serial number (the hardware ID). The library ships with activation keys for the initial BlueScale Software Support license, the initial licensed slot capacity, and any additional features you purchased. These keys are entered when the library is installed. A valid BlueScale Software Support key is required in order to update the library firmware, which includes the BlueScale software.
Important
Your initial library purchase includes a BlueScale Software Support key that is valid for the duration of the warranty period, or for the duration of any uplifted or extended service contract you purchased with the library, whichever is longer. When you renew or extend your service contract, you must generate a new BlueScale Software Support key and enter the new key into the library to allow continued access to firmware upgrades (see Generating Activation Keys on page 285). If you have questions about your service agreement, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
February 2011
283
The default library configuration includes support for a single data partition. If you need additional data partitions, you must purchase a Shared Library Services (SLS) option key and enable the option as described in this section. See Partitions on page 49 for information about how SLS provides partitioning in the library. Notes: Starting with BlueScale11.1.0, an SLS option key is required if you want to configure more than a single partition. If your library previously included free SLS support, a new eightpartition option key will be installed on the library when you upgrade to BlueScale11.1.0 or later. After the upgrade is complete, check the Option Enablement pane of the BlueScale System Setup screen and make a note of the SLS key for future reference. You will need to manually re-enter the key if you reset the library to its factory defaults. The default library configuration includes BlueScale Encryption Basic Edition. If you need more advanced encryption management capabilities, you can purchase BlueScale Encryption Pro. See Chapter 12 Configuring and Using Encryption for information. If you purchase CoD capacity that exceeds the number of unlicensed chambers available in the current library configuration, you must also purchase a Terapack Bay Assembly (TBA) to replace a Drive Bay Assembly (DBA) in an existing frame or another expansion frame. The hardware upgrade must be installed by a Spectra Logic certified field engineer.
Locating the Library Serial Number

The library serial number (Hardware ID) is required for renewing or extending your service contract, which includes the BlueScale Software Support key, and for purchasing additional Capacity on Demand (CoD) or other upgrade options. Use the following steps to determine your librarys serial number. 1. Access the System Setup screen (see Accessing the System Setup Screen on page 282).
February 2011
284
2. Make a note of the librarys serial number (Hardware ID), which is needed to generate the activation keys.
Hardware ID
Figure 175 Locating the librarys serial number (Hardware ID).
Generating Activation Keys

The method used to obtain the activation key depends on whether you are renewing or extending your service contract or you are purchasing options and upgrades for the library. See Library Upgrades on page 497 for information about the available upgrade options.
Important
If you have multiple libraries, you will need to generate separate keys for each one.
Generate the BlueScale Software Support Key

If you need to extend or renew your service agreement, use the following steps to request a service renewal quote and generate the new BlueScale Software Support key. 1. Log into your account on the Technical Support portal at http://support.spectralogic.com.
Important
The Technical Support portal currently only supports Internet Explorer versions 6.0 and above.
Note: See Accessing the Technical Support Portal on page 421 for information about creating an account and accessing the Technical Support portal.
February 2011
285
2. Select the Incidents & Service Agreement Management icon.
Figure 176 Select the Incidents & Service Agreement Management icon. 3. Select the Request a Service Renewal link on the right-hand side of the page and complete the request form.
Figure 177 Complete the Request a Service Renewal Quote form. 4. Select Submit.
February 2011
286
5. When you receive notification that your service agreement has been completed, access the Spectra Logic key generation tool at www.support.spectralogic.com/keys.
Figure 178 Access the Spectra Logic key generation tool.

For this field... Email Address Serial Number Product Type Do the following... Enter the email address where your key will be sent. If you want the key sent to additional addresses, enter each address separated by commas. Enter the librarys serial number. Confirm that the correct library type is selected. By default, library type associated with the serial number you entered is selected.
February 2011
287
6. Select Generate Keys. The focus of the Key Generator window changes to show information about the current keys, including the new BlueScale Software Support key, associated with your library. The system also sends an email to the email address you provided.
Figure 179 View the current activation keys for your library. 7. Proceed to Entering Activation Keys on page 289.
Obtaining Option Activation Keys

1. Contact your Spectra Logic sales representative to order the desired options (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5). 2. When your order has been processed, the Spectra Logic Customer Care team will contact you with the activation keys. Note: All activation keys for options purchased with the library are included with the library shipment. The necessary option keys will be enabled during the installation process. 3. Proceed to Entering Activation Keys on page 289.
February 2011
288
Entering Activation Keys

Use the following steps to enter a new BlueScale Software Support key or the activation key for a new option into the library. Notes: If the hardware upgrade must be installed by a Spectra Logic certified field engineer, the necessary option keys will be enabled during the installation process. If you purchase CoD capacity you must create or modify a partition to make use of the added capacity. See Chapter 9 Using Partitions for instructions. If you purchase CoD capacity that exceeds the number of chambers that are physically present in the library, only the physically present chambers can be used when configuring partitions. 1. Have on hand the activation key for the BlueScale Software Support license or other option (see Generating Activation Keys on page 285. 2. Access the System Setup screen (see Accessing the System Setup Screen on page 282). Note: If you are using the BlueScale web interface (RLC), you can cut and paste keys from the email into the System Setup screen. The Option Enablement pane at the top of the screen lists the currently enabled options.
Enter activation key
Figure 180 The System Setup screen (Option Enablement pane).
February 2011
289
Configuring Library Users
3. Enter the activation key for the option you want to enable in the Key field. Notes: Note:The activation keys are not case-sensitive.
Important
Beginning with BlueScale 11.0.0, the format for option keys has changed. When you update to BlueScale 11.0.0 or later from an earlier version of BlueScale, all option keys already stored in the library are automatically converted to the new format. If you restore the library using a saved configuration that was created before the library was updated to BlueScale 11.0.0. or later, the option keys in the saved configuration are updated when they are imported. Record the converted keys for future reference.
4. Select Save. The System Setup screen refreshes with the new option key and its description included in the list of keys. You can view this list at any time to determine what options are currently enabled. Note: Keep a record of all activation keys listed on the Option Enablement pane of the System Setup screen. You will need to re-enter them if the library is ever reset to factory defaults.
CONFIGURING LIBRARY USERS

Each library user is assigned to one of three user groups, each with its own set of pre-defined library privileges (also known as permissions). Before you begin, read User Security on page 79 to understand the three types of user groups and what types of privileges each has.
February 2011
290
Adding a New User

Use the following steps to add a new library user and assign that user to a user group. 1. Log into the library with superuser privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Security > Edit Users. The Library Users screen displays.
Figure 181 The Library Users screen.

For this field... User Password Retype Password Enter... The users name. A password for the user and then retype the password to confirm. Notes: For security, the text in the Password and Retype Password fields is shown as asterisks (*). By default, passwords are not required for any of the three default users. Select the group to which the user belongs. Note: See User Security on page 79 for descriptions of the user groups and privileges associated with each.
User Type
3. Select Save. The new user name and group assignment is added to the list of users. 4. Repeat Step through Step 3 for each library user.
February 2011
291
Modifying an Existing User

Use the following steps to change settings for an existing user. 1. Log into the library with superuser privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Security > Edit Users. The Library Users screen displays (see Figure 181 on page 291), showing a list of library user names. 3. Find the users name, then select Edit next to the name. 4. Change the users name, password, group, or any combination of these as required. Notes: For security, the text in the Password and Retype Password fields is shown as asterisks (*). By default, passwords are not required for any of the three default users. 5. Select Save to save your changes.
Deleting an Existing User

Use the following steps to delete an existing user. Note: The library requires a minimum of one Superuser. You cannot delete the last member of the Superuser group. 1. Log into the library with superuser privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Security > Edit Users. The Library Users screen displays (see Figure 181 on page 291), showing a list of library user names. 3. Locate the name of the user to delete, then select Delete next to that users name. When the screen refreshes, the user list no longer includes the user name you just deleted.
February 2011
292
Modifying the Configuration Settings
MODIFYING THE CONFIGURATION SETTINGS

This section describes how to modify the librarys general configuration settings. To change the current value for any of these settings, access the System Setup screen (see Accessing the System Setup Screen on page 282), then scroll down to the Other Settings pane.
Figure 182 Other Settings pane of the System Configuration screen
February 2011
293
Configuring System Settings

The following table lists the system settings that are configured through the System Setup screen, describes how to change each setting, and provides the default value for each setting, if applicable.
This setting... Library Name Is used to.... Set the name used to identify the library in messages it sends to mail recipients. 1. Enter a name for the library. Use a name that will help identify the library to a remote user. 2. Select Save. Set the port number for the dedicated Ethernet port used to access the librarys embedded web server. 1. Enter a port number from 0 to 65,535. The default port number 80 is appropriate for most installations and is strongly recommended. If you use a port number other than 80, the port number must be explicitly entered into the web browser when accessing the library remotely. CAUTION! Do not set the web server port to 443. Using this port number will cause the front panel display to become unstable. 2. Select Save. 3. Reset the library to enable the new web port number setting (see Resetting the Library on page 370). Set how frequently the information on the BlueScale user interface screens is refreshed. 1. Use the Refresh drop-down list to select a scheduled interval time. 2. Select Save. Notes: You can manually refresh the displayed information at any time by selecting the refresh button located at the left end of the status bar (see Status Bar on page 85). If you want to use something other than the default refresh rate, you must set the refresh rate every time you log into the library. If you want to disable automatic refreshing of the display, set the refresh rate to zero. Set how long the current connection to the BlueScale user interface is idle before the current user is logged out. Note: Setting the timeout value to zero disables auto logout. 1. Enter the number of minutes for the timeout. 2. Select Save. Default blank
Web Server Port
80
Refresh Rate
60 seconds
Auto Logout Timeout
0 (zero) minutes
February 2011
294
Chapter 11 Configuring the Library This setting... Disable Online Access to Spectra Logic Enable Drive Performance Monitoring Enable Power Consumption Monitoring Enable Soft Power Is used to....
Modifying the Configuration Settings Default Unchecked (Enabled) Unchecked (Disabled)
Disable or enable displaying links to the Spectra Logic web site at the bottom of each BlueScale screen when the library has a connection to the internet. Enable/disable drive performance and power consumption monitoring. See Enabling and Disabling Performance Metrics on page 297 for detailed information and instructions.
Enable/disable the soft power feature. See Enabling and Disabling Soft Power on page 298 for detailed information and instructions. Enter the IP address of an external Syslog server used to collect the system messages posted by the library. See Use Syslog on page 98 for information about what the Syslog messages contain. 1. Enter a valid IP address for the Syslog server. 2. Select Save. The library immediately begins forwarding all system messages to the server at the specified IP address. Note: Entering an IP address of all zeros turns off the Syslog feature. Enable the SNMP agent and configure SNMP settings. See Configuring SNMP (Optional) on page 305 for detailed information and instructions. Note: These settings are not present unless you purchased the SNMP option for your library.
Unchecked (Disabled) 0.0.0.0 (Disabled)
Syslog Server IP Address
Enable SNMP Agent SNMP Settings
Unchecked (Disabled)
February 2011
295
Chapter 11 Configuring the Library This setting... BlueScale Vision IP Address Is used to....
Modifying the Configuration Settings Default 0.0.0.0 (Disabled)
Enable the BlueScale Vision camera icon for the camera at the specified IP address. For each IP address you enter, a camera icon displays in the Status bar (see Figure 61 on page 110). 1. Enter a valid IP address for the camera for which you want to display the icon. 2. Select Save. 3. If desired, repeat these steps to enable up to two additional camera icons. Notes: It is not necessary to enable the camera icon to connect to the BlueScale Vision viewer for a camera. You can simply connect an Ethernet cable to the cameras Ethernet port on the back of the library (see Figure 190 on page 312) and enter the camera IP address in your web browser. If you have not yet set the IP address for the camera, see Setting the Camera IP Address on page 312. If your network uses DHCP or if you do not know the current fixed IP address for the camera, use the Network Camera Setup Wizard to determine what the current IP address is and make any desired changes. See Use the Network Camera Setup Wizard to Discover the Camera on page 375 for information about using the wizard. Read the BlueScale Vision Camera Users Guide, included on the documentation CD that came with your library, for detailed information about configuring and using the camera. To remove a camera icon from the Status bar, set the IP address to 0.0.0.0. Set the IP addressing for the LCM Ethernet port. See Configuring Network Settings on page 298 for detailed information and instructions. Configure recipients for emails containing system messages, traces, and diagnostic results generated by the library. See Configuring Mail Users on page 300 for detailed information and instructions. Configure the auto configuration save feature to automatically send an email containing a backup of the library configuration whenever a partition is created or modified. See Enabling Email for the Automatic Configuration Save Feature on page 302 for detailed information and instructions. Configure an ongoing maintenance routine for the LCM operating system. See Configuring Routine Maintenance (Optional) on page 304 for detailed information and instructions.
Network Settings
DHCP
Mail User
autosupport@ spectralogic.com
Auto Configuration Save
Enabled
Routine Maintenance
Unchecked (Disabled)
February 2011
296
Chapter 11 Configuring the Library This setting... Date And Time Is used to....
Modifying the Configuration Settings Default N/A
Set the date and time the library uses as the time stamp for library system messages. 1. Select Edit. 2. Use the Date and Time drop-down lists to select the month, day (date), year, hour, and minute of the hour to display. 3. Select Save.
Enabling and Disabling Performance Metrics

Before you can use the librarys metrics options for monitoring the operation of your library and its drives, you must enable them. To learn more about these monitoring functions, see Monitoring Your Library on page 96. 1. Access the System Setup screen (see Accessing the System Setup Screen on page 282). 2. To enable a feature, select the check box next to the feature, then select Save.
Option Drive Performance Description Enabling the Drive Performance Monitor lets you monitor the performance of your drives. Important: Make sure that the drives do not contain media before you enable Drive Performance monitoring. If you enable this option when a drive contains a cartridge, the drive is reported as empty. Important: Do not enable drive performance monitoring with SAIT or SDLT drives installed in the library. Performance monitoring is only supported for LTO tape drives. Enabling Power Consumption Monitor (EnergyAudit) lets you monitor the amount of power your library is using. Note: When you disable and then re-enable power consumption monitoring, the library does not begin capturing data again until you power cycle the library.
Power Consumption
3. To disable a metric monitoring feature, clear the check box next to the metric, then select Save. Note: When you disable and then re-enable power consumption monitoring, the library does not begin capturing data again until you power cycle the library.
February 2011
297
Enabling and Disabling Soft Power

The Soft Power feature disables the front panel power button to prevent unauthorized personnel from powering down the library. Instead, the library can only be powered off by a logged-in superuser using the soft power button on the General Status screen (see Figure 43 on page 95). The soft power button only displays on the operator panel and requires a confirmation before power to the library is turned off. See Use the Soft Power Feature on page 94for instructions on how to use the Soft Power feature. Note: The Soft Power feature is only available when run from the local user interface; it is not available through the BlueScale web interface. The Soft Power feature can only be enabled or disabled by a superuser. Use the following steps to enable the Soft Power feature. 1. Access the System Setup screen (see Accessing the System Setup Screen on page 282). 2. Select the check box next to Enable Soft Power, then select Save. 3. To disable the Soft Power option, clear the check box next to Enable Soft Power, then select Save.
Configuring Network Settings

Spectra Logic highly recommends that you configure your library for network access. Without network access, you will be unable to perform any of the following operations: Access the BlueScale web interface for remote management of the library using a standard web browser. Open support incidents from the library front panel or manually send ASLs (AutoSupport Logs) to Spectra Logic Technical Support for troubleshooting. Automatically email system messages or reports to configured mail users. Automatically send a notification to a specified recipient when certain critical events occur. Download the latest firmware packages from the Spectra Logic web site directly to the library.
February 2011
298
By default, the IP address for the Ethernet port on the LCM is set using Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). If your network does not use DHCP, or if you simply want the library to have a fixed IP address, you can configure a static (fixed) IP address as described in this section. Using a static IP address ensures that you always know the IP address for the library and is highly recommended. Use the following steps to modify the librarys IP address settings. 1. Access the System Setup screen (see Accessing the System Setup Screen on page 282). 2. Select Edit next to Network Settings. The Network Settings screen displays. Note: If the library is connected to a routed IPv6 network, its IPv6 address is listed on the Network Settings screen. IPv6 increases the address space from 32 to 128 bits, providing a virtually unlimited number of networks and systems. You can use the librarys IPv6 address to connect to the library from a web browser without changing the librarys IP address configuration.
Figure 183 The Network Settings screen. 3. Select either DHCP or Static (highly recommended) as the addressing method. If you select static addressing, enter the following information:
For this field... Address Subnet Gateway Enter... A valid Class A, B, or C IP address in the form nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. The subnet mask. The subnet mask must be a valid octet in the form nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. A valid Class A, B, or C network gateway address in the form nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Enter 0.0.0.0 for the Gateway if your network does not use a gateway.
February 2011
299
4. Select Save to finish. To return to the System Setup screen without saving your changes, select Previous. Note: If desired, print the System Configuration Settings Checklist on page 73 and use it to record the librarys network configuration settings.
Configuring Mail Users

You can configure the library to send email messages with system messages, traces, and diagnostic results to selected recipients. Recipients can be configured to receive messages automatically as they are generated by the library or on demand when traces are run, reports are generated, or the library's configuration data is backed up. Recipients can also be configured to receive AutoSupport messages. Notes: You must configure the librarys IP address as described in Configuring Network Settings on page 298 before you configure mail recipients. You must configure autosupport@spectralogic.com as mail user if you want to have the library send AutoSupport ticket requests or ASL and HHM files that are generated by the library to Spectra Logic Technical Support during troubleshooting (see Configuring AutoSupport on page 267). If desired, you can print out the System Configuration Settings Checklist on page 73 and use it to record the mail settings.
February 2011
300
Use the following steps to add or modify mail recipients. 1. Select the Edit button next to Mail Users. The Mail Recipients screen displays.
Figure 184 The Mail Recipients screen. 2. To modify an existing recipient, select Edit next to the desired recipient in the Recipients pane. The Add/Update Recipient pane refreshes to show the current information for the selected recipient. 3. Enter or update the information in the Add/Update Recipient pane.
For this field... To Enter... The email address of the recipient. Be sure to use the full address using the standard email format, including the @ symbol. Important: The email address cannot contain spaces or other nonalphanumeric characters (for example, an ampersand, &). To include multiple addresses, leave a space between each address. An alphanumeric string to uniquely identify the library (for example, the name or location of the library). Important: The string cannot contain spaces or any non-alphanumeric characters (for example, the & or the @ symbols).s The IP address of your SMTP server in the SMTP IP Address field. Use the standard IP address format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn.
From
SMTP IP Address
February 2011
301
Chapter 11 Configuring the Library For this field... Receive Enter...
If desired, select one or more of the listed message types. The library will automatically email the selected messages to the recipient when they are generated. Notes: Do not select any message types if you do not want the recipient to automatically receive messages. However, messages can still be sent to the recipient on an individual basis when traces or diagnostics are run. Do not select message types for the autosupport@spectralogic.com mail recipient. This mail recipient is only used to receive AutoSupport ticket requests or ASL and HHM files that are generated by the library.
4. Select Save. The screen refreshes to show the new mail recipient in the Recipients portion of the Mail Recipient screen (Figure 184 on page 301). 5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 to configure or modify additional email recipients. 6. Select Previous to return to the System Setup screen.
Enabling Email for the Automatic Configuration Save Feature

Having a current backup of the librarys metadata (the library partition configuration, the MLM and DLM databases, and any encryption keys) is an essential component of any disaster recovery planning. For more information about protecting the library metadata, see Backing Up the Spectra Library Metadata on page 467. The Auto Configuration Save feature creates a backup file containing the library configuration and the MLM and DLM databases once a week and every time you create or modify a partition. You can configure the library to send the auto-save configuration file as an email attachment to a previously defined email recipient (highly recommended) as soon as the file is generated. Notes: The timing for the weekly Auto Configuration Save backup file is based on the first time the file was generated. The Auto Configuration Save feature does not automatically create a backup when you make other configuration changes to the library. To use the email option for the Auto Configuration Save feature, you must first configure a mail recipient for the person to whom you want the configuration file emailed (see Configuring Mail Users on page 300).
February 2011
302
The library sends the email whenever it performs an automatic configuration save operation. The auto-save file contains the library configuration, the MLM database, and the DLM database. The email includes instructions for using the attached file to restore the library. In the event that you need to restore the library configuration, you can use either the auto-save configuration file from the LCM or the emailed copy (see Restoring From an Auto Save Configuration File on page 378). Use the following steps to enable automatically emailing the backup file created by the Auto Configuration Save feature. 1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > System. The System Setup screen displays. 3. Scroll down to the Other Settings pane (Figure 182 on page 293). 4. Select the Edit button next to Auto Configuration Save. The Automatic Configuration Save Setup screen displays.
Figure 185 The Automatic Configuration Save Setup screen. 5. Select the Email Configuration checkbox, and then use the drop-down list to select the desired recipient from the list of previously configured mail recipients. Note: Do not use the default autosupport@spectralogic.com email recipient. Spectra Logic does not save emailed configuration files.
February 2011
303
Configuring Routine Maintenance (Optional)

Routine maintenance configures the library to automatically reset (reboot) the LCM once a week. This Routine maintenance is not required as part of normal library operation and should be left disabled. You may be asked to enable this by Spectra Logic Technical Support in the course of troubleshooting or problem resolution.
Important
Do not enable this option unless specifically instructed to do so by Spectra Logic Technical Support.
Use the following steps to configure the routine maintenance feature. 1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration->System. The System Setup screen displays. Scroll down until you see the Other Settings pane (Figure 182 on page 293). 3. Select Edit next to Routine Maintenance. The Routine Maintenance Configuration screen displays.
Figure 186 The Routine Maintenance Configuration screen. Select Enable if you want the LCM to automatically reboot at the selected time each week. Use the Day of Week, Hour, and Minute pull-down lists to select when the automatic reboot will occur. 4. Select Save to finish. To return to the System Setup screen without saving your changes, select Previous.
February 2011
304
Configuring SNMP (Optional)

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a widely used protocol for monitoring the health and welfare of your library by using integrated alerts. SNMP is an option you can purchase and enable to monitor the status of your library (see Enable SNMP and SSL on page 325). When SNMP is enabled, the Other Settings pane in the System Configuration screen includes options for enabling the SNMP agent and configuring SNMP settings. Notes: The SNMP and SSL functionality are keyed options included with the Observatory software. You must purchase Observatory to obtain the keys to enable SNMP and SSL. You can choose one or the other or both. The SNMP key is listed as Observatory in the Option Enablement pane of the System Settings screen. If you are using a network-based library monitor/management application other than the librarys BlueScale user interface, you may need to identify the librarys SNMP settings to the application. These settings include the read, write, and broadcast community strings. Note: If desired, you can print out the System Configuration Settings Checklist on page 73 and use it to record the librarys SNMP settings. Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support if you have questions about configuring SNMP (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5). Use the following steps to enable and configure SNMP. 1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > System. The System Setup screen displays. 3. Scroll down to the Other Settings pane. 4. Select Enable SNMP Agent to enable SNMP in the library. The agent returns information contained in the librarys Management Information Base (MIB) to the workstation used to manage the network. The MIB defines what information is available from the library over the network. Appendix C SNMP MIB Listing provides a listing of the current MIB for the library. The MIB file is available for download from Spectra Logic at ftp://ftp.spectralogic.com/pub/t-series/.
February 2011
305
5. Select SNMP Settings. The SNMP Settings screen displays.
Figure 187 The SNMP Settings screen.

Field System Contact System Location Valid Query Communities Description Maps to the value for system.4 (sysContact) object in the MIB. Maps to the value for system.6 (sysLocation) object in the MIB. Lists all SNMP communities to which the library currently belongs. The library only responds to SNMP queries from members of these communities. The default valid query community is public. An SNMP community is the group that devices and management stations running SNMP belong to. It helps define where information is sent. The community name is used to identify the group. An SNMP device or agent may belong to more than one SNMP community. It will not respond to requests from management stations that do not belong to one of its communities. Lists all the currently configured trap destinations (IP addresses) to which the library will send SNMP traps. There are no default trap destinations configured.
Trap Destinations
February 2011
306
Backing Up the Library Configuration
6. If necessary, make changes to the SNMP settings. Select Edit next to the setting you need to modify. The current settings display in the corresponding Add/Update section of the screen. Select Save in the corresponding Add/Update section of the screen after you make your changes.
Important
Community strings are case sensitive. If the library is configured to include community FooBar, it will answer to queries from community FooBar but not from community foobar.
Select Delete to remove a setting. 7. Select Previous to return to the System Configuration screen.
BACKING UP THE LIBRARY CONFIGURATION

Keeping valid backup copies of your librarys configuration and the MLM database ensures that you can easily restore the library in the event of a disaster. Having a backup of the librarys configuration is also extremely useful if problems require you to replace the LCM or the LCMs memory card. After the replacement procedure is complete, you can use the saved configuration to restore the librarys settings, including the partitions, instead of having to manually re-enter all of the information. The library provides two methods for backing up the configuration: Using the Auto Save Configuration Feature on page 308 Backing Up the Library Configuration Manually on page 308 If you have valid backups of the librarys configuration and MLM database, you can use them to restore the library (see Restoring the Library Configuration on page 378). See Backing Up the Spectra Library Metadata on page 467 for additional information about backing up the librarys configuration information, the MLM database, the DLM database, and any encryption keys.
February 2011
307
Using the Auto Save Configuration Feature

The Auto Save Configuration feature, which operates automatically, saves a backup of the library configuration, the MLM database, and the DLM database to a time-stamped zip file on the LCM compact flash. The autosave configuration file contains the currently library configuration, the MLM database, and the DLM database. The library generates the auto-save configuration file once a week and whenever a partition is created or modified. Note: The Auto Save Configuration feature does not automatically create a backup when you make other configuration changes to the library. As an extra security measure, you can configure the library to automatically email the time-stamped zip file to a previously defined email recipient each time the file is created. The zip file is named <date-time>cfg.zip, where <date-time> indicates when the zip file was created. Saving an external copy of the auto-save configuration file ensures that you can recover the library configuration, the MLM database, and the DLM database in the event of a disaster. When the recipient receives the email, verify the backup as described in Verifying the Configuration Backup on page 310 and Verifying the Database Backup File on page 203. For detailed information about configuring email for the auto-save configuration file and using it to restore the library, see: Enabling Email for the Automatic Configuration Save Feature on page 302 Restoring From an Auto Save Configuration File on page 378
Backing Up the Library Configuration Manually

Whenever you make a configuration change to the library that does not result in an auto-save configuration file (for example, you entered option keys after the creation date of the current auto-save file), you can manually back up the library configuration as described in this section. Note: The Save Library Configuration utility described in this section does not back up the MLM database or the DLM database. To back up these databases, use the Save MLM Database utility, as described in Backing Up the MLM and DLM Databases on page 201.
February 2011
308
Use the following steps to manually back up the librarys configuration: 1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. Select Maintenance > Tools > Utilities. The Utilities screen displays a list of Basic Utilities.
Figure 188 The Basic Utilities screen. 3. Select Save Library Configuration. The screen refreshes to show the details for the utility.
Figure 189 The Save Library Configuration utility.
February 2011
309
4. Use the Select the destination drop-down list to choose where you want to save the file.
Selecting this destination... Mail results to Saves the library configuration... As a zip file attached to an email sent to the specified mail recipient. To send the email with the attached library configuration file to someone who is not already listed as a mail user, you must first configure that person as an email recipient as described in Configuring Mail Users on page 300. Note: Do not use the default autosupport@spectralogic.com email recipient. Spectra Logic does not save emailed files unless they are specifically requested for troubleshooting. To the librarys compact flash card (in the LCM). To a folder on the USB drive called SavedConfigs\<date-time>, where <date-time> is the time stamp for when the backup was created. The folder contains multiple configuration files with the format cnnnnnn.cfg, where n is a number between 0 and 9. Note: If you select this option, connect a USB drive to the USB port on the LCM before running the utility (see Connecting a USB Drive to the LCM on page 117).
Save results to Compact Flash file Save results to LCM USB
5. Select Run Utility. After a brief delay, the Utility Results screen redisplays, showing that the configuration file was either saved or sent. 6. Confirm that the backup was successful, as described in Verifying the Configuration Backup.
Verifying the Configuration Backup

After creating a backup of your library configuration, verify that the backup was successful as soon as possible after you create it.
For a Manual Backup Saved to a USB Drive

1. Plug the USB drive into a PC that is not connected to the library. 2. Examine the list of files on the USB drive and locate the \SavedConfigs folder. 3. Open the SavedConfigs folder and verify that a folder corresponding to the date and time you created the backup is present. 4. Open the date-time folder and confirm that a number of files of the format cnnnnnn.cfg, where n is a number between 0 and 9, are present. Make sure the files are more than 0 bytes in size.
February 2011
310
5. If the configuration files are present and are more than 0 bytes in size, the backup was successful. Store the USB drive in a safe location. 6. If the configuration files are not present, repeat the backup process (Backing Up the Library Configuration Manually on page 308) using a different USB drive.
For a Zip FIle Sent as an Email Attachment

1. Open the email and confirm that it contains a zip file attachment. 2. Open the zip file and confirm that it contains a number of configuration files of the format cnnnnnn.cfg, where n is a number between 0 and 9, are present. Make sure the files are more than 0 bytes in size. 3. If the configuration files are present and is more than 0 bytes in size, the configuration backup was successful. Save the email attachment to a safe location from which you can copy it to a USB drive, if needed. Note: If necessary, rename the zip file to indicate the date of the backup. 4. If the email attachment does not contain the configuration files or one or more files are 0 bytes in size, repeat the backup process (Backing Up the Library Configuration Manually on page 308) to send the email again.
February 2011
311
Setting the Camera IP Address
SETTING THE CAMERA IP ADDRESS

Each BlueScale Vision camera installed in the library uses a separate IP address. These address are separate from the IP address used for communications with the library. Note: If desired, print the System Configuration Settings Checklist on page 73 and use it to record the camera frame locations and IP addresses. Use the following steps to set the cameras IP address. 1. Connect an Ethernet cable from cameras Ethernet port on the back of the frame containing the camera to a network that is accessible to the computer that will be used to configure the camera. The camera Ethernet connector is located at the top left of each frame. Note: In order to comply with EMC requirements, use a shielded Ethernet cable to connect the camera to your network.
Drive Frame
Media Expansion Frame
Figure 190 Location of the camera Ethernet port. 2. Start a web browser session on the computer that is connected to the camera.
February 2011
312
3. Enter the cameras current IP address in the browsers Address field. The start page for the BlueScale Vision viewer opens in a new web page.
Figure 191 The BlueScale Vision viewer start page. Notes: The cameras default IP address is 10.10.10.11. If the IP address was changed as part of the library installation, enter the current IP address. If the default IP address was not changed and depending on how the computer you are using is configured, you may need to temporarily change the computers network settings so that it can access the cameras default 10.10.10.11 IP address. If your network uses DHCP, use the Network Camera Setup Wizard to determine what the current IP address is and make any desired changes. See Using the Network Camera Setup Wizard to Discover the Camera on page 375 for information about using the wizard. If the camera is configured with an unknown fixed IP address, you must physically access the camera to reset it to use DHCP addressing (see Resetting the BlueScale Vision Camera IP Address on page 374). You can then use the Network Camera Setup Wizard to determine what the current IP address is and make any desired changes.
February 2011
313
4. Select Administration. The login screen for the application displays.
10.10.10.11
Figure 192 The Administration login screen. 5. Log in using administrator (all lower case, case-sensitive) for the user name; leave the password field blank, and select OK. The System Settings screen displays.
Figure 193 The Administration screen.
February 2011
314
6. Select Network. The IP address configuration screen displays.
Figure 194 The Administration network screen. 7. Set the desired IP, subnet mask, and gateway addresses as required for your network and select Save. The factory defaults are:
IP Address 10.10.10.11 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway 10.10.10.1
8. If you have a multi-frame library with multiple cameras, make a note of which frame contains the camera you just configured.
Important
The order of the BlueScale Vision IP Address fields in the System Setup screen does not have any relationship to the position of the camera in the library. Make sure that you know which frame contains which camera. You will need the IP address information in order to determine which camera to use when viewing a specific frame.
9. If the library contains multiple cameras, repeat Step 1 on page 312 through Step 7 for each camera.
February 2011
315
Configuring Controller Failover (Optional)
CONFIGURING CONTROLLER FAILOVER (OPTIONAL)

The library supports using two G3 F-QIPs or RIMs (controllers) to provide a redundant connection to the transporter. A G3 F-QIP or RIM can be configured as the failover controller for multiple partitions, as long as all of the partitions use identical G3 F-QIPs or RIMs. See Controller Failover on page 66 for information about how controller failover functions.
Important
If you want to use F-QIPs for the controller failover feature in a library that uses SCSI drives, the SCSI drives cannot be connected to either of the F-QIPs used in the controller failover pair. The SCSI drives must be connected to an F-QIP that is not part of the controller failover pair.
Notes:
The controller failover option is not available if the library does not contain two available G3 F-QIPs or RIMs. The controller failover option is only supported by G3 F-QIPs; other versions for the F-QIP are not supported for controller failover. The G3 F-QIP can be identified by the two Fiber Channel ports, which are labeled 2 Gb/s (see Figure 13 on page 48).
If you configure controller failover before you configure the partitions, the F-QIP or RIM configured as the secondary controller in the failover pair is not available for selection as the exporting controller. Make sure that the F-QIP or RIM you select as the exporting controller is identical to the one you selected as the failover partner. To use this feature, you must assign a failover partner to the F-QIP or RIM that is configured to provide the partitions robotic control path to the transporter (see Choosing the Robotic Control Path on page 227). 1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges.
February 2011
316
2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Controllers to display the Controllers screen.
Figure 195 The Controllers screen before the failover controller is selected. 3. Identify the controller that you configured to provide the robotics control path in a partition (see Choose the Robotic Control Path on page 232). This controller is the primary controller in the failover pair. 4. Click the Failover button next to the selected controller to display the Controller Failover screen.
Figure 196 The Controller Failover screen. 5. Select the controller that you want to use as the failover partner for the primary controller. This is the secondary controller in the failover pair.
Important
Make sure that the F-QIP you select is not already being used to provide the robotic control path for another partition.
Notes:
To disable controller failover, select None. This is the default setting. When you select None or if you select a different QIP as the failover partner, the QIP previously configured as the failover partner is once again available for use in a partition.
February 2011
317
6. Select OK to complete the assignment. The Controllers screen redisplays to show the two F-QIPs configured as a failover pair. For example, in Figure 197 FR2/DBA1/F-QIP1 is the primary controller in the failover pair and will be used to provide the robotic control path for any partitions in which it is used. The FR3/DBA1/F-QIP1 is the secondary controller in the failover pair and will automatically take over for the primary F-QIP if it detects a problem.
Primary controller
Secondary controller
Figure 197 The Controllers screen after Controller Failover is configured. 7. To use the configured failover pair in a partition, select an F-QIP or RIM that is identical to the one you selected as the failover partner as the exporting controller (see Choose the Robotic Control Path on page 232).
February 2011
318
Configuring Emulation (Optional)
CONFIGURING EMULATION (OPTIONAL)

The library identifies itself with an Inquiry string of SPECTRA PYTHON. If your backup software or operating system does not specifically support one the Spectra Logic libraries that uses an Inquiry string of SPECTRA PYTHON, you can configure one or more partitions to emulate another type of library. Because most backup applications are certified for one or more of these libraries, using the emulation mode may allow these applications to support the library.
Caution
Using emulation is not the preferred method of operation and should only be used when recommended by Spectra Logic Technical Support.
Important
Beginning with BlueScale11.0, the format of the data reported for the element addresses when using STK L700 emulation has changed (see Configuring the Library for Use with StorNext Software (Optional) on page 331). If you have been using STK L700 emulation using an earlier version of BlueScale, check the configuration of your software to determine if you need to make changes to reflect the new element address format.
Notes:
Configuring emulation changes how the identifies itself to the operating system or backup application. The following describes an advanced partition configuration option used only in the context of creating or editing a partition. The screens for configuring emulation are only accessible after you complete the initial configuration steps for the partition (see Entering the Initial Partition Settings on page 225).
To define a library emulation, follow these steps: 1. Log in as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions. The Shared Library Services screen displays. 3. Select Edit to modify an existing partition or New to create a new partition. 4. Select Next to advance to the Name and Media Type screen (Figure 122 on page 225).
February 2011
319
Configuring Bar-Code Reporting (Optional)
5. Select Advanced. The Advanced Partition Settings screen displays.
Figure 198 Specifying the emulation type. 6. Select the type of library you want to emulate: Select a preconfigured emulation from the Use preset drop-down list Create a custom emulation. Select User Define, then enter the Vendor and Model in the appropriate fields. Note: The default setting is SPECTRA PYTHON. 7. Select Next. The Robotic Control Path screen displays listing the QIPs and/or direct-attach drives currently installed in the library. This is the beginning of the series of configuration screens. The sequence of steps and screens matches those described in Configuring a New Data Partition on page 223.
CONFIGURING BAR-CODE REPORTING (OPTIONAL)

The Spectra Logic T-Series libraries recognize bar-code labels with up to 16 bar-code characters, including one checksum character. The library can also handle bar-code labels with or without a checksum character. By default, the library: Expects bar-code labels with checksums (that is, it treats the right-most character as a checksum character). Does not use the checksum character to validate the bar code. Reports up to 16 bar-code characters but does not report the checksum character. Note: With the exception of the checksum, the bar-code labels typically show the human-readable character that each bar code character represents. The checksum character is not considered human-readable.
320
Unexpected behavior can occur if the librarys bar-code reporting configuration does not match the type of bar-code labels that are being used and what the backup software expects. The most common problems that occur are: The library is configured to expect a checksum character in bar codes, but the bar-code labels do not have a checksum character. In this case, the bar code reported by the library will be missing the right-most character. This is because the library treats the last character in the bar code as an unreported checksum character, when it is actually part of the bar code. The library is configured to use bar-code labels that do not include a checksum, but the bar-code labels include a checksum character. In this case, the library treats the checksum character as part of the bar code and therefore reports a seemingly random garbage character as the last character of the bar-code. The library is configured to use bar-codes that include a checksum and perform checksum verification, but the bar-code labels do not have a checksum character. In this case, the library reports a verification error on every bar-code label, because the character it is using to perform the checksum verification is not a checksum character. If your environment has any of the following: Labels without a checksum character A requirement to validate the bar code using the checksum Backup software with specific bar code requirements then you may need to modify the default settings used by the library.
Important
Proceed with caution when changing the librarys default bar-code reporting settings. Any changes that you make affect every partition in the library. Before making changes, make sure that the changes will not adversely affect others using the library. If you do modify the bar-code reporting settings, you should do so before using any media. If you change the bar-code reporting settings after media has been used by the backup software, the software may no longer recognize those tapes. In general, it is best to leave the library set to its defaults and make any reporting modifications on the software side if that is an option. Never mix media with checksummed and non-checksummed labels in the library.
February 2011
321
Changing the Librarys Default Bar-code Reporting Configuration

Note: If you are unsure whether your labels include a checksum character, see Determining Bar-Code Label Type on page 323. If necessary, use the following steps to change the librarys default bar-code reporting configuration to disable the use of checksum characters, enable or disable the verification of the checksum character, or modify what portion of the actual bar-code is reported to the host. 1. Log into the library with Superuser or Administrator privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > System. The System Setup screen displays. 3. Select Utilities from the toolbar menu. The Utilities screen displays. 4. Select Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen displays. 5. Select Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show a list of the advanced utilities. 6. Select Modify Barcode Reporting to display information about the utility. Figure 199 shows the default settings.
Figure 199 Default settings for Barcode Reporting
February 2011
322
7. Change the bar-code reporting as required for your environment.

Use this parameter Non-checksummed Barcodes Check-summed Barcodes Ignore checksummed bar codes Report Left-Hand Characters If... Your labels do not include a checksum. Your labels include a checksum and you want the bar code verified against the checksum when it is read. Verification is not generally required, but adds extra confirmation that the bar-code label was read correctly by the bar-code reader. Your labels include a checksum character but you do not want the bar code verified against the checksum when it is read. You want the library to report only the left-most x characters in the bar code, where x is any number from 1 to 16. For example, if the bar code is 1234567L2 and you configure the library to report only the five left-most characters, the library reports the barcode as 12345. Important: Be careful when specifying the number of left-most characters to report. You may end up with duplicate barcodes reported. For example, 12345XXXL2 and 12345ABCL3 will both be reported as 12345. You want the library to report only the right-most x characters in the bar code, where x is any number from 1 to 16. This is the default setting. For example, if the bar code is 1234567L2 and you configure the library to report the 5 right-most characters, the library reports the barcode as 567L2. Important: Be careful when specifying the number of right-most characters to report. You may end up with duplicate barcodes reported. For example, 1234567L2 and ABCD567L2 will both be reported as 567L2.
Report Right-Hand Characters
8. If you want to specify the number of bar-code characters the library reports, enter a number from 1 to 16 in the Select the Number of characters to report field. If your labels include a checksum, the number you enter includes the checksum character. The default number of characters is 16. 9. Select Run Utility. When the utility completes, the LCM reboots. After the library completes its initialization, it rescans the bar-code labels of all media in the library. This rescan takes approximately 18 seconds per cartridge.
Determining Bar-Code Label Type

A checksum character is an invisible characterreadable by the bar-code reader, but not shown in the human-readable text on the label. Its function is similar to a parity check.definition Refer to the bar-code label specification in the Spectra T950 Library User Guide for detailed information about the required physical characteristics of bar-code labels.
February 2011
323
Spectra Logic Certified Media with Standard Bar-code Labels

The standard bar-code labels on Spectra Logic Certified data cartridges have a bar code with eight human-readable characters followed by a checksum character that is not human-readable. The last two humanreadable characters indicate the media type (for example, L3 is LTO-3 media and L4 is LTO-4 media).
Spectra Logic Certified Media with Custom Bar-code Labels

Custom bar-code labels are designed to a users specification. Custom labels can have up to 16 bar-code characters and may or may not include a checksum character.
Bar-code Labels on Media Not Purchased from Spectra Logic

If you purchase your media from a vendor other than Spectra Logic or if you purchase your media and bar code labels from two different vendors, make sure that the bar codes you specify always include or always do not include a checksum.
Important
Never mix media with checksummed and non-checksummed labels in the library.
If you are unsure whether the bar-code labels on your media include a checksum, perform the following steps: 1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. Select the Modify Barcode Reporting utility (see Step 6 on page 322). The screen refreshes to show the details for the utility. 3. Make sure that the library is configured as follows: Ignore checksum barcodes Report Right-Hand Characters Number of characters read is set to 16 4. Make a note of the human-readable text on each bar-code label you want to test. 5. Import the cartridges into the library, then view the media inventory, either on the BlueScale Inventory screen or through your backup software. If bar code reported exactly matches the human-readable text you recorded, then the bar code includes a checksum character. If bar code reported is missing the right-most character, then the bar code does not include a checksum character.
February 2011
324
Configuring and Using Observatory (Optional)
CONFIGURING AND USING OBSERVATORY (OPTIONAL)

The BlueScale Observatory application lets you to monitor and manage multiple Spectra Logic libraries from a single remote location. Observatory arrives on a software CD for you to install on your computer system. The Observatory license includes two additional keyed options to enable Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) and Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) functionality. You can specify whether you want the keys to enable SNMP and SSL at the time you purchase Observatory. You can choose one or the other or both.
Enabling and Configuring Observatory

The instruction booklet included with the Observatory installation CD provides basic installation and configuration instructions. Additional information is available from the Observatory online help. After you install Observatory, configure it with the IP address for each Spectra Logic library you want to display in Observatory as described in Add Libraries to Observatory on page 326. Note: It is not necessary to enter the Observatory option key into the System Settings screen if you do not want to use the SNMP and SSL options.
Enable SNMP and SSL

If you want to use the SNMP or SSL option (or both), use the following steps to enter the option keys on each library you want to monitor.
Important
Enabling SSL configures the BlueScale web interface to uses a secure Internet connection. You must prefix the IP address with https:// instead of just entering the IP address when accessing the BlueScale web interface.
1. Contact your Spectra Logic sales representative to order the SNMP and SSL keys for the Observatory software (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5). You can choose one or the other or both. 2. When your order has been processed, the Spectra Logic Customer Care team will contact you with the activation keys. 3. Enter the Observatory option key as described in Entering Activation Keys on page 289). 4. Scroll down the System Configuration screen to the Other Settings pane and set the Web Server Port.
Caution
Do not set the web server port to 443 when using SSL. Using this port number will cause the front panel display to become unstable.
February 2011
325
5. Click Save. 6. Close all browsers accessing the library, then reset the LCM (see Resetting the LCM or RCM on page 371).
Caution
Failure to reset the LCM will result in communication errors when you access the user interface
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for each additional library you want to monitor. 8. Enable the SNMP agent and configure its settings (see Configuring SNMP (Optional) on page 305). Note: Appendix C SNMP MIB Listing provides a listing of the current MIB for the library. The MIB file is available for download from Spectra Logic at ftp://ftp.spectralogic.com/pub/tseries/.
Add Libraries to Observatory

1. Install Observatory on a Windows-based computer that is connected to the same network as the libraries you want to monitor using Observatory. 2. When the software install is complete, Observatory opens in a web browser. 3. Select Login (no password) on the Observatory log in page to access the Overview page. 4. Select the Setup icon and follow the instructions in the instruction booklet included with the Observatory installation CD to add the libraries you want to monitor using Observatory.
February 2011
326
Using Observatory
When you start Observatory, the Overview screen shows the status of all libraries being monitored. The individual libraries are grouped by site, in the center of the Overview screen. Note: You can run no more than two simultaneous Observatory sessions.
Figure 200 The Observatory Overview screen. Use the following steps to access the librarys BlueScale web interface through Observatory. 1. Select Login next to the library you want view to establish a remote connection to the library and display the librarys login screen. 2. Enter the appropriate user name and password to log into the library.
February 2011
327
Configuring a Firmware Package Server (Optional)
CONFIGURING A FIRMWARE PACKAGE SERVER (OPTIONAL)

Under most circumstances, the most straight forward method for updating the library firmware is to configure each library with internet access, which provides to the firmware download page on Spectra Logic web site. You can also download the firmware to a USB drive and use the downloaded file to perform the update. If you cannot use either of these methods, you can set up and use one or more local servers to store library firmware packages downloaded from Spectra Logic. Using a firmware package server is only useful in the following situations: Corporate polices do not permit you to connect the library to the internet. You are unable to connect to the Spectra Logic web site for firmware downloads. Note: For additional information about firmware packages and how to use them, see Updating Library Firmware on page 428. Use the following steps to configure, modify, or delete a local package server. 1. Identify the server or servers you want to use for storing Spectra Logic library firmware packages. Make sure that these servers can access the Internet and that they are on the same network as the libraries you want to update. Note: Both Microsofts Internet Information Services (IIS) and the Unix-based Apache server work as package servers. 2. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 3. Select Maintenance > Package Update. The Package Update screen displays.
Figure 201 The Package Update screen.
February 2011
328
Configuring a Firmware Package Server (Optional)
4. Select Manage Package Servers. The Manage Package Servers screen displays.
Server Name Server configuration settings
Figure 202 The Manage Package Servers screen. The Package Servers portion of the screen lists the following information for each currently configured package server: Server Name Configuration settings: IP Address, Proxy, and Directory where firmware packages are stored
February 2011
329
Configuring Rotation Manager (Optional)
5. The Add/Update Server portion of the Manage Package Servers screen provides options for adding, modifying, or deleting a package server. To add a package server, fill in the information required in the Name, Address, Proxy, and Directory fields, then select Save. The screen refreshes and lists the new server in the Package Servers portion of the screen. Note: Make sure you specify the directory, including the full path, where the firmware packages will be stored. To edit a server, select Edit next to that servers name and details. Change the server information as necessary, then select Save. To delete a server, select Delete next to that servers name and details.
Important
There is no confirmation when you delete a package server. After you select Delete, the server is removed from the list of available package servers.
CONFIGURING ROTATION MANAGER (OPTIONAL)

If your site uses NetBackups Vault Manager or Symantec Netbackup, you can purchase the Rotation Manager option to simplify identifying tapes moved off site. With Rotation Manager installed, the library sends an email containing the bar code information for every piece of media and its off-site location to a specified email recipient. Administrators can use this email to import identifying information for every bar-code labeled cartridge going off site into the backup software. Along with listing every bar-code labeled cartridge, the information also lists the bar-code of the TeraPack magazine holding the cartridge, which simplifies finding groups of cartridges using a single bar code. Refer to the documentation that accompanied your software for instructions. Note: Before you can use Rotation Manager, you must enter the option key to enable it as described in Entering Activation Keys on page 289. Use the following steps to configure the Rotation Manager. 1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. Generate the key and enable the option as described in Enabling BlueScale Software Support, Options, and Upgrades on page 283.
February 2011
330
Configuring the Library for Use with StorNext Software (Optional)
3. From the toolbar menu, select General > Import Export > Rotation Manager. The Rotation Manager Configuration screen displays.
Figure 203 The Rotation Manager Configuration screen. 4. Symantec NetBackup is the only vendor supported by Rotation Manager and is selected automatically. 5. Select the Mail To email address to use for sending notifications. Only previously configured mail recipients are listed. To send the notification to someone who is not already listed as a library user, you must first configure that person as an email recipient (see Configuring Mail Users on page 300). 6. Select Save.
CONFIGURING THE LIBRARY FOR USE WITH STORNEXT SOFTWARE (OPTIONAL)

StorNext does not currently provide native support for Spectra T-Series libraries. Before you can use the library with StorNext you must configure one or more data partitions (virtual libraries) to emulate a Sun StorageTek L700 library. Notes: Only data partitions configured to use the STK L700 emulation mode are recognized by the StorNext software. Support for using the STK L700 emulation mode with StorNext software requires BlueScale 11 or later. The BlueScale software version is displayed in the center of the status bar at the bottom of each BlueScale screen.
BlueScale software version
Figure 204 The BlueScale software version shown on the status bar.
February 2011
331
Configuring a partition to emulate the L700 library results in the following changes to the SCSI data it reports: The INQUIRY command returns STK L700 as the product identification. The READ ELEMENT STATUS command reports the element addresses (the element addresses for the robotics, drives, and magazine slots) using the format defined for the Sun StorageTek L700 library.
Important
Beginning with BlueScale11.0, the format of the data reported for the element addresses when using STK L700 emulation has changed (see Configuring the Library for Use with StorNext Software (Optional) on page 331). If you have been using STK L700 emulation using an earlier version of BlueScale, check the configuration of your software to determine if you need to make changes to reflect the new element address format.
Configure the Partition

Use the following steps to configure a partition for use with StorNext.
Important
Make sure that the exporting QIP and the drives in the partition are connected and configured on the same zone or storage area network (SAN) as the StorNext server.
1. Log in as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. To change user types, select Security > Switch User from the toolbar menu, then log in as a user with the required privileges. 2. Create or modify the partition to be used with StorNext. See Chapter 9 Using Partitions for detailed information about configuring and using partitions. Note: StorNext treats each data partition as an independent library. a. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions to display the Shared Library Services screen.
Figure 205 The Shared Library Services screen.
February 2011
332
b. Select New to create a new partition or Edit to modify an existing partition. The Name and Media Type screen displays.
Figure 206 The Name and Media Type screen. c. Enter a name for the partition and select the type of media that it will use. d. Select Advanced to display the Advanced Partition screen.
Figure 207 Specify the emulation mode. e. Select STK L700 from the Use preset drop-down list. f. Select Next. The Robotic Control Path screen displays listing the QIPs and/or direct-attach drives currently installed in the library. This is the beginning of the series of configuration screens. The sequence of steps and screens matches those described in Configuring a New Data Partition on page 223.
February 2011
333
Configure StorNext
The online help for the StorNext software includes all of the software documentation. This documentation provides detailed instructions for configuring and using the software to operate a library when it is emulating the Sun StorageTek L700 library.
February 2011
334
CHAPTER 12
Configuring and Using Encryption
This chapter describes configuring and using BlueScale Encryption Basic Edition, which is included with your library purchase. For information about using BlueScale Professional Edition, see the BlueScale Encryption User Guide.
Topic BlueScale Encryption Overview Site-Specific Decisions Site Security Example: Low Security Site Configuring Encryption Before You Begin Log Into the Encryption Application Described beginning on... page 336 page 337 page 341 page 342 page 342 page 343
Configure the Encryption Initialization Mode and page 344 Password Create an Encryption Key Assigning the Encryption Key to a Partition Enable Encryption Using an F-QIP Enable Drive-Based Encryption Exporting and Protecting Keys Export the Encryption Key Verify Backups of Encryption Keys Protect the Encryption Key Restoring Encrypted Data The Required Key is Stored in the Library The Required Key is Not Stored in the Library Using the Endura Decryption Utility Deleting an Encryption Key Recycling Encrypted Media page 345 page 348 page 350 page 349 page 351 page 351 page 354 page 355 page 357 page 357 page 358 page 360 page 360 page 361
335
BlueScale Encryption Overview
BLUESCALE ENCRYPTION OVERVIEW

BlueScale Encryption is tightly integrated into your Spectra library. Encryption can be handled through encryption-enabled LTO-4 and LTO-5 tape drives using LTO-4 and LTO-5 media. BlueScale encryption key management is provided through the librarys user interface. Notes: LTO-2 or LTO-3 tape drives cannot be used in partition configured to use drive-based encryption. However, you can use QIP-based encryption with these drives. Encryption-enabled LTO-4 drives in a partition configured to use drive-based encryption can read, but not write to LTO-2 or LTO-3 media. Encryption-enabled LTO-5 drives in a partition configured to use drive-based encryption can read, but not write to LTO-3 media. LTO-2 media is not supported. Encryption can also be performed using encryption-enabled F-QIPs. However, this option is not recommended. The encryption performed by encryption-enabled LTO-4 and LTO-5 drives is not compatible with the encryption performed by an encryption-enabled F-QIP. If a partition includes both an encryption-enabled F-QIP and encryptionenabled LTO-4 or LTO-5 drives, you must choose one type of encryption or the other. You cannot use both types in the same partition. The BlueScale Encryption system has two major components: The encryption chip in the F-QIP, LTO-4, or LTO-5 drive. Using hardware encryption makes encryption extremely fast and places no burden on your network. BlueScale Key Management software accessed through the librarys user interface, either using the touch screen or a remote connection through a web browser. Optionally, you can secure the web browser using SSL, which is included with Observatory. Together, these components let you easily implement the strongest encryption available, as recognized by the federal government: AES encryption using a 256-bit key. BlueScale Encryption incorporates multiple layers of security, some of which are discussed in this chapter. Others are technically implemented and invisible to the user.
February 2011
336
Site-Specific Decisions
To determine a BlueScale Encryption strategy appropriate for your site and your data, decide on the security level appropriate for your site, and the amount and kinds of data to encrypt. Then you can make some choices about how best to implement BlueScale Encryption. The following sections describe considerations that affect how you configure encryption.
BlueScale Encryption: Standard Edition vs. Professional Edition

All data encrypted using BlueScale Encryption and Key Management Standard and Professional Editions and LTO-4 or LTO-5 drive-based encryptionis secured by the strongest available encryption method, AES-256. Through BlueScale Encryption and Key Management, you have additional choices in defining the level of security you can implement in your data center. Deciding which version of BlueScale Encryption to use is the first step in implementing encryption. BlueScale Standard Edition For sites with a primary goal of securing data while it is transported to a remote site and stored there, or only for data that will be stored for a long period of time, BlueScale Standard Edition works well. See Site Security Example: Low Security Site on page 341 for an example of setting up encryption using BlueScale Standard Edition. For information about configuring and using BlueScale Encryption Standard Edition, see the remainder of this chapter. BlueScale Professional Edition For sites that want to implement compression along with greater flexibility and security, to protect data wherever its stored and regardless of the retention period, BlueScale Encryption Professional Edition works well. The Professional Edition of BlueScale Encryption lets you choose whether to support one encryption password, or three encryption passwords that enforce another level of security. The Professional Edition also lets you use QIP-based compression. For information about installing, configuring, and using BlueScale Encryption Professional Edition, see the BlueScale Encryption User Guide.
February 2011
337
The following table compares BlueScale Standard Edition with BlueScale Professional Edition.
Feature Keys Standard Edition Included as a standard feature in the library. Single encryption key on a library at a time Easier to manage and track Single encryption password Easier to manage and track Professional Edition Multiple simultaneous encryption keys (maximum is 30 keys) More secure, with a key for each of multiple data sets Choice of either one encryption password or three More secure, with the option of requiring multiple users to export and import keys, etc. Choice of single password or M-ofN shares with multiple passwords to export/import keys More secure QIP- or drive-based compression
Encryption Login Passwords
Key Export and Import
Import and export functions require a single password Easier to manage Drive-based compression only
Compression a Compatibility between Versions
Data encrypted using either version can be decrypted by a library running the other version. Data encrypted and compressed by a library using LTO-4 or LTO-5 drives, Professional Edition, or both, can be decrypted and decompressed by a library running Standard Edition. Less secure, but more simple management Fewer tapes through compression More secure, but more complex management
Summary
a. If you are using drive-based encryption, compression is handled through the drive. Further references to compression in this manual apply to library-based, not drive-based, encryption.
Security on Initialization
Security options determine whether encryption is enabled when the library starts up: Standard modeData encryption is enabled when the library starts up. No further action required. Secure initialization modeData encryption is not enabled when the library starts up. Encryption is only available and backups only run after a superuser has logged in and the encryption password is entered.
Data to Encrypt
When setting up encryption, first decide whether to encrypt all data or a subset, then determine whether the encrypted data can be grouped together or if it must be isolated into sets. For example, your site may store financial data as one set, separate from consumer identity information.
February 2011
338
If all data can be encrypted together, the library requires only a single, encryption-enabled partition. Otherwise, create multiple encryptionenabled partitions, one for each set of data, and one or more partitions for data that is not to be encrypted. Note: Implementing encryption after the library has been configured to handle encryption simply requires creating backup jobs with your backup software, which sends data to the proper partitions. Data is automatically encrypted as it is backed up.
Encryption Methods
When configuring encryption for a partition, you can choose either drivebased or F-QIP-based encryption. Encryption-enabled LTO-4 and LTO-5 drives perform the encryption as the data is written to tape. F-QIPs are no longer available for purchase with new libraries. If your library already uses an encryption-enabled F-QIP, you can use it to encrypt data using drives that do not directly support encryption (for example, LTO-2 and LTO-3 drives). If you previously encrypted data using an F-QIP, you must use an F-QIP to decrypt the data. Notes: Drive-based encryption is the preferred encryption method. The current version (Revision 2) of Spectra Logics Endura Decryption Utility (EDU) does not support recovering data that is encrypted using an F-QIP. The encryption-enabled LTO-4 and LTO-5 drives use the same encryption algorithm, ensuring that tapes encrypted by an LTO-4 drive can be read by an encryption-enabled LTO-5 drive. If a partition uses LTO-4 or LTO-5 drive-based encryption, the library can load and read data from LTO-3 media in that partition. However, attempts to write encrypted data to LTO-3 media fail. The RIM does not provide encryption capabilities. The encryption performed by encryption-enabled LTO-4 and LTO-5 drives is not compatible with the encryption performed by an encryption-enabled F-QIP. You cannot use both types of encryption in the same partition. If a partition includes both an encryption-enabled F-QIP and encryptionenabled LTO-4 or LTO-5 drives, you must choose one type of encryption or the other. You cannot use both.
February 2011
339
To decrypt data you must use the same type of partition that was used to encrypt the data. Data encrypted using an LTO-4 or LTO-5 drive can only be decrypted in a partition configured with drive-based encryption. Similarly, data encrypted using an F-QIP requires a partition configured with QIP-based encryption.
Encryption Keys
When using drive-based encryption, only one encryption key is allowed per tape. If you lose the encryption key for the tape or if you want to use a different key, you must recycle the tape before you can re-use it in an encryption-enabled LTO-4 or LTO-5 drive. Recycling media is easily managed through BlueScale Encryption Key Management (see Recycling Encrypted Media on page 361).
Passwords and Other Identifiers

BlueScale Encryption requires that you supply passwords and monikers (key names). Your site may want to consider whether specific rules govern these. Superuser Login/Encryption Passwords Passwords are the standard method of user security that restricts access. To use Spectra Logic BlueScale Encryption, you must first log into the library with superuser privileges, then enter an encryption password. The encryption password lets you access the librarys encryption features. This password must be entered after the superuser login. Select Security > Encryption to display the encryption password screen.
Caution
The BlueScale encryption password is separate from the password used to log into the library. You must use this password to access the encryption settings for the library. If you lose this password, you will not be able to configure encryption nor will you be able to import/export encryption keys that have already been assigned and used on encrypted tapes.
Note: Until you configure encryption the first time, the encryption user password is blank. Password(s) for Key Import and Export Passwords are also used to encrypt keys for export and when importing previously exported keys. This feature is only available after you log into the library as a superuser and enter the encryption password. Your site may want to consider whether to create different rules for these passwords, such as requiring that these passwords are longer than the encryption access password(s), and therefore more secure. Monikers Your site may want to create rules governing naming conventions for key monikers, an alphanumeric identifier used to refer to the never-revealed true key value, which is a 256-bit key.
February 2011
340
Password and Naming Standards Examples Create password and naming standards, in part again depending on your sites security requirements. For example, your site may require a high level of security for access to encryption partitions, in which case you need to require some combination of the following: A long password A combination that requires alphabetic and numeric characters No password that corresponds to a dictionary entry Passwords to be reset at predefined schedules
Site Security Example: Low Security Site

The following table describes the security considerations and encryption configuration for a small company with 75 employees.
Security Considerations Security goals Goal Protecting company from legal liability associated with unauthorized access to data stored on tape, both onsite and offsite, including transport to the offsite location. IT administrator, company president, corporate legal counsel. Financial and consumer identity data. BlueScale Standard Edition: single key per library is sufficient. Standard initialization mode: encryption partitions are enabled at all times. None. A single partition for encrypted data is sufficient. Staff at company will escrow keys at a site remote from the data storage location. Keep three copies of each key: one with the senior IT administrator, one with the company president, one in a corporate safety deposit box. Create a new key every six months. On a non-networked computer that supports encryption, create one or more charts or lists with this data, including key moniker, dates used, encryption and superuser passwords, and password used to encrypt exported key. (Because BlueScale prompts for the required encryption key moniker when restoring encrypted data, this company chose not to track monikers and their relationship to media.) Deemed unnecessary given the users already identified as those responsible for encryption.
Encryption principals Data to encrypt Level of security to implement Data sets requiring isolation Key escrow method Copies of each key to store and their locations Key rotation plan Tracking key monikers and passwords
Multiple encryption teams (optional)
February 2011
341
Chapter 12 Configuring and Using Encryption Security Considerations Schedule and run drills Goal
Configuring Encryption
Formalized approach deemed unnecessary. Instead, incorporate review of data decryption into standard six-month check to make sure that backups and restores are working properly. This now includes a test involving data decryption. Password to access encryption features: minimum of 12 characters, including at least one number and one letter. Password to export and import encryption keys: minimum of 30 characters, including at least one number and one letter.
Passwords
CONFIGURING ENCRYPTION
Encryption is handled either through the F-QIPs in the library or through encryption-enabled LTO-4 or LTO-5 drives. Configuring encryption and managing encryption keys are handled through the librarys user interface. Encryption configuration entails selecting an encryption mode and creating an encryption password. The encryption password enables you to access the encryption features.
Caution
BlueScale encryption requires a separate password to access the encryption settings for the library. If you lose this password, you will not be able to configure encryption nor will you be able to import/export encryption keys that have already been assigned and used on encrypted tapes.
Before You Begin

Before you begin, make sure that you have the appropriate library hardware installed. Each partition that will use encryption requires the following: Encryption-enabled Fibre Channel LTO-4 or SCSI LTO-4 drives. OR Encryption-enabled Fibre Channel LTO-5 drives. OR SCSI drives connected to an encryption-enabled F-QIP. Use this configuration to encrypt data with non-encryption capable drives. The appropriate media must be loaded in the partition.
February 2011
342
Log Into the Encryption Application

1. Log in as a superuser, then select Security > Encryption. The Encryption User Login screen displays. Note: No login or password is required the first time you log into the Encryption application.
Figure 208 The Encryption User Login screen. 2. Enter the Encryption password and then select OK. The Encryption Configuration screen displays a list of the current encryption monikers. Note: If you are configuring encryption for the first time, an encryption key has not been created, so there is no encryption key moniker to display.
Figure 209 The initial Encryption Configuration screen. 3. Proceed to Configure the Encryption Initialization Mode and Password.
February 2011
343
Configure the Encryption Initialization Mode and Password

1. From the Encryption Configuration screen, select Configure. The Encryption Settings screen displays. Note: If the partition does not include either encryption-enabled LTO drives or an encryption-enabled F-QIP, you will not see the Encryption screen described in this section.
Figure 210 The Encryption Settings screen. 2. Select or clear the Enable Secure Initialization checkbox to determine the initialization mode used when backing up data to a partition:
Mode Standard mode When the library is powered on during startup... Data can be backed up to partitions that support encryption without entering an encryption password. To use Standard Mode, make sure that Enable Secure Initialization is not selected. Partitions dedicated to encryption are not available, so backups sent to them cannot run. To initialize the encryption partitions, someone must log in as a superuser, then enter the encryption password. To use Secure Initialization Mode, select Enable Secure Initialization.
Secure Initialization mode
February 2011
344
3. In the New Encryption User Password field, type in a password, using any combination of the numbers 09, lower and upper case alphabetic characters (az and AZ), and the at sign (@), dash (), underscore (_), and colon (:) characters.
Caution
Make sure you keep a record of this password. If you lose this password, you will not be able to configure encryption nor will you be able to import/export encryption keys that have already been assigned and used on encrypted tapes.
Note: Security is greatly enhanced when the user who knows the encryption password is different from the one logging into the system during normal operations. 4. Re-enter the password in the Retype Password field, then select OK. The Encryption Configuration screen again displays. 5. Proceed to Create an Encryption Key.
Create an Encryption Key

1. From the Encryption Configuration screen, select Add Key. The New Encryption Key screen displays.
Figure 211 The New Encryption Key screen.
February 2011
345
2. Enter a name for the encryption key in the Moniker field. This moniker is the name that you will use to reference the key.
Caution
When using LTO-4 or LTO-5 drive-based encryption, make sure that the moniker you choose when creating the BlueScale encryption key contains no more than 32 characters. If you lose an encryption key that has a moniker greater than 32 characters, data cannot be recovered using Spectra Logics optional Endura Decryption Utility (EDU).
Make sure to use a name that has not been used for any other encryption key, and that uses any combination of the numbers 09, lower and upper case alphabetic characters (az and AZ), and the at sign (@), dash (), underscore (_), and colon (:) characters. To improve readability, use an underscore to separate words. Do not use any space characters. Each moniker must be a unique string of characters, independent of case. Make a habit of using a single case (all upper or all lower) for monikers. After export, case is ignored, so that keys associated with the monikers Moniker1, moniker1, and MONIKER1 are interpreted as a single key. If you have two monikers that are identical except for case, then you may not be able to retrieve some of your data after importing such a key. Note: The actual value of an encryption key is never displayed. The moniker helps to protect data encrypted using the key by eliminating the need to display or type the actual key value.
February 2011
346
3. Select OK. The Encryption Configuration screen displays with a confirmation showing the moniker for the newly created encryption key and a message reminding you to create a copy of the key for safekeeping.
Figure 212 The Encryption Configuration screen with new encryption key moniker. If the key is not yet assigned to a partition, None displays in the Primary Key For column. The BlueScale Encryption Standard Edition only supports using one encryption key. The Import Key and Add Key selections no longer display after you create a key. If you delete the existing key, they display again. BlueScale Encryption Professional Edition is required if you want to store multiple encryption keys in the library. 4. Export the newly created encryption key and save it to a secure location (see Export the Encryption Key on page 351).
Caution
If you lose the encryption key, data encrypted using the key cannot be recovered. For this reason, promptly copying the key and storing it safely (that is, away from the data encrypted using the key) is extremely important to data decryption and recovery. See Exporting and Protecting Keys on page 351 for additional information.
5. If desired, proceed to Assigning the Encryption Key to a Partition.
February 2011
347
Assigning the Encryption Key to a Partition
ASSIGNING THE ENCRYPTION KEY TO A PARTITION

After creating an encryption key, you can assign it to one or more library partitions. If a partition can support encryption, the encryption choices that display and are available depend on the hardware assigned to the partition. Possible choices are: No encryption LTO-4 or LTO-5 drive-based encryption QIP-based encryption Use the following steps to assign a key to a partition and encrypt all data sent to the partition: 1. Log in as a superuser, then select Security > Encryption. The Encryption User Login screen displays. 2. Enter the encryption password, then select OK. 3. Select Configuration > Partitions. The Shared Library Services screen displays. 4. Select New to add a partition, or select Edit to modify the settings for an existing partition. 5. Navigate through the partition configuration screens by selecting Next until the Encryption screen displays (see Configuring a New Data Partition on page 223). The Encryption screen lets you enable encryption features for the partition. It only displays if you are logged into the encryption application and have already created an encryption key as described in Create an Encryption Key on page 345. 6. Depending on whether you want to use drive-based or F-QIP-based encryption, select the desired encryption settings as described in the following sections. Enable Drive-Based Encryption on page 349 Enable Encryption Using an F-QIP on page 350
February 2011
348
Enable Drive-Based Encryption

Use the following steps to configure drive-based encryption for a partition. Note: Drive-based encryption is only available for partitions that contain encryption-enabled LTO-4 or LTO-5 drives. 1. From the Chambers and Drives screen in the partition configuration sequence, select Next. The Encryption screen displays. Note: If the partition can support encryption, the encryption choices that display and are available depend on the hardware for the partition.
Figure 213 The Encryption screen for drive-based encryption. 2. Select Drive-based Encryption. Note: With drive-based encryption, only one key is allowed per tape. To use a new encryption key on a tape previously encrypted with a different encryption key, you must first recycle the tape through BlueScale Encryption, as described in Recycling Encrypted Media on page 361. 3. Navigate through the remaining partition configuration screens by selecting Next. 4. When you reach the Save Partition screen, select Save and proceed as described in Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings on page 256.
February 2011
349
Enable Encryption Using an F-QIP

Caution
The current version (Revision 2) of Spectra Logics Endura Decryption Utility (EDU) does not support recovering data that is encrypted using an F-QIP. If you need to recover data that was encrypted using an F-QIP contact Spectra Logic Technical Support for assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5). To ensure that you can recover your encrypted data if necessary, use drive-based encryption if possible.
Use the following steps to configure F-QIP-based encryption for a partition. 1. From the Chambers and Drives screen in the partition configuration sequence (see Configuring an F-QIP-Attached SCSI Drive Partition on page 238), select Next. The Encryption screen displays. Notes: If the partition can support encryption, the available encryption choices depend on the hardware assigned to the partition. The encryption performed by encryption-enabled LTO-4 or LTO-5 tape drives is not compatible with the encryption performed by an encryption-enabled F-QIP. If a partition uses both an encryption-enabled F-QIP and encryption-enabled LTO-4 or LTO-5 drives, you must choose one type of encryption or the other. You cannot use both types in the same partition.
Figure 214 The Encryption screen for QIP-based encryption. 2. Select QIP-based Encryption.
February 2011
350
Exporting and Protecting Keys
3. To reserve a portion of the media at the beginning tape for unencrypted data, select Enable Clear File at BOT. If you choose this option, the tape headers are unencrypted so that any compatible drive can read the header information on an encrypted tape. Using unencrypted headers is a useful option for sites with a large number of tapes to manage. 4. Navigate through the remaining partition configuration screens by selecting Next. 5. When you reach the Save Partition screen, select Save and proceed as described in Confirming and Saving the Partition Settings on page 256.
EXPORTING AND PROTECTING KEYS

Data cannot be recovered without the encryption key used to encrypt the data, so protecting encryption keys is extremely important to data decryption and recovery. To decrypt and restore encrypted data, you need the data, the encryption key, and the encryption password used to protect the exported key and data. Keeping valid backup copies of your encryption keys is extremely important. To ensure that the keys are protected, use the Export Key option described in this section to export encryption keys to a USB drive as soon as possible after you create them.
Caution
Data cannot be recovered without the encryption key used to encrypt the data, so protecting encryption keys is extremely important to data decryption and recovery. To decrypt and restore encrypted data, you need the data, the encryption key, and the encryption key password used to protect the exported key and data.
Spectra Logic recommends that you export each key to at least two different USB drives. Remember, lost encryption keys cannot be recreated; you should keep them as secure (and as backed up) as your data.
Export the Encryption Key

Note: These instructions are for BlueScale Encryption Standard Edition. If you have BlueScale Professional Edition, refer to the BlueScale Encryption User Guide for additional information. For safe-keeping and security, export the encryption key and store it in a safe, secure location so that you can import it back into the library if needed. To export the current encryption key: 1. Log in as a superuser, then select Security > Encryption. The Encryption User Login screen displays.
February 2011
351
2. Enter the encryption password, and then select OK. The Encryption Configuration screen displays.
Figure 215 The Encryption Configuration screen. 3. Select Export Key. The Export Type screen displays.
Figure 216 Exporting an Encryption Key.
February 2011
352
4. Select either Export Single File to USB or Email Exported Key. If you select Export Single File to USB, plug a USB drive into the USB port on the LCM before continuing. If you select Email Exported Key, use the Mail single key file to: drop-down list to select the recipient. The exported key file is sent as an email attachment to the specified mail recipient.
Caution
As a matter of best practice, Spectra Logic recommends exporting encryption keys to a USB drive instead of using email. Although emailing encryption keys is supported by the library, using email presents security issues, including the following: Copies of encryption keys may be left on the email servers used for sending and receiving email and are thus subject to compromise. The difficulty in verifying where all the copies of emailed encryption keys may be located can make security audits more challenging.
Note: Do not use the default autosupport@spectralogic.com email recipient. Spectra Logic does not save emailed files unless they are specifically requested for troubleshooting. To send the key to a recipient who is not already listed as mail recipient, you must first configure the user as a mail recipient (see Configuring Mail Users on page 300). 5. After you either insert the USB drive or select an email recipient, select Next. 6. Enter a password, which is used to encrypt the key itself. 7. Make a record of the encryption key password, which you will need to import the key back into the library. Without the password, you cannot import the key, and the data encrypted using the key will be inaccessible.
Caution
Do not lose the encryption key password. Without it, you cannot reimport an encryption key after it is deleted from the library, and the data encrypted using the key will be inaccessible.
February 2011
353
8. Select Next. If you exported the encryption key to a USB driveImmediately confirm that the encrypted key copied correctly by selecting Check Key Files. Use the steps in Verify Backups of Encryption Keys to provide a second confirmation.
Figure 217 Use Check Key Files to confirm successful export. If the confirmation indicates the key did not copy correctly, delete all data from the USB drive so that no trace of the failed key attachment remains, then export the key again using a different USB drive, beginning with Step 2 on page 352. If you exported the key using emailConfirm the receipt of the attachment by contacting the user to whom you sent the encrypted key file. Have them confirm that the email attachment contains a key file as described in Verify Backups of Encryption Keys.
Verify Backups of Encryption Keys

After creating the backups of your encryption keys, verify that the backup was successful as soon as possible after you create it.
When Saved to a USB Drive

1. Plug the USB drive into a PC that is not connected to the library. 2. Examine the list of files on the USB drive to verify that it contains a list of files. 3. If a file called name.bsk or name.bss, where name is the moniker you assigned to the key when it was created, is present and is more than 0 bytes in size, the encryption key was successfully exported and is usable. Store the USB in a safe location. 4. If the exported key file is not present or if is 0 bytes in size, repeat the export process (Export the Encryption Key on page 351) using a different USB drive.
February 2011
354
When Sent as an Email Attachment

1. Open the email attachment and verify that it contains at least one file. 2. If a file called name.bsk or name.bss, where name is the moniker you assigned to the key when it was created, is present and is more than 0 bytes in size, the encryption key was successfully exported and is usable. Save the email attachment to a safe location from which you can copy it to a USB drive, if needed. 3. If the email attachment does not contain the exported key file or if is 0 bytes in size, repeat the export process (Export the Encryption Key on page 351) to send the email again.
Protect the Encryption Key

Make sure you track, in conformance with your security plan, where you store the key and who received an email message with the key. Also keep track of the password used when you exported the key.
Caution
Make sure you keep a record of the password created when exporting the key. You need this password and the encrypted file containing the key to import the encryption key. Without the key password, you will not be able to import the encryption key.
The following guidelines outline the essential tasks required to protect encryption keys: Save one or more copies of every key using the Key Export option on the Encryption Configuration screen (see Export the Encryption Key on page 351. Two methods are available for key export: copying the encrypted key to a USB drive or emailing an encrypted version of the key as an attachment to a user who has been configured as a mail user through the library (see Configuring Mail Users on page 300).
Caution
As a matter of best practice, Spectra Logic recommends exporting encryption keys to a USB drive instead of using email. Although emailing encryption keys is supported by the library, doing so presents security issues, including the following: Copies of encryption keys may be left on the email servers used for sending and receiving email and are thus subject to compromise. The difficulty in verifying where all the copies of emailed encryption keys may be located can make security audits more challenging.
February 2011
355
If you choose to store only a single copy of a key make sure that you keep it secure. If something happens to the device storing the key, youve lost both your key and all data encrypted using the key.
Important
To emphasize: If you lose the key, your data is unrecoverable. You need to balance the number of copies of the key to store to guarantee access to the encrypted data against the security risk associated with storing multiple keys. Make sure that the key has been successfully stored prior to removing a key from the library.
Store keys offsite in a location other than the site used for media storage. Confirm that the key is stored correctly on the USB drive or has been received by the intended recipient before deleting the key from your system. If you delete the key, you must import the key to decrypt the data that used the key during encryption. Importing keys is described in The Required Key is Not Stored in the Library on page 358. You may want to make two copies of a key, storing each in a secure location. Note the location of these keys, so that you can easily find the key when you need to restore or delete data. Maintain a list of every password associated with each key and securely store the list. Never keep this list as cleartext on a networked computer, or send it through email as cleartext. For added security, encrypt the file containing the list of passwords. Track every copy of each key. This is critical to meet requirements that may govern data retention and data destruction. Destroying all keys associated with encrypted data is sufficient to satisfy data destruction requirements, since encrypted data cannot be accessed without the key used to encrypt it. Spectra Logic recommends tracking the information listed in the following table for every key that you create. For added security, encrypt the file containing the tracking information.
Key Moniker: Number of key copies Location of each copy: Password(s) associated with exported copy of the moniker: Location of data stored on mobile media, which has been encrypted using this moniker: Moniker creation date: Proposed expiration date:
February 2011
356
Restoring Encrypted Data
RESTORING ENCRYPTED DATA

Restoring encrypted data from tape follows the standard data restore processes that you use with your backup software. The only difference is that the key used to encrypt the data being restored needs to be on the library and assigned to the partition in which the encrypted media is loaded. If the key is available, the data is automatically decrypted as it is read from tape; standard restore procedures simply work. If the encryption key required for a specific set of encrypted data has been exported from the library and then deleted, the library prompts you with the moniker of the key that is required to decrypt the data. You can use the key moniker to identify the key, then import the key into the library as described in this section.
Important
You need the passwords for both the exported key file and the encrypted file containing the key to import the encryption key. Without the key password, you will not be able to import the encryption key.
Endura Decryption Utility (EDU) is an optional command-line encryption utility which provides a method that lets you restore drive-encrypted data without loading the media into the library. See Using the Endura Decryption Utility on page 360 for detailed information about using this utility.
The Required Key is Stored in the Library

If the key used to encrypt the data is currently stored in the library, use the following steps to decrypt and restore the data. 1. Load the tape to be decrypted into the library. 2. Assign the key to the partition containing the tape if it is not already assigned to it. 3. Use your backup software to automatically decrypt and restore data. If the required key is not available, the library prompts you with the moniker of the key that is required to decrypt the data. You must import the key as described in the following section before the data can be restored.
February 2011
357
The Required Key is Not Stored in the Library

If the encryption key required for a specific set of encrypted data has been exported from the library and then deleted, you must import the key before you can access the encrypted data. After you assign the imported key to the partition with the encrypted media, it is available for decrypting data. Note: If you are using BlueScale Encryption Basic Edition and there is already an encryption key stored in the library, you must first delete that key as described in Deleting an Encryption Key on page 360. You can then import another key. As described in the following sections, you can import the encryption key from a USB drive or from a remote computer through a web browser connection to the librarys user interface. Import the Key from a USB Drive, below Import the Key Using the BlueScale Web Interface Connection to the Library on page 359
Import the Key from a USB Drive

Use the following steps to import a key stored on a USB drive: 1. Log in as a superuser, then select Security > Encryption. The Encryption User Login screen displays. 2. Enter the encryption password, then select OK. The Encryption Configuration screen displays. 3. Insert the USB drive into the LCMs USB port. 4. Select Import Key. The Import Key Selection screen displays. 5. Choose the key to import from the Key List field, then select Next. The Import Password screen displays. 6. Enter the password that was used to encrypt the key when it was exported, then select Next. The Encryption Configuration Import Password screen displays, showing the moniker of the newly imported key. 7. Assign the imported key to the partition with the encrypted media (see Assigning the Encryption Key to a Partition on page 348). 8. Use your backup software to restore the data.
February 2011
358
Import the Key Using the BlueScale Web Interface Connection to the Library
Use the following steps to import a key from a remote computer using the librarys BlueScale web interface (RLC). Note: The key must be accessible to the computer you are using to access the BlueScale web interface. 1. Log in as a superuser, then select Security > Encryption. The Encryption User Login screen displays. 2. Enter the encryption password, then select OK. The Encryption Configuration screen displays. 3. Select Import Key. The Encryption Key Files Source screen displays. Note: The Import key from RLC option is only available if you are accessing the library using the BlueScale web interface.
Figure 218 The Encryption Key Files Source screen. 4. Select Import key from RLC, then select Next. The RLC Encryption Key Upload screen displays.
Figure 219 The RLC Encryption Key Upload screen 5. To identify the key file to import: Type in the full path and file name in the Encryption Key File field. OR Select Browse. In the File Upload screen, browse to the location where the key is stored, select the key file, then select Open. The path for the key displays in the Encryption Key File field. 6. Select Next. The Import Password screen displays.
February 2011
359
Deleting an Encryption Key
7. Enter the password that was used to encrypt the key when it was being exported, then select Next. The Encryption Configuration Import Password screen displays, showing the moniker of the newly imported key. 8. Assign the imported key to the partition with the encrypted media (see Assigning the Encryption Key to a Partition on page 348). 9. Use your backup software to restore the data.
Using the Endura Decryption Utility

Spectra Logics Endura Decryption Utility (EDU) lets you restore driveencrypted data without loading the media into the library, which may be important in recovering data following a crisis or disaster. Use this command-line utility on a host that is running Red Hat Linux kernel version 2.4 or 2.6 and has one or more tape drives connected and online. Note: Other versions of Red Hat and Fedora have not been tested but may work. The EDU utility decrypts the data stored on tape and writes it to the same or a different tape. You can then restore the data with the backup software used to back up the data.
Caution
The current version (Revision 2) of Spectra Logics Endura Decryption Utility (EDU) does not support recovering data that is encrypted using an F-QIP. If you need to recover data that was encrypted using an F-QIP contact Spectra Logic Technical Support for assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
Refer to the BlueScale Encryption User Guide for detailed information about using EDU.
DELETING AN ENCRYPTION KEY

BlueScale Encryption Basic Edition only supports storing a single encryption key in the library. You must first delete the key currently stored in the library before you can create the new key and assign it to one or more partitions (see Assigning the Encryption Key to a Partition on page 348).
Caution
Make sure that you export a copy of the existing key before you delete it. You will need a copy of the exported key and its password to import the key back into the library and restore data that was encrypted with the key.
Note: If you need to store multiple encryption keys in the library, you must purchase BlueScale Encryption Professional Edition.
February 2011
360
Recycling Encrypted Media
Use these steps to delete a key: 1. Log in as a superuser, then select Security > Encryption. The Encryption User Login screen displays. 2. Enter the encryption password, then select OK. The Encryption Configuration screen displays (see Figure 212 on page 347). 3. Export at least one copy of the key and store it in a safe location (see Export the Encryption Key on page 351). 4. Select Delete Key and respond to the confirmation screens to delete the key. 5. The Encryption Configuration screen redisplays, without the moniker for the key you deleted listed.
RECYCLING ENCRYPTED MEDIA

Encryption-enabled LTO-4 and LTO-5 drives require that all data encrypted and written to an individual tape use the same encryption key that is, a single key is associated with all the encrypted data on an individual tape. After encrypted data is written to a tape, the drive will not overwrite the data using a different encryption key until you recycle the tape using the recycling capability provided by BlueScale Encryption. In addition, you must recycle the tape before you can re-use it if you lose the encryption key for a tape. Notes: If you plan to use the same key that was used to encrypt the data already on the tape, you do not need to recycle the tape using the process described in this section. Make sure that the backup software cannot access the drive you plan to use for recycling the media during the recycling operation. The recycle media operation can only be performed using the touch screen (or using a keyboard and mouse connected to the LCM). You cannot access the Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen when using the librarys BlueScale web interface. Use the following steps to recycle one or more encrypted LTO cartridges so that they can be reused with a new encryption key. 1. Stop all backup operations before beginning the recycling process.
February 2011
361
2. From the toolbar menu, select General > Import/Export. The Import/ Export TeraPacks screen displays.
Figure 220 The Import/Export TeraPacks screen. 3. Select the partition containing the tapes that you want to recycle from the Partition drop-down list, then select Go. 4. Select Recycle Encryption Media. The Select Media to Recycle screen displays.
Figure 221 The Select Media to Recycle screen.
February 2011
362
5. Select the media that you want to recycle and then select the appropriate button to move the media into the Media to Recycle list. The Available Media list shows all of the encrypted media in the partition you selected on the previous screen. To narrow down the media choices in the Available Media list, enter a partial or entire bar code in the Find by Barcode field and select Find. The list displays media with bar codes that match the values that you entered.
To recycle... Encrypted media in a data partition Select... Add Media to add the media you selected in the Available Media list to the Media To Recycle list. Add All to add all of the media in the Available Media list to the Media To Recycle list. Remove Media to remove the selected media from the Media to Recycle list. Remove All to remove all of the media from the Media to Recycle list. Add All EE to add all of the encrypted media currently in the entry/exit pool to the Media To Recycle list. This option is especially useful if you have imported a large amount of encrypted media into the library entry/exit pool and want to recycle it before moving it into a partition.
Encrypted media in the entry exit pool
6. Select Next. The Select Drive to Recycle Media screen displays.
Figure 222 The Select Drive to Recycle Media screen. 7. Select the drive that you want to use to recycle the tape from the Drive list, then select Recycle Encryption Media.
February 2011
363
CHAPTER 13
Library Troubleshooting
This chapter describes troubleshooting tools you can use, as appropriate, to help resolve problems you might encounter while operating the library. Try these troubleshooting procedures before you open a support ticket with Spectra Logic Technical Support. If you are unable to resolve the problem yourself, open a support ticket (see Opening a Support Ticket on page 465). Note: A valid service contract is required to obtain support (see Service Contract Extension on page 496 to learn about service contracts).
Topic Resolving Operational Issues Recovering a Media Pack after a Power Failure Recovering a Cartridge From a Global Spare Drive Refreshing the User Interface Display Troubleshooting Blockages Troubleshooting Library Problems Capturing Traces Resetting the Library Resetting Components Resetting the LCM or RCM Resetting a QIP or RIM Restoring the Library Configuration Restoring From an Auto Save Configuration File Restoring the Library Configuration Using a Saved Configuration Accessing the Interior of the Library Described beginning on... page 365 page 365 page 365 page 365 page 366 page 367 page 368 page 370 page 371 page 371 page 372 page 378 page 378 page 383 page 385
Resetting the BlueScale Vision Camera IP Address page 374
364
Resolving Operational Issues
RESOLVING OPERATIONAL ISSUES

While operating the library, you may encounter the issues in this section.
Recovering a Media Pack after a Power Failure

If the library loses power while a TeraPack magazine or RXT media pack is in a TAP, the library only identifies the magazines presence in the TAP the next time media is imported or exported. To recover the magazine, use the Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen to initiate an import or export operation (see Chapter 6 Importing, Exporting, and Moving Media for instructions).
Recovering a Cartridge From a Global Spare Drive

If the library loses power or if you reset the library while the PostScan process is running, the cartridge being scanned remains in the drive. The library generates a message to notify you that the Global Spare contains a cartridge after it complete its initialization process. Use the following steps to return the cartridge to its storage location: 1. Examine the partition inventories to determine where the cartridge belongs (see Viewing the Partition Inventory on page 125). 2. Substitute the Global Spare containing the cartridge for another drive in the partition (see Activating the Global Spare Tape Drive on page 121). 3. Move the cartridge out of the drive and return it to its storage location (see Moving Media Within a Partition on page 154). 4. Reclaim the Global Spare (see Reclaiming the Global Spare Tape Drive on page 122).
Refreshing the User Interface Display

If the BlueScale screens exhibit display problems (one screen on top of another, for example), either in the operator panel user interface or through the web interface, use the refresh button ( ) in the status bar to refresh the screen. Note: Using a key on a keyboard (for example, pressing F5) to refresh the screen may cause unpredictable results.
February 2011
365
Resolving Operational Issues
Troubleshooting Blockages
If the library halts and a system message indicates that the robotics are blocked, use the follow steps to troubleshoot the problem. 1. If possible, use your backup software to move any cartridges that are currently in tape drives back their storage location. If you cannot use your backup software, then attempt to move the cartridges as described in Moving Media Within a Partition on page 154. 2. If possible, pause PostScan if it is running (see Pausing the PostScan Process on page 191). Any tapes currently being scanned are returned to their storage locations. 3. Discontinue all I/O to the library. 4. Power off the library (see Powering Off the Library on page 93). The power-down sequence takes approximately one minute, while the library allows applications to shut down gracefully.
Caution
Do not power-down the library or remove the front panel before capturing all available traces (see Capturing Traces on page 368). Trace data generated by the library or the component may be lost when you perform a reset, making diagnosing problems difficult.
5. After the library has powered down, turn off both main AC power breakers (see Figure 6 on page 33) on the back of the library and unplug the power cords. Note: With cord locks installed on the power cords, it may be easier to disconnect the cords from the AC outlets at the wall. If you have redundant power supplies installed, be sure to disconnect both power cords. 6. Access the interior of the library, as described in Accessing the Interior of the Library on page 385.
Warning
Risk of electrical shock. Hazardous moving parts. Use caution when removing the librarys side panels. Spectra Logic recommends turning off the power to the library before removing the side panels. Warnung: Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlages. Gefhrliche bewegliche Teile. Gehen Sie uerst vorsichtig vor, wenn Sie die seitlichen Panels der Library entfernen. Spectra Logic empfiehlt die Stromversorgung zu unterbrechen, bevor die Panels entfernt werden.
7. Check for and remove any blockages. 8. Reinstall the side panel as described in Removing or Replacing the Side Panel on page 386).
February 2011
366
Troubleshooting Library Problems
9. Power on the library (see Powering On the Library on page 93) and wait while the library performs its initialization process. 10. If you removed any cartridges, reimport them as described in Importing Media and Cleaning Cartridges on page 132.
Important
If the library is configured with multiple partitions, make sure you import the cartridges into the correct partition.
11. If a cartridge was left in a Global Spare drive when you powered down the library, see Recovering a Cartridge From a Global Spare Drive to return the cartridge to its storage location. 12. Use your backup software to reinventory the library (see Updating the Media Inventory on page 159). 13. Re-issue the move that failed. If the move fails again, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
TROUBLESHOOTING LIBRARY PROBLEMS

If you have a problem with your library, use the information in this section to obtain help with resolving the problem.
Check... To... Review the any System Messages that have been posted by the library (see Checking Messages on page 97) and take any action described in the message(s). Look up the definition of an error code referenced in a system message using Spectra Logics interactive Sense Code Lookup at www.spectralogic.com/ support/sensecodelookup. Find information about the most current version of the BlueScale firmware and additional service and support tools. You can access the Technical Support portal at http://support.spectralogic.com. Note: Accessing many of the tools available on the Technical Support portal requires creating a user account. See Accessing the Technical Support Portal on page 421 for instructions. Check the options under the Support Tools and Knowledge Base icons for additional troubleshooting information. Select the Equipment tab on the Incidents & Service Agreement Management page to view information about the warranty and service options for your library. For information about the Spectra Certified Media warranty, see www.spectralogic.com/mediaguarantee.
System Messages
Error Codes
Technical Support Portal
February 2011
367
Capturing Traces
CAPTURING TRACES
Spectra Logic uses traces to help diagnose problems with the library. You only need to capture traces when instructed to do so by Spectra Logic Technical Support. Emailing Trace Results If you plan to email trace results directly from the library, make sure that you have already set up those recipients as mail users (see Configuring Mail Users on page 300). Saving Trace Results to USB If you plan to save trace results to USB, you must plug the USB drive into the LCM before running the trace (see Figure 10 and Figure 11 on page 38). If a USB drive is not plugged in, the USB option is not available. You can, however, still save trace results to the LCM compact flash card. You can also just view the results without saving them. Note: When capturing motion traces, Spectra Logic Technical Support may also have you connect a USB drive to the RCM. 1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Tools to display the Maintenance Tools screen.
Figure 223 The Maintenance Tools screen. 3. If you want to save the traces to a USB drive, insert the USB drive into the LCMs USB port; otherwise, skip to the next step. Notes: The option to save the traces to USB is only displayed if you plug a USB drive in to the librarys USB port before you select Traces. If directed to do so by Spectra Logic Technical Support, connect the USB drive to the USB port on the RCM in the main drive frame if you are capturing motion traces. Trace results saved to a USB drive can be reviewed from any device that can read data from a USB drive.
February 2011
368
Capturing Traces
4. Select Traces. The System Traces screen displays.
Figure 224 The System Traces screen. 5. Choose the type of trace you want to capture: LCM TraceUse to capture a trace on a single aspect of the LCM. Component TraceUse to select a trace on a single component. 6. Use the check boxes to choose any combination of the following options for saving the generated trace:
Option Mail results to Description Sends the report to a previously configured mail recipient. Use the drop-down list to select the recipient for the report file. To send the email with the attached library configuration file to someone who is not already listed as a library user, you must first configure that person as an email recipient (see Configuring Mail Recipients on page 267). Note: Do not use the default autosupport@spectralogic.com email recipient. Spectra Logic does not save emailed HHM report files unless they are specifically requested for troubleshooting. Saves the report to the memory card in the LCM. Note: Select this option only if specifically instructed to do so by Spectra Logic Technical Support. Saves the report to the USB drive. The results can then be viewed from any device that can read from USB. Note: This option is only available if you inserted a USB drive in Step 3 on page 368.
February 2011
369
Resetting the Library
7. Select Go next to the trace type you want. The library captures the requested trace, which may take several minutes for the trace to run. When complete, the trace results display in the results window. If you are connected to the library using a web browser, you can copy and paste the results into a text file and email it to Spectra Logic Technical Support if they request it.
RESETTING THE LIBRARY

Most situations that require resetting the library (for example, when you make changes to certain library configuration settings) only require resetting the LCM as described in Resetting the LCM or RCM on page 371. Because resetting the LCM only affects the BlueScale user interface, the library is still able to communicate with hosts, servers, and software. Backups can continue while the LCM resets. Performing some types of troubleshooting operations or recovering from some error conditions requires you to reset (reboot) the entire library, which resets both the LCM and all of the RCMs. If Spectra Logic Technical Support instructions you to do so, use the following steps to reset the entire library.
Caution
Do not reset the library unless you are specifically instructed to do so. Trace data generated by the library may be lost when you reset the library or a component, making diagnosing problems difficult.
1. If possible, use your backup software to move any cartridges that are currently in tape drives back their storage location. If you cannot use your backup software, then attempt to move the cartridges as described in Moving Media Within a Partition on page 154. 2. If possible, pause PostScan if it is running (see Pausing the PostScan Process on page 191). Any tapes currently being scanned are returned to their storage locations. 3. Discontinue all I/O to the library. 4. Power off the library (see Powering Off the Library on page 93). 5. Wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Power on the library (see Powering On the Library on page 93) and wait while the library performs its initialization process. 7. If a cartridge is left in a Global Spare drive after the reset is complete, see Recovering a Cartridge From a Global Spare Drive to return the cartridge to its storage location.
February 2011
370
Resetting Components
8. If you used the BlueScale user interface to move media, update the inventory maintained by your backup application (see Updating the Media Inventory on page 159).
RESETTING COMPONENTS
If instructed by Spectra Logic Technical Support or by error messages, you can reset certain library components as described in this section. See Resetting the Library on page 370 if you need to reset the entire library.
Caution
Do not reset a component unless you are specifically instructed to do so. Trace data generated by the library or the component may be lost when you perform a reset, making diagnosing problems difficult.
Resetting the LCM or RCM

To reset the LCM or RCM, insert the tip of a toothpick or other similar nonconductive object into the hole on the back of the LCM or RCM to press the reset button.
Caution
Do not use a metallic object to reset the LCM or RCM. You may inadvertently cause an electrical short inside the module.
Important
Resetting the RCM resets the motion control for the transporter. Any move requests to the transporter will fail until the RCM completes its initialization.
Reset
Figure 225 The reset button on the Spectra PC (LCM or RCM).

Reset
Figure 226 The reset button on the Spectra LS (LCM or RCM).
February 2011
371
Resetting a QIP or RIM

Hardware Reset
To perform a hardware reset of a QIP or a RIM, insert the tip of a toothpick or other similar object into the hole in the back panel to press the reset button.
Caution
Do not use a metallic object to reset the QIP. You may inadvertently cause an electrical short inside the module.
Reset
Reset
Reset
Fibre Channel QIP (F-QIP)
Ethernet QIP (E-QIP)
Robotics Interface Module (RIM)
Figure 227 Location of the reset button on a QIP or RIM
BlueScale Reset
If you are unable to communicate with a QIP-attached drive after resetting it, you may also need to perform a BlueScale reset of the QIP. Use the following instructions to reset the QIP through the BlueScale user interface. 1. Determine the BlueScale identifier for the QIP you need to reset. Note: QIPs are identified according to their physical location in the library. For example: FR1/DBA2/QIP1 refers to the QIP in DBA2 of frame 1. Refer to QIP Identifiers on page 58 for information about identifiers. 2. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 3. Select Maintenance > Tools > Utilities. The Utilities screen displays.
372
4. Select Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen displays. 5. Select Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show a list of the advanced utilities. 6. Scroll through the list of advanced utilities and select Reset Controller. The screen refreshes to show the details for the utility.
Figure 228 The Reset Controller utility for resetting a QIP. 7. Use the drop-down list to select the QIP that you need to reset. 8. Select Run Utility to reset the selected QIP. When the QIP becomes ready, the Utility Results screen displays, showing that the QIP was reset. Note: When the QIP resets, the library posts system messages that the QIP disappeared and reappeared. 9. The QIP is ready for use.
February 2011
373
Resetting the BlueScale Vision Camera IP Address

If the camera was configured with a fixed IP address and you do not know what that address is, you can reset the camera to use DHCP addressing and then use the Network Camera Setup Wizard to find the camera on the network. You can then use the wizard to change the cameras IP address as required for your network environment.
Important
Resetting a camera that was previously configured with an unknown fixed IP address to use DHCP requires physically accessing the interior of the library. If you cannot access the librarys side panels or if you have a multi-frame library, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support for assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
If the camera is already configured to use DHCP, you can use the Network Setup Wizard to determine the current IP address so that you can enter the IP address in the BlueScale System Settings screen (see Using the Network Camera Setup Wizard to Discover the Camera on page 375).
Reset the Camera

Warning
Risk of electrical shock. Hazardous moving parts. Use caution when removing the librarys side panels. Warnung: Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlages. Gefhrliche bewegliche Teile. Gehen Sie uerst vorsichtig vor, wenn Sie die seitlichen Panels der Library entfernen.
Important
If you only need to determine the current DHCP-assigned IP address, skip to Using the Network Camera Setup Wizard to Discover the Camera on page 375.
Notes:
The library must be powered on while you perform the reset. The camera reset button is on the right-hand side of the camera, as viewed from the front of the library. If possible, access the interior of the library by removing the right-hand side panel.
Use the following steps to access the camera and reset it to DHCP addressing:
Caution
If you step inside the library to access the camera, avoid stepping on the horizontal axis mounted on the floor of the library. Stepping on the horizontal axis can result in serious damage to the library.
1. Remove the side panel closest to the camera as described in Accessing the Interior of the Library on page 385.
February 2011
374
2. Locate the recessed Reset on the camera. Note: If the transporter is blocking access to the camera, carefully move it out of the way by gently pushing on the VAX column near the where the transporter is mounted.
Reset button
Figure 229 The BlueScale Vision camera Reset button (viewed from right-hand side of library). 3. Insert the tip of a toothpick or other similar non-conductive object into the hole to press the reset button. Hold the reset button for 10 seconds to reset the camera's settings to the factory defaults, which include using DHCP to obtain an IP address. 4. Replace the librarys side panel and secure it with the screw, as shown in Figure 234 on page 386.
Using the Network Camera Setup Wizard to Discover the Camera

Run the Network Camera Setup Wizard to determine the current DHCPassigned IP address for the camera and set a fixed IP address, if desired. Note: Read the BlueScale Vision Camera Users Guide, included on the Product Documentation and Software CD that came with your library, for detailed information about using the wizard to configure the camera. 1. Insert the librarys Product Documentation and Software CD into the CD/ DVD drive of a Windows-based computer located on the same network as the camera. Adobe Reader launches automatically and opens the welcome.pdf file. Note: You can close the welcome.pdf file if you do not want to read the documentation provided on the CD. 2. Using Windows Explorer, run NetworkCamera.exe, which is located in the Network Camera folder on the CD.
375
3. When the wizard starts, select Setup Camera. The wizard searches the network and locates any compatible network cameras. Note: The Network Camera Setup Wizard uses the UDP broadcast to discover the camera on the network. You may need to disable your networks firewall if it blocks using UDP.
Figure 230 The Network Camera Setup Wizard start page. 4. Select the camera that the wizard identified. Note: The default device name for the camera is SLnnnnnn, where nnnnnn are the last 6 digits of the cameras 12 digit hexadecimal MAC address.
Select arrow to continue
Figure 231 The camera IP address shown in the Network Camera Setup Wizard. 5. Select the arrow to continue.
February 2011
376
6. Enter the Administrator Name and Administrator Password. The default Administrator Name is administrator (all lower case, casesensitive); leave the Administrator Password blank. 7. If desired, change the device name to something more meaningful in your environment. You can also configure the time settings. 8. Select the arrow to continue. 9. Use the wizard to configure the camera to use IP address settings to values that are supported by your network.
Important
Dynamic Host Control Protocol (DHCP) is an option for acquiring the cameras IP address. If you choose to use DHCP, and no DHCP server is available, the camera defaults to IP address 192.168.0.99. If your network does not support using this IP address, you must set the camera to a supported fixed IP address before you will be able to enable and access the cameras BlueScale Vision viewer. If you choose to use DHCP addressing, use the Network Configuration Wizard to find the IP address for the camera. Be aware that if the DHCP-assigned IP address changes, you will lose access to the camera's BlueScale Vision viewer through the BlueScale user interface until you use the wizard to find the new IP address and then enter the new address in the System Setup screen. If you want to access the camera using the camera icon on the status bar of the BlueScale user interface, you must enter the cameras IP address into the BlueScale Vision IP Address field of the librarys BlueScale System Setup screen.
10. Continue through the wizard to save your changes. 11. If desired, re-enable the camera icon in the BlueScale user interface status bar. a. From the librarys user interface, select Configuration > System. The System Setup screen displays. b. Scroll down until you see the Other Settings pane (Figure 174 on page 282). c. Enter the cameras updated IP address in the BlueScale Vision IP Address field. d. Select Save.The camera icon in the status bar indicates that the IP address has been configured.
February 2011
377
Restoring the Library Configuration
RESTORING THE LIBRARY CONFIGURATION

If you have valid backups of the librarys configuration and the MLM database saved on a USB drive or sent as an email attachment, you can use them to restore the library in the event of a disaster. You can also uses these backups to restore the library if problems require you to replace the LCM or the LCMs memory card. See Backing Up the Library Configuration on page 307 for information about backing up the library configuration. Note: The backup of the MLM database also contains the DLM database.
To restore the... Library configuration and the MLM and DLM databases Library configuration MLM and DLM databases Using the... Auto Save Configuration file Saved configuration file MLM database backup file See... Restoring From an Auto Save Configuration File on page 378. Restoring the Library Configuration Using a Saved Configuration on page 383 Restoring the MLM and DLM Databases on page 204
Restoring From an Auto Save Configuration File

The advanced utility called Restore Library Configuration From Auto Save lets you restore the library configuration and MLM database using the auto-save configuration file that the library generates automatically (see Using the Auto Save Configuration Feature on page 308).
Caution Important
Before restoring your system using the auto-save file, check the time stamp included in the file name to ensure that you have the most current file. The library does not automatically save a backup when you make changes to any of the library configuration settings other than those for partitions. Changes will be saved during the next weekly automatic configuration save operation.
February 2011
378
Notes:
When you make a change to a partition, the library immediately generates an auto-configuration file and saves it to the LCM memory card. If you configured the auto-save email option, an email containing the updated library configuration and the MLM data base will be sent to the specified recipient (see Enabling Email for the Automatic Configuration Save Feature on page 302). Changes to any of the library configuration settings other than those for partitions are automatically saved in the autosaved configuration file that the library creates each week. If you cannot restore from the auto-save configuration file on the LCM and you have a manual backups of the library configuration and the MLM database that are more current than the available auto-save configuration file saved elsewhere, you may want to use those backups instead of the auto-save configuration file (see Restoring the Library Configuration Using a Saved Configuration on page 383 and Restoring the MLM and DLM Databases on page 204).
Restore the Library Configuration and MLM Database

Use the following steps to restore the library configuration and MLM database using an auto-saved configuration file. If the auto-save configuration file is not available on the LCM memory card, use the autosave file you saved to a USB drive or sent as an email attachment. 1. If you plan to restore using the zip file containing the auto-save file that was sent as an email attachment, use the following instructions to copy it to a USB drive; otherwise, skip to Step 2. a. Create a folder called \autocfgsave on a USB drive. b. Copy the zip file you received in the email to the \autocfgsave folder on the USB drive. c. Connect the USB drive to the USB port on the LCM before continuing. 2. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 3. Select Maintenance > Tools > Utilities. The Utilities screen displays. 4. Select Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen displays. 5. Select Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show a list of the advanced utilities.
February 2011
379
6. Scroll through the list of advanced utilities and select Restore Library Configuration from Auto Save. The screen refreshes to show the details for the utility.
Figure 232 The Restore Library Configuration from Auto Save utility. 7. Use the Select a restore time stamp drop-down list to choose the autosave file you want to use. The auto-save files are named <date-time>cfg.zip, where <date-time> is the time stamp for when the file was created. Unless you have replaced the LCM or its compact flash, the first file listed (\hard disk\lc\autocfgsave) is the auto-save zip file stored on the LCM memory card. Note: If available, the auto-save zip file stored on the LCM memory card always contains the most recently saved library configuration information. MLM database, and DLM database. 8. Select Run Utility.
Important
Before the library is restored using an auto-save configuration file on the USB drive, the current configuration is saved to the USB drive with a time stamp indicating when the file was created. The library is then restored using the selected auto-save configuration. The USB drive now contains one additional auto-save configuration file.
After a brief delay, the Utility Results screen appears, showing that the configuration was restored.
February 2011
380
Restore Other Configuration Changes

The library does not immediately create an auto-saved configuration file when you make changes to any of the library configuration settings other than those for partitions. If you made any configuration changes after the auto-saved configuration file you used was generated, you will need to restore those changes after completing the auto-save configuration restore. If you have a manual backup of the library configuration that is more current than the auto-save configuration file you used, you can use it to restore the updated configuration (see Restoring the Library Configuration Using a Saved Configuration on page 383). If you do not have a manual backup available, you will need to restore the following changes manually: If you made configuration changes after the creation date of the auto-save file you used, you will need to use the options in the Configuration menu to repeat those changes after the restore is complete. If you entered option keys after the creation date of the auto-save file you used, you will need to use the Option Enablement pane of the System Configuration screen to re-enter those keys (see Entering Activation Keys on page 289).
Update the Library Inventory

If you imported magazines into empty chambers in a partitions storage pool after the configuration backup file you used was generated, the library does not recognize the imported magazines as belonging to the partition after you restore the configuration. Instead, the library notifies you that there are unused magazines in the free pool. Use the partition wizard to update the library inventory to reflect the correct number of magazines assigned to the partition. 1. Log in as a user with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Partitions. The Shared Library Services screen displays. 3. Select either Summary or Edit for the partition to which the unassigned magazines should belong. Either option can be used when modifying a partition. Note: If you select Summary, select Edit on the Partition Setting screen to modify the partition.
February 2011
381
4. Select Next to advance through the partition configuration screens until you reach the Chambers and Drives screen.
Figure 233 The Chambers and Drives screen. 5. Decrease the number of storage chambers assigned to the partition by the number of missing magazines. 6. Select Next to advance through the remainder of the screens without making any additional changes until you reach the Save Library Configuration screen. 7. Select Save. The Share Library Services screen redisplays. 8. Repeat Step 2 through Step 6, this time increasing the number of storage chambers assigned to the partition by the number of missing magazines.
February 2011
382
9. Review the information on the screen and confirm that all settings are correct for this partitions configuration. If the configuration information is correct, proceed to Step 10. If the configuration information is not correct, either: Select Cancel to configure the partition again from the beginning. Select Previous to move backward through the configuration screens until you reach the settings that need correction. Make any necessary corrections, then select Next to move forward through the screens and return to the Save Partition screen. 10. Select Save. The library requires several minutes to store the configuration information, after which the Shared Library Services screen redisplays.
Restoring the Library Configuration Using a Saved Configuration

If you want to restore the library from a previously saved the library configuration to a USB drive or uploaded the configuration to a file on a computer (see Backing Up the Library Configuration Manually on page 308), use the following steps to restore the configuration. 1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. Select Maintenance > Tools > Utilities. The Utilities screen displays. 3. Select Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen displays. 4. Select Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show the Advanced Utilities. 5. Scroll through the list of advanced utilities and select one of the following, as applicable for your situation. The screen refreshes to show the details for the selected restore utility. Note: The Advanced Utilities screen lists the utilities in alphabetical order. The following table lists the utilities in most-frequentlyused order.
Use this Restore Option... Restore Library Configuration from Auto Save Restore Library Configuration from USB To... Restore auto-save configuration file that you previously stored on a USB drive (see Restoring From an Auto Save Configuration File on page 378). Note: The auto-save configuration file contains both the library configuration and the MLM database. Restore a library configuration file previously stored on a USB drive. Note: Before starting this procedure, insert the USB drive into the USB port on the LCM.
February 2011
383
Chapter 13 Library Troubleshooting Use this Restore Option... Upload Backup Configuration a, b
To... Upload a configuration file that you previously saved to a location that is accessible to the computer you are using to a temporary location in the library memory. 1. Select the Upload Backup Configuration button at the top of the screen.
2. When the upload is complete, you must then run the Restore Library Configuration from Backup Configuration File utility to restore the library configuration. Note: The Upload Backup Configuration button is only available when you access the library through the BlueScale web interface. Restore Library Configuration from Uploaded File b Complete the restore process after using the Upload Backup Configuration button to upload a saved configuration file from a computer. Note: This option is used in conjunction with Upload Backup Configuration, which must be run first.
a. This option may not be possible until you configure your library network settings. b. This option is only available when you access the library using the BlueScale web interface.
6. Select Run Utility.
Important
Before the library is restored using a saved configuration file on the USB drive, the current configuration is saved to the USB drive with a time stamp indicating when the file was created. The library is then restored using the selected auto-save configuration. The USB drive now contains one additional configuration file.
After a brief delay, the Utility Results screen appears, showing that the configuration file was uploaded and/or the configuration restored. 7. If you imported magazines into empty chambers in a partitions storage pool after you generated the backup configuration file, see Restore Other Configuration Changes on page 381. 8. If necessary, restore the MLM and DLM databases as described in Restoring the MLM and DLM Databases on page 204.
February 2011
384
Accessing the Interior of the Library
ACCESSING THE INTERIOR OF THE LIBRARY

Do not access the interior of the library unless you are specifically instructed to do so by Spectra Logic Technical Support.
Warning
Risk of electrical shock. Hazardous moving parts. Use caution when removing the librarys side panels. Spectra Logic recommends turning off the power to the library before removing the side panels. Warnung: Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlages. Gefhrliche bewegliche Teile. Gehen Sie uerst vorsichtig vor, wenn Sie die seitlichen Panels der Library entfernen. Spectra Logic empfiehlt die Stromversorgung zu unterbrechen, bevor die Panels entfernt werden.
Important
Before accessing the interior of the library contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5). Do not access the interior of the library unless you are specifically instructed to do so by Spectra Logic Technical Support.
Preparing the Library

Before accessing the interior of the library, use the following steps to prepare the library. 1. If possible, use your backup software to move any cartridges that are currently in tape drives back their storage location. If you cannot use your backup software, then attempt to move the cartridges as described in Moving Media Within a Partition on page 154. 2. If possible, pause PostScan if it is running (see Pausing the PostScan Process on page 191). Any tapes currently being scanned are returned to their storage locations. 3. Discontinue all I/O to the library. 4. Capture all available traces (see Capturing Traces on page 368). Trace data generated by the library or other components may be lost when you perform a reset, making diagnosing problems difficult. 5. Power off the library (see Powering Off the Library on page 93). Note: If soft power is enabled, a superuser must use the soft power button on the General Status screen to power off the library. 6. Access the interior of the library as described in the following section.
February 2011
385
Accessing the Interior of the Library
Removing or Replacing the Side Panel

Note: A safety interlock on the side panel turns off the 24 VAC power to the transporter when the panel is removed. 1. Use the steps shown in the following illustrations to remove the access panel right-most frame of the library where the transporter is parked, providing access to the interior of the service bay. 2. Set the panel aside out of the way.
Figure 234 Use a 1/8-inch Allen Figure 235 Lift the panel up Figure 236 Lift the panel wrench or hex screwdriver to remove while holding it steady out and off. the screw at the bottom of the side higher up. panel.
Resume Operation
1. Power on the library (see Powering On the Library on page 93) and wait while the library performs its initialization process. 2. If a cartridge is left in a Global Spare drive after the reset is complete, see Recovering a Cartridge From a Global Spare Drive to return the cartridge to its storage location. 3. If you used the BlueScale user interface to move media, update the inventory maintained by your backup application (see Updating the Media Inventory on page 159). 4. Restart any backup operations.
February 2011
386
CHAPTER 14
Drive Troubleshooting
This chapter describes procedures for dealing with most common problems encountered with the librarys drives. Try these troubleshooting procedures before you open a support ticket with Spectra Logic Technical Support. If you are unable to resolve the problem yourself, open a support ticket (see Opening a Support Ticket on page 474). Note: A valid service contract is required to obtain support (see Service Contract Extension on page 505 to learn about service contracts).
Topic Resetting a Drive Using DLM to Test an LTO Drive Requirements Running the DLM Drive Health Verification Wizard Retrieving a Drive Dump File Troubleshooting All Drive Types General Troubleshooting Host Cannot Access Drives QIP-Attached SCSI Drive Is Impaired or Offline Read/Write Problems Troubleshooting LTO Tape Drives Interpreting the Status LED Information Interpreting the Display Character Information Troubleshooting SDLT Tape Drives Troubleshooting SAIT Tape Drives Troubleshooting RXT Drives Described beginning on... page 388 page 389 page 389 page 390 page 393 page 396 page 396 page 397 page 397 page 398 page 398 page 400 page 401 page 415 page 417 page 419
387
Resetting a Drive
RESETTING A DRIVE
You may occasionally need to reset a drive as part of a firmware upgrade or for troubleshooting.
QIP
Important Important
When you reset a QIP-attached drive, you may also need to perform a BlueScale reset of the QIP. See Resetting a QIP or RIM on page 372 for instructions. The Power Drive on/off utility powers the selected drive on or off. This utility should ONLY be run on a drive that is not assigned to a partition. Do not use the advanced Power Drive on/off utility to reset a drive that is assigned to a partition. Running this utility on a drive assigned to a partition will disable the host interface.
1. Determine the BlueScale identifier for the drive you want to reset. Note: Drives are identified according to their physical location in the library. For example, FR1/DBA2/DRV4 refers to the upper right drive in DBA2 of frame 1. Refer to Drive Identifiers on page 58 for information about identifiers. 2. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 3. Select Configuration > Drives to display the Drives screen.
Figure 237 The Drives screen. 4. Select Reset. The library power cycles the drive. When the drive completes its POST and becomes ready, a Status screen displays, showing that the drive was reset. Note: When the drive resets, the library posts system messages that the drive disappeared and reappeared. 5. The drive is ready for use.
February 2011
388
Using DLM to Test an LTO Drive
USING DLM TO TEST AN LTO DRIVE

If you suspect that a drive is experiencing problems or if the Drive Lifecycle Management report indicates that a drive is experiencing repeated errors, you can use the DLM Drive Health Verification wizard to test the drive.During the test process, the wizard cleans the drive and then performs a write/read test using a scratch tape.
Requirements
Before you can run the DLM Drive Health Verification wizard, the following requirements must be met: The drive must not contain a cartridge. A scratch tape appropriate to the generation of drive being tested is available in the partitions entry/exit pool. The scratch tape health must be Good (green) or Usable.
Caution
Make sure that the scratch tape does not contain data that you need to retain. The test process overwrites all data on the tape.
Notes:
The test will abort (fail) if the scratch cartridge health is not Good or Usable. If the cartridge health is unknown (that is, it is not currently listed in the librarys MLM database, the library loads the cartridge into a drive to determine the health before beginning the test. The scratch cartridge must have a barcode label.
If a cleaning partition is associated with the partition containing the drive, make sure the cleaning partition contains a cleaning cartridge with Good (green) or Usable health. You can use MLM to determine the health of the cleaning cartridges currently in the cleaning partition (see Generating Reports on page 192). If necessary, import a known good cleaning cartridge into the cleaning partition (see Importing Media into the Entry/Exit Pool or a Cleaning Partition on page 133).
February 2011
389
If the partition does not use a cleaning partition, a cleaning cartridge with Good or Usable health must be in the partitions entry/exit pool. The cleaning cartridge must be in a regular TeraPack magazine; it cannot be in a Maintenance TeraPack magazine. Notes: The test will abort (fail) if the cleaning cartridge health is not Good or Usable. The cleaning cartridge must have a barcode label. If the entry/exit pool contains only one chamber, both the cleaning cartridge and the scratch cartridge must be in the same TeraPack magazine.
Running the DLM Drive Health Verification Wizard

Use the following steps to launch the DLM Drive Health Verification wizard.
Important
If you are accessing the library remotely using the BlueScale web interface, you will not be able to complete the test if the scratch cartridge and cleaning cartridge are not already present in the required locations.
1. Log into the library from the operator panel. 2. If necessary, import a TeraPack magazine containing a scratch tape into the partitions entry/exit pool and a cleaning cartridge into the cleaning partition, if present (see Importing Media into the Entry/Exit Pool or a Cleaning Partition on page 133). Note: If the partition does not use a cleaning partition, both the scratch tape and the cleaning cartridge can be imported into the entry/ exit pool in the same magazine. 3. From the toolbar menu, select Configuration > Drives to display the Drives screen. Note: The Test button is not present if DLM is not enabled.
Figure 238 The Test button on the Drives screen.

390
4. Select the Test button to start the DLM drive test wizard. The wizard determines whether all of the requirements for the test have been met. If one or more requirement needs attention, a screen displays to tell you what needs to be done. Notes: If you are accessing the library remotely using the BlueScale web interface and either the scratch cartridge or the cleaning cartridge is not available, then Cancel is the only option available. If all of the requirements are met, the Move and Import/ Export buttons are not present on this screen. Skip to Step 5.
Figure 239 The Drive Health Verification resources required screen. Use the following steps to address the unmet requirements. a. Use the Move or Import/Export button, as required, to move a cartridge out of the drive and to make a scratch cartridge and a cleaning cartridge available. b. After you complete the necessary actions, return to the Drives screen (Step 4) and select Test to launch the wizard again. When all of the requirements have been met, the Drive Health Verification screen displays a warning about the upcoming test process. Proceed to Step 5.
Figure 240 The Drive Health Verification requirements screen.
February 2011
391
5. Select Next to select the scratch cartridge you want to use for the test. Note: Only data cartridges located in the partitions entry/exit pool are listed and available for selection.
Figure 241 The DLM Select Scratch Cartridge screen. 6. Select Next to begin the automatic test process. A series of status screens let you know how the test is progressing. The test process requires approximately 15 minutes to complete. Note: The following conditions can result in the test aborting before it completes. If this occurs, resolve the problem and repeat Step 2 through Step 6. The cleaning cartridge is expired. The scratch cartridge is encrypted and the encryption key is not stored in the library. When the test is complete, a results screen displays showing the outcome of the test. If the drive passes the test, the drive health is set to Good (green).
Figure 242 The DLM Test Results screen (test successful). If the drive fails the test, the drive health is set to Poor (red). Contact Spectra Logic about replacing the drive (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
Figure 243 The DLM Test Results screen (test failed). 7. Select Continue to return to the Drives screen.
392
Retrieving a Drive Dump File
RETRIEVING A DRIVE DUMP FILE

Spectra Logic uses drive dumps to help diagnose problems with a tape drive. You only need to retrieve a drive dump when instructed to do so by Spectra Logic Technical Support.
Using IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT)

For LTO drives, use the IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) instead of the utility described in this section (see Download and Install ITDT on page 454). Refer to the ITDT documentation for information about using this utility to retrieve the dump file. Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support if you need assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5). Note: Make sure you install ITDT on a computer that has network access to the tape drives in the library.
Using the BlueScale Retrieve Drive Dump Utility

If your library uses drives types other than LTO or if for some reason you cannot install and use ITDT in your environment, use the BlueScale Retrieve Drive Dump Utility to collect the dump file from a drive.
Before You Begin

Before you begin the dump utility, make sure you fulfill the following prerequisites. Emailing Trace Results If you plan to email the results directly from the library, make sure that you have already set up the email recipients as mail users (see Configuring Mail Users on page 300). Saving Trace Results to USB If you plan to save the dump results to USB, you must plug the USB drive into one of the librarys USB ports before running the accessing the Utilities screen (see Connecting a USB Drive to the LCM on page 117). Note: If a USB drive is not plugged in, the USB option is not available. You can, however, still save trace results to the LCM compact flash card. You can also just view the results without saving them.
February 2011
393
Run the Utility

Use the following steps to retrieve the drive dump file using the BlueScale user interface. 1. Determine the BlueScale identifier for the drive from which you want to retrieve the dump. Note: Drives are identified according to their physical location in the library. For example: FR1/DBA2/DRV4 refers to the upper right drive in DBA2 of frame 1. Refer to Drive Identifiers on page 58 for information about identifiers. 2. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 3. Select Maintenance > Tools > Utilities to display the Utilities screen. 4. Select Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen displays. 5. Select Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show a list of the advanced utilities. 6. Scroll through the list of advanced utilities and select Retrieve Drive Dump. The screen refreshes to show the details for the utility.
Figure 244 The Retrieve Drive Dump utility.
February 2011
394
7. Select any combination of the check boxes to chose the options for saving the generated trace:
Option Mail results to Description Sends the dump to a previously configured mail recipient. Use the drop-down list to select the recipient for the report file. Only previously configured mail recipients are listed. To send the email with the attached dump file to someone who is not listed, exit the utility, configure that person as an email recipient (see Configuring Mail Recipients on page 267), and then run the utility again. Note: Do not use the default autosupport@spectralogic.com email recipient. Spectra Logic does not save emailed HHM report files unless they are specifically requested for troubleshooting. Saves the report to the memory card in the LCM. Note: Select this option only if specifically instructed to do so by Spectra Logic Technical Support. Saves the report to the USB drive. The results can then be viewed from any device that can read from USB. Note: This option is only available if you connected a USB drive to one of the librarys USB ports before accessing the Utilities screen.
8. Use the drop-down list to select the drive from which you want to retrieve the dump. 9. Select Run Utility to retrieve the dump file from the selected drive.
Important
Do not use the drive from which you are retrieving the dump file for any other purpose while the utility runs.
When the dump is complete, the Utility Results screen displays, showing that the utility ran successfully.
February 2011
395
Troubleshooting All Drive Types
TROUBLESHOOTING ALL DRIVE TYPES

The following sections provide information about troubleshooting drive problems.
General Troubleshooting
When you encounter problems with drive operation, begin troubleshooting by check the following:
Check... System Messages To... Review the any System Messages that have been posted by the library (see Checking Messages on page 95) and take any action described in the message(s). Look up the definition of an error code referenced in a system message using Spectra Logics interactive Sense Code Lookup at www.spectralogic.com/ support/sensecodelookup. View any error codes from the drive (see Viewing Drive Status Information on page 108). Refer to the appropriate section in this chapter to determine how to proceed. Troubleshooting LTO Tape Drives on page 398 Troubleshooting SDLT Tape Drives on page 415 Troubleshooting SAIT Tape Drives on page 417 Troubleshooting RXT Drives on page 419 Find detailed troubleshooting information for the drive. See Additional Publications on page 17 for information about obtaining drive documentation. Find information about the most current version of drive firmware, tape drive device drivers, and additional service and support tools. You can access the Technical Support portal at http://support.spectralogic.com. Note: Accessing many of the tools available on the Technical Support portal requires creating a user account. See Accessing the Technical Support Portal on page 421 for instructions. Check the options under the Support Tools and Knowledge Base icons for additional troubleshooting information. Select the Equipment tab on the Incidents & Service Agreement Management page to view information about the warranty and service options for your library. For information about the Spectra Certified Media warranty, see www.spectralogic.com/mediaguarantee.
Error Codes
Drive Details Screen
Drive Documentation Technical Support Portal
February 2011
396
Troubleshooting All Drive Types
Host Cannot Access Drives

When you encounter problems accessing the drives in the library from the application software on the host, check the following:
Check... Interface Connections Software installation Drive Addressing To... Make sure that the interface connections to the drives, QIPs, or Bus Expansion Modules are secure. Make sure that your host application is installed and configured correctly (refer to your software documentation). Pay special attention to steps that describe how to configure the software for use with the tape drive(s). Make sure that the drive address configured in the host application is the same one you specified when you configured the partition containing the drive (see Configuring a New Data Partition on page 223). Determine whether a device driver is required. Some operating environments require you to install device drivers before the application software can correctly communicate with the drives. When you update the drive firmware, you may also need to update the device driver for the drive. See Updating Drive Device Drivers on page 461 for instructions.
Host and Software Documentation
QIP-Attached SCSI Drive Is Impaired or Offline

SCSI drives that were previously connected to a QIP are no longer accessible from the network if the QIP is replaced by a RIM. To continue using the SCSI drives, replace the RIM with an F-QIP. The Drives screen shows Controller is Missing for the drives. The Partition Settings screen shows the drives as Impaired. Check the device descriptor on the Controllers page (circled in the following figures) to determine whether QIP connected to the drive is actually a RIM.
Figure 245 The Controller screen (F-QIP installed). Figure 246 The Controller screen (RIM installed).
February 2011
397
Troubleshooting LTO Tape Drives
Read/Write Problems
If you have been successfully operating the backup software and library in the past, but are now experiencing problems reading and writing data, check the following:
Check this... Write-protect switch Cartridge age Drive cleaning SCSI bus termination If... You are writing data to a cartridge. Make sure that the cartridge is writeenabled (see Preparing Media for Use on page 128) before importing it into the library. A tape cartridge has been in use for a long time or if it has been used frequently, try using a new cartridge. The drive indicates that a cleaning is required, see Cleaning a Tape Drive on page 446. You have SCSI drives in the library and you experience sporadic errors. Make sure that a SCSI terminator is installed on each SCSI drive in the library. The SCSI drives used with the library are shipped with the appropriate terminators installed. If the SCSI bus is not properly terminated you may experience one or more of the following failure symptoms: Read/Write failure Bus hangs Connectivity issuesdrive is not seen on bus or drops off bus Command failurescommands to a drive may fail while commands to other devices on the bus may work properly
TROUBLESHOOTING LTO TAPE DRIVES

BlueScale Drive Lifecycle Management (DLM) helps you identify drives that experience a high number of errors or other problems during operation. You can view the DLM health information for each individual drive and, if necessary, use the built-in BlueScale drive test to clean the drive and then run a read/write performance test using a scratch tape. This test, when used in conjunction with other DLM data and MLM data, can help you determine whether a tape drive or the media is the source of the errors you are investigating. See Chapter 8 Drive Lifecycle Management for detailed information about using DLM to monitor the health of LTO drives.
February 2011
398
If you think that a drive may be faulty, follow these steps: 1. Review the issues described in General Troubleshooting on page 396. 2. Display the Drive Details screen for the drive you suspect is having problems (see Viewing Drive Status Information on page 108). The Drive Details screen for each LTO drive in a partition includes the LED state and SCD code information about the drives operational status. This information corresponds to the information displayed by the drives LED and single-character display (SCD). These LEDs are not visible when the drive is operating inside the library. 3. Refer to the following table to interpret the information on the Drive Details screen.
Detail Field POST Status Description Indicates whether the drive successfully completed its power-on self-tests (POST). When an LTO drive power-cycled or reset, it automatically runs self-diagnostic tests (POST), checking memory and sensors, performing motor and servo tests, and testing data channels to ensure that the drive is functioning within normal parameters. Indicates whether the drive requires cleaning (see Cleaning a Tape Drive on page 446). Corresponds to the status LED on the drive. See Interpreting the Status LED Information on page 400 for detailed information. Corresponds to the single-character display (SCD) on the drive. The meaning of the character displayed depends on the LTO drive generation. See Interpreting the Display Character Information, beginning on page 401 for detailed information. Indicates whether a cartridge is currently loaded in the drive, tape motion, and other information related to reading and writing data.
Cleaning Status LED Status
Display Character
Cartridge Status
4. Use the DLM Drive Health Verification wizard to test the drive (see Using DLM to Test an LTO Drive on page 389 5. If the drive fails the DLM Drive Health Verification test, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
February 2011
399
Interpreting the Status LED Information

The following table describes the states for the status LED and the meaning of each state. The LED states are the same for all generations of LTO drives. Notes: For LTO-4 Fibre Channel drives running firmware version 8940 or later and all firmware versions for LTO-5 Fibre Channel drives, the LED status information shown on the Drive Details screen always indicates that the LED is off. If you need to determine the state of the LED, use the IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT). Download and install the software as described in Download and Install ITDT on page 454). Refer to the ITDT documentation for information about using this utility to retrieve the dump file. Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support if you need assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5). Make sure you install ITDT on a computer that has network access to the tape drives in the library
LED State Green Off Solid The drive is powered off or is not assigned to a partition. The drive is powered on and assigned to a partition. If a solid C appears in the singlecharacter display in conjunction with the solid green LED, then the drive needs cleaning. The drive is reading from the tape, writing to the tape, rewinding the tape, locating data on the tape, loading the tape, or unloading the tape. The status light also flashes green if the drive contains a cartridge during the power-on cycle. In this case, the drive completes writing the current data and slowly rewinds the tape (the process may take up to 13 minutes). The light stops blinking when the drive completes the recovery and is ready for a read or write operation. The drive is powering on or is in maintenance mode. LED Color Amber
Flashing
One of the following applies: If the light flashes once per second, an error occurred and the tape drive or media may require service. Note the single-character code displayed on the SCD, then read the drive-specific information about the SCD in the following sections to determine the action required. If the light flashes twice per second, the tape drive is updating firmware. If the light flashes four times per second, the tape drive detected an error and is performing a firmware recovery. It resets automatically.
February 2011
400
Interpreting the Display Character Information

The following sections describe the meaning of the codes displayed for the Display Character in the Drive Details screen. The Display Character corresponds to the single-character display (SCD) on the tape drive. Drive Cleaning Notification WORM Media Errors SCD Codes for LTO-3, LTO-4, and LTO-5 Drives SCD Codes for LTO-2 Drives Note: The SCD is blank during normal drive operation. In the event of a drive problem, the single character code indicates the type of error. If multiple errors occur, the code with highest priority (lowest number) displays first. Once that error is corrected, the code with the next highest priority displays, until none remain.
Drive Cleaning Notification

Whenever a tape is loaded or unloaded, the read/write heads are physically cleaned by a brush located within the drive. Occasionally, the drive may require additional cleaning. If a cleaning is required, the drive sends a Tape Alert message to the host and displays a C on the SCD. The notification is also posted to the librarys Drive Details screen (Figure 58 on page 109). If needed, clean the drive as described in Cleaning a Tape Drive on page 446. Use only a certified LTO cleaning cartridge. To order a cleaning cartridge, see Media and Accessories on page 495.
WORM Media Errors

LTO-3 through LTO-5 drives support using WORM media. To learn more about WORM media, see LTO WORM Media on page 518. The following conditions cause WORM media errors to occur: Information in the servo manufacturers word (SMW) on the tape must match information from the cartridge memory (CM) module in the cartridge. If it does not match, the drives SCD displays error code 7. Inserting a WORM tape cartridge into a drive that is not compatible with WORM causes the cartridge to be treated as an unsupported medium. The drives SCD displays error code 7.
February 2011
401
SCD Codes for LTO-3, LTO-4, and LTO-5 Drives

The SCD is blank during normal operation. If multiple errors occur, the code with highest priority (lowest number) displays first. Once corrected, the code with the next highest priority displays, until none remain. If the drive detects a permanent error and displays an error code other than zero (0), it automatically performs a drive dump. If you force a drive dump, the existing dump will be overwritten and data will be lost. After you force a drive dump, do not turn off the power to the drive or you may lose the dump data. See Retrieving a Drive Dump File on page 393 for information about retrieving the dump data from the drive. Notes: The single-character display does not indicate the characters B, D, G, I, O and Z to prevent misinterpretation as the characters 8, 0, 6, 2, and 1. Some of the solutions listed in the following table include testing the drive. See Using DLM to Test an LTO Drive on page 389 for instructions. In some cases, additional tests using ITDT are required. Download and install the software as described in Download and Install ITDT on page 454). Refer to the ITDT documentation for information about using this utility to retrieve the dump file. Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support if you need assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
February 2011
402
The following table shows the SCD codes and, where applicable, the associated DLM Drive Health icon for LTO-5 through LTO-3 tape drives. See the table on page 212 for a description of what the Drive Health icons indicate.
DLM Health Icon N/A Cause and Solution
Code 0 1
No error occurred. No action is required. The power was cycled or diagnostics have finished with no errors. Cooling problem. The recommended operating temperature was exceeded. Perform one or more of the following: Make sure that the cooling fan is rotating and is quiet. Remove any blockage that prevents air from flowing freely through the tape drive. Make sure that the operating temperature and airflow is within the specified range. If the operating temperature is within the specified range and the problem persists, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5). Note: The error code clears when you reset or power cycle the tape drive or when you place it in maintenance mode. Power problem. The externally supplied power is approaching the specified voltage limits (the tape drive is still operating) or is outside the specified voltage limits (the tape drive is not operating). Make sure that the librarys power connector is properly seated. If the problem persists, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5). Note: The error code clears when you reset or power cycle the tape drive or when you place it in maintenance mode. Firmware problem. Important: Do not force a dump; one already exists. The tape drive determined that a firmware error occurred. Perform the following: 1. If possible, use ITDT to collect a drive dump (see Using IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) on page 393. If you cannot use ITDT, use the BlueScale user interface to collect a drive dump (see Retrieving a Drive Dump File on page 393). 2. Reset the drive (see Resetting a Drive on page 388), then retry the operation that produced the error. 3. If the problem persists, send the drive dump to Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5). Note: The error code clears when you reset or power cycle the tape drive or when you place it in maintenance mode.
February 2011
403
Chapter 14 Drive Troubleshooting DLM Health Icon Cause and Solution
Code 4
Firmware or drive problem. Important: Do not force a dump; one already exists. A firmware or drive hardware failure occurred. Perform the following: 1. If possible, use ITDT to collect a drive dump (see Using IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) on page 393). If you cannot use ITDT, use the BlueScale user interface to collect a drive dump (see Retrieving a Drive Dump File on page 393). 2. Reset the drive (see Resetting a Drive on page 388), then retry the operation that produced the error. 3. If the problem persists, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5) and send the drive dump to them. Note: The error code clears when you reset or power cycle the tape drive or when you place it in maintenance mode.
Tape drive hardware problem. The tape drive determined that a tape path or read/write error occurred. To prevent damage to the drive or tape cartridge, the drive does not allow you to insert a cartridge if the current cartridge was successfully ejected. If the problem persists, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5). Perform the following: 1. If possible, use ITDT to collect a drive dump (see Using IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) on page 393. If you cannot use ITDT, use the BlueScale user interface to collect a drive dump (see Retrieving a Drive Dump File on page 393). 2. Reset the drive (see Resetting a Drive on page 388), then retry the operation that produced the error. 3. If the problem persists, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5). Note: The error code clears when you reset or power cycle the tape drive.
February 2011
404
Chapter 14 Drive Troubleshooting DLM Health Icon N/A Cause and Solution
Code 6
Tape drive or media error. See Chapter 7 Media Lifecycle Management for information about using MLM to determine the health of the cartridge. See Chapter 8 Drive Lifecycle Management for information about using DLM to determine the health of the drive. The tape drive determined that an error occurred, but it cannot isolate the cause. Ensure the tape cartridge is the correct media type: See LTO Read/Write Compatibility on page 518 for information about which media is compatible with each LTO tape drive generation. Drive will not accept an expired cleaning cartridge. Drive will not accept a WORM cartridge when running diagnostic tests in Maintenance Mode. Drive will not write over existing data sets on a WORM cartridge. Ensure you are appending data sets on WORM media rather than attempting to write over existing data sets. If the tape cartridge is the correct media type, perform the following action: Problems Writing Data on Cartridge with Known Volume Serial Number Retry the operation with a different cartridge. If the operation succeeds, the original cartridge was defective. Copy data from the defective cartridge and discard it. If the operation fails and another tape drive is available, insert the cartridge into the other drive and retry the operation. If the operation fails, discard the defective cartridge. If the operation succeeds, use the Drive Health Verification wizard to test the drive (see Using DLM to Test an LTO Drive on page 389). If the diagnostics fail, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5). If the diagnostics succeed, the error was temporary. If the operation fails and another tape drive is not available, use the Drive Health Verification wizard to test the drive. If the diagnostics fail, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support. If the diagnostics succeed, discard the cartridge.
February 2011
405
Chapter 14 Drive Troubleshooting DLM Health Icon N/A Cause and Solution
Code 6 (cont.)
Problems Reading Data on Cartridge with Known Volume Serial Number Perform one of the following procedures: If another tape drive is available, insert the cartridge into the other drive and retry the operation. If the operation fails, discard the defective cartridge. If the operation succeeds, use the Drive Health Verification wizard to test the drive (see Using DLM to Test an LTO Drive on page 389). If the diagnostics fail, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5). If the diagnostics succeed, the error was temporary. If another tape drive is not available, use the Drive Health Verification wizard to test the drive. If the diagnostics fail, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support. If the diagnostics succeed, discard the cartridge. Problems with Multiple Cartridges or One Cartridge with Unknown Volume Serial Number If the problem occurs with multiple tape cartridges or if you do not know the tape cartridges volume serial number, use the Drive Health Verification wizard to test the drive (see Using DLM to Test an LTO Drive on page 389). If the Drive Health Verification fails, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5). If the diagnostics succeed, use the ITDT tape drive diagnostics to run the Test Head diagnostic: If the Test Head diagnostic fails, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support. If the Test Head diagnostic succeeds, replace the cartridges that caused the problem.
February 2011
406
Code 7
High probability of media error. An error occurred because of a faulty tape cartridge. Ensure the tape cartridge is the correct media type: See LTO Read/Write Compatibility on page 518 for information about which media is compatible with each LTO tape drive generation. Drive will not accept an expired cleaning cartridge. Drive will not accept a WORM cartridge when running diagnostic tests in Maintenance Mode. Drive will not write over existing data sets on a WORM cartridge. Ensure you are appending data sets on WORM media rather than attempting to write over existing data sets. If the tape cartridge is the correct media type, try another tape cartridge in the drive. If the problem occurs with multiple tape cartridges, run the tape cartridge in a different tape drive. If the operation in the other drive fails and the SCD displays 6 or 7, replace the media. If the operation succeeds, use ITDT to run the Test Cartridge & Media diagnostic. CAUTION! When you use ITDT to run the Test Cartridge & Media diagnostic, data on the suspect tape is overwritten. If the Test Cartridge & Media diagnostic fails, replace the media. If it runs successfully, use the Drive Health Verification wizard to test the drive (see Using DLM to Test an LTO Drive on page 389). If the tape drive diagnostics fail, replace the tape drive. If the Drive Health Verification wizard runs successfully, try again to perform the operation that produced the initial media error. Note: The error code clears when you remove the tape cartridge or when you place the tape drive in maintenance mode.
SCSI interface or Fibre Channel failure. A failure occurred in the tape drive hardware or in the SCSI bus. The error code clears after 10 seconds if the error does not recur. If the error persists, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5). RS-422 error. The drive determined that a drive interface or library interface failure occurred. The error code clears after 10 seconds if the error does not recur. If the error persists, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
February 2011
407
Code A
Degraded operation. The tape drive determined that a problem occurred that degraded the operation of the tape drive, but it did not restrict continued use. The drive is usable, though the single-character display (SCD) continues to indicate an error and the status light flashes amber. The error code may clear when you cycle power to the tape drive. 1. Reset the drive (see Resetting a Drive on page 388) to clear the error code. 2. Confirm that the drive is using the current firmware version (see Determine the Drive Generation and Firmware Version on page 455) and update the firmware if necessary. 3. Use the Drive Health Verification wizard to test the drive (see Using DLM to Test an LTO Drive on page 389). 4. If the problem persists, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5). N/A No error or message assigned. See Error Code 8 in this table. Cleaning indicator. The tape drive needs to be cleaned, or is in the process of loading the cleaning cartridge or being cleaned. The error code clears when you clean the drive and unload the cleaning cartridge. See Cleaning a Tape Drive on page 446 for instructions. N/A No error or message assigned. See Error Code 0 (zero) in this table. Two drives on the Fibre Channel loop have the same AL-PA. The Fibre Channel port connection is off-line. The drive detected a configuration error during an encryption operation. 1. Make sure that you are using LTO-4 or LTO-5 data cartridges. Encryption is only supported for LTO-4 and LTO-5 cartridges. 2. Retry the encryption operation with the suspect cartridge in another encryption enabled drive. 3. Replace the cartridge if you see the same problem in multiple drives.
B C
D d E e
February 2011
408
Code F
Drive Fiber Channel error. The Fibre Channel drive does not detect light or a related diagnostic failed on not detecting light through the fiber optic connection to the drive. Verify the fiber cables and connections between the tape drive and the host are the correct type and are working properly. Verify all equipment and devices are powered ON. Verify the configuration settings for the drive are set correctly and are compatible with the topology of the network. Verify that the host fiber adapter and port are working properly and are compatible with the topology of the network. Verify that the fiber channel switch ports are working properly and are compatible with the topology of the network. Verify that the fiber cable is connected to Port A (0) of the tape drive. Verify that Port A (0) on the Fibre Channel drive is working properly by running Function Code 6: Run Host Interface Wrap Test. The cartridge in the drive is write-protected. A backup application cannot write data to a write-protected cartridge. The library cannot update the cartridge MAM when the cartridge is write-protected. Firmware update is in progress. N/A Reserved or not actively in use, or no error or message assigned. There may be a problem with the SCD. Reset the drive and determine whether all segments on the SCD are lit. If they are all lit, confirm that the drive is using the current firmware version (see Determine the Drive Generation and Firmware Version on page 455) and update the firmware if necessary. If the problem persists, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5). The message display has lost communication with the tape drive. This message appears on Line 2 of the message display. The three dots may occasionally display during normal processing.
u b, c, H, J, h, n, o
N/A
February 2011
409
SCD Codes for LTO-2 Drives

If multiple errors occur, the code with highest priority (lowest number) displays first. Once corrected, the code with the next highest priority displays, until none remain. Note: The SCD is blank during normal operation.
DLM Health Icon Cause and Solution
Code 0 1
No error occurred. No action is required. The power was cycled or diagnostics have finished with no errors. Cooling problem. The recommended operating temperature was exceeded. Perform one or more of the following: Ensure that the cooling fan is rotating and is quiet. Remove any blockage that prevents air from flowing freely through the tape drive. Ensure that the operating temperature and airflow is within the specified range. If the operating temperature is within the specified range and the problem persists, replace the drive. Note: The error code clears when you reset or power cycle the tape drive or when you place it in maintenance mode. Power problem. The externally supplied power is approaching the specified voltage limits (the tape drive is still operating) or is outside the specified voltage limits (the tape drive is not operating). Make sure that the librarys power connector is properly seated. If the problem persists, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5). Note: The error code clears when you reset or power cycle the tape drive or when you place it in maintenance mode.
February 2011
410
Code 3
Firmware problem. Important: Do not force a dump; one already exists. The tape drive determined that a firmware error occurred. Perform the following: 1. If possible, use ITDT to collect a drive dump (see Using IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) on page 393. If you cannot use ITDT, use the BlueScale user interface to collect a drive dump (see Retrieving a Drive Dump File on page 393). Note: You can also use the servers SCSI interface. Use a device driver utility or system tool (for instructions about reading a drive dump from tape, visit http://ssddom02.storage.ibm.com/tape/lto/). 2. Reset the drive (see Resetting a Drive on page 388) to clear the error code. 3. Confirm that the drive is using the current firmware version (see Determine the Drive Generation and Firmware Version on page 455). 4. Update the firmware if necessary (see Updating Drive Firmware on page 453). 5. Retry the operation that produced the error. 6. If the problem persists, send the drive dump collected in Step 1 to Spectra Logic Technical Support. Note: The error code clears when you reset or power cycle the tape drive or when you place it in maintenance mode.
Firmware or drive problem. Important: Do not force a dump; one already exists. A firmware or drive hardware failure occurred. Perform the following: 1. If possible, use ITDT to collect a drive dump (see Using IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) on page 393. If you cannot use ITDT, use the BlueScale user interface to collect a drive dump (see Retrieving a Drive Dump File on page 393). Note: You can also use the servers SCSI interface. Use a device driver utility or system tool (for instructions about reading a drive dump from tape, visit http://ssddom02.storage.ibm.com/tape/lto/). 2. Reset the drive (see Resetting a Drive on page 388) to clear the error code. 3. Retry the operation that produced the error. 4. If the problem persists, confirm that the drive is using the current firmware version (see Determine the Drive Generation and Firmware Version on page 455). 5. Update the firmware if necessary (see Updating Drive Firmware on page 453). Note: The error code clears when you reset or power cycle the tape drive or when you place it in maintenance mode.
February 2011
411
Code 5
Tape drive hardware problem. The tape drive determined that a tape path or read/write error occurred. To prevent damage to the drive or tape cartridge, the drive does not allow you to insert a cartridge if the current cartridge was successfully ejected. If the problem persists, replace the drive. Note: The error code clears when you reset or power cycle the drive or when you place it in maintenance mode. N/A Tape drive or media error. See Chapter 7 Media Lifecycle Management for information about using MLM to determine the health of the cartridge. See Chapter 8 Drive Lifecycle Management for information about using DLM to determine the health of the drive. The tape drive determined that an error occurred, but it cannot isolate the error to faulty hardware or to the tape cartridge. Perform the following actions: For Problems with Writing Data If the problem occurred while the tape drive was writing data to the tape, and if you know the volume serial number (located on the cartridge label) of the tape cartridge that was loaded in the drive when the problem occurred, retry the operation with a different cartridge: If the operation succeeds, the original cartridge was defective. Copy data from the defective cartridge and discard it. If the operation fails and another tape drive is available, insert the cartridge into the other unit and retry the operation. If the operation fails, discard the defective cartridge. Note: The error code clears when you remove the tape cartridge or place the tape drive in maintenance mode. For Problems with Reading Data If the problem occurred while the tape drive was reading data from the tape, and if you know the volume serial number of the tape cartridge, perform one of the following procedures: If another tape drive is available, insert the cartridge into the other unit and retry the operation: If the operation fails, discard the defective cartridge. Note: The error code clears when you reset or power cycle the tape drive or when you place it in maintenance mode. High probability of media error. An error occurred because of a faulty tape cartridge. Try another tape cartridge. If the problem occurs with multiple tape cartridges, run the tape cartridge in a different tape drive. If the operation in the other unit fails and 6 or 7 displays, replace the media. Note: The error code clears when you reset or power cycle the tape drive or when you place it in maintenance mode.
February 2011
412
Code 8
Primary port interface error. A failure occurred in the tape drive hardware or in the primary port interface. The error code clears 10 seconds after the drive detected the error or when you place the drive in maintenance mode. Tape drive, library interface, or RS-422 error. A failure occurred in the drive hardware, the library interface, or the RS-422 connection. Replace the drive. The error code clears 10 seconds after the drive detected the error or when you place the drive in maintenance mode. Degraded operation. The drive is usable, though the single-character display (SCD) continues to indicate an error and the status light flashes amber. The error code may clear when you reset the tape drive. 1. Reset the drive (see Resetting a Drive on page 388) to clear the error code. 2. Confirm that the drive is using the current firmware version (see Determine the Drive Generation and Firmware Version on page 455) and update the firmware if necessary. 3. Use the Drive Health Verification wizard to test the drive (see Using DLM to Test an LTO Drive on page 389). 4. If the problem persists, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5). Note: The error code may clear when you reset or power cycle the tape drive or when you place it in maintenance mode. N/A No error or message is assigned. See Error Code 8 in this table. Cleaning indicator. The tape drive needs to be cleaned. The error code clears when you clean the drive or place it in maintenance mode. N/A No error or message assigned. See Error Code 0 in this table. Fibre Channel AL_PA conflict. Two tape drives on a Fibre Channel loop have the same AL_PA. The Fibre Channel port is offline.
B C
D d E
February 2011
413
Code F
Drive Fiber Channel error. The Fibre Channel drive does not detect light or a related diagnostic failed on not detecting light through the fiber optic connection to the drive. Verify the fiber cables and connections between the tape drive and the host are the correct type and are working properly. Verify all equipment and devices are powered ON. Verify the configuration settings for the drive are set correctly and are compatible with the topology of the network. Verify that the host fiber adapter and port are working properly and are compatible with the topology of the network. Verify that the fiber channel switch ports are working properly and are compatible with the topology of the network. Verify that the fiber cable is connected to Port A (0) of the tape drive. Verify that Port A (0) on the Fibre Channel drive is working properly by running Function Code 6: Run Host Interface Wrap Test. N/A No error or message assigned. There may be a problem with the SCD. Reset the drive and determine whether all segments on the SCD are lit. If they are all lit, confirm that the drive is using the current firmware version (see Determine the Drive Generation and Firmware Version on page 455) and update the firmware if necessary. If the problem persists, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5). The message display has lost communication with the tape drive. This message appears on Line 2 of the message display. The three dots may occasionally display during normal processing.
c, b, h, n, or u
N/A
February 2011
414
Troubleshooting SDLT Tape Drives
TROUBLESHOOTING SDLT TAPE DRIVES

Important
SDLT drives are only supported as legacy devices. New SDLT drives are no longer available for purchase.
Viewing the Status of the Front Panel LEDs

SDLT drives have three front panel LEDs that you can use as troubleshooting tools. These LEDs are not visible when a drive is installed in the library. Instead, the LED state information for each SDLT drive in a partition can be viewed using the Drive Details screen (Figure 58 on page 109). If you think that a drive may be faulty, follow these steps: 1. Display the Drive Details screen for the drive you suspect is having problems (see Viewing Drive Status Information on page 108). 2. Refer to the table in Interpreting the SDLT LEDs to understand the information on the Drive Details screen. All of the LEDs flash rapidly and simultaneously when the drive malfunctions. 3. If the drive is in an error state, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).Select Configuration > Drives.
Interpreting the SDLT LEDs

The following table describes the states for the SDLT LEDs and their meaning.
LED Drive Density Drive Status Color Orange or Green Green Indication On Off Flashing The tape drive is in use, which includes functions such as: The tape is moving. The drive is calibrating, reading, writing, or rewinding the tape. The drive is loading, unloading, or rewinding. The drive is idle. There may or may not be a cartridge in the tape drive. The tape drive has not been turned on or is not plugged into a power source. Cleaning is required. Cleaning is not required. Explanation See The Drive Density LED on page 416.
On Off Cleaning Required Yellow On Off
February 2011
415
Troubleshooting SDLT Tape Drives
The Drive Density LED On the SDLT 600 drive, the left-most LED on the front of the drive is a dual color LED, able to appear green or orange. This is the Drive Density LED, which indicates the type of tape cartridge loaded in the drive, as well as its status. These combinations are summarized in the Density Indicator table below.
Drive Density LED Possible Tape Cartridge Scenario No Cartridge Inserted Any SDLT II (SDLT 600) Cartridge Inserted Any SDLT I (SDLT 320 or 220) Cartridge Inserted Any VS160 Cartridge Inserted DLTtape IV Cartridge Inserted LED Color Black (Off) Green Orange Orange Black (Off)
SDLT Tape Drive Cleaning

The frequency of cleaning is dictated mostly by the amount of ambient pollution and particulates in the environment. SDLT drives monitor their cleaning status. When the drives yellow Cleaning Required LED turns on or if your backup software notifies you that a cleaning is required, follow the instructions in Cleaning a Tape Drive on page 446 to clean the drive. Note: Spectra Logic recommends cleaning all of the tape drives in the library whenever you replace the air filter, whether or not the drive indicates that cleaning is required. If cleaning is required, use only a certified SDLT cleaning cartridge. To order a cleaning cartridge, see Media and Accessories on page 495.
Caution
Never use a DLT cleaning tape in an SDLT drive; DLT cleaning tapes are incompatible with the SDLT heads.
Each SDLT cleaning tape is good for 20 uses. Keep track of the number of times you use each cleaning cartridge.
February 2011
416
Troubleshooting SAIT Tape Drives
TROUBLESHOOTING SAIT TAPE DRIVES

Important
SAIT tape drives are only supported as legacy devices. They are no longer available for purchase.
Viewing the Status of the Front Panel LEDs

SAIT tape drives have four front panel LEDs that you can use as troubleshooting tools. These LEDs are not visible when a drive is installed in the library. Instead, the LED state information for each SAIT drive in a partition can be viewed using the Drive Details screen (Figure 58 on page 109). If you think that a drive may be faulty, follow these steps: 1. Display the Drive Details screen for the drive you suspect is having problems (see Viewing Drive Status Information on page 108). 2. Refer to the table in Interpreting SAIT LEDs to understand the information on the Drive Details screen. All of the LEDs flash rapidly and simultaneously when the drive malfunctions. 3. If the drive is in an error state, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
Interpreting SAIT LEDs

The following table describes the states for the SAIT front panel LEDs and their meaning.
Color and State Tape Motion Green ALL lit (0.5 second) then Yellow blinks across all LEDs, from left to right, repeatedly for 2-3 seconds Green ALL lit only while eject button is pressed Amber blinking Amber solid Yellow blinking LED Drive Error Tape Error Cleaning Request
A brief display of these colors and states is normal during power on or reset. Brief and repeated displays of these colors and states is normal during diagnostics. The eject operation is inhibited. Tape access in progress (write) N/A Tape access in progress (search) Drive error N/A a Drive error Media error Media error Media error Error on cleaning N/A Cleaning request
February 2011
417
Chapter 14 Drive Troubleshooting Color and State Tape Motion Yellow solid Green blinking Green solid Off
a. N/A = Not Applicable.
Troubleshooting SAIT Tape Drives LED Drive Error N/A N/A N/A No error Tape Error N/A N/A N/A No error No request Cleaning Request Clean not completed N/A
Tape loaded (write protected) Tape access in progress (read) Tape loaded (writable) No tape
SAIT Drive Cleaning Notification

Whenever a tape is loaded or unloaded, the read/write heads are physically cleaned by a brush located within the drive. Occasionally, the drive may alert you that it requires additional cleaning flashing the Cleaning Request LED or by notifying the backup software. When a cleaning is required, follow the instructions in Cleaning a Tape Drive on page 446 to clean the drive. Note: Spectra Logic recommends cleaning all of the tape drives in the library whenever you replace the air filter, whether or not the drive indicates that cleaning is required. If cleaning is required, use only a certified SAIT cleaning cartridge. To order a cleaning cartridge, see Media and Accessories on page 495. Each cleaning tape is good for a limited number of uses. Keep track of the number of times you use each cleaning cartridge.
February 2011
418
Troubleshooting RXT Drives
TROUBLESHOOTING RXT DRIVES

Important
RXT drives are supported as legacy devices only. They are no longer available for purchase.
Viewing the Status of the Front Panel SCD

RXT drives have a digital display that consists of a 14-segment singlecharacter display (SCD) and a status indicator. The SCD is not visible when the drive is operating inside the library. Instead, the SCD code information for each RXT drive in a partition can be viewed using the Drive Details screen (Figure 58 on page 109). If you think that a drive may be faulty, follow these steps: 1. Display the Drive Details screen for the drive you suspect is having problems (see Viewing Drive Status Information on page 108). 2. Note the information in the Display Character field on the Drive Details screen, then refer to Interpreting RXT Drive SCD Codes to interpret the information. 3. If the drive is in an error state, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
Interpreting RXT Drive SCD Codes

The following table describes the single-character codes that appear on the RXT drives SCD and display in the Display Character field on the Drive Details screen. Unless there is an error, the SCD will be blank except for a flashing blue status indicator. If you need assistance, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support.
Code Meaning Powering On Booting Waiting 1 Cooling Problem Resolution Status message that the drive is powering on; no action is required. Status message that the drive is booting up; no action is required. Status message that the drive is processing; no action is required. If regarding a RXT media pack, remove the pack and try reloading. If regarding the RXT drive, cycle the power on the RXT drive.
February 2011
419
Chapter 14 Drive Troubleshooting Code 2 3 4 5 6 Meaning Firmware Error RXT Drive Hardware Error RXT Media Hardware Error RXT Drive or RXT Media Hardware Error RXT Drive Hardware Warning RXT Media Hardware Warning RXT Drive or RXT Media Hardware Warning RXT Media Degraded Mode RXT Drive Configuration Warning RXT Media Firmware later than RXT drive Firmware RXT Media Reformatting Necessary RXT Media Reconstructing RXT Drive Firmware Upgrade Necessary RXT Drive Firmware Upgrade In Progress RXT Drive Firmware Upgrade Failed Communication Application Failed Resolution
Troubleshooting RXT Drives
Gather traces and debug files using diagnostics. Spectra Logic recommends using the Web interface for these procedures, but you may also access them through the serial interface.
Obtain the warning message and forward it to Spectra Logic Technical Support. Gather traces and debug files using the Web or serial interface. Send the message to Spectra Logic Technical Support with trace and debug files. Send the message to Spectra Logic Technical Support with trace and debug files. Determine which drive is impaired and send trace and debug files to Spectra Logic Technical Support. Send the message to Spectra Logic Technical Support with trace and debug files. Upgrade the RXT drive firmware to current level.
7 8
9 A B
C D E F G H
Contact Spectra Logic Technical Support to determine if there is a hardware or firmware problem; the RXT media pack may need reformatting.
Upgrade the RXT drive firmware to current level if desired. Wait until the firmware file has upgraded. Attempt to upgrade again. If this fails, email Spectra Logic Technical Support with trace and debug files. Debug logs about the application failure are located on the RXT media. You may want to save the logs for sending to Spectra Logic Technical Support, but you can continue using the drive.
February 2011
420
CHAPTER 15
Maintaining the Library & Drives
This chapter describes the common maintenance tasks for the Spectra T950 library and its drives.
Topic Accessing the Technical Support Portal Maintaining the Library Replacing the Air Filter Updating Library Firmware Installing Cord Locks Calibrating the Touch Screen Maintaining Drives Cleaning a Tape Drive Updating Drive Firmware Updating Drive Device Drivers Adding or Replacing a Drive Described beginning on... this page page 425 page 425 page 428 page 443 page 445 page 446 page 446 page 453 page 461 page 463
ACCESSING THE TECHNICAL SUPPORT PORTAL

The new Spectra Logic Technical Support portal provides access to the Knowledgebase, the current version of the BlueScale firmware for the library, drive firmware, tape drive device drivers, and additional service and support tools. You can also open or update a support ticket and upload ASL files.
Important
The Technical Support portal currently only supports Internet Explorer versions 6.0 and above.
421
Accessing the Technical Support Portal
Creating an Account
Access to the Knowledge Base, logging a support ticket and uploading ASL files do not required you to create an account. You can also view the current firmware version for the library and drives. However, you must create a user account before you can download library firmware and drive firmware from the portal. Note: If you have multiple Spectra Logic products, you can associate the serial numbers for all of your Spectra Logic products with a single account. 1. If you have not yet created an account, follow these steps: a. If the library is not powered on, power it on now and log into the BlueScale user interface as either a superuser or administrator. b. Select Configuration > System to display the System Setup screen. c. Make a note of the librarys serial number (Hardware ID), which you need to create your Technical Support portal account.
Hardware ID
Figure 1 Locating the librarys Hardware ID.
February 2011
422
d. Access the Technical Support portal login page at http://support.spectralogic.com.
Figure 2 The Spectra Logic Technical Support portal login page. e. Select the Create an Account or Login icon and follow the instructions to create your account. The account you create is associated with the serial numbers you entered and provides access to firmware and device drivers that are appropriate for those libraries.
February 2011
423
Logging Into the Portal

After creating your user account, use your email and password to log into the Technical Support portal. Note: Some parts of the Technical Support portal are currently under construction. If you cannot access the information you are seeking through the portal, select the Support link at the top of the page.
Figure 3 The Spectra Logic Technical Support portal home page.
February 2011
424
Maintaining the Library
MAINTAINING THE LIBRARY

This section provides instructions for routine library maintenance procedures.
Topic Replacing the Air Filter Updating Library Firmware Installing Cord Locks Calibrating the Touch Screen Described on... this page page 428 page 443 page 445
Replacing the Air Filter

A set of fans mounted in the lower front of each frame pull cool air into the library and circulate it to maintain the temperature within an acceptable range. The air filters ensures that the air pulled into the library is free of contaminants. A clogged air filter can cause operational problems due to excessive temperatures inside the library. You should inspect the filter at least once every three months as part of your preventive maintenance procedures. If a filter appears to be clogged, continue with the steps in this section.
Caution
Some environments may require more frequent filter inspection and replacement. If an air filter gets clogged quickly, consider moving the library to a more dust-free location or improve the environment where it is located.
Spectra Logic recommends keeping one or more new air filters on site to use for replacement as often as is necessary. To purchase replacement air filters, contact your sales representative.
Before You Begin...

Confirm that the filter needs to be replacedBecause dust primarily collects at the bottom of the air filter, it can be rotated 180, top to bottom, one time before it needs to be replaced. Gather the following tools and suppliesGather these supplies before beginning the procedure. A new filter from Spectra Logic A flat blade screwdriver Continue Library Operations While Replacing the FilterIt is safe to continue normal library operations, such as backups, while replacing the air filter.
February 2011
425
Replace the Filter

Follow these steps to rotate or replace the air filter in a frame. 1. Remove the filter cover by pulling outward on the handle at the top left of the panel (A) and the bottom right corner of the panel (B).
A B
Figure 4 The filter cover. Note: The fans stop running when you remove the filter cover and resume running after the filter and filter cover are replaced. 2. Use a flat head screwdriver to loosen the four captive screws on the air filter (circled in Figure 5).
Note: You can rotate the air filter 180 one time before replacing it.
Figure 5 The filter screws.
February 2011
426
3. Determine whether the filter can be rotated. If the filter has not previously been rotated, rotate it 180, top to bottom
Important
Make sure that you do not flip the filter over. Doing so will place the dirty side of the air filter toward the interior of the frame and will result in the trapped contaminates being blown into the library interior.
Note: When you rotate the filter, mark it in some way so that you can tell at a glance the next time you inspect the filter. If the filter has already been rotated once, you must replace it. 4. Place the air filter in front of the fan assembly on the frame. 5. Ensure that the tab on the filter is pressing in on the switch.
Switch Tab
Captive screws
Figure 6 Install the filter. 6. Use a flat head screwdriver to tighten the four captive screws on the filter. 7. Use a dry cloth to wipe any accumulated dust off the inside of the filter cover. 8. Replace the filter cover on the front of the library; the fans restart. 9. If necessary, repeat Step 1 through Step 8 for each additional frame in the library. Note: If you have an eight-frame library, frames seven and eight do not have air filters.
February 2011
427
Updating Library Firmware

This section covers the following information:
Topic Firmware Package Support Checking the Current Firmware Versions Downloading the Currently Released BlueScale Firmware Version Preparing for the Update Using the Standard Firmware Update Procedure Using the Advanced Firmware Update Procedure Managing Firmware Packages Described beginning on... this page page 429 page 432 page 434 page 435 page 440 page 442
Firmware Package Support

Firmware packages are groupings of program code that are used to update the BlueScale software and firmware for the library and its components. Spectra Logic provides complete support for the two most recently shipped releases of firmware packages. Customers using previously released firmware packages are urged to upgrade to the current release. If the firmware you are running is more than two releases behind, you may be required to upgrade firmware to resolve an issue or to verify that the problem still exists in current firmware.
Important
The Spectra T950 Library Release Notes and Documentation Updates, available on the firmware download page on the Technical Support portal, provide information about the BlueScale firmware releases, as well as updates to this guide and other documentation. The release notes are also available at www.spectralogic.com/documents.
February 2011
428
Checking the Current Firmware Versions

The following sections provide instructions for determining the version of BlueScale software and firmware currently running on the library.
Check the Library Firmware Version

Use the following steps to determine the BlueScale firmware version currently running on the library. 1. Log into the library. 2. Make a note of the BlueScale version being run by the library. The status bar at the bottom of each BlueScale screen shows the version of the BlueScale firmware being run by the library.
BlueScale version
Figure 7 The BlueScale version shown on the status bar. If the library is running BlueScale10.6.3 or earlier, select Maintenance > Package Update from the toolbar menu to view the current package version on the Package Update screen.
BlueScale version
Figure 8 The BlueScale version shown on the Package Update screen. 3. Proceed to Downloading the Currently Released BlueScale Firmware Version on page 432.
February 2011
429
Check Component Firmware Versions (Optional)

Note: This procedure is not necessary or helpful unless recommended by Spectra Logic Technical Support. 1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Tools. The Maintenance Tools screen displays.
Figure 9 The Maintenance Tools screen. 3. If you want to save the information about the firmware versions to a USB drive, connect a USB drive to LCMs USB port; otherwise, skip to the next step. Note: The option to save the information to USB is only displayed if you plug a USB drive in to the USB port on the LCM before you select Utilities (see Connecting a USB Drive to the LCM on page 117). 4. Select Utilities. The Utilities screen displays. 5. Select Display Firmware Versions. The Utilities screen refreshes to show a description of the Display Firmware Versions tool.
Figure 10 The Utilities screen.
February 2011
430
6. If you want to save the results from the utility, use the check boxes at the top of the screen to select the location; otherwise skip to Step 7.
Selecting this location... Mail results to Saves the report... As an attachment to an email sent to the specified mail recipient. Use the dropdown list to select the recipient for the report file. To send the email with the attached library configuration file to someone who is not already listed as a library user, you must first configure that person as an email recipient (see Configuring Mail Users on page 300). Note: Do not use the default autosupport@spectralogic.com email recipient unless Spectra Logic Technical Support specifically instructs you to do so. Spectra Logic does not save emailed results files unless they are specifically requested for troubleshooting. To the librarys compact flash card in the LCM. Note: Select this option only if specifically instructed to do so by Spectra Logic Technical Support. To a USB drive connected to the USB port on the LCM. Note: This option is only available if you inserted a USB drive in Step 3 on page 430.
7. Select Run Utility. The Utility Results screen displays, showing a list of the firmware levels for all installed components.
Figure 11 The Firmware Levels Utility Results screen. 8. If requested to do so, send this information to Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5) for advanced troubleshooting.
February 2011
431
Downloading the Currently Released BlueScale Firmware Version

Use the following steps to determine whether a more current version of the BlueScale firmware version is available on the Technical Support portal and, if the version on the portal is more current that what the library is running, download it. 1. Log into your account on the Technical Support portal at http://support.spectralogic.com. Note: See Accessing the Technical Support Portal on page 421 if you have not previously created an account on the Technical Support portal. 2. Select the Firmware & Drivers icon. 3. Select the Product Firmware tab. 4. Locate your library in the Product column. The currently released firmware version is listed in the Current Firmware column.
3 1
Figure 12 Locate the currently released firmware version for your library. 5. Compare the BlueScale firmware version your library is using (see Check the Library Firmware Version on page 429) with the most currently released version available on the Technical Support portal.
February 2011
432
6. If a more current version of the BlueScale firmware is available, use one of the following methods to download it.
If... The library has internet access and you plan to download and install the firmware directly from the Spectra Logic firmware download page, Then... The firmware is downloaded when you start the firmware update process. There is no need to download it beforehand. Proceed to Using the Standard Firmware Update Procedure on page 435. Note: Under most circumstances, downloading and installing the firmware directly from the Spectra Logic firmware download page is the preferred method for updating the library firmware. Configure each library with internet access so that it can download and install the firmware directly from the Spectra Logic firmware package server (see Configuring Network Settings on page 298). Use the following steps to download the updated firmware. 1. Log into your account on the Technical Support portal at http://support.spectralogic.com if you are not already logged in. 2. Select the Firmware & Drivers icon. 3. Select the Product Firmware tab (see Figure 12 on page 432). 4. Use the Serial Number pull down list to select the serial number of library for which you want to download firmware. The firmware for the library type associated with the serial number you entered is automatically selected. 5. Select Download Selected Package. The Firmware Package Download Agreement window displays. 6. Read the Firmware Package Download Agreement. 7. Check the Accept the Spectra Firmware Package Download Agreement field and select Submit. 8. When the File Download dialog box displays, select Save and then download the package to one of the following locations: The root directory of a USB drive. OR A previously configured package server (see Configuring a Firmware Package Server (Optional) on page 328). 9. When the download is complete, close the Download complete notification box. Note: All of the firmware packages you have downloaded are listed on the Firmware Download History tab of the Firmware and Drivers page of the Technical Support portal. 10.Proceed to Using the Standard Firmware Update Procedure on page 435.
The library cannot access an outside web site because of security or firewall requirements,
February 2011
433
Preparing for the Update

After downloading the library firmware, prepare the library for the update as described in the following sections.
Make Sure Your BlueScale Software Support Key Is Current

Updating the library firmware and BlueScale software requires a current service contract with Spectra Logic Technical Support. If your BlueScale Software Support key has expired, you will see the following screen when you attempt to update the library firmware.
Figure 13 The BlueScale Software Support Key Expired screen.
Important
If you see this screen, you must complete the following steps before you can update the BlueScale firmware. 1. Renew your service contract (see Service Contract Extension on page 496). 2. Generate the new BlueScale Software Support key and enter it on the System Settings screen (see Enabling BlueScale Software Support, Options, and Upgrades on page 283).
Prepare the Library

Back up your MLM database (see Backing Up the MLM and DLM Databases on page 201). Note: Backing up the MLM database also backs up the DLM database. Back up the library configuration (see Backing Up the Library Configuration Manually on page 308).
February 2011
434
Back up all of your encryption keys (see Exporting and Protecting Keys on page 351). Download and read the Spectra T950 Library Release Notes and Documentation Updates for the most current information about updated firmware packages.
Important
Confirm that all of the following conditions are met before beginning the firmware upgrade process: All backup processes have completed All backup software daemons are stopped All drives are empty If the release notes provide special requirements or procedures for updating the firmware, make sure that you follow them.
Important
Using the Standard Firmware Update Procedure

The standard firmware update procedure is the preferred method for performing all library firmware updates. If you have any questions or concerns about upgrading, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
Update the Firmware Important Important

If you receive an error message stating that your disk is too full when the library attempts to unzip a firmware package, see Managing Firmware Packages on page 442 for information about deleting old firmware packages. Certain firmware package upgrades may cause the Power Control Module (PCM) to fail with a timeout. If you encounter this problem, first disable power monitoring (see Enabling and Disabling Performance Metrics on page 297) and retry the upgrade. If the upgrade still fails with a timeout, complete the upgrade and then reset the LCM (see Resetting the LCM or RCM on page 371).
Use the following steps to update the library firmware. 1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. If you downloaded the firmware update to a USB drive, plug the USB drive into the LCMs USB port before continuing (see Connecting a USB Drive to the LCM on page 117).
February 2011
435
3. Select Maintenance > Package Update. The Package Update screen displays. Note: If the library notifies you that your BlueScale Software Support key has expired, see Make Sure Your BlueScale Software Support Key Is Current on page 434.
Figure 14 The Package Update screen. 4. Select Begin Package Update. 5. Read the license agreement, then select Accept or Decline. When you select Accept, the Select Package Source screen displays. Note: The USB Key option is only available if you previously connected a USB drive containing the firmware update file to the USB port on the LCM in Step 2 on page 435.
Figure 15 The Select Package Source screen.
February 2011
436
6. Select the source for the firmware update package you want to use:
Source Local USB Key Description Select the desired firmware package from packages already stored on the librarys LCM compact flash card. Select the desired firmware package from packages stored on a USB drive. There is a brief delay while the library detects the USB device when you select this option. Notes: The USB Key option is only available if you previously connected a USB drive containing the firmware update file to the USB port on the LCM in Step 2 on page 435. The firmware file must be stored in the root directory of the USB drive. Select and download the desired firmware package from Spectra Logics server to the LCM compact flash card and then install it. Note: The library must have a connection to the internet before you can use this option (see Configuring Network Settings on page 298). Select the desired firmware package stored on previously configured firmware package server, if you have one available. Note: The firmware package server is only available if you previously configure one. See Configuring a Firmware Package Server (Optional) on page 328 for information about configuring a firmware package server.
Spectra Logic
Firmware Package Server
7. Select Next. The Select Package Type screen displays.
Figure 16 The Select Package Type screen. 8. Select Library to update the library firmware. Note: The DCM firmware is a component of the BlueScale firmware. It is separate from the firmware used in the drive itself.
February 2011
437
9. Select Next. The Save Library Configuration screen displays.
Figure 17 The Save Library Configuration screen. 10. Choose whether and where you want to save the library configuration before performing the update. Dont Save Library Configuration (not recommended)A backup of the changed library configuration will not be saved. Save Library Configuration To (highly recommended)Saves a backup of the changed library configuration to the selected destination. Using this option is highly recommended to ensure that you can easily restore the library. Choose whether to save the configuration file to USB or to email it to an already-configured mail recipient (see Configuring Mail Users on page 300). Notes: Saving the library configuration ensures that you can easily restore the library if necessary. Do not use the default autosupport@spectralogic.com email recipient. Spectra Logic does not save emailed configuration files unless they are specifically requested for troubleshooting. Send Email Notification (recommended)Sends an email to Spectra Logic to update the librarys support records.
February 2011
438
11. Select Next. The Select Package screen displays. The Select Package screen lists the file names of the firmware package available on the selected source. The file names begin with the firmware version, followed with the date of release in YYYYMMDD format and either an F for Full Release or an I for Incremental Release.
Figure 18 The Select Package screen. Note: The firmware packages listed on the Select Package screen change depending on the packages currently available at the source you selected in Step 6 on page 437. 12. Select the firmware package you want to use for the update. You can only select one firmware package at a time. If you want to view information about the various firmware components affected by a specific firmware update, select Details to display a Package Details screen similar to the one shown in Figure 19. If you do not want to view this information, skip to Step 13.
Figure 19 The Package Details screen.
February 2011
439
13. Select Update. A progress screen appears for the duration of the update, which may take several minutes. When completed, the Package Results screen displays, showing that the update completed successfully. Notes: Once the firmware update process starts, it cannot be canceled. Do not turn off power to the library or power-down any component being updated during the firmware update process. 14. Select Finish to complete the firmware update and reboot the LCM. Firmware updates do not take effect until the library completes the update process and automatically reboots the LCM and any other components that were updated.
Caution
Always select Finish to complete the firmware update process and reboot the LCM. Do not manually reboot the LCM, power-cycle the library, or perform any other operations on the library when you see the Package Results screen. Doing so will cause the update process to fail.
Note: If you are using the BlueScale web interface to update firmware, the connection to the library is lost when the LCM reboots. Allow sufficient time for the LCM to complete its initialization, then enter the librarys IP address in your web browser to reconnect. 15. When the firmware update is completed, the library automatically sends an email to Spectra Logic Technical Support if it is configured as a mail recipient (see Configuring Mail Users on page 300).
Using the Advanced Firmware Update Procedure

Important
Use the advanced firmware update procedure only when directed to do so by Spectra Logic Technical Support. If a BlueScale firmware update requires using the advanced firmware update procedure, the current version of the Spectra T950 Library Release Notes and Documentation Updates will specifically instruct you to do so.
Use the following steps to update a selected component (for example, the LC server component) of the library firmware. 1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. Follow the Using the Standard Firmware Update Procedure, beginning on page 435, until you reach the Select Package screen (Step 11 on page 439).
February 2011
440
3. Select Advanced. The Advanced Package Update screen displays. Any items that need to be upgraded or downgraded to match the firmware package you chose are automatically selected.
Figure 20 The Advanced Package Update screen. 4. Clear the checkbox next to any firmware component you do not want to update. For example, clear every thing except LC Server to update just the LC Server component. Note: Occasionally, Spectra Logic Technical Support may instruct you to update a firmware component even if it is already at the same level as the component in the selected firmware package. 5. Select Update. A progress screen displays for the duration of the update process, which may take several minutes. Notes: Once the firmware update process starts, it cannot be canceled. Do not cut power to the library or any component being updated during the firmware update process. When completed, the Package Results screen displays, showing that the update completed successfully.
February 2011
441
6. Select Finish to complete the update process and reboot the LCM. The firmware updates do not take effect until the library completes the update process and automatically reboots the LCM and any other components that were updated.
Caution
Always select Finish to complete the firmware update process. Do not manually reboot the LCM, power-cycle the library, or perform any other operations on the library when you see the Package Results screen. Doing so will cause the update process to fail.
Note: If you are accessing the library through the BlueScale web interface, the connection to the library is lost when the library reboots. Allow sufficient time for the library to complete its initialization, then enter the librarys IP address in your web browser to reconnect. 7. When the firmware update is completed, the library automatically sends an email to Spectra Logic Technical Support if it is configured as a mail recipient (see Configuring Mail Users on page 300).
Managing Firmware Packages

The firmware packages downloaded to the library reside on the LCM memory card. Over time, firmware packages (one per update) accumulate on the card. Under certain rare circumstances, the library may post an error message and prompt you to delete packages, or you may choose to delete downlevel packages at some point. You can delete downlevel firmware packages using either the front panel or over a remote connection to the LCM through the BlueScale web interface. Deleting a firmware package files does not delete firmware already applied to library components; it simply removes the firmware package files from local storage on the LCM.
Caution
There is no confirmation before the selected firmware package is deleted. Make sure that you no longer need access to a firmware package file before you delete it.
Use the following steps to delete firmware package files from the LCMs compact flash card. 1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Package Update. The Package Update screen displays (see Figure 14 on page 436).
February 2011
442
3. Select Manage Packages. The Package Files screen displays with a list of all the package files currently stored on the LCM memory card.
Figure 21 The Package Files screen. 4. Select the file(s) that you want to delete, then select Delete Selected. The file delete process begins.
Caution
Make sure that only the packages you want to delete are selected. There is no confirmation before the selected packages are deleted.
Installing Cord Locks

Install the cord locks included with each frame to prevent the power cords from being inadvertently disconnected from the dual AC input connectors. Use the following steps to install the cord locks. 1. Use your backup software to move any cartridges that are currently in tape drives back their storage location. If you cannot use your backup software, then attempt to move the cartridges as described in Moving Media Within a Partition on page 154. 2. Pause PostScan if it is running (see Pausing the PostScan Process on page 191). Any tapes currently being scanned are returned to their storage locations. 3. Discontinue all I/O to the library. 4. Power off the library (see Powering Off the Library on page 93). 5. Disconnect the power cords from the dual AC module where you plan to install the cord locks.
February 2011
443
6. Remove the two screws securing each of the two input plugs to the dual AC assembly (circled in Figure 22).
Figure 22 The screws on the dual AC module. 7. Place a cord lock over the connector on the end of the power cord that connects to the library. Orient the cord lock as shown in Figure 23.
Cord lock clamp screw
Figure 23 Install the cord lock. 8. Push the power cord into the input plug and reinstall the screws that secure the input plug to the dual AC assembly. Make sure that the cord connector is fully seated in the input plug. 9. Tighten the cord lock clamp screws (shown in Figure 23). 10. Repeat Step 7 through Step 9 for the other power cord. 11. Plug the free end of each power cord into an appropriate 200240 VAC, 50/60 Hz power source protected by a 15 amp circuit breaker. 12. Repeat the entire process for the power cords attached to dual AC assembly in each drive expansion frame and the expansion power module in each service bay.
February 2011
444
Calibrating the Touch Screen

If the touch points on the librarys touch screen do not properly align with the user interface graphics, perform the following procedure to recalibrate the position of the touch points. Notes: This procedure is not necessary or helpful unless recommended by Spectra Logic Technical Support. You must perform this procedure while standing in front of the touch screen. The utility is not available when accessing the library through the BlueScale web interface (RLC). 1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. From the toolbar menu, select Maintenance > Tools to display the Maintenance Tools screen (Figure 9 on page 430). 3. Select Utilities. The Utilities screen displays. 4. Select Calibrate Touch Screen. 5. Select Run Utility. The touch screen displays a series of calibration target points. 6. Touch each point as it displays with either your finger or a stylus to recalibrate the touch points on the screen. Note: Touch each point at a straight-on angle as close to the center of the target as possible. 7. When the calibration routine is complete, the Utilities screen redisplays.
February 2011
445
Maintaining Drives
MAINTAINING DRIVES
This section provides instructions for routine drive maintenance procedures.
Topic Cleaning a Tape Drive Updating Drive Firmware Adding or Replacing a Drive Described beginning on... this page page 453 page 463
Cleaning a Tape Drive

Under normal operating conditions, the tape drives in the library do not require regular cleaning. The tape drives contain an automatic cleaning mechanism that allows them to clean themselves as necessary. However, a tape drive may occasionally require additional cleaning with a cleaning cartridge. If you have Auto Drive Clean enabled and the tape drive is in a partition with an associated cleaning partition, these cleanings are performed automatically. See Configuring a Cleaning Partition on page 253 for information about configuring a cleaning partition. If you are experiencing read/write errors with one of the tape drives in the library and you suspect that it may require cleaning, check the Cleaning Status on the Drive Details screen (see Figure 25 on page 447). Your backup software may also notify you that cleaning is required. Note: The DLM drive health icon for a drive changes to yellow when it requires cleaning (see Using the Drive Health Icons on page 212 for additional information).
Determine Whether Cleaning is Required

Clean the librarys tape drives when any of the following occurs: The drive indicates that it needs cleaning (see Chapter 14 Drive Troubleshooting) by sending a message to the backup software. The SCD information on the Drive Details screen for an LTO drive displays a C. The Cleaning Status on the Drive Details screen indicates that the drive requires cleaning (see Figure 25 on page 447). Note: In order for the library to monitor drive status, the drive must be configured in a partition.
February 2011
446
Maintaining Drives
Use the following steps to use the Drives screen to determine whether a drive requires cleaning. 1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. Select Configuration > Drives. The Drives screen displays.
Figure 24 The Drives screen. 3. Select Detail next to the drive you want to check. The Drive Details screen displays. If the Cleaning Status displays Drive Cleaning Required, clean the tape drive as described in the following sections.
Figure 25 The Drive Details screen, cleaning required.
February 2011
447
Maintaining Drives
Prepare the Library for Tape Drive Cleaning

Before you can clean the tape drive, you must address the following requirements: Required Tools and Materials You must have a certified cleaning cartridge for the type of drive(s) to be cleaned. Cleaning cartridges can be purchased from Spectra Logic. If the cartridge has a bar-code label, be sure to note the bar code, including any leading zeros. This information will help you locate the cleaning cartridge after it is loaded into the library.
Caution
Using only Spectra Certified cleaning cartridges to clean your tape drives is highly recommended. For information on ordering these cartridges, see Media and Accessories on page 495. Carefully follow all instructions and recommendations provided with the cleaning cartridge. Do not rewind and reuse the material in a cleaning cartridge. Reusing the material may redistribute contaminants previously removed from the tape path. If all of the cleaning material has been used, discard the cartridge and use a new cleaning cartridge.
Continuing Backups A drive is unavailable for backups while it is being cleaned. It is safe to continue backups on the librarys other drives while cleaning a drive. However, if you are running many backups with frequent loads and unloads, Spectra Logic recommends waiting until backups are completed before cleaning a drive to avoid delays in move requests coming from software.
February 2011
448
Maintaining Drives
How to Proceed
The method you use to clean the drive depends on the following factors:
If... Auto Drive Clean is enabled and a cleaning partition is associated with the data partition, Then... The library automatically cleans the drives, including any Global Spares, as needed. See Chapter 9 Using Partitions for information about configuring a cleaning partition and associating it with one or more data partitions. You can also clean the drive manually using a cleaning cartridge in the cleaning partition (see Cleaning Partition Present on page 450). Use your backup software to perform regularly scheduled drive cleanings. Refer to your backup software user manual or vendor for instructions on how to set up scheduled automatic cleanings. You may choose to leave a cleaning cartridge in each data partition, particularly if you can configure your backup software to perform regular automated cleanings. CAUTION! Make sure that the cleaning cartridge has a bar-code label. Your software must be able to identify the cleaning cartridge and use it only for cleaning tape drives. Any attempts to use a cleaning cartridge for data storage will cause software failures. Import a cleaning cartridge into the partition and clean the drive manually as described in No Cleaning Partition Present on page 451. You may choose to leave a cleaning cartridge in each data partition so that it is available whenever you need it. CAUTION! Make sure that the cleaning cartridge has a bar-code label. Your software must be able to identify the cleaning cartridge and use it only for cleaning tape drives. Any attempts to use a cleaning cartridge for data storage will cause software failures.
A cleaning partition is not associated with the data partition; your software package includes features that allow for scheduled drive cleanings,
A cleaning partition is not associated with the data partition and your software package does not have features that allow for scheduled drive cleanings,
February 2011
449
Maintaining Drives
Manually Cleaning a Tape Drive

The process for loading a cleaning cartridge into the tape drive depends on whether or not a cleaning partition is associated with the data partition containing the drive you need to clean.
Cleaning Partition Present

If a cleaning partition is present and contains a cleaning cartridge, you can use the Auto Drive Clean feature to manually clean a drive. See Configuring a Cleaning Partition on page 253 for information about configuring a cleaning partition. 1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. If necessary, import a magazine containing one or more cleaning cartridges into the cleaning partition (see Importing Media into the Entry/Exit Pool or a Cleaning Partition on page 133). 3. Select Configuration > Drives. The Drives screen displays.
Figure 26 The Drives screen. 4. Select Clean next to the drive that needs cleaning. The library retrieves a cleaning cartridge from the cleaning partition and inserts it into the drive. The Drive Cleaning Progress screen displays while the cleaning is in progress. 5. When the cleaning is complete, the library returns the cleaning cartridge to the cleaning partition and displays a status message. 6. If the cleaning cartridge is MLM-enabled, the cartridge health and Cleans Remaining are updated in the MLM database.
February 2011
450
Maintaining Drives
No Cleaning Partition Present

If a cleaning partition is not associated with the data partition containing the drive you need to clean, a cleaning cartridge must be present in the data partition. If you do not permanently store a cleaning cartridge in the storage pool for each partition, you must import one when drive cleaning is required. You need a TeraPack magazine containing a cleaning cartridge and either of the following: A TeraPack magazine with one or more empty slots in the storage pool of the partition with the drive that needs cleaning. An empty chamber in either the entry/exit pool or the storage pool of the partition with the drive that needs cleaning. Note: If you did not configure an entry/exit pool for the partition, you must import the magazine into the storage pool. Use the following steps to clean the tape drive. 1. Log into the library. Note: You must be logged in as a superuser in order to import a magazine into the storage pool. 2. If you keep a cleaning cartridge stored in the storage pool for the partition, use its bar-code label information to determine its location, as described in Locating the Desired Media on page 154. 3. If necessary, import the TeraPack magazine with the cleaning cartridge into either the entry/exit pool or the storage pool for the partition containing the drive that needs cleaning, as described in Importing Media into the Entry/Exit Pool or a Cleaning Partition on page 133. When the TAP door opens, insert the magazine containing the cleaning cartridge, making sure that it is correctly oriented (see Figure 76 on page 136). Note: If an empty chamber is not available in either the entry/exit pool or the storage pool, exchange the magazine containing the cleaning cartridge for a magazine in one of those pools (see Exchange Media in the Entry/Exit or Storage Pool on page 148). When the cleaning is complete, you can exchange the magazines again. 4. Move the cleaning cartridge from the magazine to the drive needing cleaning, as described in Move the Media on page 156. The tape drive automatically performs the cleaning, which takes approximately one minute, and ejects the cartridge when finished. 5. Move the cleaning cartridge from the tape drive back to the magazine from which it came.
February 2011
451
Maintaining Drives
6. Check the Drive Information screen to confirm that the cleaning was successful. If the cleaning cartridge was expended before the cleaning started, the tape drive automatically ejects the cartridge and does not perform the cleaning. The Drive Details screen will still indicate that the drive needs cleaning. If a drive still needs cleaning, perform the following steps: a. Export the expended cleaning cartridge. b. Import a new cleaning cartridge. c. Repeat Step 3 through Step 6 to clean the tape drive. 7. If you have additional drives to clean, repeat Step 3 through Step 6 for each drive. 8. If you do not store the cleaning cartridge in the library, export the magazine containing it, as described in Exporting or Exchanging Media on page 145. 9. Make sure you track the number of times the cleaning cartridge has been used (see Tracking Cleaning Cartridge Use on page 452. Note: If you used an MLM-enabled LTO cleaning cartridge, the cartridge usage is tracked in the MLM database.
Tracking Cleaning Cartridge Use

Cleaning cartridges have a limited number of uses. Spectra Logic recommends marking the cleaning cartridge label after each use so that you know when it has reached the end of its life cycle. If you enabled Media Lifecycle Management (MLM) and use MLM-enabled cleaning cartridges, the library tracks the number of cleaning remaining on the cartridge and notifies you when a cleaning cartridge is nearing the end of its useful life. See Chapter 7 Media Lifecycle Management for detailed information about using MLM-enabled cleaning cartridges. To purchase MLM-enabled Spectra Certified cleaning cartridges, contact your sales representative or visit the Spectra Logic web site at www.spectralogic.com/shop.
February 2011
452
Maintaining Drives
Updating Drive Firmware

Whenever you update your library firmware, confirm that your drives are using the correct firmware version. Firmware updates are also occasionally required to resolve tape drive issues. When updated firmware is available, schedule a drive firmware upgrade at your earliest convenience.
Topic Before You Begin Download and Install ITDT Determine the Drive Generation and Firmware Version Download the Currently Recommended Drive Firmware Version Update the Drive Firmware Described beginning on... page 454 page 454 page 455 page 456 page 458
Important
Always make sure that you have the most current firmware for your tape drives. Check the Drive Firmware tab on the Firmware and Drivers page of the Technical Support portal for the latest supported firmware, as well as important notifications. The latest firmware for LTO-4 and LTO-5 drives is required for the BlueScale MLM, DLM, and encryption capabilities to work in the library. Always download updated tape drive firmware from the Spectra Logic web site to ensure that the latest firmware posted by drive manufacturer has been qualified by Spectra Logic. After the drive firmware update is complete, you may need to reset the servers accessing the drives. Some operating environments require you to install device drivers before the application software can correctly communicate with the drives. When you update the drive firmware, you may also need to update the device driver for the drive (see Updating Drive Device Drivers).
Important Important Important
February 2011
453
Maintaining Drives
Before You Begin

Before you begin the update procedure, make sure you fulfill the prerequisites described in this section. Check the Drive Firmware tab on the Firmware and Drivers page on the Technical Support portal for the currently recommended firmware version for each tape drive type and generation. See Accessing the Technical Support Portal on page 421 for information about creating an account and using the Technical Support portal. Check the Service Tools page on the Technical Support portal for a link to the drive tools for your tape drive technology. If tools are available, download and install them. Note: Use ITDT as described in the following sections if you have IBM LTO tape drives. Updating drive firmware requires either superuser or administrator privileges. If you cannot use either of the methods described in the following sections, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support for assistance (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
Download and Install ITDT

If you plan to use the IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) to update LTO tape drive firmware, download and install ITDT on a computer that has network access to the tape drives you need to update. Notes: If for some reason you cannot use ITDT in your environment, you must request a firmware tape from Spectra Logic. See Use a Firmware Tape on page 459 for update instructions. See Knowledge Base article #478 Using command-line ITDT to test LTO drives on the Technical Support portal for detailed information about using ITDT. 1. Go to IBMs Fix Central web site at http://www.ibm.com/support/ fixcentral and select the following options: Product Group = Storage Systems Product Family = Tape Systems Product Type = Tape device drivers and software Product = Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) 2. Choose your operating system from Platform drop-down list and click Continue. 3. On the next page, select the version of ITDT that you want to download. If desired, you can select multiple versions. Note: If you are unsure of which version to select, click Show Fix Details to see additional information.
February 2011
454
Maintaining Drives
4. Click Continue and complete the remaining steps to download the selected ITDT installation files. If you are only downloading one version, choose Download using your browser (HTTP). If you are downloading multiple versions, choose Download using Download Director. 5. Download and read the ITDT documentation for assistance in using and setting up the program. 6. After ITDT is installed, launch the program so that it creates the Input and Output folder it uses during the firmware update process.
Determine the Drive Generation and Firmware Version

Use the following steps to determine the generation and current firmware version for each drive you plan to update. 1. Log into the library as either a superuser or administrator. 2. Select Configuration > Drives or Configuration > DLM to view a list of all the drives currently installed in the library.
The drive identifier
The drive type, generation and interface
Figure 27 The Drive Details screen. 3. For each drive, make a note of the following information: Drive generationLTO-5, LTO-4, LTO-3, or LTO-2 (listed as IBM Ultrium-TDn, where n is the generation) Interfaceidentified in both the Drive Type field and in the Drive Identifier field SCSI (labeled LTO in the drive identifier) Fibre Channel (labeled fLTO in the drive identifier
February 2011
455
Maintaining Drives
4. For each drive, select Details to view information about the current status of the selected drive, including its firmware version.
The drive firmware version
Figure 28 The Drive Details screen. 5. Make a note of the firmware version the drive is currently using.
Download the Currently Recommended Drive Firmware Version

Use the Spectra Logic Technical Support portal to check the currently recommended firmware version for the drives in your library and download updated firmware if it is available.
Important
Always download tape drive firmware from the Spectra Logic Technical Support portal to ensure that the latest firmware posted by the drive manufacturer has been qualified by Spectra Logic.
1. Log into your account on the Technical Support portal at http://support.spectralogic.com Note: See Accessing the Technical Support Portal on page 421 for information about accessing the Technical Support portal. 2. Select the Firmware & Drivers icon. 3. Select the Drive Firmware tab. 4. Locate your library in the Product Type list and click the + icon next to it to expand the list of current drive firmware versions. Note: Each type of drive requires its own firmware, which is specific to the drive type (SCSI or Fibre), generation (for example, LTO-3, LTO-4, or LTO-5) and form factor (full-height or half-height).
February 2011
456
Maintaining Drives
5. Compare the recommended drive firmware version for each of the drives in your library with the version currently in use (see Determine the Drive Generation and Firmware Version on page 455). 6. If a more current version of the drive firmware is available, use the following steps to download it. a. In the Drive Type column, locate the drive for which you want to download firmware and click the Select radio button next to that drive. b. select Download Selected Firmware. c. Read the Firmware Package Download Agreement. d. Select the Accept the Spectra Firmware Package Download Agreement button. e. Select Submit. f. When the File Download dialog box appears, select Save, and then select the location for the downloaded file. If you will be using ITDT to update LTO drives, save the firmware file to the ITDT Input folder on the computer where ITDT is installed (see Download and Install ITDT on page 454). For other drive types, save the firmware file to a computer that has network access to the drives you need to update or to a USB drive. 7. When the download is complete, the log on the Firmware Download History tab on the Firmware & Drivers page is updated to show that the file was downloaded. This page maintains a log of the drive (and library) firmware that has been downloaded through the Technical Support portal.
February 2011
457
Maintaining Drives
Update the Drive Firmware

Caution
Attempting to update the firmware while the library is busy or when the tape drives contain tapes may result in permanent damage to the drive. If you have not already done so, stop all backup operations, remove all tapes from the drives you are upgrading, and stop the backup application (see Discontinue Backups and Empty the Tape Drives). DO NOT use the BlueScale Upgrade Drive Firmware advanced utility to update LTO drives. Using this method to perform the update requires at least an hour per drive.
Important
Discontinue Backups and Empty the Tape Drives

You must discontinue all backup operations to the tape drives and remove any cartridges for the drives before beginning the firmware update.
Caution
Make sure that all backup operations are discontinued during the firmware update procedure! Make sure that all tape drives are empty! Failure to do either can permanently damage your tape drives. Confirm that all of the following conditions are met before beginning the firmware upgrade process: All backup processes have completed All backup software daemons are stopped All drives are empty Attempting to update the firmware while the library is busy or with tapes in the tape drives may result in the upgrade failing and/or in failed backup jobs. If you previously attempted to upgrade drives firmware with media loaded, unload the tapes, and retry the operation.
Important
Important
Use the following steps to discontinue all backup operations to the tape drives and remove any cartridges for the drives. 1. Use your backup software to stop all backup operations to the tape drives you plan to update. Refer to the software documentation for instructions. 2. Pause PostScan if it is running (see Pausing the PostScan Process on page 191 for instructions). Any tapes currently being scanned are returned to their storage locations. 3. If possible, use your backup software to move any cartridges that are currently in tape drives back their storage locations. If you cannot use your backup software, then move the cartridges as described in Moving Media Within a Partition on page 154.
February 2011
458
Maintaining Drives
Update the Drive Firmware

Use one of the following methods to update the drive firmware.
Use this method... If... Your library contains LTO drive. For LTO drives, using ITDT is the preferred method for updating drive firmware. If you do not have LTO drives or if for some other reason you cannot use ITDT in your environment, you must request a firmware tape from Spectra Logic. Skip to Use a Firmware Tape on page 459. 1. Follow the instructions in the ITDT documentation to update the drive firmware. For additional information, Spectra Logic specific information, refer to Knowledge Base Article #653 Using IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) to upgrade LTO drive firmware at www.spectralogic.com/knowledgebase. 2. Reset the updated drives as described in Resetting a Drive on page 388 to restore their configuration settings. For some reason you cannot use ITDT in your environment. You must request a drive firmware tape (also known as a code load tape) from Spectra Logic and use it to perform the update. Important: If you did not configure an entry/exit pool for the partition containing the drive you want to update, you will not be able to use a firmware tape. The firmware tape must be imported into the entry/exit pool. Refer to Configuring Chambers and Drives on page 230 for information about configuring and using the entry/exit pool. Important: If you have a tape drive with a more current firmware version than what is on the firmware tape DO NOT use the tape to down-level the firmware on the tape drive unless specifically instructed to do so by Spectra Logic Technical Support.
Use ITDT
Use a Firmware Tape
Import the Firmware Tape

1. Log into the library with superuser or administrator privileges. 2. Insert the firmware update tape into a magazine. Pay attention to which slot you use (as viewed from the TAP, slot 1 is at the back of the magazine; slot 10 is at the front). Note: If the Entry/Exit pool contains a magazine with an empty slot, you can use Export/Exchange on the Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen to remove the magazine from library and then reimport it after you insert the firmware update tape. 3. Import a magazine into the librarys Entry/Exit pool as described in Importing Media into the Entry/Exit Pool or a Cleaning Partition on page 133.
February 2011
459
Chapter 15 Maintaining the Library & Drives Use this method... If...
Maintaining Drives
Use a Firmware Tape to Update the Drive Firmware (continued)
Update the Firmware

1. Select Maintenance > Tools > Utilities > Show Advanced. The Advanced Utilities Confirmation screen displays. 2. Select Next. The Utilities screen refreshes to show a list of the advanced utilities. 3. Scroll through the list of advanced utilities and select Update Drive Firmware. The screen refreshes to show the details for the utility.
4. Use the Select drive or partition to upgrade drop-down list to select the drive(s) that you want to upgrade. You can choose to: Upgrade all of the drives in a partition. OR Upgrade a single drive based on its BlueScale identifier. Note: Drives are identified according to their physical location in the library. For example: FR1/DBA2/DRV4 refers to the upper right drive in DBA2 of frame 1. See Drive Identifiers on page 58 for additional information about identifiers. 5. Use the Select EE slot of the firmware tape drop-down list to select the slot in the magazine where the firmware update tape is located. 6. Select Run Utility to start the update process. Important: Once the firmware update process starts, it cannot be canceled. Do not cut power to the library or any component being updated during the firmware update process. The library retrieves the firmware tape and inserts it in the tape drive. When the drive completes the update, it ejects the tape. The library then either returns the tape to the Entry/Exit pool or inserts it in the next drive to be updated. A progress screen appears for the duration of the update, which may take several minutes. When completed, a Utility Results screen displays, showing that the update completed successfully. 7. Repeat the steps for all tape drives in all partitions, as needed. 8. Export the firmware update tape from the library (see Exporting or Exchanging Media on page 145) and store it for future use. You can use the tape to update the firmware in a replacement drive, if it is at a lower firmware level. February 2011 User GuideSpectra T950 Library
460
Maintaining Drives
Updating Drive Device Drivers

Some operating environments require you to install device drivers before the application software can correctly communicate with the drives. When you update the drive firmware, you may also need to update the device driver for the drive.
IBM LTO Drives

For IBM LTO drives, use the following instructions to locate and download the tape drive device driver after you reach the IBM Support Fix Central web site. Note: You can connect to the Fix Central web site either from the Spectra Logic Technical Support portal or directly at http://www.ibm.com/support/fixcentral. If you connect directly, skip to Step 5 in the following instructions. 1. Log into your account on the Technical Support portal at http://support.spectralogic.com Note: See Accessing the Technical Support Portal on page 421 for information about accessing the Technical Support portal. 2. Select the Firmware & Drivers icon. 3. Select the Device Drivers tab. 4. Select IBM LTO-2, LTO-3, and LTO-4, and LTO-5 (IBM TotalStorage 3580 Ultrium 2, 3, 4, and 5) to open IBM Fix Central in a new web page. 5. On the IBM Fix Central web page, select the following options: Product Group = Storage Systems Product Family = Tape Systems Product Type = Tape device drivers and software Product = Tape device drivers Platform = The operating system used by your host. 6. Click Continue. 7. On the Identify Fixes page, confirm that only the Browse for fixes option is selected. 8. Click Continue to display a list of the available drivers. 9. Click Show Fix Details to view information about each driver.
February 2011
461
Maintaining Drives
10. Select the driver you want to download and click Continue.
If your organization... Has a policy against using non-WHQL certified drivers. Does not have a policy against using non-WHQL certified drivers. Choose... The WHQL (Windows Hardware Quality Labs) certified driver, if available. Any appropriate driver.
11. Complete the remaining screens to begin the download process. 12. Save the file containing the driver to a known location on the server that will be using the tape drive. 13. Install the device driver following the instructions in the documentation for your operating environment.
For All Other Tape Drive Types

1. Log into your user account on the Technical Support portal (see Accessing the Technical Support Portal on page 421). 2. Select the Firmware & Drivers icon. 3. Select the Device Drivers tab. 4. Select on the link for the desired tape drive type to go to the manufactures web site. 5. Follow the instructions on the manufacturers web site to download the appropriate device driver.
If your organization... Has a policy against using non-WHQL certified drivers. Does not have a policy against using non-WHQL certified drivers. Choose... The WHQL (Windows Hardware Quality Labs) certified driver, if available. Any appropriate driver.
6. Save the file containing the driver to a known location on the server that will be using the tape drive. 7. Install the device driver following the instructions in the documentation for your operating environment.
February 2011
462
Maintaining Drives
Adding or Replacing a Drive

Important
Only use drives obtained from Spectra Logic in the library. When replacing a drive, the new drive must be the same technology and generation as the one you replace.
Adding Drives to the Library

If your library has unused drive bays, you can purchase additional drives and add them to the library.
Figure 29 The Drives screen (Add a drive). To add the new drive, follow the instructions that accompany the drive to install it in the library. If the drive has a Fibre Channel interface, connect it to arbitrated loop or fabric where the hosts reside. Note: The instructions for installing a drive are also available on the Spectra Logic web site at www.spectralogic.com/documents. After you add the drive to the library, you must create or modify a partition to assign it to the partition or configure it as a Global Spare drive before you can use it. See Chapter 9 Using Partitions for information about creating and modifying partitions.
February 2011
463
Maintaining Drives
Replacing a Drive
To replace a drive that has failed, follow the instructions that accompany the drive to install it in the library. If the drive has a Fibre Channel interface, connect it to arbitrated loop or fabric where the hosts reside.
Figure 30 The Drives screen (Replace a drive).
Important
Do not select Remove. This option permanently removes the drive from the partition. When the replacement drive is installed, it will not be assigned to the partition from which the malfunctioning drive was removed. If you select Remove and the selected drive is the only drive in the partition, the partition will be deleted.
After you replace the drive, do the following to resume operation: If you used the Global Spare option to temporarily replace the malfunctioning drive, you can now reclaim the Global Spare drive so that it is again available for use (see Reclaiming the Global Spare Tape Drive on page 122). The library automatically switches all incoming communications to the new drive. If you did not use the Global Spare option, use your backup software to restart any backup processes that had been running to the replaced drive. This restart ensures that the software recognizes the drive as working and available.
February 2011
464
APPENDIX A
Service and Support
Spectra Logic Technical Support provides a worldwide service and maintenance structure, refined over many years to provide timely, professional service.
Important
A valid BlueScale Software Support key is required in order to obtain technical support (see Service Contract Extension on page 496).
OPENING A SUPPORT TICKET

AutoSupport provides the easiest way to open a support ticket. See Chapter 10 AutoSupport beginning on page 264 for detailed information about configuring and using AutoSupport. You can also open a support ticket the Spectra Logic Technical Support portal, the telephone, or email. Gather the following information as you prepare to open the ticket. 1. Make notes about the problem, including what happened just before the problem occurred. 2. Gather the following information: Your Spectra Logic customer number Company name, contact name, phone number, and email address The library serial number (see Locating the Library Serial Number on page 284) Type of host system being used Type and version of operating system being used Type and version of backup software being used
465
Appendix A Service and Support
Returns
3. Submit a support ticket. To use the Spectra Logic Technical Support portal: a. Log into your account on the Technical Support portal at http://support.spectralogic.com. Note: See Accessing the Technical Support Portal on page 421if you have not previously created an account on the Technical Support portal. b. Select the Incidents & Service Agreement Management icon. c. Select the Open New Incident link to display the Open Incident page. d. Select the serial number of the library for which you want to submit the ticket and the complete the request form. Note: If you do not have AutoSupport enabled, you can upload any ASL logs generated by the library from the Open Incident page. To contact Spectra Logic Technical Support by telephone or email see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
RETURNS
Your Technical Support representative may ask you to return a problem component to Spectra Logic for analysis and servicing. After you complete a replacement procedure, return the defective part using ALL the packaging that the replacement part arrived in (including any anti-static bags or foam inserts).
Caution
Severe damage can occur if the component is not packaged correctly. You may be invoiced if it is damaged due to improper or insufficient packaging.
Use the return label and instructions that were included with the replacement part when preparing to ship the component you are returning. If you cannot locate these, contact Spectra Logic for another copy (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5). The return label and RMA printed on it are used to associate the returned component with your account. To avoid being invoiced for failure to return the component, do not ship the component back to Spectra Logic without the RMA return label.
February 2011
466
APPENDIX B
Best Practices
This chapter reviews best practices for operating the library and working with media.
Topic Backing Up the Spectra Library Metadata Working with Tape Media Working with RXT Media Operating in Gigabit Ethernet Environments Described on... this page page 471 page 479 page 485
BACKING UP THE SPECTRA LIBRARY METADATA

To ensure the availability of your library and encrypted data, protect library metadata by following the procedures described in this section. Library metadata includes library configuration data, the MLM and DLM databases, and all encryption-key related data. Note: The DLM database is included in any operations that backup or restore the MLM database. Having reliable backups of the library metadata is very important in the case of disaster recovery and other situations where you need to restore the library.
Caution
Losing metadata can have catastrophic effectsas can losing keys in any encryption key management system, especially when related to encrypted data. If you lose all copies of all metadata: Your encrypted data is lostyou will be unable to decrypt encrypted data without the encryption keys. You will need to completely reconfigure your library. You will lose stored data about your media that will be time-consuming to recover.
467
Backing Up the Spectra Library Metadata
Back Up the Library Metadata

Use the following methods to create backup copies of all your librarys metadata. The following table shows the file names and locations of the data saved during each type of backup operation.
This backup method... Auto Save Library Configuration Option Creates... A time-stamped zip file containing the library configuration, the MLM database, and the DLM database. The file is stored on the LCM memory card and can be sent as an email attachment to a previously configured mail recipient. The zip file is named <date-time>cfg.zip, where <date-time> is the time stamp for when the zip file was created. Note: The Auto Save Configuration feature does not automatically create a backup when you make other configuration changes to the library. See Enabling Email for the Automatic Configuration Save Feature on page 302 for information about configuring the Auto Save Configuration feature so that the library automatically sends an email with the current autosave configuration file to a pre-configured mail recipient once a week and whenever you create or modify a library partition. See Using the Auto Save Configuration Feature on page 308 for information about using this method to back up the library configuration and the MLM and DLM databases. A time-stamped file containing the current MLM and DLM databases.The file is saved to a USB drive or emailed to a previously configured mail recipient. The file is named cminfo_<date-time>.zdt or cminfo_<date-time>.dat, where <date-time> is the time stamp for when the backup file was created. The file has a .zdt extension if you zipped the file when you created it or a .dat extension if you did not choose to zip the file. If the backup file was saved to a USB drive, it is located in a folder called \SavedMLMDB. Backing Up the MLM and DLM Databases on page 201 provides instructions for using the utility. Important: To ensure that you always have a current backup of the MLM and DLM databases, back up them up regularly.
Save MLM Database

Advanced Utility
February 2011
468
Appendix B Best Practices This backup method... Partition Wizard and Save Library Configuration Utility
Creates... Multiple configuration files with the format cnnnnnn.cfg, where n is a number between 0 and 9. You can choose to save the library configuration data to a USB drive or email it to a previously configured mail recipient. If the backup files are saved to a USB drive, they are located in a folder called SavedConfigs\<date-time>, where <date-time> is the time stamp for when the backup was created. If the backup was sent as an email attachment, the files will be in a file named <date-time>cfg.zip, where <date-time> is the time stamp for when the zip file was created. Important: The backup file of the library configuration does not include the MLM and DLM databases. Partition WizardThe partition wizard prompts you to save the library configuration whenever you create or modify a partition. See Chapter 9 Using Partitions beginning on page 218 for detailed information about creating and modifying partitions. Save Library Configuration UtilityUse the Save Library Configuration utility to back up the updated library configuration whenever you make a configuration change to the library. This is especially important when you make configuration changes that do not result in an auto-save configuration file. See Backing Up the Library Configuration Manually on page 308 for instructions. A key file containing the exported encryption keys. The file is named name.bsk or name.bss, where name is the moniker you assigned to the key when you created it. You can choose to save the file exported keys to a USB drive or email it to a previously configured mail recipient. Use the BlueScale Export Key option to export encryption keys to a USB drive as soon as you create them. The exported keys are encrypted and password protected. See Exporting and Protecting Keys on page 351 for instructions CAUTION! As a matter of best practice, Spectra Logic recommends exporting encryption keys to a USB drive instead of using email. Although emailing encryption keys is supported by the library, doing so presents security issues, including the following: Copies of encryption keys may be left on the email servers used for sending and receiving email and are thus subject to compromise. The difficulty in verifying where all the copies of emailed encryption keys may be located can make security audits more challenging.
Export Key Option
February 2011
469
Verify and Protect the Metadata Backup

To ensure that your metadata is protected and available when you need it: 1. As soon as you create and export the backup files, check the exported data to make sure the correct files are present and accessible. Plug the USB drive into a computer or laptop. If you emailed the metadata (the data is sent as an attachment), save the data to a USB drive, and then check the data in the email attachment and the data on the USB drive. Examples The following figures show examples of the files you will see when you check your USB drive or the email attachment. Encryption key dataT950_SF2.bsk Note: The screen shown in Figure 1 also includes the SavedMLMDB and SavedConfigs folders.
Figure 1 Encryption key data file. Saved MLM and DLM database in the folder \SavedMLMDB. In this example the file has a .zdt extension. The file will have a .dat extension if you did not choose to zip the file when you created it.
Figure 2 Zipped MLM database file.
February 2011
470
Working with Tape Media
Saved configuration data with the CFG extension located in the \SavedConfigs\<date-time> folder, where <date-time> in this example is 2008-08-20 11_24_06.
Figure 3 Saved configuration data files. 2. Store at least one USB drive containing the backup files off-site. After you have several weeks of backups stored off-site, rotate back through them. 3. When you run-through disaster recovery exercises, restore the library using the backup files from both your USB drives and your saved email attachments. See Restoring the Library Configuration on page 378 for instructions.
WORKING WITH TAPE MEDIA

Note: Refer to MLM Best Practices on page 167 for additional guidance when using Spectra Certified Media with MLM support. The following sections describe best practices for using tape media and for managing your media inventory. All library user groups have privileges that allow them to use the librarys user interface to perform the media handling and management operations described in this chapter. Because handling media requires you to physically interact with the library, much of the information in this chapter is not applicable when you are accessing the library using a web browser.
Important
Do not attempt to install tape drives purchased from other vendors in the library. The tape drives used in the library are specifically configured for use in the library and should only be purchased from Spectra Logic.
February 2011
471
Use Only Spectra Certified Media

To ensure the best possible performance, use Spectra Certified Media. Check the Spectra Logic web site for the most up-to-date media availability. Do not use any media that has not been approved by Spectra Logic for use in the library.
Labeling Tape Media

If you are not using Spectra Certified media, be sure to label the media with the appropriate bar-code labels. Follow the guidelines in the following table. Note: Although the information in this table refers to LTO tape media similar guidelines apply to the other tape media types supported by the library.
Use this label... LTO-5 bar-code label LTO-4 bar-code label LTO-3 bar-code label LTO-2 bar-code label LTO Cleaning bar-code labela
a. This label must begin with CLN.
For this cartridge... LTO-5 (Ultrium 5) Data Cartridge LTO-4 (Ultrium 4) Data Cartridge LTO-3 (Ultrium 3) Data Cartridge LTO-2 (Ultrium 2) Data Cartridge LTO Cleaning Cartridge
Handling Tape Media

Note: Although the information in this section refers to LTO tape media, many of the guidelines are also applicable to the other tape media types supported by the library. Incorrect handling or an incorrect environment can damage the LTO tape cartridge or its magnetic tape. To avoid damage to your tape cartridges and to ensure the continued high reliability of your drive, use the following guidelines: Do not drop the cartridge. If the cartridge drops, slide the cartridge door back and ensure that the leader pin is properly seated in the pinretaining spring clips. Inspect the rear of the cartridge (the part that you load first into the tape load compartment) and ensure that there are no gaps in the seam of the cartridge case. Open only the cartridge door. Do not open any other part of the cartridge case. The upper and lower parts of the case are held together with screws; separating them destroys the usefulness of the cartridge.
February 2011
472
Do not handle tape that is outside the cartridge. Handling the tape can damage the tapes surface or edges, which may interfere with read or write reliability. Pulling on tape that is outside the cartridge can damage the tape and the brake mechanism in the cartridge. Before you use a cartridge, let it acclimate for at least 24 hours to the normal operating environment. Ensure that all surfaces of a cartridge are dry before inserting it into a magazine. Do not stack more than six cartridges. Do not expose the tape cartridge to moisture or direct sunlight. Do not degauss a tape cartridge that you intend to reuse. Degaussing makes the tape unusable. Do not expose recorded or blank tape cartridges to stray magnetic fields (such as terminals, motors, video equipment, X-ray equipment, or high-current cables or power supplies). Such exposure can cause the loss of recorded data or make the blank cartridge unusable. Maintain the environmental conditions specified in Tape Media Specifications on page 517.
Storing Tape Media

While in use, cartridges are stored in magazines inside the library. When the cartridges are outside the library, Spectra Logic recommends storing them in TeraPacks.
Figure 4 TeraPack with bar-code labeled cartridges and plastic dust cover. Storing and handling cartridges in TeraPacks helps to eliminate errors resulting from mishandling individual cartridges, which is the leading cause of cartridge damage. A clear plastic dust cover snaps onto the TeraPack to protect the cartridges.
February 2011
473
Whenever you remove cartridges from your library, be sure to store them properly to maximize archival life and ensure data integrity. Follow these guidelines for proper cartridge storage: Store cartridges in a suitable environment (see Tape Media Specifications on page 517). Keep the storage location as free of airborne particulates as possible. To eliminate obvious sources of particulates, do not permit anyone to smoke, eat, or drink near the storage area, and do not store cartridges near a copier or printer that may emit toner and paper dust. Store cartridges with the write-protect switch in the protected position.
Write-protect switch
Figure 5 LTO cartridge write-protect switch. Store cartridges as soon as possible after you remove them from the library. Immediate storage helps avoid many of the conditions that can damage tapes, such as temperature and humidity fluctuations, particulate contamination, and excessive handling. If you plan to ship a TeraPack magazine, make sure that you have a proper shipping container and that you use adequate packing material. The TeraPack carrying cases available from Spectra Logic are designed for safely transporting TeraPack magazines off site and are compatible with Iron Mountain.
February 2011
474
Using Tape Media in the Library

This section describes the best practices for using tape media in the library. Use only approved media in the library. See Media and Media Accessories on page 494 for more information about Spectra Certified Media. Make sure that the entry/exit pool contains one or more empty TeraPack magazines. This is particularly important when your backup software ejects tape cartridges from a partition. If the entry/exit pool does not have any empty slots available for the ejected media, then the backup software must wait until empty slots become available. The simplest way to avoid this delay is to import one or more empty TeraPack magazines after you export media from the library. Alternatively, always make sure that you import full TeraPack magazines into the library, then use your backup software to move (import) all of the new media into the storage pool for the partition. After all of the media is moved to the storage pool, you will end up with one or more empty magazines in the entry/exit pool. Make the entry/exit pool large enough to accommodate all media typically imported or exported during a single operation. For example, if you run a nightly backup that uses 48 tapes which are then exported each morning, create an entry/exit pool of 50 slots (five chambers). After your library has been in use for a period of time, and at least one set of media has completed a round trip (exported from the library, stored off site, then re-imported), the following rule of thumb applies: if you remove a TeraPack magazine from the entry/exit pool, replace it with either an empty magazine to accommodate future eject operations or a full magazine whose cartridges are then imported into the storage pool using your backup software. During an import or export operation, do not leave the library unattended for more than a few minutes. If you do, the import or export operation times out so that the library can continue automated backup tasks. To continue, restart the operation when you are ready. Enable Auto Drive Clean and configure a cleaning partition to clean drives whenever required to help ensure optimal performance. If you do not use the Auto Drive Clean feature, periodically check the Drives screen to determine whether the drives require cleaning (see Cleaning a Tape Drive on page 446). Confirm the quality of your media and verify data integrity by occasionally running restores on alternate drives. Confirm the quality of both media and drives by running periodic disaster recovery drills. These drills test the overall ability to recover all of your data using your backups.
475
Tape Media Rotation

During normal backup operations, tapes are rotated into and out of the library. This section provides a simple example of the librarys media life cycle functionality to manage tape rotation. Using the backup plan similar to the one described in the following example for a period of time establishes a media rotation schedule for the library. The example assumes the following: The library has a total of 17 licensed chambers. 2 chambers are assigned to the entry/exit pool (20 slots, or 2 TeraPack magazines). 15 chambers are assigned to the storage pool (150 slots, or 15 TeraPack magazines). The library contains 15 full TeraPack magazines and two empty TeraPack magazines. Two magazines containing 20 cartridges worth of backup data are sent off site every Friday. After the data has aged two weeks, the media is returned to the library and re-used. The site adheres to the following best practices: Whenever a TeraPack magazine is exported, another magazine (either full or empty) is imported. The library has enough empty TeraPack magazines to fill the entry/ exit pool. This example shows that, by Week 3, the backup plan results in a full media rotation in which the operator has done the following: 1. Removed and stored two full TeraPack magazines of media. Full magazines were exported from the entry/exit pool and removed through the TAP, resulting in an empty entry/exit pool. 2. Imported two full TeraPack magazines into the entry/exit pool through the TAP and then used the backup software to move the media in the entry/exit pool into the storage pool. Moving the media to the storage pool leaves two empty magazines in the entry/exit pools, ready to accept media as the backup software identifies media as ready to be ejected from the library. The following sections describe and illustrate the rotation process in more detail.
February 2011
476
Initial Installation of Media

The library is configured with a single partition and has a total of 17 licensed chambers assigned to either the entry/exit pool or storage pool. When the library is initially installed, chambers are filled with TeraPack magazines as described in the following illustration.
Library: Entry/exit pool: 2 chambers contain empty TeraPack magazines. Storage pool: 15 chambers contain full TeraPack magazines. Data center: 4 empty TeraPack magazines available.
End of Week 1
The backup software ejects cartridges from the storage pool. The library moves the cartridges to empty magazine slots in the entry/exit pool, making them ready to be removed from the library and stored off site.
Operator tasks: Export 2 full TeraPack magazines from the entry/exit pool. Import 2 empty TeraPack magazines into the entry/exit pool. Results of operator tasks: Off-site storage: 2 full TeraPack magazines. Entry/Exit pool: 2 chambers, each containing an empty TeraPack magazine. Storage pool: 13 chambers contain full TeraPack magazines. 2 chambers contain empty TeraPack magazines. Data Center: 2 empty TeraPack magazines.
February 2011
477
End of Week 2
The backup software ejects cartridges from the storage pool. The library moves the cartridges to empty magazine slots in the entry/exit pool, making them ready to be removed from the library and stored off site.
Operator tasks: Export the 2 full TeraPack magazines from the entry/ exit pool. Import 2 empty TeraPack magazines into the entry/ exit pool. Results of operator tasks: Off-site storage: 4 full TeraPack magazines Entry/Exit pool: 2 chambers, each containing an empty TeraPack magazine. Storage pool: 11 chambers contain full magazines 4 chambers contain empty TeraPack magazines. Data Center: No reserved media or magazines.
End of Week 3
The backup software ejects cartridges from the storage pool. The library moves the cartridges to empty magazine slots in the entry/exit pool, making them ready to be removed from the library and stored off site. The two full magazines stored off site in Week 1 are ready for re-use. After importing the full magazines into the entry/exit pool, the backup software is used to move the cartridges to the storage pool, leaving two empty magazines in the entry/exit pool.
Operator tasks: Export the 2 full TeraPack magazines from the entry/exit pool. Import 2 full TeraPack magazines into the entry/exit pool. Use backup software to move cartridges to the storage pool. Results of operator tasks: Off-site storage: 4 full TeraPack magazines Entry/Exit pool: 2 chambers, each containing an empty TeraPack magazine. Storage pool: 11 chambers contain full magazines 4 chambers contain empty magazines Data Center: No reserved media or magazines.
February 2011
478
Working with RXT Media
WORKING WITH RXT MEDIA

Important
RXT drives and RXT media are supported as legacy devices only. They are no longer available for purchase.
This section describes best practices for using RXT media and managing your media inventory. Before beginning, read: RAID Overview, below Optimizing Performance on page 481 Handling RXT Media on page 483 Using RXT Media in the Library on page 482
RAID Overview
RAID (Redundant Array of Independent Disks) is a method of combining several hard disk drives into one logical virtual disk (two or more disks grouped together to appear as a single device to the host system) for the purpose of sharing or replicating data. RAID technology was developed to address the fault-tolerance and performance limitations of conventional disk storage. Depending on how data is written to the disk array (typically referred to as the RAID level), RAID increases data integrity, fault-tolerance, throughput, or capacity, as compared with single drives. RAID is not a replacement for a good backup system and policy. Instead, it should be seen as added insurance against data loss and business disruption. In the case of RXT media packs, the RAID disks appear as a single, large capacity LTO cartridge to the backup software running on the host system. RXT media packs arrive preconfigured to the RAID level specified when they were ordered.
February 2011
479
RXT media is available in four RAID configurations, each one providing different levels of performance and protection. Choose a RAID level based on your risk tolerance as well as your capacity and performance needs.
RAID Level RAID 0 (zero) (Disk Striping) Description Data is split evenly across two or more disks with no parity information for redundancy. RAID 0 maximizes read/write performance and takes full advantage of available capacity, but provides no redundancy. Because RAID 0 does not provide increased data integrity or fault-tolerance it is best suited for non-critical data. RAID 0 level is not recommended for high data-availability needs. If a disk fails, your data is unrecoverable. Duplicate copies of data are written to multiple disks to ensure continuous availability. RAID 1 provides moderate performance and full redundancy. Duplicate copies of data are simultaneously written to two separate disks. A single drive failure causes degraded performance, but the data remains accessible through the mirrored drive.When the failed disk is replaced, data can be restored from the surviving disk. When two or more drives fail, a single uncorrectable media error occurring on the mirrored drive could result in data loss. Because all data is duplicated, RAID 1 requires at least twice the storage capacity for a given amount of data. For example, 1 TB of raw disk capacity provides 500 GB of usable capacity in a RAID 1 configuration. A combination of RAID 1 and RAID 0, RAID 10 provides increased performance over RAID 1. Data is mirrored on two separate sets of striped disks. Although RAID 10 offers the same protection as RAID 5, it requires significantly more disk space for the same amount of data storage. With either RAID 1 or RAID 10, a single drive failure causes degraded performance, but the data remains accessible through the mirrored drive. When two or more drives fail, a single uncorrectable media error occurring on the mirrored drive could result in data loss. Data and error correction informationparityis evenly distributed (striped) across multiple drives. If one drive fails, the parity information from the remaining disks can be used to rebuild the data. RAID 5 provides good performance with a reasonable amount of data protection. The parity data used for redundancy consumes approximately 20% of the total disk capacity.
RAID 1 (Disk Mirroring)
RAID 1+0 (RAID 10)
RAID 5 (Disk Striping with Distributed Parity)
February 2011
480
Optimizing Performance
The following sections describe factors that affect the performance from RXT media and drives.
RAID and Transfer Rates

RXT media is designed to achieve native transfer rates of up to 110MB/sec when configured as RAID 0 in an optimal environment (that is, with an optimal data source and optimal performance from the server connected to the RXT drive). Tests have shown that speeds of 75 MB/sec are realistic in many environments. Due to different read and write processes that must occur for RAID 1, RAID 5, and RAID 1+0, the transfer rates for these configurations vary. A reasonable expectation for these RAID levels is 50 MB/sec; make sure that you are achieving at least this level of throughput no matter what RAID type you are using.
Block Sizes
RXT drives cannot be directly configured to alter performance. All performance tuning must be done through your operating system and backup software. To maximize performance with RXT, Spectra Logic recommends using a 256KB block size (or larger) in your backup application. Block sizes smaller than this may result in decreased performance. Notes: Block sizes larger than 256KB are not supported in Windows operating systems with IBM drivers. Always use block sizes that are divisible by four (4). Consult the documentation for your backup software and operating system for instructions on how to configure the block size setting and for other performance tuning options.
Enable SCSI Disconnects

In most backup environments, SCSI disconnects are already enabled, which optimizes backup performance. Make sure that SCSI disconnects are enabled for the RXT drive, since an RXT drive has substantially slower SCSI throughput if SCSI disconnects are disabled. Consult your HBAs user documentation for instructions on how to modify this option.
February 2011
481
Using RXT Media in the Library

Write Protection
You can write-protect RXT media just as you would tape media. Write protection prevents accidental overwriting of crucial data. Store the RXT media with the write-protect switch set to the locked position (see Figure 74 on page 131).
RXT Media Pack Management

If you have multiple RXT media packs, use the label on the top of the media for simple pack management. You can track RAID level, type of backup, and other information.
Automatic Ejects
Turn off the automatic eject feature of your backup software if you plan on using the same RXT media pack for multiple backup operations.
Firmware Upgrades
Keep the firmware in the RXT drives updated with the latest firmware version. You can download firmware packages from the Spectra Logic web site. Refer to the Spectra RXT-150 User Guide for detailed information about updating the drive firmware. A PDF of the user guide is available on the Spectra Logic web site at www.spectralogic.com/documents.
February 2011
482
Handling RXT Media

This section describes the best practices for handling RXT media. Do not touch the pogo pin interface (the green and gold board) on the back of the RXT media packs.
Pogo pin interface
Figure 6 Location of the RXT media pack pogo pin interface. Keep the RXT media and RXT drives as clean as possible. Use and store them in a dry and clean environment. See RXT Drive and Media Pack Specifications on page 523 for more detail. Handle the RXT media packs carefully when transporting and storing them. Do not drop the media packs or subject them to significant vibration. If you plan to ship an RXT media pack, make sure that you have a proper shipping container and that you use adequate packing material. The RXT Media Pack carrying cases available from Spectra Logic are designed for safely transporting RXT media off site and are compatible with Iron Mountain. For information about purchasing carrying cases, see Media and Accessories on page 495.
Storing RXT Media

Spectra Logic recommends storing RXT media packs in the same type of environment in which it is used (see Environmental Specifications on page 526). This way, the RXT media packs are always ready for immediate access. For short-term storage, store RXT media packs lying flat in a clean, dry place.
February 2011
483
Store RXT media packs with the write-protect switch in the protected position.
Figure 7 Setting the RXT media pack write-protect switch. To set the switch, use a small flat-head screwdriver to move the switch to either the unlocked or locked position, as desired.
Icon Meaning Unlocked Locked Use Position the switch next to the Unlocked icon. Data can be written to the pack. Position the switch next to the Locked icon. Data cannot be written to the pack (that is, the pack is write-protected).
For short-term storage, install the pogo pad cover to protect the pogo pin interface.
Pogo pad cover
Figure 8 The cover for the RXT media pack pogo pin interface. For long-term storage, make sure that the RXT media pack is properly packed in its original shipping materials before sending off site. If RXT media packs have been kept in long-term storage outside of the recommended environmental operating specifications, ensure that the pack temperature comes within the suggested range before trying to access your data. You should allow at least 24 hours for this to occur. If you plan to store the RXT media packs for long periods of time, make a plan to access the RXT media packs and their data at least once per year to ensure continued data integrity. RXT media should be mounted in an RXT drive and accessed at lease once every 12 months.
484
Operating in Gigabit Ethernet Environments
OPERATING IN GIGABIT ETHERNET ENVIRONMENTS

Important
Ethernet QIPs (E-QIPs) are only supported as legacy devices. They are no longer available for purchase.
iSCSI networks use Gigabit Ethernet protocols for managing the transfer of data across the network. This section provides information about configuring your network to provide optimal library performance.
Best Practices for IP SANs

IP SANs should be based on Gigabit Ethernet 1000BaseT network topography. Since backups and storage networks create a good deal of traffic, a dedicated subnet should be utilized. IP SANs should not be sharing bandwidth with regular user LAN traffic.
Best Practices for iSCSI

The best performance with iSCSI is achieved by setting the iSCSI parameters to the following state: R2T = No Immediate Data = Yes or No Best performance is achieved by setting the following parameters to the maximum values listed below: First Burst Length = 128K Maximum Burst Length = 256K Maximum Receive Buffer Length = 64K Sun Solaris iSCSI only: Maximum Receive Data Segment length = 64K (or the block size used by the backup software, whichever is greater.) Note: The Sun Solaris parameter for Maximum Receive Data Segment length is not compatible with tape drives.
Supported Optical SFPs

Spectra Logic recommends using quad-rate SFPs with all E-QIPs.
Supported Copper SFPs

Copper RJ-45 SFPs are supported on the G3 E-QIP. Copper SFPs are designed for use with Gigabit Ethernet connections only and are not for use with Fibre Channel connections. The minimum cable requirements when using the copper SFPs is CAT5e. CAT6 cable is highly recommended for distances greater than 10 feet.
February 2011
485
APPENDIX C
SNMP MIB Listing
When configured to use SNMP, the Spectra T950 library returns information as defined in the SL-HW-LIB-T950-MIB. The MIB file is available for download from Spectra Logic at ftp://ftp.spectralogic.com/ pub/t-series/.
--- SL-HW-LIB-T950-MIB.mi2 --- Copyright Spectra Logic Corporation, 2005. All Rights Reserved. ---------------------------------------------------------------------SL-HW-LIB-T950-MIB DEFINITIONS ::= BEGIN IMPORTS MODULE-IDENTITY, OBJECT-TYPE, NOTIFICATION-TYPE, Integer32, Unsigned32 FROM SNMPv2-SMI TEXTUAL-CONVENTION, DisplayString FROM SNMPv2-TC MODULE-COMPLIANCE, OBJECT-GROUP, NOTIFICATION-GROUP FROM SNMPv2-CONF slT950, slModules FROM SPECTRALOGIC-GLOBAL-REG SLComponentStatus, SLTimeStampString FROM SPECTRALOGIC-GENERIC-TYPES-MIB;
486
Appendix C SNMP MIB Listing slT950MibModule MODULE-IDENTITY LAST-UPDATED "200509220000Z" -- September 22, 2005 ORGANIZATION "Spectra Logic" CONTACT-INFO "email: support@spectralogic.com phone: (800) 227-4637" DESCRIPTION "The Spectra Logic T950 library mib module" REVISION "200509220000Z" -- September 22, 2005 DESCRIPTION "Rev 1.1 September 22, 2005 by Trip Segars Changed all Unsigned32 to Integer32." REVISION "200506210000Z" -- June 21, 2005 DESCRIPTION "Rev 1.0 April 14, 2005 by Trip Segars Initial version of T950 library mib module" ::= { slModules 4 } --- root for items in the T950 Library MIB module -slT950MIB OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { slT950 1 } --- conformance area, containing groups and compliance specifications -slT950Confs OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { slT950MIB 1 } slT950Groups OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { slT950Confs 1 } slT950Compl OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { slT950Confs 2 } --- sub-tree for objects, and for each functional area -slT950Objs OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { slT950MIB 2 } slT950LibraryObjs OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { slT950Objs 1 } slT950GeneralObjs OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { slT950LibraryObjs 1 } slT950GeneralStatusObjs OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { slT950GeneralObjs 1 } slT950InventoryObjs OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { slT950GeneralObjs 2 } slT950ConfigurationObjs OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { slT950LibraryObjs 2 } slT950MaintenancelObjs OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { slT950LibraryObjs 3 } slT950SecurityObjs OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { slT950LibraryObjs 4 } slT950MessageObjs OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { slT950LibraryObjs 5 }
February 2011
487
Appendix C SNMP MIB Listing --- sub-tree for events -slT950Events OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { slT950MIB 3 } slT950EventsV2 OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { slT950Events 0 } --- textual conventions --
---------------------------------------------------------------------------- the T950 library objects ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- slT950GeneralStatusObjs -slT950GeneralStatusPowerStatus OBJECT-TYPE SYNTAX SLComponentStatus MAX-ACCESS read-only STATUS current DESCRIPTION "Indicates the current status of library power supplies" ::= { slT950GeneralStatusObjs 1 } slT950GeneralStatusFansStatus OBJECT-TYPE SYNTAX Integer32 { ok(1), warning(2), failure(3) } MAX-ACCESS read-only STATUS current DESCRIPTION "Indicates the current status of library fans ok(1) Library fans are fully functional warning(2) One or more library fans are impaired or filter is dirty failure(3) Library fans are missing or filter is plugged" ::= { slT950GeneralStatusObjs 2 }
February 2011
488
Appendix C SNMP MIB Listing slT950GeneralStatusTap1Status OBJECT-TYPE SYNTAX Integer32 { ok(1), warning(2), failure(3) } MAX-ACCESS read-only STATUS current DESCRIPTION "Indicates the current status of Tap 1 ok(1) Tap 1 is closed warning(2) Tap 1 is open failure(3) Tap 1 is impaired" ::= { slT950GeneralStatusObjs 3 } slT950GeneralStatusTap2Status OBJECT-TYPE SYNTAX Integer32 { ok(1), warning(2), failure(3) } MAX-ACCESS read-only STATUS current DESCRIPTION "Indicates the current status of Tap 2 ok(1) Tap 2 is closed warning(2) Tap 2 is open failure(3) Tap 2 is impaired" ::= { slT950GeneralStatusObjs 4 } slT950GeneralStatusPartitionCount OBJECT-TYPE SYNTAX Integer32 MAX-ACCESS read-only STATUS current DESCRIPTION "Number of partitions in the library" ::= { slT950GeneralStatusObjs 5 } slT950GeneralStatusPartitionTable OBJECT-TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF SlT950GeneralStatusPartitionEntry MAX-ACCESS not-accessible STATUS current DESCRIPTION "A table of partition-specific general status information" ::= { slT950GeneralStatusObjs 6 } slT950GeneralStatusPartitionEntry OBJECT-TYPE SYNTAX SlT950GeneralStatusPartitionEntry MAX-ACCESS not-accessible STATUS current DESCRIPTION "A row in the general status partition table. Entries cannot be created or deleted via SNMP operations" INDEX { slT950GeneralStatusPartitionIndex } -- this column will -- identify a partition ::= { slT950GeneralStatusPartitionTable 1 }
February 2011
489
Appendix C SNMP MIB Listing SlT950GeneralStatusPartitionEntry ::= SEQUENCE { slT950GeneralStatusPartitionIndex Integer32, slT950GeneralStatusPartitionName DisplayString, slT950GeneralStatusPartitionTotalAvailableDrives Integer32, slT950GeneralStatusPartitionFullDrives Integer32, slT950GeneralStatusPartitionTotalAvailableStorageSlots Integer32, slT950GeneralStatusPartitionFullStorageSlots Integer32, slT950GeneralStatusPartitionTotalAvailableEntryExitSlots Integer32, slT950GeneralStatusPartitionFullEntryExitSlots Integer32 } slT950GeneralStatusPartitionIndex OBJECT-TYPE SYNTAX Integer32 MAX-ACCESS read-only STATUS current DESCRIPTION "The unique value which identifies a partition" ::= { slT950GeneralStatusPartitionEntry 1 } slT950GeneralStatusPartitionName OBJECT-TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString (SIZE (0..255)) MAX-ACCESS read-only STATUS current DESCRIPTION "The partition name" ::= { slT950GeneralStatusPartitionEntry 2 } slT950GeneralStatusPartitionTotalAvailableDrives OBJECT-TYPE SYNTAX Integer32 MAX-ACCESS read-only STATUS current DESCRIPTION "The number of available drives in the partition" ::= { slT950GeneralStatusPartitionEntry 3 } slT950GeneralStatusPartitionFullDrives OBJECT-TYPE SYNTAX Integer32 MAX-ACCESS read-only STATUS current DESCRIPTION "The number of loaded drives in the partition" ::= { slT950GeneralStatusPartitionEntry 4 } slT950GeneralStatusPartitionTotalAvailableStorageSlots OBJECT-TYPE SYNTAX Integer32 MAX-ACCESS read-only STATUS current DESCRIPTION "The number of available storage slots in the partition" ::= { slT950GeneralStatusPartitionEntry 5 }
February 2011
490
Appendix C SNMP MIB Listing slT950GeneralStatusPartitionFullStorageSlots OBJECT-TYPE SYNTAX Integer32 MAX-ACCESS read-only STATUS current DESCRIPTION "The number of full storage slots in the partition" ::= { slT950GeneralStatusPartitionEntry 6 } slT950GeneralStatusPartitionTotalAvailableEntryExitSlots OBJECT-TYPE SYNTAX Integer32 MAX-ACCESS read-only STATUS current DESCRIPTION "The number of available entry/exit slots in the partition" ::= { slT950GeneralStatusPartitionEntry 7 } slT950GeneralStatusPartitionFullEntryExitSlots OBJECT-TYPE SYNTAX Integer32 MAX-ACCESS read-only STATUS current DESCRIPTION "The number of full entry/exit slots in the partition" ::= { slT950GeneralStatusPartitionEntry 8 }
--- slT950MessageObjs -slT950MessageCount OBJECT-TYPE SYNTAX Integer32 MAX-ACCESS read-only STATUS current DESCRIPTION "Number of system messages" ::= { slT950MessageObjs 1 } slT950MessageTable OBJECT-TYPE SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF SlT950MessageEntry MAX-ACCESS not-accessible STATUS current DESCRIPTION "A table of system messages information" ::= { slT950MessageObjs 2 }
February 2011
491
Appendix C SNMP MIB Listing slT950MessageEntry OBJECT-TYPE SYNTAX SlT950MessageEntry MAX-ACCESS not-accessible STATUS current DESCRIPTION "A row in the system messages table. Entries cannot be created or deleted via SNMP operations" INDEX { slT950MessageIndex } -- this column will identify a message ::= { slT950MessageTable 1 } SlT950MessageEntry ::= SEQUENCE { slT950MessageIndex Integer32, slT950MessageNumber Integer32, slT950MessageSeverity Integer32, slT950MessageText DisplayString, slT950MessageRemedyText DisplayString, slT950MessageTime DisplayString, } slT950MessageIndex OBJECT-TYPE SYNTAX Integer32 MAX-ACCESS read-only STATUS current DESCRIPTION "The unique value which identifies a message" ::= { slT950MessageEntry 1 } slT950MessageNumber OBJECT-TYPE SYNTAX Integer32 MAX-ACCESS read-only STATUS current DESCRIPTION "The message number" ::= { slT950MessageEntry 2 } slT950MessageSeverity OBJECT-TYPE SYNTAX Integer32 { info(1), warning(2), error(3), fatal(4) } MAX-ACCESS read-only STATUS current DESCRIPTION "The message severity info(1) Informational message warning(2) Warning message error(3) Error message fatal(4) Fatal message" ::= { slT950MessageEntry 3 }
February 2011
492
Appendix C SNMP MIB Listing slT950MessageText OBJECT-TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString (SIZE (0..255)) MAX-ACCESS read-only STATUS current DESCRIPTION "The text of the system message" ::= { slT950MessageEntry 4 } slT950MessageRemedyText OBJECT-TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString (SIZE (0..255)) MAX-ACCESS read-only STATUS current DESCRIPTION "The remedy text of the system message" ::= { slT950MessageEntry 5 } slT950MessageTime OBJECT-TYPE SYNTAX SLTimeStampString MAX-ACCESS read-only STATUS current DESCRIPTION "Time the message was generated" ::= { slT950MessageEntry 6 }
--- event definitions -slT950MessageEvent NOTIFICATION-TYPE OBJECTS { slT950MessageIndex, slT950MessageNumber, slT950MessageSeverity, slT950MessageText, slT950MessageRemedyText, slT950MessageTime } STATUS current DESCRIPTION "A system message has been created" ::= { slT950EventsV2 1 } END
February 2011
493
APPENDIX D
Media & Upgrades
This appendix describes items that can be purchased for use with the Spectra T950 library.
MEDIA AND MEDIA ACCESSORIES

Spectra Logic offers a variety of media and media accessories for the library.
Spectra Certified Media

Spectra Logic certifies only the highest quality data cartridges received directly from the manufacturer and provides a lifetime guarantee on all Spectra Certified Media. Each order includes 10 LTO cartridges or 9 SDLT cartridges, a TeraPack magazine to hold the media inside and outside the library, and a fitted dust cover for use outside the library. For your convenience, all Spectra Logic Certified Media is available pre-labeled with sequential bar-code labels. Optional custom bar-code sequences can be ordered, if desired. Using pre-labeled media ensures that you will never have to deal with the problem of duplicate bar codes. Spectra Logics bar-code labels carry the same lifetime guarantee that protects each Spectra Certified Media cartridge. Check the Spectra Logic web site at www.spectralogic.com for the most up-to-date media availability.
494
Appendix D Media & Upgrades
Media and Media Accessories
Media and Accessories

Spectra Logic offers the following media and accessories:
Media or Accessory Certified Media Packs Description Each pack contains 1 TeraPack magazine with dust cover and Spectra Certified Media (10 LTO cartridges or 9 SDLT cartridges) with standard bar-code labels. Note: With the exception of LTO-2 and WORM media, all Spectra Certified LTO media is MLM-enabled. Each pack consists of 1 TeraPack magazine with a dust cover and Spectra Certified Media (10 LTO cartridges or 9 SDLT cartridges) with custom bar-code labels. You must order a minimum of four custom-labeled packs at a time. Spectra Certified cleaning cartridges for the tape drives supported by the library are available in TeraPacks containing either five or ten cartridges. The cleaning cartridges have CLN at the beginning of the bar-code sequence on their labels. Note: All Spectra Certified LTO cleaning cartridges are MLM-enabled. The cleaning cartridges are stored in Spectra Maintenance TeraPack magazines, which are identified by Spectra-unique labels. High-contrast, high-resolution labels for reliable operation. Labels are available either with a standard bar-code numbering sequence or with a custom bar code numbering sequence. Bar-code labels for cleaning cartridges are also available. The bar-code labels for cleaning cartridges have CLN at the beginning of the bar-code sequence. Empty 10-slot TeraPack magazines for LTO tapes, 10-slot Maintenance magazines for LTO cleaning cartridges, or empty 9-slot TeraPack magazines for SDLT tapes are available. Each magazine includes a dust cover. Carrying cases are designed for safely carrying TeraPack magazines and RXT media packs off site. Cases are compatible with Iron Mountain.
Certified Media Pack With Custom Bar-code Labels Cleaning Cartridges
Bar-code Labels (In Series Of 300)
Terapack Magazines TeraPack and RXT Media Pack Carrying Cases
How To Order
To purchase Spectra Certified Media and media accessories, contact your sales representative (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5) or use the Spectra Logic online store at www.spectralogic.com/shop.
February 2011
495
Library Support and Upgrades
LIBRARY SUPPORT AND UPGRADES

The library ships with the service contract and options you purchased when you purchased the library. You can renew your service contract or purchase more capacity or other options described in this section at a later date.
Service Contract Extension

Your initial library purchase includes a BlueScale Software Support key that is valid for the duration of the warranty period, or for the duration of any uplifted or extended service contract you purchased with the library, whichever is longer. A valid BlueScale Software Support key is required in order to update the library firmware, which includes the BlueScale software, and to obtain technical support.
Important
When you renew or extend your service contract, you must generate a new BlueScale Software Support key and enter the new key into the library to allow continued access to firmware upgrades (see Enabling BlueScale Software Support, Options, and Upgrades on page 283). If you have questions about your service agreement, contact Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
When the original warranty or service contract expires, a renewal contract can be purchased to continue service. Log into the Spectra Logic Technical Support portal at: support.spectralogic.com and select the Incidents & Service Agreement Management icon to view your information about the warranty and service options for your library. You can also request a renewal of your service agreement. Note: See Accessing the Technical Support Portal on page 421 for information about creating a user account and logging into the Technical Support portal.
February 2011
496
Firmware Upgrades
Firmware package upgrades are free of cost to customers who have a current service contract with Spectra Logic Technical Support. When a service contract is renewed, you must generate a new BlueScale Software Support key and entered it into the library to allow continued access to firmware upgrades. See Enabling BlueScale Software Support, Options, and Upgrades on page 283 for information.
Important
See Updating Library Firmware on page 428 for firmware upgrade instructions.
Library Upgrades
Upgrades available for purchase include BlueScale software options and library hardware upgrades. You can purchase options and upgrades from your sales representative (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
Options
The following table describes the BlueScale software options that are available. See Enabling BlueScale Software Support, Options, and Upgrades on page 283 for information about enabling these options.
Library Option BlueScale Encryption Professional Edition Description BlueScale Encryption Standard Edition, included free on the Spectra TranScale Library, provides a strong, easy to use method of encrypting data using a single key on the library, letting you add encryption without adding complexity. BlueScale Encryption Professional Edition supports multiple keys on a library at a single time and additional security features so that you can implement more customized data encryption regimens. See BlueScale Encryption Overview on page 336 for more information about BlueScale Encryption.
February 2011
497
Appendix D Media & Upgrades Library Option Capacity-OnDemand (CoD) Description
The Capacity-On-Demand (CoD) feature lets you purchase a library that meets your current storage needs and then purchase additional capacity later as required. CoD reduces up-front costs, because users only pay for what they currently need. As more capacity is required, it can be added in increments by purchasing activation codes to enable additional chambers in the library and additional TeraPack magazines or RXT media packs to fill the added chambers. Note: If you purchase CoD capacity that exceeds the number of unlicensed chambers available in the current library configuration, you must purchase another DBA or add another frame. These upgrades and their installation by a certified Spectra Logic field technician are priced separately from the CoD capacity upgrade. The Observatory suite of management tools gives you the ability to manage multiple Spectra Logic libraries from one screen with customized viewing of alerts or failures. Built on the BlueScale environment, the Observatory tools provide full management access to configuration and operation of one or more Spectra Logic libraries from anywhere using a web browser. See Configuring and Using Observatory (Optional) on page 325 for additional information about Observatory. Note: Observatory includes keys SNMP and SSL support. Rotation Manager is an option to simplify identifying tapes that have been moved off site. With Rotation Manager installed, the library sends an email containing the bar code information for every piece of media and its off-site location to a specified address. See Configuring Rotation Manager (Optional) on page 330 for additional information about Rotation Manager. Shared Library Services (SLS) partitioning logically divides the library into multiple virtual libraries. With SLS, one library can support multiple media types and provide dedicated library services to multiple user groups. The default library configuration includes support for a single data partition. If you need additional data partitions, you must purchase a Shared Library Services (SLS) option key. See Partitions on page 49 for more information about using partitioning in the library using SLS. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a widely used protocol for monitoring the health and welfare of your library by using integrated alerts. SNMP support is a keyed option included with the Observatory software (see Configuring and Using Observatory (Optional) on page 325). See Configuring SNMP (Optional) on page 305 for additional information about SNMP.
Observatory
Rotation Manager
Shared Library Services (SLS)
SNMP Support
February 2011
498
Hardware Expansion and Upgrades

The Spectra T950 library is designed to expand to meet a data centers changing storage requirements, as well as to achieve storage consolidation goals. These expansion and upgrade options can be purchased through a sales representative (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5). The following table describes the types of hardware expansion and upgrades that are available.
Hardware BlueScale Vision Camera Description The web-based BlueScale Vision camera lets you visually monitor the interior of the library. In multi-frame libraries, additional BlueScale vision cameras can be installed in the expansion frames to provide monitoring of the entire library. Each camera can view the interior of the frame where it is mounted and one frame to either side. A BlueScale Vision camera is standard in the main drive frame. You can purchase additional cameras when you order your library or as an upgrade at a later date. Note: Cameras must be installed by a certified Spectra Logic field technician. If all of the currently installed DBAs in the library are fully populated with drives and your library includes one or more TeraPack Bay Assemblies (TBAs), you can replace a TBA with a DBA. Note: Replacing a TBA with a DBA reduces the storage capacity of your library. Each library Drive Bay Assembly (DBAs) in a drive frame holds up to four drives. If a DBA is not full, additional drives can be installed to increase data throughput. Drives are sled-mounted and install in under two minutes. The storage capacity or performance of the library can be increased by adding media or drive expansion frames, respectively. The library requires one 5/12 VDC power supply module per DBA and one 24 VDC robotics power supply module. Optionally, you can purchase an additional supply per frame, which in combination with the dual AC power inputs, provides redundancy and failover protection. The power supply modules needed for the power redundancy configuration are an option you can purchase separately or when you order the library. QIPs provide connectivity to additional SCSI drives. QIPs are sled-mounted and install in under two minutes. Important: QIPs (both F-QIPs and E-QIPs) are no longer available for purchase. A RIM is used to provide the robotics control path to the librarys transporter. One RIM can support multiple library partitions. A minimum of two RIMs is required if you want to use the BlueScale controller failover feature for enhanced availability. Important: The RIM does not provide connectivity for SCSI drives.
Drive Bay Assembly (DBA)
Drives
Expansion Frames Power Supplies
Quad Interface Processors (QIPs)
Robotics Interface Module (RIM)
February 2011
499
Appendix D Media & Upgrades Hardware USB Drive Description
Replaceable Components
You can use USB drive for saving backups of the library configuration and MLM database, when upgrading the librarys firmware package, or as a troubleshooting tool for use as instructed by Spectra Logic Technical Support. USB drives are available for purchase from Spectra Logic for a nominal charge.
How to Order
To purchase library upgrades, including a renewed or extended service contract, determine your library Hardware ID (see Locating the Library Serial Number on page 284) and then contact your sales representative (see Contacting Spectra Logic on page 5).
REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS
Some library components are extremely easy to remove and install. They are classified as customer-replaceable units (CRUs) and they are available for purchase based on your service contract with Spectra Logic Technical Support (see Appendix A Service and Support). CRUs include: Air filters Drives QIPs RIMs Library Control Module (LCM) Robotics Control Module (RCM) Power supply modules Power Management Module (PCM) Transporter (not the VAX column) Depending on your service contract, you may also be able to replace certain additional components that are classified as field-replaceable units (FRUs).
February 2011
500
APPENDIX E
Specifications
This appendix provides specifications for the Spectra T950 library, as well as the drives and media used in the library:
Topic Library Specifications Interface Specifications Tape Drive and Media Specifications RXT Drive and Media Pack Specifications Described beginning on... this page page 510 page 512 page 523
Note: The specifications in this chapter are subject to change without notice.
LIBRARY SPECIFICATIONS
This section includes the following library specifications:
Topic Data Storage Capacity Size and Weight Service Access Requirements Power Specifications Environmental Specifications Shock and Vibration Interoperability and Software Compatibility Interface Specifications Described beginning on... page 502 page 504 page 505 page 506 page 509 page 510 page 510 page 510
501
Library Specifications
Data Storage Capacity

The T950 library provides flexible storage capacity that expands from a minimum of one media pack up to the maximum storage capacity of the library. The capacity specifications in this section assume that only one type of drive and media is installed in the library. When using mixed drives and media, the librarys capacity depends on the number of frames in the library, the number of drives and slots inside each frame, and the type(s) of drives and media used. See Drive and Media Frames on page 55 for an explanation of the different types of frames that can comprise the library.
Main Frame
The following table shows the capacity of the librarys main frame in its two basic configurations. The information in the table assumes that only tape drives and tape media are installed in the frame.
Tape Drives 1 - 12 13 - 24 TeraPack Magazines 95 83 Slots a LTO-5 950 830 1425 1245 Native Capacity (TB) b LTO-4 742 648 LTO-3 371 324 LTO-2 186 162 Slots a 855 747 SDLT 600 Native Capacity (TB) c 257 224
a. A minimum of one chamber in each partition should be reserved for the entry/exit pool. A chamber contains a TeraPack magazine with either nine or ten slots. The media in entry/exit pool cannot be used for data storage until it is moved to the storage pool. b. Includes media packs stored in the entry/exit pool. The media stored in the entry/exit pool are not available for use by the application software for writing or reading data until it is moved to the storage pool. See Media Pools on page 52 for information about how the library uses media pools. c. Using Super DLTtape II. cartridges.
Expansion Frames
The capacity of an expansion frame depends on the type of frame and its configuration. For each expansion frame, add the frames capacity to that of the main frame to calculate the capacity of the entire library.
Tape Drive Expansion Frame

Tape Drives 1 - 12 13 - 24 TeraPack Magazines 101 89 Slots LTO-5 1010 890 1515 1335 Native Capacity (TB) LTO-4 880 712 LTO-3 395 348 LTO-2 197 174 Slots a 909 801 SDLT 600 Native Capacity (TB) a 303 240
a. Using Super DLTtape II. cartridges.
February 2011
502
Tape Media Expansion Frame

Tape Drives 0 TeraPack Magazines 130 Slots LTO-5 1300 1950 Native Capacity (TB) LTO-4 1040 LTO-3 508 LTO-2 254 Slots
a
SDLT 600 Native Capacity (TB) a 351 1170
a. Using Super DLTtape II. cartridges.
RXT Drive Expansion Frame Important

RXT drives and media packs are only supported as legacy devices. They are no longer available for purchase.
Note: A maximum of 22 RXT drives can be installed in drive frames, as opposed to 24 drives for tape drives. This is because RXT drives cannot be installed in the top two drive bay chambers.
RXT Drives 1 - 10 11 - 22 RXT Media Packs a 95 83 Gold RXT Media 1.2 TB Option 1140 TB 996 TB
b, c
Silver RXT Media 2 TB Option b, c 1.9 PB 1.7 PB
a. Each RXT media pack occupies one chamber. b. Capacity per media pack. c. Native, uncompressed capacity.
RXT Media Expansion Frame

RXT Drives 0 RXT Media Packs a 130 Gold RXT Media 1.2 TB Option 1.6 PB
a. Each RXT media pack occupies one chamber. b. Capacity per media pack. c. Native, uncompressed capacity.
b, c
Silver RXT Media 2 TB Option b, c 2.6 PB
February 2011
503
Size and Weight

The following table shows the size and weight specifications for the library frames and other components. Notes: All dimensions and weights are approximate. To calculate the dimensions of the entire library, total the dimensions for each frame. Add two inches for the cover panels on each side of a single-frame library or for the two frames at the ends of a multi-frame library. To calculate the approximate weight of a loaded library, calculate the total weight for all of the frames. Then add the weight for each drive, QIP, and power supply, plus the weight of each TeraPack magazine full of media or RXT media pack. When calculating the space requirements, be sure to include the service access requirements described in Service Access Requirements on page 505.
Parameter Main Drive Frame Height Width
b
Specification a Drive Expansion Frame 79.2 in (2.0 m) 29.7 in. (75.4 cm) 43.5 in. (110.5 cm) 750 lb. (340 kg) Media Expansion Frame 79.2 in (2.0 m) 29.7 in. (75.4 cm) 43.5 in. (110.5 cm) 700 lb. (318 kg) N/A 12 lb. (5.4 kg) 13 lb. (5.9 kg) 13 lb. (5.9 kg) 9 lb. (4.1 kg) 5.1 lb. (2.3 kg) each 6 lb. (2.7 kg) each 5 lb. (2.3 kg) 4 lb. (1.8 kg) N/A N/A
79.2 in (2.0 m) 29.7 in. (75.4 cm) 43.5 in. (110.5 cm)
d, e
Depth c Weight
f
800 lb. (363 kg)
Drives LTO drive SAIT drive SDLT drive RXT drive Media TeraPack magazine with media RXT media pack Each QIP or RIM Each power supply
a. All dimensions and weights are rounded up to the nearest tenth. b. These dimensions represent the frames without the cover panels installed. Each service bay has a single side cover panel. The side cover panels add 1 to each side of a frame. c. These dimensions represent the frames and service bays with the front and back cover panels installed. d. These weights are with no drives or media installed. e. All dimensions and weights are approximate. To calculate the approximate weight of a loaded library, calculate the total weight for all of the frames and then add the weight for each drive, QIP, and power supply, plus the weight of each TeraPack magazine full of media. f. Each drive. Weights are approximate.
February 2011
504
Service Access Requirements

Important
A minimum of 24 inches (61 cm) of clearance is required on the LEFT end of the library to provide service access. Providing 36 inches (91 cm) of clearance on all sides of the library is highly recommended.
In addition to the service access space on either side of the library, leave a minimum of 24 inches (61 cm) at the front and back of the library for service and operator access. Refer to the Spectra T590 Library Site Preparation Guide for detailed information about space requirements.
Shipping and Storage Size and Weight

The following table provides the approximate dimensions and weights of the pallet and boxes used to ship the library.
Parameter Library Crates b, c Height Width Depth Weight d Component Boxes e Height Width Depth Weight Specification a 86 in. (2.18 m) 42 in. (1.07 m) 55 in. (1.40 m 1,000 lb. (554 kg) 22 to 60 in. (56 to 152 cm) 42 to 179 in. (107 to 455 cm) 22 to 60 in. (56 to 152 cm) 200 to 600 lb. (91 to 272 kg)
a. All dimensions are rounded to the nearest tenth; weights are rounded to the nearest unit. b. Each frame is shipped in a separate crate. c. Includes the weight of the accessory box (approximately 50 lb. (23 kg), which contains some or all of the following items: a tool kit, stylus and stylus holder, the Product Documentation CD, and printed product documentation. d. Does not include the drives, media, QIPs, or power supply modules. e. The sizes and weights of the component boxes depend on the number and type of components in the box. To calculate the approximate weight of all the components, add 15 lb. (7 kg) for each drive, 5 lb. (1.8 kg) for each TeraPack magazine full of media, 5 lb. (1.8 kg) for each QIP, and 4 lb. (1.5 kg) for each power supply.
February 2011
505
Power Specifications
This section describes the power specifications for the library.
Input Power Requirements

The main frame and each drive frame has dual AC power inputs. Each AC input must be connected to a 200240 VAC, 50/60Hz circuit. When using a redundant power configuration, connect each input to a separate branch circuit, which allows for failover in the event of a power failure in one of the circuits. For redundant AC power configurations, the two AC inputs for each frame must be on the same phase, and the voltages must be the same within a few volts. If these requirements are not satisfied, there may be problems switching between the two AC power sources.
Caution
The main and drive expansion frames are designed to be used on single phase power only. If the power sources for the dual AC inputs for a frame are not on the same phase, damage to the library could result.
The library is rated at 200240VAC at 13 amps (2600 watts maximum). This power rating is based on a library with 24 LTO drives and 6 QIPs, which is the single-frame configuration for maximum power consumption. The library is not rated at 120 VAC due to the high current required to supply the product.
Power Cord Specifications

The power cords included with the library are considered part of the library and are not intended for use with any other equipment. See Supplyend Connector Types on page 507 for the different types of cords available from Spectra Logic. Notes: Install the included cord locks to prevent the power cords from being inadvertently disconnected from the dual AC input connectors. For instructions on installing cord locks, see Installing Cord Locks on page 443. The supply-end connector is considered the disconnect for the unit. Make sure that the socket-outlet for the AC connections is in an accessible location near the library. To use the library outside of North America, the power cord must meet the specifications for that country, as described in the following sections.
February 2011
506
200240 VAC Power Cord for Use in North America and Korea The criteria for a 200-volt to 240-volt AC power cord in North America and Korea are as follows:
Parameter Power cordage Power input connectors Specification SJT type, three-conductor, 14 AWG minimum a NEMA L6-20P, male IEC 60320-C19, female
a. Power cord must comply with local electrical code.
200240 VAC Power Cord for International Use The criteria for an international 200-volt to 240-volt AC power cord are as follows:
Parameter Power cordage Specification Flexible, HAR (harmonized) type H05VV-F, three conductor, cord with minimum conductor size of 0.03 square inches (1.0 square millimeter) Male connector must be of the proper type, rating, and safety approval for the intended country (see Supply-end Connector Types for available power cord connectors). IEC 60320-C19, female
Power input connectors
Supply-end Connector Types

The type of connector on the other end of the cord depends on the country. The following table shows the Spectra Logic part numbers for power cords with the connector types used in each country on the supply-end.
Part Number 5500 7029 6807 Country of Use North America, Korea North America, Korea Japan Plug Style NEMA L6-20P NEMA L6-30P NEMA L6-20P Appearance
8665
United Kingdom, Continental Europe
IEC 60309
February 2011
507
Power Consumption and Cooling Requirements

The power and cooling requirements for the library depend on the number and type of drives installed. The following table provides the nominal and maximum power consumption specifications for the base library with no QIPs or drives installed.
Parameter Power Consumption Heat Load Base Library Nominal:1,300 watts Maximum: 3,600 watts Nominal: 4,440 BTU/hour Maximum: 12,295 BTU/hour
Use the following table, which shows the power and cooling requirements for the main frame using Fibre Channel LTO-4 tape drives, as a guideline for determining the requirements for your library. Refer to Tape Drive and Media Specifications on page 512 and RXT Drive and Media Pack Specifications on page 523 for additional detailed drive specifications. Note: For RXT drives, the maximum number of drives that can be installed is 22.
Drive Type 4 Standby Mode (Minimum) Power Consumption (Watts) Heat Dissipation (BTU/hour) Read/Write/Seek Mode (Maximum) Power Consumption (Watts) Heat Dissipation (BTU/hour) 487 1662 735 2509 983 3356 1231 4203 1479 5050 1705 5824 340 1161 441 1507 543 1853 644 2199 745 2545 825 2819 8 Number of Drives Installed 12 16 20 24
February 2011
508
Environmental Specifications
This section describes environmental specifications for the library. Do not place the library on a carpeted floor or anywhere else that poses risk for static discharge that could damage the library and its drives.
Caution
The library must be installed on a level, hard-surfaced floor such as cement or tile. Never install it on carpeted flooring.
The library is equipped with internal fans as well as temperature sensors that operate the fans as much or as little as is necessary in your data center environment. These features keep the librarys internal temperature within specifications as long as the data center environment is within specifications.
Caution
When the library is moved from a cold environment to a warm environment, it should not be powered on for at least 24 hours. This adjustment period prevents condensation damage.
The following tables list the general environmental specifications for the library.
Operating Environmental Specification Humidity Humidity gradient Ambient temperature
a b
20% to 80% (non-condensing) Less than 10% per hour 50 F to 90 F (10 C to 32 C) 51.8 F (28.5 C) per hour 77 F (25 C) Sea level to 10,000 feet (3,048 meters)
Maximum temperature change rate Maximum wet bulb temperature Altitude
a. The maximum ambient temperature must not exceed 86 F (30 C) when G2 F-QIPs (P.N. 90949008) are installed in the library. b. The temperature and humidity must be allowed to stabilize in the specified ambient environment for 24 hours.
Storinga and Shipping (Non-Operating) Environment Specification Humidity Temperature Altitude 10% to 95% (non-condensing) 40 F to 149 F (4 C to 65 C) Sea level to 40,000 feet (12,192 meters)
a. The library is in its original packaging. The packaging is designed to protect the library from condensation caused by extreme temperature variations of 59 F (15 C) or more. When the library is moved from a cold storage environment to a warm operating environment, it must be acclimated in its packaging for at least 24 hours before opening to prevent serious condensation damage from occurring.
February 2011
509
Interoperability and Software Compatibility
Shock and Vibration

The library will operate normally after experiencing shock loads as specified in the following table. The operating shock levels indicate how much shock the library can withstand while the enclosed drives are reading and writing data. The non-operating and storage shock levels indicate how much shock the library can withstand when it is not operating. After experiencing this amount of shock, the library will operate normally.
Specification Shock Operating 2 g pk sine wave for 10 msec (3 axes, 2 shocks per axis, minimum) Storing and Shipping (Non-Operating Environment) a 2 g pk sine wave for 10 msec (3 axes, 2 shocks/axis, minimum) 5 Hz 500 Hz 5 Hz 5 31 Hz, 0.02-inch DA displacement 31 500 Hz 1G pk @ 1/2 octave (minimum three axes) 1 200Hz @ 1.156 Grms. Bottom face only for 60 minutes.
Vibration (Swept 5 Hz 500 Hz 5 Hz Sine) 5 22 Hz 0.01-inch DA displacement 22 500 Hz 0.25G pk @ 1/2 octave (minimum three axes) Vibration (Random) 0.5 Grms, 0 3000 Hz (single axis)
a. Library is in its original packaging.
INTEROPERABILITY AND SOFTWARE COMPATIBILITY

You can find complete interoperability listings, as well as a list of the types of software that have been tested and proven compatible with the library on the Spectra Logic Web site at www.spectralogic.com/compatibility.
INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS
This section provides information about the interfaces used to connect the library and tape drives to the host systems. It also provides information about the Ethernet interface used to access the librarys BlueScale web interface. The library QIPs support either Fibre Channel (F-QIP) or Gigabit Ethernet (E-QIP) host interfaces. The Robotics Interface Module (RIM) supports a Fibre Channel host interface. Direct-attach tape drives have a native Fibre Channel interface. Direct-attach SCSI drives are not supported. Instead, they must be connected to a Fibre Channel fabric through an F-QIP.
Important Important
QIPs (both F-QIPs and E-QIPs) are no longer available for purchase. The option to connect SCSI drives through a QIP is no longer available for purchase with new libraries. The library continues to support partitions configured to use QIP-attached SCSI drives.
February 2011
510
Interface Specifications
For information about how LTO Ultrium tape drives support SCSI communications, refer to the tape drive documentation, available from IBM at www.storage.ibm.com/tape/lto/oem/index.html.
Component Interface Connectors

Component Drive, direct-attach Fibre Channel Drive, SCSI b Physical Interface Two dual port multimode optical LC connectors a Ultra-3 SCSI LVD 68-pin Micro D female connector. One wide Ultra320 SCSI Active SCSI terminator is provided with each SCSI tape drive. Two dual port optical SFPs with LC connectors c,d Two GigE SFPs with a copper RJ-45 socket c, d
QIP, Fibre Channel (F-QIP) QIP, Gigabit Ethernet (E-QIP)
a. Only one port at a time can be used to connect the tape drive to a Fibre Channel network. If desired, the two ports can be used to create a failover configuration (see Failover Using Direct-Attached LTO-4 and LTO-5 Fibre Channel Drives on page 68). b. Requires a QIP to provide network connectivity. Direct-attach to a SCSI bus is not supported. c. The two ports on a QIP each provide access to all or any of the four tape drives associated with the QIP (see Connectivity on page 59 for additional information). d. The QIPs are shipped with SFPs installed.
Network Interface Cable Requirements

The type of cables required to connect the library and its drives to the network depend on the type of interface being used.
Interface Type Fibre Channel (F-QIPs and DirectAttach Drives) Gigabit Ethernet (iSCSI) (E-QIPs) Cable Requirements The Fibre Channel interface in the F-QIPs and direct-attach tape drives support the Fibre Channel Protocol (FCP). Connecting F-QIPs and direct-attach Fibre Channel tape drives to the host network requires multimode optical cables with dual LC connectors. The Gigabit Ethernet interface in the E-QIPs support the iSCSI protocol. Connecting each port on an E-QIP to the host network requires a shielded Category 5 (10/100BaseT connection) data-grade cable or a similar Category 5 cable with an RJ-45 connector.
February 2011
511
Tape Drive and Media Specifications
Ethernet Cable Requirements

The Ethernet port on the LCM provides the connection to a 10/100BaseT Ethernet network for accessing the library using a standard web browser on a remote computer. An additional Ethernet port may be present on the drive and media expansion frames if a BlueScale Vision camera is installed in the frame. Each Ethernet port is a pin-through-hole RJ-45 shielded connector. To comply with EMC requirements, use shielded Category 5 (10/100BaseT connection) data-grade cables or a similar Category 5 cable for all Ethernet connections.
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Support

The USB ports on the LCM and the RCM support the following: USB mass storage devices (for example, flash drives) Keyboards Pointer devices (for example, a computer mouse) FAT file formats (FAT, FAT12, FAT 16, and FAT 32) Long file names The LCM and RCM do not support connecting the following devices to the USB port: Cameras Multimedia devices (for example, MP3 players)
TAPE DRIVE AND MEDIA SPECIFICATIONS

This section provides the basic specifications for the tape drives and media supported by the library. Note: The specifications in this section are subject to change without notice.
Topic LTO Tape Drive Specifications SDLT Tape Drive Specifications SAIT Tape Drive Specifications Tape Media Specifications Bar-Code Label Specifications for Half-Inch Media Described beginning on... page 513 page 516 page 517 page 517 page 519
February 2011
512
LTO Tape Drive Specifications

This section provides specifications for the LTO drives and media supported by the library. See Tape Media Specifications on page 517 for information about the media used in the library. Notes: The specifications in this section are provided for convenience only. Refer to the tape drive documentation for the most current specifications (see LTO Ultrium Tape Drives on page 18). LTO drives and media are also referred to as Ultrium or LTO Ultrium drives and media.
LTO-5 Drive
When connecting to a Fibre Channel network, LTO-5 Fibre Channel drives will attempt to connect at 8 Gb/sec., but will auto-negotiate down to 4 Gb/second, 2 Gb/second, or 1 Gb/second, depending on the requirements of the port to which the drive is connected. Note: A 1Gb interface speed will not stream an LTO-5 drive at 140MB/second.
Parameter Maximum sustained transfer Speed matching range Average file access time Encryption capability WORM capability MTBF Uncorrected error rate Power consumption rate a, b Specification 140 MB/second, native 280 MB/second, compressed 40 MB/second to 140 MB/second 50 seconds AES 256-bit Yes 250,000 hours at 100% duty cycle 1 x 10 17 bits Read/write: 27 watts typical Idle: 7.5 watts
a. Assuming a 2:1 compression ratio. Compression throughput depends on the type of data. b. This is a per-drive value. Total sustained transfer rate for the library depends on the number of drives installed in the library.
February 2011
513
LTO-4 Drive
When connecting to a Fibre Channel network, LTO-4 Fibre Channel drives will attempt to connect at 4 Gb/sec., but will auto-negotiate down to 2 Gb/sec. or 1 Gb/sec., depending on the requirements of the port to which the drive is connected.
Parameter Sustained transfer rate
a, b
Specification SCSI: 70 MB/sec native (140 MB/sec compressed); 504 GB/hour Fibre Channel: 120 MB/sec native (240 MB/sec compressed); 864 GB/h 65 seconds AES 256-bit Yes 250,000 hours at 100% duty cycle 1 x 10 17 bits SCSI: 26.5 watts typical read/write Idle: 9.5 watts Fibre Channel: 29.5 watts typical read/write Idle: 12.5 watts
Average file access time Encryption capability WORM capability MTBF Uncorrected error rate Power consumption
a. Compression throughput depends on the type of data. b. This is a per-drive value. Total sustained transfer rate for the library depends on the number of drives installed in the library.
Encryption with LTO-5 and LTO-4 Drives

The encryption-enabled LTO-5 and LTO-4 tape drives use the same encryption algorithm, ensuring that media encrypted by an LTO-4 drive can be read and decrypted by an encryption-enabled LTO-5. Note: LTO-3 media does not support encryption. The encryption performed by the drives has minimal latency to permit encryption set-up. However, the rate at which data is transferred from the host is not affected, since the encryption and decryption capability resides in the drive. The BlueScale Encryption and key management interface support for drive-based encryption is documented in the BlueScale Encryption User Guide. If you choose not to use BlueScale key management with drivebased encryption, you must use a key management application (if any are available that support LTO encryption) that runs on a separate host.
February 2011
514
Drive-based encryption highlights: AES-256 data encryption with a secret 256-bit encryption key is used to encrypt and decrypt data. The key is not retrievable from the encryption core and is automatically erased during the unload process; software is required to extract the key, keep it secure, and provide management tools to track, store, use, and delete keys as appropriate. Note: The encryption performed by encryption-enabled LTO-4 and LTO-5 drives is not compatible with the encryption performed by an encryption-enabled F-QIP. If the library has encryptionenabled F-QIPs and encryption-enabled LTO-4 or LTO-5 drives installed, both can be used for encryption. However, the two types of encryption must be used in separate encryption-enabled partitions. Data from the host is encrypted only after it is compressed. Data is encrypted at full line speed in hardware in the drive, so it has no effect on drive performance. To confirm that data is encrypted properly during write operations, the drive automatically decrypts after encrypting to provide on-the-fly checking that data is, in fact, encrypted correctly. If you choose not to use drive-based encryption, you can take advantage of the drives backward read/write capabilities (see LTO Read/Write Compatibility on page 518).
LTO-3 Drives Important

The LTO-3 drive is no longer available for purchase. Parameter Sustained transfer rate a,b Average file access time Encryption capability WORM capability MTBF Uncorrected error rate Power consumption Specification 80 MB/sec native (160 MB/sec compressed) 54 seconds No Yes 250,000 hours at 100% duty cycle 1 x 10 17 bits 28 watts typical (49 watts maximum)
February 2011
515
LTO-2 Drives
Parameter Sustained transfer rate Encryption capability WORM capability MTBF Uncorrected error rate Power consumption
a, b
Specification 35 MB/sec native (70 MB/sec compressed) 65 seconds No No 250,000 hours at 100% duty cycle 1 x 10 17 bits 29 watts typical (50 watts maximum)
Average file access time
SDLT Tape Drive Specifications

Important
SDLT drives are no longer available for purchase.
Note: The specifications in this section are provided for convenience only. Refer to the tape drive documentation for the most current specifications (see SDLT Tape Drives on page 18). The library supports Quantums SDLT 600 tape drives.The SDLT 600 tape drive is backward compatible with the following DLT media: Super DLTtape II: read/write Super DLTtape I written on SDLT 320 and SDLT 220 drives: read only DLTtape VS1 written on DLT VS160: read only
Parameter Tape capacity
a
Specification 300 GB native 36 MB/sec native (72 MB/sec compressed) 79 seconds 250,000 hours at 100% duty cycle 1 x 10 17 bits read 32 watts typical, streaming/writing
Sustained transfer rate b, c Average file access time MTBF Uncorrected error rate Power consumption
a. Using Super DLTtape II. Actual capacity depends on the type of data. b. Compression throughput depends on the type of data. c. This is a per-drive value. Total sustained transfer rate for the library depends on the number of drives installed in the library.
February 2011
516
SAIT Tape Drive Specifications

Important
SAIT tape drives are no longer available for purchase.
Note: The specifications in this section are provided for convenience only. Refer to the tape drive documentation for the most current specifications (see SAIT Tape Drives on page 18).
Parameter Tape capacity a Sustained transfer rate MTBF Uncorrected error rate Power consumption
a, b
Specification 500 GB native (1.3 TB compressed) 30 MB/sec native (78 MB/sec compressed) 45 seconds 500,000 hours at 100% duty cycle Less than 10 17 bits 0.7A at 100V AC, 0.4A at 240V
Average file access time
a. Assumes 2.6:1 compression with ALDC. Compression throughput and capacity depend on the type of data. b. This is a per-drive value. Total sustained transfer rate for the library depends on the number of drives installed in the library.
Tape Media Specifications

This section provides specifications for the tape media supported by the library. See Media and Accessories on page 495 for information about ordering media for your library.
Environmental Requirements
The following table lists the specifications for storage temperature and other environmental requirements for tape media. Do not allow the temperature and humidity in the storage environment to fluctuate.
Specification a Temperature Relative humidity Wet bulb temperature Operating b +50 F to +113 F (+10 C to +45 C) 10% to 80% +79 F (+26 C) Operational Storage +61 F to +90 F (+16C to +32C) 20% to 80% +79 F (+26 C) Archival Storage +61 F to +77 F (+16C to +25C) 20% to 50% +79 F (+26 C) Shipping 9 F to +120 F (23 C to +49 C) 5% to 80% +79 F (+26 C)
a. All specifications are subject to change without notice. b. The upper limit applies to the drive, not the library. Be sure there is adequate air flow around library at all times.
February 2011
517
LTO Tape Media Specifications

The following table shows the capacities of the different generations of LTO Ultrium data cartridges.
LTO Media Generation LTO-5 LTO-5 WORM LTO-4 LTO-4 WORM LTO-3 LTO-3 WORM LTO-2 LTO-1
b
Native Capacity (Compressed Capacity a ) 1.5 TB (3 TB) 800 GB (1.6 TB) 400 GB (800 GB) 200 GB (400 GB) 100 GB (200 GB) Not applicable
LTO Cleaning
a. Assuming a 2:1 compression ratio. The compressed capacity depends on the type of data. b. LTO-1 media is not supported by the library.
LTO Read/Write Compatibility

The following table shows the media read/write compatibility for each LTO drive generation supported by the library.
Drive Generation a LTO-5 LTO-4 LTO-3 LTO-2 LTO-5 Media Read/write Not supported Not supported Not supported LTO-4 Media Read/write Read/write Not supported Not supported LTO-3 Media Read only Read/write Read/write Not supported LTO-2 media Not supported Read only Read/write Read/write
a. LTO-1 is not supported by the library.
LTO WORM Media

Certain records retention and data security applications require a Write Once, Read Many (WORM) method for storing data on tape. The LTO-5, LTO-4, and LTO-3 drives enable WORM support when a WORM tape cartridge is loaded into the drive. WORM Media Requirements Because standard read/write media are incompatible with the WORM feature, a specially formatted WORM tape cartridge is required. Each WORM cartridge has a unique, worldwide cartridge identifier (WWCID), which comprises the unique CM chip serial number and the unique tape media serial number.
February 2011
518
Data Security on WORM Media Certain built-in security measures help ensure that the data written on a WORM cartridge does not become compromised, for example: The format of a WORM tape cartridge is unlike that of standard read/ write media. This unique format prevents a drive that lacks WORMcapable firmware from writing on a WORM tape cartridge. When the drive senses a WORM cartridge, the firmware prohibits the changing or altering of user data already written on the tape. The firmware keeps track of the last appendable point on the tape.
LTO Cleaning Cartridges

The LTO cleaning cartridges are valid for 50 uses. Do not rewind and reuse the material in a cleaning cartridge. Reusing the material may redistribute contaminants previously removed from the tape path. If all of the cleaning material has been used, discard the cartridge and use a new cleaning cartridge.
Bar-Code Label Specifications for Half-Inch Media

The bar-code labeling scheme used on Spectra Logic certified media uses the bar-code symbology of USS-39. You can obtain a complete description and definition of this symbology from the Automatic Identification Manufacturers (AIM) specification, the Uniform Symbol Specification (USS-39), and the ANSI MH10.8M-1993 ANSI Barcode specification. The bar-code label must be applied to the cartridge so that it fits within the label recess on the edge of the cartridge without curling up on the sides or ends. The label must be oriented so that bar-code characters are along the edge closest to the hub side of the cartridge. The label can have humanreadable alphanumeric characters printed along the top edge of the label, above the bar code. See Detailed Specifications on page 520 for specific information about label, the characters used on the label, and spacing.
February 2011
519
Figure 1 shows the dimensional specifications for labels with the alphanumeric characters above the bar code.
Important
The bar-code label must only have one bar code on it. If multiple bar codes are present, the librarys bar-code scanner cannot determine which one to process when scanning the cartridge.
Alphanumeric characters
Bar code start character
Bar code stop character
17 mm +0/0.8
11.1 mm, minimum
74.088 mm, nominal

Quiet Zone 4.32 mm, minimum
79 mm +0/.8
Quiet Zone 4.32 mm, minimum
Figure 1 Bar code specifications for half-inch media; alphanumeric characters on top. Note: When using bar-code labels with alphanumeric characters along the bottom edge, the label must be positioned so that bar code is at least 13.72 mm below the top edge of the cartridge to ensure that the bar-code reader can read the label.
Detailed Specifications
For the official IBM bar-code label specification, see www-01.ibm.com/ support/docview.wss?uid=ssg1S7000429&aid=1. Unless otherwise specified, tolerances are X.XXX 0.127 mm, X.XXX 0.762 mm.
Bar Code Element Specifications

Minimum symbol height is 11.1 mm, measured to the inside of the labels edge. The wide-to-narrow ratio is 2.75. The narrow element width is 0.432 mm +0.03 mm or 0.076 mm. The nominal width of the wide spaces and bars is 1.188 mm. The inter-character gap is 0.432mm +0.03/0.076 mm. The minimum quiet zone at the beginning and end of a printed barcode string is 4.32 mm (10 times the narrow element width).
February 2011
520
The total nominal bar-code string length (including quiet zones) is 74.088 mm. The edge of the bar code is the edge of the printed area associated with the bar. The edge roughness is the transition encountered as a horizontal line is moved vertically from all black to all white. The edge roughness maximum is 0.038 mm. Variation between all bars, white and black, must be less than 0.0381 mm.
Physical Label Specifications

Label stock must fit within the label recess on the face of the cartridge without curling up on the sides or ends (79 mm X 17 mm +0/0.8). Minimum length sufficient for the quiet zones, start-stop, and data characters (nominal 74.088 mm). Minimum width no less than 1.5 mm narrower than the cartridge label recess width. Corners are cut with a 1.5 mm radius. Maximum label thickness, including the RFID tag if present, together with any associated layers and adhesives cannot exceed 0.40 mm. The label and adhesive must have an environmental performance to match or exceed the environmental specifications of the cartridge to which it is applied.
Bar-Code Data
The library supports bar-code data strings consisting of a start character, from 1 to 16 alphanumeric characters, an optional checksum character, and the stop character. Quiet zones precede and follow the start and stop characters. The bar-code data string on standard Spectra Logic bar-code labels consists of a start character, eight alphanumeric characters, a checksum character, and the stop character. Quiet zones precede and follow the start and stop characters. The first six (6) characters following the start character can be any combination of upper case A-Z or 0-9 (for example, ABC123) to identify the cartridge Volume Serial Number. The last two (2) characters are the media identifier and indicate the LTO cartridge Media Type (for example, L for LTO and 4 for an LTO-4 cartridge). The bar-code string can be printed in either direction on the label and must begin and end with a valid start/stop character ( * ). The label must be printed so that bar-code data is positioned along the edge of the label that will be closest to the hub side of the cartridge. The AIM Uniform Symbol USS-39 specification provides detailed information about the format of the start character, the series of characters that make up the bar-code data, and the stop character.
521
Human Readable Text

Human readable text is allowed, provided there is no conflict or interference with the automation code. This text must include the bar-code data, but can also include additional text. The format, colors, and location of the human readable characters is up to the customer and label vendor.
Volume Identifier Formats

The volume identifier field consists of six (6) left justified alphanumeric characters as described in the SCSI-3 Medium Changer Commands (SMC) ANSI NCITS 314-199X specification. The volume identifier only uses ASCII characters A-Z and 0-9. The use of CLN and DG{space} at the beginning of the volume identifier is reserved. The volume identifier CLNvnn is reserved for cleaning cartridges. When a drive requires cleaning, it requests a specific type of cleaning cartridge. The v field is an alphanumeric field to identify cleaning cartridge applications, "U" for Universal Cleaning Cartridges or a drive unique identifier. The nn alphanumeric field is used to track individual cleaning cartridge activity (that is, usage and life). The volume identifier DG{space}vnn is reserved for diagnostic and service cartridges. The two character media identifier Lg immediately follows the volume identifier. The L identifies the cartridge as LTO The g represents and alphanumeric character that indicates the generation and capacity of the LTO cartridge. In IBM LTO tape drives, the value of the media identifier on cleaning cartridges is ignored, although a valid value must be present.
February 2011
522
RXT Drive and Media Pack Specifications
RXT DRIVE AND MEDIA PACK SPECIFICATIONS

Important
RXT drives and media packs are no longer available for purchase.
Note: The specifications in this section are subject to change without notice. This section provides the basic specifications for Spectra Logic RXT150 drive and media packs supported by the library. RXT drives and media packs bring RAID-protected disk storage to the traditional tape library environment without adding complexity to the backup environment.
Topic RXT Drives RXT Media Packs Described beginning on... page 523 page 524
RXT Drives
RXT150 drives are the same size as a standard full-height tape drive. They mount into a drive sled similar to the ones used for the tape drives. The RXT drives use an internal RAID controller to write data to RXT media packs.
Transfer Rates
The drives in an RXT media pack achieve native transfer rates of up to 110MB/sec when configured as RAID 0 in an optimal environment (that is, with an optimal data source and optimal performance from the server connected to the RXT drive). The RAID level configured on the RXT media pack, its network configuration, and the use of data compression will affect the transfer rate. Optimizing Performance on page 481 for information about obtaining the best possible performance.
February 2011
523
Physical Specifications
Parameter Reliability Power consumption Specification 100,000 media insertion and removal cycles 20 watts, typical 55 watts, maximum
Environment Specifications
The following table lists the specifications for storage temperature and other environmental requirements for RXT drives. Do not allow the temperature and humidity in the storage environment to fluctuate.
Operating Environmental Specification Humidity Ambient temperature Altitude 20% to 80% (non-condensing) 32 F to 104 F (0 C to 40 C) Sea level to 10,000 feet (0 to 3,048 meters)
Storinga and Shipping (Non-Operating) Environment Specification Temperature Altitude 40 F to 140 F (4 C to 60 C) Sea level to 40,000 feet (12,192 meters)
a. The drive is in its original packaging. The packaging is designed to protect the drive from condensation caused by extreme temperature variations of 59 F (15 C) or more. When the drive is moved from a cold storage environment to a warm operating environment, it must be acclimated in its packaging for at least 24 hours before opening to prevent serious condensation damage from occurring.
RXT Media Packs

RXT media packs can be removed and stored as appropriate for your backup strategy, while still providing the reliability of disk and the redundancy of RAID (Redundant Array of Independent Disks). For a brief overview of RAID, see RAID Overview on page 479.
February 2011
524
Capacity and Performance Specifications

RXT Media Gold RXT Media Capacity options a RAID options Mounting speed Drive RPM MCBF Uncorrectable error rates Power consumption Silver RXT Media Capacity options a RAID options Mounting speed Drive RPM MCBF Uncorrectable error rates Power
a. Native, uncompressed capacity.
Specification 6 TB (12 x 500 GB per drive) 1.2 TB (12 x 100 GB per drive) RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5 40 seconds 5400 25,000 cycles 1 in 1014 27 watts typical, 32 watts peak 2 TB (2 x 1 TB per drive) RAID 0, RAID 1 35 seconds 7200 25,000 cycles 1 in 1014 10 watts typical, 17 watts peak
Physical Specifications
Parameter Dimensions Specification HxWxD 2.4in x 4.6in x 10.1in 6.1cm x 21.1cm x 25.4cm 10,000 media insertion and removal cycles
Reliability
February 2011
525
Environmental Specifications
The following table lists the environmental specifications for RXT media packs.
Specificationsa Humidityb Humidity gradient Temperature Maximum temperature gradient Maximum wet bulb temperature Altitude Operating Environment 10% to 80% Less than 10% per hour 50 F to 90 F (10 C to 32 C) 59 F (15 C) per hour 84 F (29 C) 984 feet to 9,842 feet (300 to 3,000 meters) 84 F (29 C) 984 to 39,370 feet (300m to 12,000 m) 60 F to 77 F (16 C to 25 C) Storing (Non-Operating) Environment 20% to 50%
a. Specifications are subject to change at any time without notice. b. Non-condensing.
February 2011
526
APPENDIX F
Regulatory & Safety Standards
The Spectra T950 library complies with the safety and regulatory agency standards listed below when installed by a Spectra Logic Certified engineer or third-party provider.
EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
We: Spectra Logic Corporation 6285 Lookout Road Boulder, CO 80301 USA declare under sole responsibility that the Spectra T590 Library to which this declaration relates, meets the essential health and safety requirements and is in conformity with the EU Directives listed below using the relevant section of the EU standards and other normative documents listed in the following table.
Directive EN 55022: 2006 + A1: 2007 ANSI 63.4: 2003 Specification Information technology equipment. Radio disturbance characteristics. Limits and methods of measurement Methods of Measurement of Radio-Noise Emissions from LowVoltage Electrical and Electronic Equipment in the Range of 9 kHz to 40 GHz See FCC Notice on page 528 Specification for radio disturbance and immunity measuring apparatus and methods. Radio disturbance and immunity measuring apparatus. Limits and methods of measurements of radio interference characteristics of information technology equipment Spectrum Management and Telecommunications Policy Interference-Causing Equipment Standard
CFR 47, FCC Part 15 CISPR 16-1: 2002
CISPER 22: 2006 ICES-003 All Class A
527
Appendix F Regulatory & Safety Standards Directive EN 55024: 1998 + A1:2001 + A2: 2003 Specification
Korean Regulatory Compliance
Information Technology Equipment Immunity Characteristics Limits and Methods of Measurement IEC 61000-4-2 Ed. 2.0, 2008-12: Electrostatic Discharge IEC 61000-4-3 Ed. 3.1, 2008-04: Radiated RF Immunity IEC 61000-4-4 Ed. 2.0, 2004-07:Electrical Fast Transient/Burst IEC 61000-4-5 Ed. 2.0, 2005-11: Surge Immunity IEC 61000-4-6 Ed. 2.2, 2006-05: Conducted RF Immunity IEC 61000-4-8 Ed. 1.1, 2001-03: Power Frequency H-field Immunity IEC 61000-4-11 Ed. 2.0, 2004-03: Voltage Dips and Interrupts Power Line Harmonics, Class A Power Line Flicker RoHS. Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.
EN 61000-3-2: 2006 EN 61000-3-3: 1995 + A1: 2001 + A2: 2006 EU Directive 2002/95/EC
KOREAN REGULATORY COMPLIANCE

The T950 library has been tested and approved for the KCC mark by the Korean government.
FCC NOTICE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to CFR 47, Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at the users own expense. The CE marking has been affixed on this device according to Article 10 of the EU Directive 90/336/EEC. Note: To meet CE certification requirements, you must be running your library on an uninterruptable power supply.
February 2011
528
Safety Standards and Compliance
SAFETY STANDARDS AND COMPLIANCE

The Spectra T950 library complies with the following domestic and international product safety standards. IEC 60950-1 UL 60950-1 (Safety of Information Technology Equipment based on IEC 60950) CSA C22.2 No. 950 (Canada: cUL Mark) EN 60950-1 (European Union [EU]) Low Voltage Directive (EU: CE Mark). The Spectra T950 library complies with all safety-relevant provisions referring to: Protection against electrical hazards Protection against hazards such as: Mechanical hazards Fire hazards Noise Vibration
UL Accreditation
The safety issues of this information technology equipment type have been evaluated by a government-accredited European third-party organization, such as UL Demko International. The CE marking has been affixed on this device according to Article 10 of the EU Directive 90/336/EEC. Note: To meet CE certification requirements, you must be running your library on an uninterruptable power supply. This Mass Storage Device has been evaluated and determined to comply with the Safety Requirements of the International Standard for Information Technology Equipment, IEC 60950-1, First Edition. The evaluation was conducted by a Underwriters Laboratories (UL). UL participates in the CB Scheme as a National Certification Body certified by the IECEE.
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
The Spectra T950 library complies with the following domestic and international hazardous materials directives.
February 2011
529
Hazardous Materials
Waste of Electronic and Electrical Equipment (WEEE) Directive

Note: For information on recycling your Spectra library, please check the Spectra Logic web site. European Union users should contact their local waste administration for WEEE collection instructions for this product. The WEEE symbol on the back of this product indicates that this product meets the European Directive 2000/96/EC on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment, known as the WEEE directive. This directive, only applicable in European Union countries, indicates that this product should not be disposed of with normal unsorted municipal waste. Within participating European Union countries, special collection, recycling, and disposal arrangement have been established for this product. At the end of life, the product user should dispose of this product using special WEEE collection systems. These special systems mitigate the potential affects on the environment and human health that can result from hazardous substances that may be contained in this product.
Restriction of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment (RoHS)

The RoHS marking indicates that this product is in compliance with European Council Directive 2002/95/EC, on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.
February 2011
530
Hazardous Materials
Measures for the Administration of the Control of Pollution by Electronic Information Products (China)
T950 (Pb) 1 X X IBM LTO-3 X IBM LTO-4 X IBM LTO-5 X Camera 1. O O O O O
1 1,8 1,4
(Hg) O O O O
(Cd) 2 X O O O
(Cr(VI)) O O O O
(PBB) O O O O
(PBDE) O O O O
2.
76/769/ECC
91/338/EE
3. MCV 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 5.0 3.2 0.35%
Deca-PBDE
Deca-PBDE
0.4%
4.0%
February 2011
531
Index
A
AC power breakers, main or drive frame 34 connecting to library 34 cord and connector types 506 cord locks, installing 443 to 444 electrical shock warning 4 specifications 506 status LED 34 accessing air filter 425 to 427 interior components 385 to 386 user interface 78 to 79 accessories camera 499 media and bar-code labels 495 purchasing Certified Media 495 USB drive 500 activation key code, entering 289 to 290 adding a new user 291 address, drives direct-attach FC 235 E-QIP-attached 248 to 250 F-QIP-attached 243 address, Ethernet IP address camera 312 to 315 E-QIP ports 248 to 250 library (LCM) 298 to 300 address, Fibre Channel ports direct-attach drives 235 F-QIP, direct-attach FC drive partition 237 F-QIP, SCSI drive partition 242 to 243 address, SMTP 301 Administrator group default user name and password 79 privileges 79 agency declarations EU Declaration of Conformity 527 to 528 FCC notice 528 regulatory 527 to 528 RoHS 530 RoHS, China 531 safety 529 WEEE 530 air filter location 26 replacing 425 to 427 alarms, configuring in AutoSupport 272 to 273 architecture Auto Drive Clean 53 to 54 cleaning partition 52 connectivity 59 to 65 controller failover 66 to 67 direct-attach FC LTO drive failover 68 entry/exit pool 52 free pool 52 partitions 49 to 52 storage pool 53 asterisk (*) bar code in MLM reports 170 bar codes in MLM record 206 expired cleaning cartridge 127 in password field 291 attention required notification drive health 212 media health 195 system 85 auto discovery for MLM-enabled media, enabling 173 to 174 Auto Drive Clean cleaning partition description 52 configuring a cleaning partition 253 to 255 description 53 to 54 enabling 231 requirements for using 53, 137 using to manually clean a drive 450 auto-negotiate, F-QIP fibre mode 237, 243 auto-save configuration file description 302, 308 enable email 302 to 303 using to restore library 378 to 383 AutoSend profile configuring 270 including SpectraGuard Support 270 AutoSupport Log (ASL) description 265 sending automatically 274 sending manually 275 to 279 See also Log Forwarding AutoSupport, configuring AutoSend profile 270 creating or modifying profiles 268 to 271 critical alarm notification 272 to 273 deleting profiles 272 log set forwarding recipient 274 mail recipients 267 requirements 267 AutoSupport, using creating a new HHM ticket 103 to 106 creating a new support ticket 275 to 279 overview 264 to 266 updating a ticket 279 to 280 average status, media health 195
532
Index B
B
backup encryption keys 351 to 355 library configuration, automatic 308 library configuration, manual 308 to 311 MLM and DLM databases 201 to 203 backup software cleaning cartridge accessibility in cleaning partition 129 compatibility 510 drive cleaning without Auto Drive Clean 129 importing media into new partition 133 to 137 PostScan blackout periods during backup window 184 restoring encrypted data 357 to 360 updating media inventory 159 backups, continuing while accessing the library interior 385 cleaning tape drives 448 resetting the RCM 371 updating drive firmware 458 updating library firmware 435 using the USB drive 116 bar-code labels asterisk (*) in Inventory screen 127 asterisk (*) in MLM record 206 asterisk (*) in MLM reports 170 CLN prefix for cleaning cartridges 129 configuring reporting 320 to 323 custom sequences 495 determining type 323 to 324 media 47 placement on cartridges 129 requirements for cleaning partition 138
bar-code labels (continued) role in maintaining the library inventory 125 specifications 519 to 522 TeraPack magazine 47 best practices encryption passwords 340 entry/exit pool 475 export and protect encryption keys 351 to 356 Gigabit Ethernet 485 MLM 167 to 170 protecting librarys saved data 467 to 471 RXT media 479 to 484 tape media 471 to 478 blackout period for PostScan 176 to 177 block sizes, optimizing RXT performance 481 blockages, removing 366 BlueScale Drive Lifecycle Management description 22 See also DLM BlueScale Encryption components 336 key management 355 to 356 overview 336 Professional vs. Standard edition 337 to 338 See also encryption BlueScale EnergyAudit description 22 See also power consumption BlueScale Hardware Health Monitoring description 23 See also HHM BlueScale Media Lifecycle Management description 23 See also MLM BlueScale software description 21 overview 21 to 24 version shown on status bar 86, 429 See also firmware See also user interface
BlueScale Software Support key enabling 283 to 290 expired key 434 extending or renewing 496 generating 285 to 288 required for firmware updates 283 See also library, firmware BlueScale user interface features 80 to 87 See also touch screen See also user interface See also web interface BlueScale Vision camera description 28 See also camera born on date for MLM-enabled media, definition 193 breakers, AC power description, main or drive frame 34 location 30 broadcast capacity configuring 174 to 176 description 174 bulk media exports 146 imports 140 buttons do not use keyboard Enter key 90 in status bar 85 library power 93 refresh display 85 reset, camera 375 reset, LCM or RCM 371 reset, QIP or RIM 372
C
cables AC connector types 506 Ethernet, requirements 512 Fibre Channel, requirements 511 Gigabit Ethernet, requirements 511
February 2011
533
Index C
camera, configuring enable/disable status bar icon 296 IP address, default 313 setting a fixed IP address 312 to 315 setup wizard administrator name 377 UDP broadcast discovery 376 using DHCP addressing 377 using the setup wizard 375 to 377 camera, description 28 camera, purchasing 499 camera, troubleshooting reset button 375 resetting to DHCP addressing 374 to 377 camera, using access viewer using status bar icon 113 access viewer using web browser 113 BlueScale Vision viewer application 113 to 115 connecting to network 112 Ethernet connector, location 112 overview 112 viewing documentation 115 capacity adding 289 hardware ID to purchase additional 285 in broadcast view 174 library specifications 502 on-demand, description 289, 498 TeraPack magazines 128 upgrades 289, 498 Capacity-on-Demand (CoD) See capacity See upgrades carrying cases, description 495 cartridges adding to MLM database 165, 179 to 180 asterisk (*) in MLM record 206 asterisk (*) in MLM report 170 cartridges (continued) bar-code labels 129 capacity shown in Filled Capacity bar graph 162 cleaning, import into cleaning partition 137 to 140 export/exchange 145 to 149 import into entry/exit pool 133 to 137 import into storage pool 140 to 143 initiating manual discovery 181 to 182 LTO MAM, description 162 overriding red MLM health 198 to 199 preparing for use 128 to 130 setting write-protect switch 130 Spectra Certified Media, MLM-enabled 162 See also media cautions deleting encryption keys 360 deleting partitions 262 do not rewind cleaning cartridges 448 emailing encryption keys 353 encryption key moniker length 346 executing firmware updates during backups 116, 119 hardware reconfiguration 72 label cleaning cartridges 449 lost encryption keys 347 lost encryption user password 342, 345 moving the library 4 packaging components for shipping 466 reset after firmware update 440 resetting library components 371 use approve cleaning cartridges 448 use only approved media 4 using EDU with QIP-encrypted data 350 Certified Media cleaning cartridges 166 description 494 for use with MLM 162 MLM alert 171 purchasing 495 warranty 396 See also media chambers assigning to cleaning partition 255 assigning to data partition 230 to 232 changing number in a partition 259 description 28 editing partitions 259 changing users 90 CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol), configuring 252 to 253 Check Key Files, using to validate exported key 354 cleaning cartridges asterisk (*) next to slot number 127 Born on Date report, MLM 193 Cleans Remaining report, MLM 193 CLN bar-code prefix 129 do not rewind 448 exchanging 149 to 151 expired 54, 127 Exported Media report, MLM 194 exporting 149 to 151 for LTO 519 importing into cleaning partition 137 to 140 importing with no cleaning partition 451 to 452 label when stored in library 449 MLM health status icons 195 purchasing 495 requirements 448 tracking use 452 using 448
February 2011
534
Index C
cleaning notification LTO 401 on Drive Details screen 447 SAIT 418 SDLT 415, 416 cleaning partition assign chambers 255 associating with a data partition 231 configuring 253 to 255 description 52 exchanging cleaning cartridges 149 to 151 exporting cleaning cartridges 149 to 151 for Global Spare 253 importing cleaning cartridges 137 to 140 Maintenance TeraPack requirement 129 media type 254, 255 naming 254 using for manual drive cleaning 450 cleaning tape drives 446 to 452 Cleans Remaining, MLM report 193 CoD, See capacity command processing, progress bar 87 CommVault, optimize motion with SmartMotion 226 compact flash card, See memory card compatibility between LTO and F-QIP encryption 336 host interface 511 LTO read/write 518 MLM media 178 software 510 software, using emulation 319 compliance FCC notice 528 hazardous materials directives 529 to 531 KCC 528 regulatory agency 527 to 528 safety agency 529 components front panel 26 identifiers 57 to 58 interior 27 to 29 rear panel, drive frame 30 to 35 configuration backup file auto-save, using to restore library 378 to 383 creating 308 to 310 manual, using to restore library 383 to 384 Configuration toolbar, options 82 configuration, AutoSupport configuring alarms 272 to 273 creating or modifying profiles 268 to 271 deleting profiles 272 log set forwarding 274 mail recipients 267 requirements 267 configuration, camera IP address 312 to 315, 374 to 377 configuration, DLM, enable/ disable 171 configuration, encryption assign key to partition 348 to 351 create key 345 to 347 initialization mode 344 password 344 to 345 requirements 342 configuration, library accessing the System Setup screen 282 backing up, automatic 308 backing up, manual 308 to 311 controller failover 316 to 318 date and time 297 display refresh rate 294 emulation 319 to 320 enable and configure Observatory 325 to 326 enable email for auto-save file 302 to 303 enable for StorNext 331 to 334 enable or disable metrics monitoring 297 configuration, library (continued) enable or disable Soft Power 298 firmware package servers 328 to 330 generating BlueScale Software Support key 285 to 288 IP address 298 to 300 library name, as identifier for remote access 294 mail recipients 300 to 302 restore using auto-save backup file 378 to 383 restore using manual backup file 383 to 384 Rotation Manager 330 to 331 routine maintenance option 304 settings checklist 73 SNMP 305 to 307 Syslog server IP address 295 user-based security 79 verifying backup file 310 web server port 294 configuration, MLM alerts 171 broadcast capacity 174 configure PostScan blackout periods 176 to 177 enable/disable MLM 171 Media Auto Discovery 173 to 174 non-certified media 171 configuration, partitions confirm and save settings 256 to 258 creating cleaning partitions 253 to 255 creating data partitions 223 to 253 drive visibility through E-QIP 247 drive visibility through F-QIP 241 emulation mode 319 to 320 entry/exit pool 230 to 232 E-QIP iSCSI options 250 E-QIP port IP addressing 248 to 250 F-QIP port addressing 237, 242 to 243
February 2011
535
Index D
configuration, partitions (continued) modifying 259 to 262 overview 219 to 222 robotic control path visibility 236 to 236, 240, 246 SmartMotion 226 storage pool 230 to 232 user access 235, 239, 245 configuration, system settings changing 293 to 307 defaults 294 to 297 connectivity drives 62 to 65 example of using QIPs 65 overview, using QIPs 59 to 65 QIPs, for drives 63 to 65 QIPs, for transporter 59 to 62 transporter 59 to 62 using direct-attached FC drives, example 63 using SCSI drives, example 63 to 65 See also controller failover connectors AC power, main or drive frame 34 Ethernet, camera 112 Ethernet, LCM 39 international power 507 LCM and RCM 38 network cables 511 QIP 42 RIM 44 specifications, AC power 506 USB port 38 contacting Spectra Logic 5 controller, See QIPs or RIM controller failover configuring 316 to 318 description 66 to 67 disabling 317 Controllers screen, accessing 82 cooling requirements 508 copying firmware from USB drive 119 cord locks, installing 443 to 444 cover, TeraPack magazine 473 creating an encryption key 345 Critical Alarms AutoSend profile 270 configuring in AutoSupport 272 to 273 description 265 to 266 custom bar-code labels, purchasing 495 DCM firmware description 437 version 108 default settings camera, fixed IP address 377 system configuration 294 to 297 user names and passwords 79 deleting encryption key 360 individual MLM records 205 library users 292 multiple MLM records 206 partitions 262 device drivers, updating for tape drives 461 to 462 DHCP, using for camera IP address 377 E-QIP IP address 249 library (LCM) IP address 298 to 300 diagnostics, accessing 83 DLM database backing up 201 to 203 download as XML file 216 to 217 information stored 214 to 215 restore from backup on USB 204 restore using auto-save backup file 378 to 383 DLM, enable/disable 171, 211 DLM, overview description 22 how it works 210 DLM, using drive health status 215 entry/exit pool requirement for Drive Health Verification 231 generating reports 213 to 215 health status icons 212 requirements for drive test 389 saving report 216 testing a drive 389 to 392 viewing tape usage 215
D
data compressing before encryption 515 integrity and security provided by TAP 37 library capacity 502 restoring encrypted 357 to 360 data partitions architecture 51 assign chambers and drives 230 Auto Drive Clean icon 258 configuring new 223 to 253 export/exchange media 145 to 149 importing media, entry/exit pool 134 to 137 importing media, storage pool 140 to 143 media type 225 minimum drive and slot requirements 51 naming, supported characters 225 recycling encrypted tapes 363 using Auto Drive Clean 231 databases, MLM and DLM See DLM database See MLM database date in status bar 85 setting 297 DBA description 31 location 30 power supply modules, description 33 purchasing 499 QIP-attach drives 65
February 2011
536
Index E
documentation check release notes for updated information 428 related to drive use 18 related to library use 17 typographical conventions 19 Drive Bay Assembly, See DBA drive cleaning notification LTO 401 on Drive Details screen 447 SAIT 418 SDLT 415, 416 Drive Control Module (DCM), firmware version 108 drive dump files retrieving 393 to 395 saving 395 drive expansion frame, description 55 to 56 Drive Lifecycle Management, See DLM Drive Performance Monitor enable/disable 297 using 99 to 100 drive sled, description 46 Drives screen, accessing 81, 82 drives, cleaning automatic 449 cleaning manually 450 to 452 configuring a cleaning partition 253 to 255 determine if cleaning is required 446 to 447 prepare library 448 to 449 drives, configuring adding new 463 as Global Spare 228 to 229 assigning to partitions 231 drive-based encryption 349 element addresses after installing additional 72 Fibre Channel, direct-attach partition 232 to 238 port visibility description 65 port visibility, E-QIP 247 port visibility, F-QIP 241 replacing 464 drives, configuring (continued) RXT 419 to 420 SCSI, E-QIP partition 243 to 253 SCSI, F-QIP partition 242 to 243 drives, connectivity direct-attach Fibre Channel 63 QIP-attached SCSI 63 to 65 supported interfaces 46 drives, firmware current version 108, 455 device drivers 453, 461 to 462 requirements for using firmware update tape 459 update using firmware tape 459 to 460 update using ITDT 459 drives, general information descriptions 45 to 46 purchasing upgrades 499 related documentation 18 supported types 45 drives, monitoring with DLM generating reports 213 to 215 saving a report 216 drives, specifications environmental, RXT 524 heat dissipation 508 performance, LTO 513 to 516 performance, SAIT 517 performance, SDLT 516 read/write compatibility, LTO generations 518 drives, troubleshooting all types 396 cartridge in Global Spare following a reset or powercycle 365 DLM tape usage 215 drive errors, reported by DLM 215 host cannot access drive 397 LTO 398 to 414 power-cycling 388 resetting 388 retrieving dump files 393 to 395 drives, troubleshooting (continued) SAIT LEDs 417 SDLT 415 to 416 sense code lookup 396 serial number 108 test using DLM 389 to 392 using Knowledge Base 396 drives, using activating Global Spare drive 120 to 122 DLM health status icons 212 DLM monitoring 212 to 215 Global Spare icons 122 identifiers in BlueScale interface 58 LTO encryption compatibility 336 reclaiming a Global Spare 122 to 123 viewing performance metrics 99 to 100 viewing status 108 WWN assigned to FC drive 109 dual AC power module location 30
E
EE chambers, See entry/exit pool EE pool, See entry/exit pool EE port, See TAP email configuring recipients 300 to 302 drive dump results 395 enabling for auto-save file 302 to 303 Spectra Logic offices 5 trace results 369 See also mail recipients emulation changes to STK L700 emulation mode 319 configuring 319 to 320 description 319 enabling options 283 to 290
February 2011
537
Index E
encryption BlueScale Encryption overview 336 configuring 342 to 347 data compression 515 default password 340 deleting key 360 drive-based 339 enabling for F-QIP partitions 350 exporting key 351 to 355 initialization mode 344 to 345 library-based 339 password to access 340 performed by F-QIP 43 performed by LTO drives 514 read/write unencrypted tapes 128 requirements for using 342 restoring encrypted data 357 to 360 reusing encrypted tapes 361 to 363 using direct-attach drives 349 using EDU with QIP-encrypted data 360 using partitions to manage 51 encryption key assigning to a partition 348 to 351 creating a moniker 345 to 347 deleting 360 export before deleting 360 exporting 351 to 355 guidelines for protecting 355 to 356 importing using USB drive 358 importing using web interface 359 to 360 password to import/ export 340 protect against lost 347 rules for creating monikers 346 validating exported 354 verifying backup 354 EnergyAudit description 22 See also power consumption entering information using external keyboard 91 using soft keyboard 91 using the web interface 90 entry/exit pool best practices 475 configuring 230 to 232 configuring for a partitions 231 DLM Drive Health Verification requirements 231 exporting media 145 to 148 importing media 133 to 137 loading empty magazines 143 to 144 partition requirements 219 preparing for use 143 to 144 recycling encrypted tapes 363 understanding 52 viewing inventory 125 to 127 entry/exit port See entry/exit pool See TAP environmental specifications library, operating 509 library, shipping and storing 509 RXT drives 524 RXT media 526 tape media 517 E-QIP connectors 42 description, Gigabit Ethernet 43 drive visibility 247 reset button 372 E-QIP, partition configuration CHAP settings 252 to 253 Ethernet protocol 244 iSCSI configuration options 250 port addressing 248 to 250 port visibility, drives 247 error codes for drive troubleshooting 396 for library troubleshooting 367 LTO-2 drives 410 to 414 LTO-3, LTO-4, and LTO-5 drives 402 to 409 error codes (continued) RXT drives 419 to 420 SDLT drives 415, 417 error condition drives, reported by DLM 215 HHM threshold, status notification 87 media health 195 system, status notification 85 error messages for library 97 LTO drive cleaning notification 401 SAIT drive cleaning notification 418 SDLT drive cleaning notification 415, 416 Ethernet connector camera 112 description 39 E-QIP, location 42 LCM and RCM, location 38 using on RCM 39 Ethernet network camera IP address 312 to 315 configuring library web server port settings 294 E-QIP IP address 248 to 250 E-QIP iSCSI options 250 library (LCM) IP address 298 to 300 Ethernet protocol used by E-QIP 244 EU Declaration of Conformity 527 to 528 events, configuring alarms 272 to 273 expansion frames description 55 to 56 purchasing 499 Exported Media report, MLM 194 exporting encryption key 351 to 355 media, Advanced Import/ Export 152 exporting controller definition (QIP or RIM) 227 port addressing, direct-attach FC drive partition 237
February 2011
538
Index F
exporting controller (continued) port addressing, E-QIP-attach SCSI drive partition 248 port addressing, F-QIP-attach SCSI drive partition 242 to 243 exporting/exchanging media from cleaning partition 149 to 151 from data partition 145 to 149 Fibre Channel drives connection requirements 46 direct-attach, loop IDs 235 drive sled connectors 46 in direct-attach partitions 237 WWN 109 Fibre Channel ports drives, location 46 F-QIP, location 42 RIM, location 44 Fibre Channel QIP, See F-QIP fibre mode for F-QIP, partition configuration 237, 243 filter, replacing 425 to 427 firmware tape, using 459 to 460 firmware, drives current version 455 discontinue backups & empty drives 458 firmware update tape, requirements for use 459 prepare for update 453 to 457 updating RXT drives 482 updating using firmware tape 459 to 460 updating using ITDT 459 firmware, library BlueScale Software Support key required for updates 283, 285 check release notes for updated information 428 configuring a package server 328 to 330 current version 86, 429 current version on Technical Support portal 432 downloading 433 for individual components 430 generating BlueScale Software Support key 285 to 288 managing packages 442 to 443 Package Update screen 328 preparing to update 432 storing on USB drive 433 support requirements for updates 72, 428, 434, 497 supported packages 428 firmware, library (continued) updating, advanced procedure 440 to 442 updating, standard procedure 435 to 440 upgrade policy 497 upgrading from a USB drive 437 upgrading, best practices 428 See also BlueScale Software Support key flash codes LTO-2 410 to 414 LTO-3, LTO-4, and LTO-5 402 to 409 SAIT 417 SDLT 415 F-QIP connectors 42 description 43 drive visibility 241 enabling encryption 350 fabric mode 242 to 243 fabric mode, robotics 237 loop mode 237, 243 purchasing 499 reset button 372 F-QIP, partition configuration auto-negotiate fibre mode 237, 243 port addressing 237, 242 to 243 port visibility, drives 241 using direct-attach FC drives 232 to 238 using SCSI drives 238 to 243 frames description 55 to 56 maximum number 55 free pool contains magazines after configuration restore 381 description 52 front panel components 26 FullScan description 186 enable/disable 234
F
fabric, address settings direct-attach drives 235 exporting F-QIP 242 to 243 F-QIP-attached SCSI drives 242 to 243 loop ID, F-QIP-attach SCSI drive 242 to 243 robotics 237 See also network failover configuring QIPs 316 to 318 configuring using dual-port LTO FC drives 68 power supplies 499 power supplies, drive frames 34 power supplies, robotics 32 QIPs, controller failover operation 66 to 67 robotic control path 222 fax numbers, Spectra Logic 5 FC drive, See Fibre Channel drives features BlueScale user interface overview 21 to 24 library hardware 24 to 25 user interface 80 to 87 Fibre Channel cable requirements 511 connectivity 59 to 65 protocol support 511 WWN assigned to FC drive 109 WWN assigned to FC partition 110 to 111
February 2011
539
Index G
G
gateway address setting for E-QIP 249 setting for library 299 General Status screen, accessing 81 General toolbar options 81 Gigabit Ethernet best practices 485 cable requirements 511 protocol support 511 using DHCP addressing 249 using iSNS 250 See also E-QIP See also IP SANs See also iSCSI Global Spare drive backup application guidelines 120 cartridge in drive following reset 365 cleaning 253 cleaning during PostScan operations 188 configuration requirements 228 configuring 228 to 229 description 23 partition requirements 229 PostScan requirements 229 reclaiming 122 to 123 status icons 122 use requirements 120 using 120 to 122 good status drive health 212 media health 195 system 85 grouped media, advantages 48 groups, library users 79 guidelines MLM 167 to 170 protecting encryption keys 355 to 356 protecting librarys saved data 467 to 471 using tape media 471 to 478
H
handling media best practices, RXT 483 best practices, tape media 472 hard address for direct-attach FC drives 235 F-QIP 237, 243 Hardware Health Monitoring See HHM hardware ID locating 284 to 285 required to create Technical Support portal account 422 required to purchase options 285 See also serial number hardware, reconfiguration caution 72 hazardous materials directives, compliance 529 to 531 heat dissipation 508 HHM creating an AutoSupport ticket 103 to 106 description 23 icon 87 using to monitor library health 102 viewing library health data 106 to 108
I
IBM LTO, See LTO icons camera 87 DLM drive health 212 enable/disable the camera icon 296 Error condition 85 Global Spare drive 122 Information 85 keyboard 88 Maintenance 87 MLM media health 195
icons (continued) Notice 85 refresh button 85 status bar 85 Switch User 90 system messages 85 System OK 85 system status 85 identifiers for drives 58 for QIPs and RIMs 58 used by BlueScale interface 57 to 58 Import/Export TeraPack Cases screen Advanced Import/Export 152 available options 142 import media to cleaning partition 139 import media to entry/exit pool 135 using to export media 147, 149 using to import media 142 importing an encryption key using USB drive 358 using web interface 359 to 360 importing cleaning cartridges into cleaning partition 137 to 140 into data partition 451 to 452 importing media bulk imports 140 individual tapes 133 to 137 into a cleaning partition 137 to 140 into storage pool 141 to 143 TAP operation 136 using Advanced Import/ Export 152 using entry/exit pool 133 to 137 improper packaging, charges for damage 466 initial configuration, overview 70 initialization mode, encryption configuring 344 to 345 secure mode, no encryption on startup 338
February 2011
540
Index K
initialization mode, encryption (continued) security options 338 standard mode, encryption enabled on startup 338 initialization, library power-on 93 installing additional drives, affect on element addresses 72 installation overview 69 new drive 463 interfaces connectivity 59 to 65 drive connections 42 to 43 Fibre Channel 511 Gigabit Ethernet 511 library connections, QIPs 42 to 43 library connections, RIM 44 supported for host 511 USB 512 interior components accessing 385 to 386 descriptions 27 to 29 Internet, IPv6 support, description 299 interoperability, software 510 inventory backup software, updating after an import 159 bar-code information 47 description 125 during FullScan operation 186, 187 expired cleaning cartridge 127 locating media 154 to 156 managing dense storage 47 moving media within a partition 154 to 158 storing in NVRAM 47 viewing 125 to 127 Inventory screen, accessing 81 IP address camera 312 to 315 displayed on status bar 86 E-QIP 248 to 250 library (LCM), configuring 298 to 300 Syslog server IP address 295 IP SANs, best practices 485 IPv6 support, description 299 iSCSI best practices 485 E-QIP configuration options 250 See also Gigabit Ethernet iSNS, using in an E-QIP partition 250 ITDT download and install 454 to 455 using to update LTO drive firmware 459 labels, bar-code (continued) placement on cartridges 129 RXT media 484 specifications 519 to 522 LC description 35 web server 41 See also operator panel See also user interface See also web interface LCM capturing traces 368 to 370 configuration data on memory card 39 configuring IP address 298 to 300 connecting a USB drive 117 connector locations 38 description 41 Ethernet connection 39 location 30, 40 resetting 371 routine maintenance option 304 USB port locations 117 See also LC LEDs AC power status 34 codes, SAIT drive cleaning notification 418 codes, SDLT drive cleaning notification 415, 416 LTO status 400 power supply module status, drive frame 34 power supply status, robotics 32 SAIT tape drives 417 SDLT tape drives 415 library configuration backing up settings 308 to 311 restore using auto-save backup file 378 to 383 restore using manual backup file 383 to 384 Library Control Module (LCM), See LCM Library Controller (LC), See LC
K
key entering activation code 289 to 290 format change in BlueScale 11 290 generating for BlueScale Software Support and options 285 to 288 management tasks, encryption 355 to 356 See also options See also encryption key keyboard LCM connector 38 supported characters 91 touch screen 91 using Enter key 91 using external 91 using the web interface 90 Knowledge Base about 367 accessing 367 library sense code lookup 367
L
labels, bar-code best practices, tape media 472 for cleaning cartridges 129 ordering custom bar-code sequences 495
February 2011
541
Index L
library messages checking 97 forwarding to a Syslog server 295 library serial number, locating 284 to 285 library, components AC power breakers, main or drive frame 34 AC power connectors, main or drive frame 34 front panel 26 to 27 interior 27 to 29 rear panel 30 to 35 touch screen, description 35 library, configuring add, modify, or delete users 290 to 292 adding capacity 289 auto-save configuration file, description 302 backing up settings 308 to 311 controller failover 316 to 318 date and time 297 default system settings 294 to 297 during installation 70 emulation 319 to 320 enable email for auto-save file 302 to 303 enable firmware updates 283 to 290 enable media auto discovery 173 to 174 enable or disable metrics monitoring 297 enable or disable Soft Power 298 enable/disable camera icon 296 enable/disable performance monitoring 297 enable/disable power consumption monitor 297 Global Spare tape drive 228 to 229 IP address 298 to 300 mail recipients 300 to 302 Observatory 325 to 326 library, configuring (continued) package server 328 to 330 Rotation Manager 330 to 331 routine maintenance option 304 setting name 294 setting Syslog server IP address 295 setting web server port 294 SNMP 305 to 307 StorNext support 331 to 334 system settings 293 to 307 library, firmware advanced update procedure 440 to 442 backup configurations before updating 434 check release notes for updated information 428 download updates 433 expired BlueScale Software Support key 434 standard update procedure 435 to 440 viewing current version 86, 429 See also BlueScale Software Support key library, installation installing AC cord locks 443 to 444 lifting or moving, warning 4 moving 72 overview 69 weight warning 4 library, maintaining advanced firmware update procedure 440 to 442 prepare to update firmware 428 to 435 replacing the air filter 425 to 427 standard firmware update procedure 435 to 440 library, overview BlueScale features 21 to 24 connectivity 59 to 68 hardware features 24 to 25 library, specifications data capacity 502 environmental 509 library, specifications (continued) host interfaces supported 511 recycling 530 shock and vibration limits 510 size and weight, installed 504 size and weight, shipping 505 library, troubleshooting accessing interior components 385 to 386 BlueScale screen display problems 365 calibrate touch screen 445 capturing traces 368 to 370 configuration restore options 378 general 367 recovering media after power failure 365 removing blockages 366 resetting a QIP or RIM 372 to 373 resetting camera to DHCP addressing 374 to 377 resetting library 370 resetting the LCM/RCM 371 restore using auto-save backup file 378 to 383 restore using manual backup file 383 to 384 sense code lookup 367 using Knowledge Base 367 library, users deleting 292 modifying existing 292 library, using activating Global Spare tape drive 120 to 122 backing up metadata 468 to 469 best practices, saved data 467 to 471 BlueScale software version on status bar 86 check release notes for documentation updates 428 connectivity overview 59 to 65 importing cleaning cartridges 137 to 140
February 2011
542
Index M
library, using (continued) importing media 132 to 143 IP address displayed on status bar 86 logging in 88 to 89 logging out or switch users 90 name displayed in email messages 294 name displayed on status bar 86 power-off procedure 93 power-on sequence 93 preparing entry/exit pool 143 to 144 purchasing upgrades 497 to 500 reclaiming a Global Spare 122 to 123 related documentation 17 restrictions while PostScan runs 188 security, users and groups 79 SNMP MIB 486 Soft Power to power off 94 to 95 software compatibility 510 software license 3 switching or logging out user 90 Syslog messaging 98 viewing drive status 108 viewing media inventory 125 to 127 viewing metrics 96 to 102 viewing status 85 WWN for FC partition 110 to 111 license, library software 3 Load Count report, MLM 193 local access, touch screen interface 78 Log Set Forwarding configuring recipient 274 description 265 See also AutoSupport logging in/logging out of library 90 loop ID direct-attach FC drives 235 exporting F-QIP 242 to 243 exporting F-QIP 237 F-QIP-attach SCSI drives 242 to 243 loop mode, F-QIP 237, 243 LTO cartridge capacities 518 cartridge MAM 162 drive specifications 513 to 516 drive-based encryption 339, 514 read/write compatibility 518 recycling encrypted tapes 340, 361 to 363 tapes per TeraPack magazine 47 troubleshooting drives 398 to 414 maintenance, drives (continued) tape drive cleaning 446 to 452 update firmware using firmware tape 459 to 460 update firmware using ITDT 459 maintenance, library prepare to update firmware 428 to 435 replacing the air filter 425 to 427 updating firmware, advanced procedure 440 to 442 updating firmware, standard procedure 435 to 440 MAM, description 162 Manage Package Servers screen 329 Media Auto Discovery description 163 Media Check tracking non-MLM-enabled media 167 media expansion frame, description 55 to 56 Media Lifecycle Management, See MLM media, general information accessories 495 bar-code labels, purchasing 495 carrying cases 495 caution, use only approved media 4 Certified Media, description 494 purchasing certified media 495 See also cartridges, MLM, RXT media media, import/export bulk imports 140 during FullScan operation 186, 187 exchanging from entry/exit pool or storage pool 148 exporting from entry/exit pool or storage pool 145 to 148 exporting or exchanging while running PreScan or PostScan 145
M
magazines in free pool 381 in TAP after a power failure 365 Maintenance TeraPack 129 See also TeraPack magazine mail recipients AutoSupport 267 configuring 300 to 302 See also email mailing address, Spectra Logic 5 main frame, description 55 to 56 main office, Spectra Logic 5 Maintenance TeraPacks for cleaning partitions 129 identifying 129 See also TeraPack magazine Maintenance toolbar, options 83 maintenance, drives device driver 461 to 462 prepare to update firmware 453 to 457
February 2011
543
Index M
media, import/export (continued) importing into a new partition 140 to 143 importing into entry/exit pool 133 to 137 importing into storage pool 141 to 143 importing while running PreScan or PostScan 133 overview 132, 132 to 133 preparing entry/exit pool 143 to 144 update backup software inventory 159 using a specific location 151 to 154 media, inventory description 125 during FullScan operation 186, 187 expired cleaning cartridge indicator 127 viewing 125 to 127 media, MLM reports 193 to 194 media, RXT best practices 479 to 484 description 48 specifications 524 to 526 media, See cartridges media, troubleshooting MLM Load Count report 193 MLM Media Health report 193 MLM Write Errors report 193 overriding red MLM health 198 to 199 media, using availability of MLM reports 178 enabling MLM 171 enabling MLM auto discovery 173 to 174 environmental specifications, tape 517 generating MLM reports 192 to 196 handling guidelines, tape media 472 in cleaning partitions 137 labeling guidelines 472 located in entry/exit pool 52 media, using (continued) located in free pool 52 located in storage pool 53 locating in library 154 to 156 LTO cartridge capacities 518 LTO WORM media 518 manually add to PostScan queue 189 to 191 MLM alerts 171 MLM best practices 167 to 170 MLM health score 195 MLM health status icons 195 MLM reports 193 to 194 moving in partition through user interface 154 to 158 multiple types in the library 48 recycling encrypted tapes 361 to 363 requirements when using MLM 178 rotation example 476 to 478 saving MLM reports 196 to 198 storage guidelines, tape media 473 to 474 tape media, best practices 471 to 478 TeraPack magazines 47 type for cleaning partition 255 type for data partition 225 usage information in DLM report 215 Medium Auxiliary Memory, See MAM memory card configuration data stored 39 location in LCM or RCM 38 saving drive dump files 395 saving traces 369 messages date and time stamp 297 HHM notification 103 icons, MLM media health 195 icons, system status 85 library name 294 LTO cleaning notification 401 SAIT cleaning notification 418 messages (continued) SDLT cleaning notification 415 types 85 metadata backing up 468 to 469 best practices 467 to 471 definition 467 See also DLM database See also encryption keys See also library configuration See also MLM database metrics drive performance 99 to 100 power consumption 101 storage density 101 MIB, for SNMP in the library 305 MLM adding cartridges to the database 179 to 180 best practices 167 to 170 broadcast capacity 174 configure PostScan blackout periods 176 to 177 configuring 170 to 173 configuring PreScan and PostScan for partition, LTO-4 or 5 FC drives 233 to 234 configuring PreScan for a partition 245 configuring PreScan, nonLTO-4 or 5 FC drive partition 239 description 23 enabling PostScan for a partition 188 features 161 to 167 generating reports 192 to 196 how it works 161 to 167 initiating manual discovery 181 to 182 library firmware compatibility 179 manually add a tape to PostScan queue 189 to 191 Media Auto Discovery, configuring 173 to 174 Media Auto Discovery, description 163
February 2011
544
Index N
MLM (continued) media compatibility 178 overriding red cartridge health 198 to 199 pause PostScan operation 191 PostScan, how it works 185 to 188 preparing to implement 178 to 180 PreScan and PostScan, description 164 PreScan and PostScan, enabling 164 PreScan, how it works 183 report options for saving 197 saving reports 196 to 198 stopping media discovery 183 using 192 to 209 MLM database adding cartridges 165, 179 to 180 backed up in auto-save file 308 backing up 201 to 203 deleting individual records 205 deleting multiple records 206 description 165 download as a CSV file 207 to 209 maximum number of records 167 restore from backup on USB 204 restore using auto-save backup file 378 to 383 tracking non-MLM-enabled media 167 MLM records, asterisk (*) next to bar-code label 206 MLM reports asterisk (*) next to bar-code label 170 Born on Date 193 Cleans Remaining 193 Exported Media 194 Last Write/Read Time 194 Load Count 193 Media Health 193 Remaining Capacity 193 Write Errors 193 MLM, enable/disable 171 modes, encryption secure initialization, no encryption on startup 338 standard initialization, encryption enabled on startup 338 monikers, encryption creating 345 to 347 rules for creating 346 monitor, LCM connector 38 mouse, LCM connector 38 moving the library, caution 4 On/Off, main or drive frame AC breakers 34 operating environment library 509 RXT drives 524 RXT media 526 tape media 517 Operator group, default user name and password 79 operator panel description 35 See also touch screen See also user interface See also web interface options capacity 289, 498 enabling with activation code 283 to 290 key format change in BlueScale 11 290 requirements when purchasing 284, 500 viewing currently enabled 289 to 290
N
names as identifier used in library messages 294 cleaning partitions 254 data partitions, supported characters 225 library identifier for remote access 294 library, displayed on status bar 86 library, used in email messages 294 network E-QIP IP address 248 to 250 E-QIP iSCSI configuration options 250 interface cable requirements 511 IP address, library (LCM) 298 to 300 See also fabric, address settings Network Camera Setup Wizard, use to configure camera 375 to 377 network connectivity, See connectivity network settings, configuring for library 298 to 300
P
package server, configuring 328 to 330 Package Update screen 328 packages, See firmware packaging, improper when shipping 466 partitions See also cleaning partitions See also data partitions partitions, configuring assigning an encryption key 348 to 351 assigning drives 231 changing number of chambers 259 cleaning, for automatic drive cleaning 253 to 255 confirm and save settings 256 to 258 creating automatically 224 data, new 223 to 253 deleting 262
O
Observatory configuring 325 to 326 description 325 using 327
February 2011
545
Index P
partitions, configuring (continued) enabling encryption 348 to 351 entry/exit pool 231 entry/exit pool requirements 219 E-QIP port visibility for drives 247 E-QIP, using SCSI drives 243 to 253 Ethernet (E-QIP) protocol 244 F-QIP port visibility for drives 241 F-QIP, using direct-attach FC drives 232 to 238 F-QIP, using SCSI drives 238 to 243 maximum data partitions 219 media type, cleaning partition 255 media type, data partition 225 MLM PreScan 245 MLM PreScan and PostScan, LTO-4 or 5 FC drives 233 to 234 MLM PreScan, non-LTO-4 or 5 FC drive partition 239 modify an existing 259 to 262 PostScan requirements for Global Spares 229 precautions before deleting 262 QIP requirements for controller failover with SCSI drives 228 requirements overview 219 to 222 robotics control path 227 running PreScan or PostScan while creating, modifying, or deleting 221 SmartMotion 226 storage pool requirements 219 user access 235, 239, 245 partitions, general information advantages 51 cleaning, overview 52 conceptual illustration 50 data partition uses 51 overview 49 to 52 partitions, using importing cleaning cartridges 137 to 140 importing media 132 to 143 importing media the first time 140 to 143 PostScan requirements for Global Spares 120 preparing entry/exit pool 143 to 144 recycling encrypted tapes 361 to 363 viewing inventory 125 to 127 WWN for FC partition 110 to 111 passwords default 89 encryption 344 to 345 encryption features access 340 entering or changing 291 guidelines for creating 341 to import/export encryption key 340 used with encryption 340 PCM, description 34 performance, optimizing RXT 481 to 481 phone numbers, Spectra Logic offices 5 policies, RMA 466 pools description 52 example of use 50 See also entry/exit pool See also storage pool poor status drive health 212 media health 195 port visibility E-QIPs-attached drives 247 F-QIP-attached drives 241 QIPs, overview 65 robotic control path 240, 246 portal accessing for technical support 421 to 424 checking current BlueScale firmware version 432 downloading BlueScale firmware package 433 See also technical support PostScan automatic triggers 185 cleaning the Global Spare drive 188 configure blackout periods 176 to 177 configuring for partition, LTO-4 or 5 FC drive 233 to 234 creating partitions while running 221 enabling 164 enabling for partition 188 exporting or exchanging media while running 145 FullScan option, description 186 Global Spare configuration requirements 229 Global Spare use requirements 120 how it works 185 to 188 importing media while running 133 library operation restrictions 188 manually add a tape to queue 189 to 191 operations not permitted while running 191 overview 184 to 188 pausing operation 191 prerequisites for starting 185 queue processing 185, 186 QuickScan time limit, Global Spare drive 187 QuickScan time limit, partition drive 187 triggers, setting 234 using blackout periods during backup window 184 power cord and connector types 506 cord locks, installing 443 to 444 enabling or disabling Soft Power 298 input specifications 506 requirements 506 to 507 Soft Power confirmation 94 to 95
February 2011
546
Index Q
power (continued) Soft Power, description 94 turn library on/off 93 turn off library using Soft Power control 94 to 95 power button description 36 location 26 power consumption enable/disable monitoring 297 library 508 LTO-2 drives 516 LTO-3 drives 515 LTO-4 drives 514 LTO-5 drives 513 RXT drives 524 RXT media packs 525 SAIT drives 517 SDLT drives 516 viewing metrics 101 power control module, See PCM Power Drive On/Off utility, use with caution 388 power supply bay description 33 location, main or drive frame 30 power supply module DBA, description 33 purchasing 499 robotics, description 32 robotics, location 30 status LEDs 32, 34 power, AC breaker switches, main or drive frame 34 PreScan configuring for partition 245 configuring for partition, LTO-4 or 5 FC drive 233 to 234 configuring, non-LTO-4 or 5 FC drive partition 239 creating partitions while running 221 enabling 164, 183, 234 exporting or exchanging media while running 145 how it works 183 PreScan (continued) importing media while running 133 starting an manual scan 184 privileges, user groups 79 profiles in AutoSupport creating or modifying 268 to 271 deleting 272 progress bar 87 protecting encryption keys 355 to 356 protocol support E-QIP 511 Fibre Channel 511 purchasing cleaning cartridges 495 custom bar-code labels 495 drives 499 library upgrades 497 to 500 media and accessories 495 TeraPack magazines 495 QIPs (continued) WWN, F-QIP 60 See also connectivity See also controller failover See also E-QIP See also F-QIP Quad Interface Processors, See QIPs Quantum SDLT, See SDLT QuickScan enabling 234 time limit, Global Spare drive 187 time limit, partition drive 187 using a Global Spare drive, description 187
R
RAID description 479 levels for RXT media 480 overview 479 RAID level, impact on RXT transfer rates 481 RCM configuration data on memory card 39 connector locations 38 description 41 location 30, 40 resetting 371 USB port locations 117 rear panel components, drive frame 30 to 35 rebooting library 370 recycling encrypted LTO media 340, 361 to 363 redundancy LTO-4 and LTO-5 drive connectivity 68 transporter connectivity 66 to 67 redundancy, power supplies drive frames 34 robotics 32 refresh display setting refresh rate 294 status bar button 86 time of last update 86 updating information 86
Q
QIP failover, See controller failover QIPs connectivity example 65 connectivity for drives 63 to 65 connectivity for transporter 59 to 62 controller failover operation 66 to 67 description 42 to 43 description of exporting 59 Fibre Channel (F-QIP), description 43 Fibre Channel configuration example 65 hardware reset 372 identifiers 58 location 30 port visibility, robotics 236 to 236, 240 reset using Reset Controller utility 372 to 373 SCSI drive is impaired or offline 397
February 2011
547
Index S
regulations, safety compliance 529 regulatory agency compliance 527 to 528 remaining capacity, MLM 193 remote access exporting encryption key 353 importing encryption key 359 to 360 See also web interface Remote Library Controller (RLC), See web interface remote support, description 86 remove/replace drive 464 side access panels 385 to 386 repair, RMA policy 466 reports, DLM generating 213 to 215 saving for DLM 216 reports, MLM Born on Date 193 Cleans Remaining 193 Exported Media 194 generating 192 to 196 Last Write/Read Time 194 Load Count 193 Media Health 193 Remaining Capacity 193 saving 196 to 198 Write Errors 193 requirements bar-code labels 519 to 522 environmental, library 509 environmental, RXT drives 524 environmental, RXT media 526 environmental, tape media 517 network cables 511 power 506 to 507 Reset Controller utility, using 372 to 373 resetting camera to DHCP 374 to 377 caution after firmware update 440 caution, trace data 371 drives 388 resetting (continued) LCM or RCM 371 library 370 QIP or RIM 372 to 373 restore encrypted data 357 to 360 library configuration 378 to 384 MLM & DLM databases 204 Retrieve Drive Dump utility for retrieving drive dump file 394 returns, using an RMA 466 RIM connectors 44 description 44 identifier 58 reset button 372 resetting 372 to 373 SCSI drive is impaired or offline 397 RLC description 78 See also remote access See also web interface RMA numbers, using 466 robot, See transporter robotics control path failover 222 control path, configuring 227 control path, direct-attach FC drive partition 60 control path, QIP-attached drive partition 64 F-QIP hard addressing 243 F-QIP soft addressing 243 port visibility, E-QIP 246 port visibility, F-QIP 236 to 236, 240 power, status LED 32 removing blockages 366 selecting control path 227 See also transporter Robotics Control Module (RCM), See RCM Rotation Manager configuring 330 to 331 description 330 routine maintenance option, configuring 304 RXT drives enable SCSI disconnects 481 environmental specifications 524 factors affecting performance 481 optimum block sizes 481 specifications 523 to 524 troubleshooting 419 to 420 RXT media best practices 479 to 484 description 48 factors affecting performance 481 handling 483 preparing for use 131 specifications 524 to 526 storing, best practices 483 supported RAID levels 479 to 480 See also media
S
safety agency compliance 529 SAIT drive cleaning 418 drive specifications 517 LEDs 417 troubleshooting 417 to 418 sales, contacting 5 Save Library Configuration utility, using 308 to 310 saving data to a USB drive 118 SCD codes LTO drive cleaning notification 401 LTO-2 drives 410 to 414 LTO-3, LTO-4, and LTO-5 drives 402 to 409 RXT drives 419 to 420 WORM media error 401 SCSI bus, optimizing RXT performance 481 SCSI drives connection requirements 46 drive sled connectors 46 F-QIP address settings 242 to 243
February 2011
548
Index S
SCSI drives (continued) in E-QIP partitions 248 in F-QIP partitions 242 to 243 QIP requirements 46 sled terminator location 46 SCSI terminator, description 46 SD memory card, See memory card SDLT drive specifications 516 LEDs 415 tapes per TeraPack magazine 47 troubleshooting drives 415 to 416 secure initialization 338 Security toolbar, options 83 security, provided by configuring users 79 self-maintenance, drives firmware update, preparation 453 to 457 tape drive cleaning 446 to 452 update device drivers 461 to 462 update firmware using firmware tape 459 to 460 update firmware using ITDT 459 self-maintenance, library prepare to update firmware 428 to 435 replacing the air filter 425 to 427 updating firmware, advanced procedure 440 to 442 updating firmware, standard procedure 435 to 440 Send Log Sets configuring 268 to 271 description 265 sense codes drives, lookup on web site 396 library, lookup on web site 367 serial number drive 108 required to create Technical Support portal account 422 See also hardware ID servers, firmware packages 328 to 330 service access, space requirements 505 service contract entering BlueScale Software Support key 283, 285 extending or renewing 285, 496 required for firmware update 72, 428, 434, 497 See also BlueScale Software Support key service options 367, 396 setup wizard, camera default administrator name 377 using 375 to 377 SFPs, supported types 485 Shared Library Services, See SLS shipping library environment 509 RMA on return label 466 shock and vibration limits, library 510 side access panels removal warning 4 remove/replace 385 to 386 slots, upgrading capacity 289, 498 SLS description 49 option key requirements 49, 219, 284 purchasing 498 See also partitions SmartMotion, configuring 226 SMPT address, setting 301 SNMP configuring 305 to 307 enabling 325 MIB definitions 486 obtaining library MIB 305 purchasing option key 325, 325 soft address drives, F-QIP-attached 243 for direct-attach FC drives 235 F-QIP 237 robotics, F-QIP 243 soft keyboard description 78 on touch screen 91 Soft Power description 94 enabling or disabling 298 using 94 to 95 software BlueScale Software Support key, required for firmware updates 283 BlueScale software version 86 compatibility 510 license for library 3 using emulation for compatibility 319 software support key, enabling 283, 285 software support key, See BlueScale Software Support key Sony SAIT, See SAIT specifications AC power connectors 506 AC power cord 506 bar-code labels 519 to 522 cooling requirements 508 data capacity 502 environmental, library 509 environmental, RXT media 526 environmental, tape media 517 heat dissipation 508 LTO media capacity 518 LTO tape drives 513 to 516 multi-frame space requirements 504 power 506 to 507 power consumption 508 RXT drives 523 to 524 RXT media 524 to 526 SAIT tape drives 517 SDLT tape drives 516 service access space requirements 505 shipping size and weight 505 shock and vibration limits, library 510 size and weight 504
February 2011
549
Index T
Spectra Certified Media cleaning cartridges 166, 495 description 494 MLM-enabled 162 purchasing 495 Spectra Library Server, See Spectra PC and Spectra LS Spectra Logic contacting 5 manuals, obtaining 17 web shopping 495 Spectra Logic Technical Support portal, See portal Spectra PC and Spectra LS description 37 to 39 memory cards 39 See also LCM See also RCM SSL enabling 325 purchasing option key 325, 325 standard initialization, encryption 338 static addressing, E-QIP IP address 249 status attention required, system 85 attention, drive health 212 average, media health 195 error, system 85 for drives 108 General Status screen 81 good, drive health 212 good, media health 195 information notification 85 library messages 97 poor, drive health 212 poor, media health 195 System OK 85 unknown, media health 195, 212 using status bar 85 status bar BlueScale software version 86 description 85 enable/disable the camera icon 296 refresh display 85 remote access icon 86 status bar (continued) system status icon 85 time of last refresh 86 status icons, descriptions 85 status LED LTO tape drives 400 power supply module, drive frame 34 power supply, robotics 32 RXT drive 419 SDLT tape drive 415 storage density, viewing metrics 101 storage pool configuring 230 to 232 description 53 exporting media 145 to 148 importing media 141 to 143 importing media for first time 141 partition requirements 219 viewing inventory 125 to 127 storing media, best practices RXT media 483 tape media 473 to 474 storing the library, environmental requirements 509 StorNext, using with T-Series libraries 331 to 334 stylus, location 36 su, See superuser subnet mask library 299 setting for E-QIP 249 setting for library 299 superuser default user name and password 79 deleting last 292 privileges 79 Support creating a portal account 422 support firmware packages 428 using AutoSupport 275 to 280 See also technical support support ticket opening 465 sending 466 Switch User, using to change users or log out 90 Syslog using 98 Syslog messaging enabling/disabling 295 message format 98 Syslog server configuring IP address 295 system configuration defaults 294 to 297 configuration settings 293 to 307 configuration settings checklist 73 system messages date and time stamp 297 HHM notification 103 icons 85 icons, MLM media health 195 System OK icon 85 System Settings screen, accessing 82 System Setup screen, accessing 282
T
TAP advantages to using 37 description 36 inserting a TeraPack magazine 136 location 26 tape drives configure Global Spare 228 to 229 configuring Auto Drive Clean 253 to 255 device drivers 71 is cleaning required 446 to 447 LTO, drive cleaning notification 401 LTO, status LED 400 LTO, WORM media errors 401 manual cleaning, no cleaning partition 451 to 452
February 2011
550
Index T
tape drives (continued) manual cleaning, using cleaning partition 450 reclaim Global Spare 122 to 123 required materials for cleaning 448 SAIT, drive cleaning notification 418 SCSI drive is impaired or offline 397 SDLT, drive cleaning notification 415, 416 specifications, LTO 513 to 516 specifications, SAIT 517 specifications, SDLT 516 troubleshooting, LTO 398 to 414 troubleshooting, SAIT 417 to 418 use Global Spare 120 to 122 viewing status 108 See also drives tape media best practices 471 to 478 environmental specifications 517 MLM-enabled 162 preparing for use 128 to 130 rotation example 476 to 478 write-protecting 130, 474 See also cartridges See also media tape rotation example 476 to 478 using Rotation Manager 330 target, visibility 65 TBA, description 31 technical support accessing the Technical Support portal 421 to 424 contacting 5 creating a portal account 422 firmware updates 72, 428, 434, 497 service options 367, 396 using Knowledge Base 367, 396 See also portal TeraPack Access Port, See TAP TeraPack Bay Assemblies, See TBA TeraPack case or container See magazines See TeraPack magazine TeraPack magazine capacity 128 cover 473 description 47 efficiency from grouped media 48 handling and storing media 47 importing a cleaning cartridge 451 to 452 inserting cartridges 130 inserting into TAP 136 mixed media support 48 pre-loaded media 47 purchasing 495 storage density 28 See also magazine See also media See also Maintenance TeraPacks throughput, See transfer rate time in status bar 85 setting 297 toolbar options map 84 toolbars Configuration options 82 General, options 81 Maintenance 83 Security 83 touch screen calibrating 445 description 35 location 26 touch screen interface description 78 features 80 to 87 logging in 88 to 89 logging out 90 soft keyboard description 78 using 88 to 91 using soft keyboard 91 See also LC See also user interface traces capturing 368 to 370 emailing results 369 saving to LCM memory card 369 saving to USB drive 369 saving to USB during backup operations 116 transfer rate LTO-2 drive 516 LTO-3 drive 515 LTO-4 drive 514 LTO-5 drive 513 RXT drive 523 RXT, impact of RAID level 481 SAIT drive 517 SDLT drive 516 transporter configuring robotics control path 227 connectivity 59 to 62 description 28 power supply modules, description 32 troubleshooting, drives general 396 host cannot access drive 397 library error sense codes 396 LTO drive cleaning notification 401 LTO status LED 400 LTO WORM media 401 LTO-2 410 to 414 LTO-3, LTO-4, and LTO-5 402 to 409 retrieving drive dump files 393 to 395 RXT drives 419 to 420 SAIT drive cleaning notification 418 SAIT tape drives 417 to 418 SCSI drive is impaired or offline 397 SDLT drive cleaning notification 415, 416 SDLT tape drives 415 to 416 using DLM drive test 389 to 392 using Knowledge Base 396
February 2011
551
Index U
troubleshooting, library accessing interior components 385 to 386 BlueScale screen display problems 365 calibrate touch screen 445 capturing traces 368 to 370 cartridge in Global Spare following a reset or powercycle 365 check firmware levels 429 to 431 collect trace data before resetting 371 error sense codes 367 general 367 general information 364 magazine in TAP after power failure 365 power-cycle reset 370 recovering media in TAP after power failure 365 removing blockages 366 resetting a QIP or RIM 372 to 373 resetting the camera to DHCP 374 to 377 resetting the LCM or RCM 371 resuming operation after accessing interior components 386 using Knowledge Base 367 web site sense code lookup 367 typing using external keyboard 91 using soft keyboard 91 using the web interface 90 typographical conventions 19 unknown status drive health 212 media health 195 update drive firmware, preparation 453 to 457 upgrades to library firmware, policy 497 upgrades, library adding capacity 289 BlueScale software options 497 hardware components 499 how to order 500 purchasing capacity 289, 498 requirements when purchasing 284, 500 USB drive connecting to LCM 117 for firmware upgrades 119 importing encryption key 358 purchasing 500 saving data to 119 saving traces to 369 uses 116 using for firmware upgrade 437 using to save drive dump files 395 USB key, See USB drive USB port interface support 512 location, LCM and RCM 38 using for firmware upgrade 433 USB storage device, See USB drive user groups overview 79 privileges 79 user interface accessing 78 to 79 attention required notification 85 camera icon to access the BlueScale Vision viewer 113 command processing progress bar 87 Configuration toolbar options 82 entering information 90 to 91 user interface (continued) error notification 85 feature overview 21 to 24 features 80 to 87 General tool bar options 81 HHM notification 87 information notification 85 locating media in library 154 to 156 logging in 88 to 89 logging out 90 Maintenance toolbar options 83 map of toolbar options 84 moving media within a partition 154 to 158 refreshing displayed information 86 Security toolbar options 83 setting date and time 297 soft keyboard 78 status bar 85 System OK notification 85 typing, soft keyboard 91 typing, using external keyboard 91 typing, web browser 90 using 88 to 91 web 41 user privileges required to access drives screen 447 access encryption settings 340 add a user 291 calibrate touch screen 445 change library configuration 283 configure AutoSupport profiles 268 configure controller failover 316 configure emulation 319 configure encryption 343 configure MLM 170 configure StorNext 332 create cleaning partitions 254 create data partitions 223 create HHM AutoSupport ticket 103 delete a user 292
U
UDP broadcast, using to discover camera 376 Ultrium, See LTO Universal Serial Bus (USB) See USB drive See USB port
February 2011
552
Index V
user privileges required to (continued) delete MLM database records 206 delete partitions 262 enable/disable Soft Power 298 export media from storage pool 146 export MLM database 207, 216 export/exchange cleaning cartridges 149 export/exchange media from a specific location 151 import media into entry/exit pool 135 import media into partitions 138 import media into storage pool 141 import/export media to storage pool 451 manage firmware packages 442 modify a user 292 modify partitions 260 open AutoSupport ticket 275 reclaim Global Spare drive 122 respond to HHM notification 103 restore Auto Save library configuration 379 restore library configuration file 383 restore MLM database 201, 204, 379 use Global Spare drive 121 use Soft Power 94 users adding new 291 changing logged in 90 configure partition access 235, 239, 245 configuring 290 to 292 configuring for library security 79 deleting 292 deleting last superuser 292 logging in 88 to 89 logging out 90 users (continued) modifying existing 292 overview 79 types of privileges 79 using media best practices, RXT media 479 to 484 best practices, tape media 471 to 478 utilities calibrate touch screen 445 current firmware levels 430 HHM: View Data 106 to 108 Reset Controller, to reset QIP 372 to 373 Restore Library Configuration 383 to 384 Restore Library Configuration from Auto Save 379 to 380 Retrieve Drive Dump, to retrieve drive dump file 394 Save Library Configuration 308 to 310
W
warnings library weight 4 lifting or moving the library 4 power 4 side access panel removal 4 warranty and service options 367 warranty, Certified Media 396 web interface available functions when using 90 description 78 entering information 90 features 80 to 87 logging in 88 to 89 logging out 90 using 88 to 91 See also user interface web server communication port 294 in LCM 41 reserved port number 294 web site drive sense code lookup 396 library sense code lookup 367 obtaining Spectra Logic manuals 17 shop 495 software interoperability tables 510 Spectra Logic 5 World Wide Name, See WWN WORM media, LTO description 518 error conditions 401 write errors, reported by MLM 193 write-protect setting for cartridges 130 tape media 474 WWN assigned to FC drive 109 assigned to FC partition 110 to 111 for F-QIPs 60
V
verifying configuration backup file 310 virtual library, See partitions virtualization description 49 See also partitions See also SLS visibility configuring for drives 247 description 65 ports on E-QIPs, drives 247 ports on F-QIPs, drives 241 robotic control path on QIP or RIM ports 236, 240 voltage, AC input for library 506
February 2011
553

t950 User Guide

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

t950 User Guide

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Spectra T950 Library

Part Number Revision History

Date November 2007 December 2009

User GuideSpectra T950 Library

User GuideSpectra T950 Library

Warnings and Cautions

Caution Caution Caution

User GuideSpectra T950 Library

Contacting Spectra Logic

User GuideSpectra T950 Library

Chapter 1 Library Overview

LIBRARY COMPONENT OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DRIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MEDIA HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2 Architecture Overview

Chapter 3 Installation Overview

UPDATING OR SERVICING THE LIBRARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SETTINGS CHECKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 4 Introducing the BlueScale User Interface

USING THE BLUESCALE USER INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5 Operating the Library

MONITORING YOUR LIBRARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

USING A USB DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

User GuideSpectra T950 Library

USING A GLOBAL SPARE TAPE DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6 Importing, Exporting, and Moving Media

IMPORTING MEDIA AND CLEANING CARTRIDGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EXPORTING OR EXCHANGING MEDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

USING ADVANCED IMPORT/EXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOVING MEDIA WITHIN A PARTITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

UPDATING THE MEDIA INVENTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 7 Media Lifecycle Management

MLM BEST PRACTICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONFIGURING MLM SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

IMPLEMENTING MEDIA LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

User GuideSpectra T950 Library

STARTING OR STOPPING MEDIA AUTO DISCOVERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

USING MLM REPORTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MANAGING THE MLM DATABASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 8 Drive Lifecycle Management

DOWNLOADING THE DLM DATABASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 9 Using Partitions

CONFIGURING A NEW DATA PARTITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

User GuideSpectra T950 Library

227 228 230 232 238 243

CONFIGURING A CLEANING PARTITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

256 259 262

Chapter 11 Configuring the Library

CONFIGURING LIBRARY USERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MODIFYING THE CONFIGURATION SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

User GuideSpectra T950 Library

300 302 304 305

BACKING UP THE LIBRARY CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

312 316 319 320

CONFIGURING AND USING OBSERVATORY (OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

328 330 331

Chapter 12 Configuring and Using Encryption

ASSIGNING THE ENCRYPTION KEY TO A PARTITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EXPORTING AND PROTECTING KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RESTORING ENCRYPTED DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DELETING AN ENCRYPTION KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RECYCLING ENCRYPTED MEDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 13 Library Troubleshooting

367 368 370 371

RESTORING THE LIBRARY CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ACCESSING THE INTERIOR OF THE LIBRARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 14 Drive Troubleshooting

RETRIEVING A DRIVE DUMP FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .